null User manual

null  User manual
Adobe® Marketing Cloud
Social Help
Contents
Social Help Home....................................................................................................9
Release Notes........................................................................................................10
Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices..................................................................................11
Customer Resource Hub.......................................................................................................12
Getting Started with Social...................................................................................18
Understanding Adobe Social.................................................................................................18
Understanding the Social/Analytics Integration.....................................................................20
Owned Social Properties Reports............................................................................................................20
Enabling Social for Report Suites..........................................................................................22
Global Report Suites................................................................................................................................22
Signing In to Social...............................................................................................................23
Linking Your Social Account to the Marketing Cloud................................................................................27
Supported Browsers.................................................................................................................................27
Signing Out of Social and Resetting Your Password................................................................................27
Change Social Report Suite or Company.............................................................................28
Product Notification System..................................................................................................29
Getting Started with LinkedIn................................................................................................29
Sensitive Personal Data........................................................................................................30
Social Training Videos...........................................................................................31
Overview Dashboards...........................................................................................40
Marketing Overview Dashboard............................................................................................40
Moderation Overview Dashboard..........................................................................................46
Analytics.................................................................................................................50
Social Campaigns.................................................................................................................50
Campaign Details.....................................................................................................................................51
Last updated 6/20/2016
Social Help
Contents
Custom Reports....................................................................................................................53
Asset Tracking Codes...............................................................................................................................53
Authors.....................................................................................................................................................55
Social Platforms/Properties......................................................................................................................56
Display Name...........................................................................................................................................58
Language.................................................................................................................................................59
Competitor Analytics.............................................................................................................61
Social Buzz...........................................................................................................................63
Tune Sentiment........................................................................................................................................69
Post Details in Social Buzz Report...........................................................................................................70
How to Tell Which Listening Rule Captured a Post..................................................................................71
Properties..............................................................................................................................72
Property Details Report............................................................................................................................74
Post Analytics........................................................................................................................80
Post Analytics List View............................................................................................................................80
Post Analytics Roll-Up View.....................................................................................................................86
Configure Reports.................................................................................................................90
Configure Graphs.....................................................................................................................................90
Configure Options for Reports.................................................................................................................91
Adjust the Reporting Date Range............................................................................................................93
Schedule and Send Reports Via Email.................................................................................95
Publish....................................................................................................................99
Content Calendar..................................................................................................................99
Display and Filter the Content Calendar..................................................................................................99
Content Calendar List View....................................................................................................................101
Content Calendar Month View................................................................................................................106
Content Calendar Week View.................................................................................................................111
View or Create Post Drafts and Templates.............................................................................................115
Suspend and Unsuspend Posts.............................................................................................................119
Export Content to Excel.........................................................................................................................124
Parent and Child Posts...........................................................................................................................124
Publisher.............................................................................................................................128
Publisher Page.......................................................................................................................................129
Last updated 6/20/2016
Social Help
Publish Anywhere................................................................................................................148
Publish Anywhere Workflow...................................................................................................................149
Moderation...........................................................................................................166
Unified Moderation..............................................................................................................166
Create a New Moderation Feed.............................................................................................................166
Display Moderation Feeds......................................................................................................................176
Edit a Moderation Feed..........................................................................................................................176
Download Moderation Feed Content......................................................................................................178
Clone a Moderation Feed.......................................................................................................................179
Delete a Moderation Feed......................................................................................................................179
Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets......................................................................................................179
Moderate Multiple Posts using Bulk Actions...........................................................................................193
Stream or Manually Refresh Moderation Feeds.....................................................................................194
View Social Contact Information............................................................................................................196
Troubleshoot Moderation Feeds.............................................................................................................199
Unified Moderation Rules....................................................................................................200
Create Auto-Delete Moderation Rules...................................................................................................200
Create Auto-Notification Moderation Rules............................................................................................202
Unified Moderation Workflow...............................................................................................204
Configure Escalation Management........................................................................................................205
Settings.................................................................................................................207
Properties............................................................................................................................207
Display Managed Properties..................................................................................................................207
Add Properties.......................................................................................................................................208
Configure Property Settings...................................................................................................................212
Delete Properties...................................................................................................................................213
Re-authorize Properties.........................................................................................................................213
Listening Rules....................................................................................................................214
Add Rules to Track.................................................................................................................................214
Rule Variables........................................................................................................................................237
Add Rules in Bulk...................................................................................................................................239
Manage Active Rules.............................................................................................................................241
Last updated 6/20/2016
Social Help
Contents
Guidelines for Keyword Selection...........................................................................................................245
Starter's Guide for Listening...................................................................................................................255
Social Tags..........................................................................................................................272
Add Tag Groups.....................................................................................................................................273
Edit a Tag Group....................................................................................................................................274
Delete Tag Groups.................................................................................................................................275
Add Tags to a Tag Group........................................................................................................................275
Delete Tags from Tag Groups.................................................................................................................276
Page Groups.......................................................................................................................276
Create Page Groups..............................................................................................................................277
Edit Page Groups...................................................................................................................................277
Clone Page Groups................................................................................................................................278
Delete a Page Group..............................................................................................................................278
Facebook Audiences...........................................................................................................278
Create an Audience................................................................................................................................279
Manage Audiences.................................................................................................................................280
Narrow an Audience During Publishing..................................................................................................281
Marketing Cloud Users and Groups....................................................................................281
Add Users in the Analytics Admin Console............................................................................................281
Add User Group, Permissions, and Members........................................................................................282
Publishing Workflows..........................................................................................................283
Create a New Publishing Workflow........................................................................................................284
Edit a Publishing Workflow.....................................................................................................................287
Delete a Publishing Workflow.................................................................................................................287
Duplicate a Publishing Workflow............................................................................................................288
Viewing the Audit Trail for Publishing Workflows....................................................................................288
Register Users....................................................................................................................288
Facebook Permissions........................................................................................................289
Campaigns..........................................................................................................................289
Create a Campaign................................................................................................................................290
Campaign Categorization.......................................................................................................................291
Circle Manager....................................................................................................................291
Create Circle..........................................................................................................................................291
Edit or Remove Circles...........................................................................................................................292
Last updated 6/20/2016
Social Help
Link Shorteners...................................................................................................................293
Add a ctx.ly Account...............................................................................................................................293
Add a bit.ly Account...............................................................................................................................296
Add an awe.sm Project..........................................................................................................................296
Add a Po.st Account...............................................................................................................................297
Add a BudURL Account.........................................................................................................................297
Generate Short URLs in Posts...............................................................................................................298
Competitor Pages................................................................................................................301
Add Competitor Pages...........................................................................................................................302
Delete Competitor Pages.......................................................................................................................303
Preferences.........................................................................................................................303
Classifying Terms in SAINT.................................................................................................305
Creating the Conversion Classification Structure...................................................................................306
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis........................................................309
Content Analysis Functionality............................................................................................310
Sentiment Analysis..............................................................................................................311
Sentiment Analysis Engine Architecture................................................................................................311
Understanding Sentiment Scores..........................................................................................................313
Sentiment-Analysis Accuracy and Improvements..................................................................................321
Language Support...............................................................................................323
Changing the UI Language.................................................................................................324
FAQ........................................................................................................................325
Documentation Updates.....................................................................................330
If There's a Problem.............................................................................................355
Other Help Resources.........................................................................................357
Adobe Consulting Services................................................................................358
Last updated 6/20/2016
Social Help
Contents
Historical Release Notes.....................................................................................359
Social 16.3.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................359
Social 16.2.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................360
Social 16.1.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................361
Social 15.11.1.0 Release Notes..........................................................................................362
Social 15.9.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................363
Social 15.8.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................364
Social 15.7.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................365
Social 15.6.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................365
Social 15.5.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................366
Social 15.4.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................368
Social 15.3.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................369
Social 15.2.1.0 Release Notes............................................................................................369
Social 3.4 Release Notes....................................................................................................370
Social 3.3.5 Release Notes.................................................................................................371
Social 3.3.4 Release Notes.................................................................................................372
Social 3.3.3 Release Notes.................................................................................................374
Social 3.3.2 Release Notes.................................................................................................376
Social 3.3.1 Release Notes.................................................................................................377
Social 3.3 Release Notes....................................................................................................378
Social 3.2.2 Release Notes.................................................................................................381
Social 3.2.1 Release Notes.................................................................................................383
Social 3.2 Release Notes....................................................................................................386
Social 3.1.2 Release Notes.................................................................................................389
Social 3.1.1 Release Notes.................................................................................................391
Social 3.1 Release Notes....................................................................................................393
Social 3.0.2 Release Notes.................................................................................................395
Social 3.0.1 Release Notes.................................................................................................396
Social 3 Features and Enhancements................................................................................397
Adobe Social Mobile App....................................................................................398
Last updated 6/20/2016
Social Help
Getting Started with the Social Mobile App.........................................................................398
Requirements.........................................................................................................................................398
Sign in to Social Mobile App..................................................................................................................404
Basic Navigation.....................................................................................................................................404
Sign Out of the Adobe Social Mobile App..............................................................................................406
Publishing with the Adobe Social Mobile App.....................................................................406
Create a Post.........................................................................................................................................406
Filter Posts.............................................................................................................................................409
Edit a Post..............................................................................................................................................410
Suspend Posts.......................................................................................................................................410
Approve a Post.......................................................................................................................................410
Contact and Legal Information...........................................................................412
Last updated 6/20/2016
Social Help
Social Product Documentation
9
Social Product Documentation
Social provides a hosted, subscription-based solution to help you achieve your social media goals and improve your
strategy and performance.
Popular Topics
Marketing Cloud Resources
Last update: June 16th, 2016
• Adobe Social Community
• Release Notes
• Marketing Cloud Release Notes
Learn about what's new in Social, including new features and
fixes.
• Customer Resource Hub
• Product Documentation Home
• Developer
• Idea Exchange
• Adobe Training and Tutorials
Resources to help you become acquainted with the new features • Featured Solutions Center
in each release of Adobe Social. Resources include Capability
Spotlights, Quick Start Guides, New Feature Guides, quick how-to
training videos demonstrating new features, migration guides,
and links to webinars.
• Social Training Videos
New training videos for Social 3 are available for viewing on
Adobe EnterpriseTV.
• Documentation Updates
All updates (additions, deletions, and corrections) to the Social
User Guide, by date.
• FAQ
List of Frequently Asked Questions and links to where you can
find the answers to these questions in Help.
• Starter's Guide for Listening
Take the pulse of brand-related conversations across the social
web about your company, products, and competitors using the
Adobe Social listening capabilities.
• Guidelines for Keyword Selection
Learn how to track meaningful terms using Social.
Release Notes
10
Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
This section contains the following information:
• Current Release Notes
• Documentation Updates, Historical Release Notes, and Marketing Cloud Release Notes
Current Release Notes
The Social 16.6.1.0 release (6/16/2016) includes the following changes:
Improvements
• Reply to direct messages from Twitter handles which do not follow you.
Fixes
The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue where deleted users remain listed as authorizers for specific properties in Social.
• Fixed an issue where claiming of feed after escalation was not working correctly and two users were able to claim
and work on the same tweet.
• Fixed an issue where publishing a large video to Facebook produced an error and multiple back-to-back postings.
• Fixed an issue where downloaded Moderation Overview reports of specific date ranges were missing certain
sections.
Important: Data collection, accessibility, and usage rates within the social space are constantly evolving.
Due to changes made by our data provider and usage rates, we will no longer be providing blog, Tumblr,
Foursquare or Klout data effective April 8, 2016. Options for these data sources will be removed from listening
rule creation and Social Buzz filtering in the April Monthly Release (MR). We will continue evaluating new
options to help you quantify your social presence across platforms and will provide an update if/when an
alternate options are identified. For more information, see the Data Changes FAQ.
Documentation Updates, Historical Release Notes, and Marketing Cloud Release Notes
In addition to the notes for each release, the following resources provide additional information:
Resource
Description
Documentation Updates
View detailed information about updates to this guide that might not be included in
these release notes.
Historical Release Notes
View information about new features and enhancements in previous releases of
Adobe Social.
Marketing Cloud Release
Notes
View the latest release notes for the Adobe Marketing Cloud solutions.
Release Notes
11
Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices
Best practices for a successful experience with a new product release.
This section contains the following information:
• Pre-Release: Schedule Posts Around the Maintenance Period
• During the Release: Publish Immediately
• Post-Release: Check for Failed Posts and Reschedule
Pre-Release: Schedule Posts Around the Maintenance Period
If possible, we suggest that you try not to schedule any posts to publish during the maintenance period, which is
announced one week prior to the release and is typically 2 to 6 p.m. PST on the day of the release. This will help
minimize any potential issues with posts not going out as scheduled.
We understand that this is not always possible, so if you know you have posts that need to go out during the
maintenance period, we suggest monitoring that content to ensure it published properly or actively create and publish
at the time it needs to go live.
During the Release: Publish Immediately
While we don't anticipate any periods of significant disruption, we suggest that you try not to schedule any posts to
publish during the release maintenance window and instead publish posts instantly to your pages. Use the "Schedule
time for post NOW" option where possible.
Post-Release: Check for Failed Posts and Reschedule
In the event that one or more posts fail to publish to the appropriate social property, you can filter the Content
Calendar to show only posts that failed. You can then duplicate the post and schedule it to be posted again.
Although we do not anticipate post failures on a regular basis, sometimes posts fail due to the targeted social platform
experiencing temporary technical issues, a property needing to be reauthorized, or posting content during a scheduled
Social maintenance window (for monthly releases, for example).
We have improved the error messages users can receive when publishing content using the Publisher or Content
Calendar. New error and email messages contain detailed information about internal failures and external failures
(social platform) and contain information to troubleshoot the problem, if applicable.
To find and resend failed posts
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
2.
Access the filter options by clicking
.
Release Notes
12
3. Click Post Status then select Failed (ensure that you deselect all other status boxes).
The Content Calendar refreshes to show only failed posts. Notice that a Failed flag displays in each failed post's
tile.
4. Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode.
5.
Click
to create a duplicate post.
Creating a duplicate post lets you send the post immediately or reschedule for a later time. You can also edit the
post, if needed. For more information about working with draft posts, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates.
6. To display all duplicated posts, from the Post Timeline drop-down list, click Drafts.
7. Locate the desired post, then click Schedule to specify the post's schedule (immediately or according to schedule).
8.
To delete the original, failed post, repeat Steps 1 through 3 above, then click
on the desired post's tile.
Customer Resource Hub
Resources to help you become acquainted with the new features in each release of Adobe Social. Resources include
Capability Spotlights, Quick Start Guides, New Feature Guides, quick how-to training videos demonstrating new
features, migration guides, and links to webinars.
Last updated: June 15, 2016
This section contains the following information:
• New Resources
• New User Orientation Videos
• How-To Videos
• Capability Spotlights
• Quick Start Guides
Release Notes
13
• Features Guides
• Training Videos
• Migration Guides
• Webinars
New Resources
Check out the latest resources for this release.
New Resources
Capability Spotlight: Publisher Update
How-To-Videos: Publish Anywhere Tutorial Video
For more information in Help, see:
Publish Anywhere
Publish Anywhere
New User Orientation Videos
Check out the latest videos for new Social users.
New Resources
For more information in Help, see:
• New User Orientation: Adobe Social
• New User Orientation: Publishing
• New User Orientation: Content Calendar
• New User Orientation: Moderation
• New User Orientation: Analytics
• New User Orientation: Social Campaigns
For more information and links to view
additional videos, see Social Training Videos.
How-To Videos
Check out the latest videos to help you perform common tasks in Social.
New Resources
For more information in Help, see:
• Publish Anywhere Tutorial Video
• Create an Adobe ID and Link it to Your Adobe Social Account
• How to Monitor and Respond to Conversations
• How to Pull and Customize Property and Post Analytics
• How to Troubleshoot a Post that Failed to Publish
• How to Set Up Social Campaigns
• How to Pull and Customize Social Campaign Reports
• How to Reauthorize a Social Account
• How to Create a Listening Rule
• How to Create a Moderation Feed
For more information and links to view
additional videos, see Social Training Videos.
Capability Spotlights
Learn about specific capabilities and related specs.
These guides, in PDF format, spotlight new features to get you up to speed quickly.
Release Notes
14
Link to Capability Spotlight
For more information in Help, see
Publisher Update
Publish Anywhere
Owned Social Reports
Owned Social Properties Reports
Publish Anywhere
Publish Anywhere.
Social Relationship Management
View Social Contact Information
Adobe Social Product Overview
Listening Rule Builder
Add Rules to Track
Multi-Level Publishing Approval Workflows
Publishing Workflows
Quick Start Guides
Learn about new features.
These guides, in PDF format, help get you up to speed with new features and enhancements.
Link to Quick Start Guide
For more information in Help, see
Social 3.3.3 What's New Part 1: Navigation and UI Enhancements
Social 3.3.3 What's New Part 2: Moderation Enhancements
For more information, see Tune Sentiment
in a Moderation Feed; Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds; and the topics
under Create a New Moderation Feed and
Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets.
Social 3.3 Publisher and Platform Enhancements
Social Moderation Quick Start Guide
Unified Moderation
Features Guides
Access lists of new features per release.
These guides, in PDF format, provide highlights of new major functionality and list additional new features for each
area of the product.
Link to Features Guide
Social 3.2 New Features Guide (Revised: 03/06/2014)
Social 3.1 New Features Guide
Social 3.0 New Features Guide
Training Videos
Watch short how-to videos about specific features and functionality.
Link to Training Video
What's New for August 2015 (15.8.1.0)
For more information in Help, see
Twitter Multi-Image Support: You can now
share up to four photos in one tweet, which
Release Notes
Link to Training Video
15
For more information in Help, see
will be displayed as a preview collage in your
followers' timelines.
See Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Twitter Video Support: Incorporate video
clips up to 30 seconds long in your tweets.
See Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Export Moderation Feed: Export moderation
feed content for access to additional metrics.
See Download Moderation Feed Content.
Aviary Integration: The Adobe Social mobile
app features an integration with the Aviary
Photo Editor.
See Use the Photo Editing Tools.
What's New for May 2015 (15.5.1.0)
Video Thumbnail: Select a still frame from
anywhere in the video to use as that video's
thumbnail image in the post.
See Publisher Page.
Dark Post: Create posts on Facebook that
do not display on your Timeline but can be
accessed with a direct link.
See Set Dark Post in Publish Anywhere
Workflow.
• Social 15.4.1.0: What's New - Part 1 (Social Tag Management)
• Social 15.4.1.0: What's New - Part 2 (Social Tags)
Use Social Tags as a centralized location to
manage tags for use throughout Social.
Social Tags help classify content within
Social. For example, you can tag social
contact profiles, inbound content in
moderation feeds, and outbound posts
created in the Content Calendar or
Publisher.
For more information, see Social Tags.
Social 3.4: What's New
For more information about the Unified
Property Management feature, see
Properties.
For more information about the new Custom
time frame for moderation feeds, see
Release Notes
Link to Training Video
16
For more information in Help, see
Moderate an Individual Facebook Post and
Moderate an Individual Tweet.
Social 3.3.3 What's New Part 1: Navigation and UI Enhancements
Social 3.3.3 What's New Part 2: Moderation Enhancements
Social 3.3 What's New? Part 1: Publisher and Platform Enhancements
Social 3.3 What's New? Part 2: Moderation Enhancements
For more information, see Tune Sentiment
in a Moderation Feed; Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds; and the topics
under Create a New Moderation Feed and
Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets.
Publisher Page
Schedule and Send Reports Via Email
Preferences
Create Auto-Notification Moderation Rules
Configure a Twitter Conversation
Moderation Feed
Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed
Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed
Stream or Manually Refresh Moderation
Feeds
Moderate an Individual Tweet
View Social Contact Information
Moderation Overview Dashboard
Social 3.2.2 What's New
Social 3.2.1 Moderation Tool Administrator Setup
Social 3.2.1 Moderation Tool User Orientation
Unified Moderation
Day-to-Day Moderation Part 1
Unified Moderation
Day-to-Day Moderation Part 2
Unified Moderation
Day-to-Day Moderation Part 3
Unified Moderation
Social 3.2 Listening Enhancements
Listening Rules
Social 3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements
Configure Link Shortening Preferences
Social 3.2 Publisher and Content Calendar Enhancements
Social 3.2 Metric Selector Enhancements
Social 3.2 Competitive Analytics
Enable or Disable Post Predictions
Publisher Page
Properties
Post Analytics Roll-Up View
Competitor Analytics
Release Notes
17
Note: In addition to these short how-to videos, see Social Training Videos for more formal, detailed videos
about Adobe Social and its features.
Migration Guides
Learn what you need to know before migrating to new functionality.
Link to Migration Guide
For more information in Help, see
Moderation Tool Migration Guide
Unified Moderation
Webinars
Watch webinars to help you get up to speed with various Social features.
Link to Webinar
For more information in Help, see
Building Customer Relationships with Adobe Social: Moderation Tool Unified Moderation
Use Cases
Adobe Social Campaigns
Campaigns
Getting Started with Social
18
Getting Started with Social
Adobe Social provides a complete view of your social media initiatives across various channels, including Facebook,
Twitter, Google+, YouTube, blogs, and more.
Social is completely redesigned with new interactive and actionable reports that let you drill down into your social
data to help you make data-driven decisions. New tools and workflows streamline day-to-day tasks, facilitate
collaboration, and help you share content and data more easily with others in your organization.
The new user interface lets you engage audiences and access real-time reports, wherever you are and whenever
the need arises. The touch interface is designed for use on desktop and laptop computers and is optimized for use
on mobile devices, specifically on iOS and Android browsers.
Adobe Social helps you better understand how conversations in social media affect brand perception, channel
activity, and key business metrics. Social lets you know how often a product or term is mentioned, gauge sentiment,
and then see how social metrics correlate with your business KPIs.
Social also lets you publish engaging content to Facebook, Twitter, Google+, YouTube, and LinkedIn.
You can create and configure moderation feeds to facilitate moderation of escalated issues and content on owned
Facebook pages, LinkedIn company pages, and Twitter accounts.
Social uses a permissions-based system to ensure that only authorized users can publish content or moderate
posts.
Note: This guide documents all Social functionality. Some features must be specifically enabled by your
Adobe Account Manager. Furthermore, many features are permission-based (such as the Publisher and
Applications). If some features have not been provisioned for your company, or if you don't have the appropriate
permissions from your company's Social administrator, you won't be able to see those features in the user
interface. As a result, the documentation might discuss features and functionality that you cannot access.
Other Help Resources
In addition to this Social Users Guide, the following resources are useful to help you get the most out of Adobe
Social.
Join the Adobe Social Community Forum.
View the Adobe Social Help page.
Understanding Adobe Social
Adobe Social helps you create and demonstrate social media Return on Investment (ROI).
Social media presents many business challenges for the social marketer, including:
• The value of social media is difficult to prove.
The difficulty involved in measuring the value of social media limits the marketer's ability to demonstrate tangible
business impact and prevents teams from justifying increased investments.
• Social media is an isolated effort with universal impact.
Customers don't limit their interactions with businesses to social networks, but social media initiatives are often
disconnected from marketing and customer service.
Getting Started with Social
19
• It is difficult for social initiatives to keep pace with social customers.
Social marketing requires real-time engagement and response. Using disconnected processes makes your social
media efforts more difficult. Examining data gathered using multiple tools limits your understanding of who customers
are, what they want, and how to engage with them effectively in real time.
• It is difficult to globalize social efforts without losing control of your brand.
Social efforts are difficult to scale a consistent brand presence globally while empowering local teams.
With these challenges in mind, Adobe Social provides the following benefits to help you manage your social media
presence:
• Deliver and demonstrate social media ROI.
Move beyond Likes and Shares by connecting social media to business results. Understand how interactions with
your customers using social media channels impact purchase behavior, brand value, and purchases.
• Obtain an end-to-end view of customers.
Connect your social media fan base to your marketing database for a complete view of customers. Use social
insights to better understand who your customers are and what they want. Use detailed customer information to
shape your marketing efforts.
• Go from insight to action at the speed of social.
Gather real-time insights, engage in real-time response, publish engaging content, and amplify that content with
social advertising—all within one platform and workflow.
• Organize for global scale with local impact.
Scale social efforts with a single tool built to manage across brands, business units, teams, time zones, and
languages. Organize efforts and maintain a consistent brand presence, both global and hyper-local.
Adobe Social offers the following capabilities to help you better connect with customers using social media channels
to drive ROI:
Listening, Measurement, and Analytics
• Measure the effectiveness of campaigns, content, and engagement without tagging or manual implementation.
Understand which marketing tactics work best and see exactly how fans, followers, and advocates affect your
bottom line. Take what you learn and optimize marketing efforts quickly and easily.
• Get a complete view of your customers across all touch points—not just on social networks. Understand customer
behavior, brand preferences, purchases, loyalty, and advocacy. Use this information to market more effectively.
Engagement
• Create content once and publish it to multiple places in ways that are appropriate for each social platform. Choose
when, where, and to whom content is pushed.
• Easily create and deploy interactive applications with either complete design control or built from quick-to-deploy
templates, including contests, coupons, and questionnaires.
Listening and Moderation
• Monitor and respond to conversations within your communities on Facebook and Twitter. Respond to questions
and problems quickly by routing issues to the right people. Track issues through resolution.
• Identify trends and influencers as they emerge. Use real-time insights to go from strategy to execution in a matter
of minutes.
Governance and Administration
• Use flexible permissions for users and groups.
Getting Started with Social
20
• Review processes that help global teams collaborate while maintaining security and controlling access.
Understanding the Social and Analytics Integration
Adobe Social combines data collected from the social web with Adobe Analytics data. This data is collected from
visitors to your website, Facebook pages, Google+ pages, Twitter followers, and users of your Facebook page
applications.
Brand names, product names, and company names represent your business. Conversations about these terms
constantly occur on the social web.
In addition to these conversations on the social web, your Analytics implementation provides you with a wealth of
information gathered from visitors who access your organization's website or page to consume content. This
information includes the number of visitors to your website or page, the number of application users, the number of
products purchased, the amount of revenue, and so forth.
As a marketer, you need to understand the conversations on the social web in terms of quantity and quality. More
importantly, you need to understand how these conversations affect the rest of your business. For example, when
an increasing number of people mention your products on Twitter, does your website see a corresponding increase
in visitors and purchases?
The Social/Analytics integration combines data gathered from the social web with data collected from consumers
of your content. Social seamlessly combines social analytics with quantitative analytics gathered by Analytics to
help you tie activity on the social web with core Key Performance Indicators (KPIs).
Social aggregates all relevant activity from social networks and identifies how that activity impacts key business
metrics and brand perception. This information ultimately helps you guide social activity across channels and drive
ROI.
Social helps customers monitor and measure the social web to see their valuable social data in context with all of
their online initiatives. This helps marketers get quick answers to business questions such as:
• What is social media's impact on my business?
• How are our social initiatives and conversations driving conversion of revenue?
• Who are the social influencers for my business?
• When positive social sentiment peaks, does our web traffic peak or are our conversion metrics positively impacted?
Note: Many of the concepts in this guide are covered in more detail in the Adobe Analytics help. Because
Social and Analytics are tightly integrated, a good understanding of Analytics and its features is important to
fully understand Social.
Owned Social Properties Reports
Social metrics for your owned Social properties (your Facebook pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, YouTube
videos, and LinkedIn pages and groups) are shared with and available within Adobe Analytics.
This functionality gives you the ability to evaluate owned Social KPIs along with site KPIs in Analytics. This data can
be added to Analytics dashboards, pulled into report builder, and is available in ad hoc analysis and data warehouse.
You can break down a report in Analytics to see subrelated data. For example, instead of viewing the total number
of Likes in Social for a Facebook page, you can use Analytics to drill into the data and view the total number of Likes
for that page broken down by different dimensions, such as age, gender, country, and so forth.
Getting Started with Social
21
For more information, see Owned Social Properties in the Analytics Admin & Reference Guide.
Owned Data Mappings
Download an Excel spreadsheet containing Social platform data metrics and definitions for the respective metrics
and definitions found in Adobe Social and Adobe Analytics.
If you assign a campaign to a post, Social automatically appends parameters to the post's URL that tie your campaign
to your social engagement data visible in Adobe Analytics. For more information, see Publisher Page.
Social adds many new metrics for owned social properties to pull in campaign conversion data, in addition to those
previously accessible from the Metric Selector in Analytics. More metrics will be supported in the future.
This section contains the following information:
• Owned Social Engagement Metrics Available in Analytics
• Owned Data Mappings
Owned Social Engagement Metrics Available in Analytics
Download a PDF document that contains a list of all available Social engagement metrics with their definitions.
Click here to download the Owned Social Engagement Metrics Available in Analytics document.
Owned Data Mappings
The Owned Data Mappings spreadsheet contains a list of all available Social engagement metrics, their definitions,
and the corresponding Adobe Analytics variable names.You can use this spreadsheet if you work with your Analytics
implementation team and need additional information not found in the PDF document mentioned above.
Click here to download the Owned Data Mappings Excel spreadsheet.
As you review the spreadsheet, keep the following information in mind:
• Data is broken out into separate sheet tabs for each platform's posts and property data.
• Each worksheet has the following columns:
Column
Description
<Platform> Title
The name of the metric provided by the social platform.
Facebook Dimension
(Facebook only) The dimension for that respective metric. For example, the
metric "Lifetime Talking About This (Post) by action type" has three possible
dimensions: Likes, Comments, and Shares.
<Platform> Definition
The definition of the metric provided by the social platform.
Adobe Social Name
The name given to the metric in Adobe Social.
Adobe Social Definition
The definition given to the metric in Adobe Social.
Adobe Analytics Variable
The name given to the metric in Adobe Analytics via the "Owned Social
Definition" variable. The <Insight Type> placeholder value can vary based on
the metric.
Adobe Analytics Variable
(Example)
An example for the variable is given with the <Insight Type> populated with
the actual value.
• The breakdown of the Adobe Analytics Variable is as follows:
Getting Started with Social
22
platform : post or property : insight type : insight value : metric
• When an Adobe Analytics variable contains _total at the end, the value is an aggregated total for that date.
For example, facebook:post:action_type:comment:post_stories_total means it's the lifetime comments
for the post to date, where as facebook:post:action_type:comment:post_stories means it's the comments
that occurred on that date.
• n/a means that is no value for that cell.
Enabling Social for Report Suites
Contact Adobe Client Care to enable Adobe Social for your desired report suites.
For more information, see Contact and Legal Information.
After Adobe Client Care enables social reporting for your report suite, you are ready to log in to Social.
For more information, see Signing In to Social.
Global Report Suites
Social supports global report suites that provide an aggregate view across an organization's various properties.
Global report suites are an Adobe Analytics concept whereby a site/app/property sends analytics data to two (or
more) report suites at the same time, with those secondary report suites capturing data from multiple properties.
The use of global report suites makes a secondary call necessary that comes with an additional cost. Global report
suites and this secondary call is sometimes referred to as multi-suite tagging. Only customers who currently pay for
multi-suite tagging are able to leverage global report suite functionality.
Traditionally, Adobe Social has been implemented on either the individual child report suite level or just on the global
suite level, but never in both.
The use of global report suites has implications across the following areas of Social:
• Implementation
• Owned Social Data
• Campaigns
• Listening
Implementation
The use of global report suites is optional. Not every report suite within a company needs to roll up to a global report
suite. A login company can have multiple global report suites, but only one level of global hierarchy is supported. A
global report suite cannot be assigned to another global report suite.
Global report suites must be configured by a member of the Adobe Social consulting team. Enabling a global report
suite requires coordination with Adobe. Adobe needs to know which report suites should be associated with a global
report suite. In addition, enabling a global report suite adds an additional campaign classification for customers
where campaigns are integrated that needs to be coordinated so as to not break existing SAINT processes.
If you are interested in global report suite functionality, contact your Social Account Manager. Your Social Account
Manager will then work with you and with the Social consulting team.
Getting Started with Social
23
Owned Social Data
Currently owned social data collection is driven by the report suite association in the Settings area (a 1:1 relationship).
After a customer has a global report suite configured and chooses one or more report suites that roll up to the global
report suite, all owned social data is sent to the child and global report suite. This allows customers to have one
aggregated view of all their owned social data across the organization in one report suite.
Note that Social determines whether a report suite is a global report suite to prevent data from being sent twice.
Campaigns
All campaigns created on the child report suites are visible in the global report suite. If multiple child report suites
have campaigns with the same name, the campaign exists only once in the global report suite and all tracking codes
and data are aggregated under this campaign. The global campaign has a new classification called "report suite"
to capture the report suite ID that allows you to see campaign details broken out by report suite. When a campaign
is created in the child report suite, and that campaign does not yet exist in the global report suite, it is created there
along with the classifications upon the first publishing to the campaign.
You can create campaigns on the global report suite level, but these campaigns are not available in the child report
suites.
If you decide to use a global report suite, you should continue to publish content from the child report suites so the
data is captured on that level, in addition to the global level. Seeing campaign data within the context of a child report
suite is much more meaningful. For example, revenue generated by a campaign as a percent of child report suite
verses a percent of global report suite provide two very different perspectives.
Listening
Listening rules that are tracking in the child report suites are aggregated in the global report suite to show the total
mention volume. If two or more child report suites track the same listening rule, that rule is only seen once in the
global report suite to show de-duped mentions and verbatims. Rules that are created in the child report suite cannot
be edited or deleted in the global report suite. Ownership of rules stays with the report suite where the rule was
created.
Classifications in child report suites are not carried up to the global report suite. SAINT has a 30-column limit that
could be quickly exceeded if classifications were to be copied up.
Signing In to Social
Sign in to Adobe Social using your web browser.
As part of its integration with the Adobe Marketing Cloud, Social offers Shared Assets functionality, as well as a
Mobile App:
Functionality:
Description:
Shared Assets
Shared Assets: Adobe offers a shared asset repository so that you can share assets
and folders between the Marketing Cloud and Creative Cloud.
For more information, see Share Marketing Cloud Folders and Assets with Creative
Cloud in the Marketing Cloud and Core Services Product Documentation.
Getting Started with Social
24
Functionality:
Description:
Adobe Social Mobile App
Social offers a mobile app for Publishing and Content Calendar workflows. You can
create, manage
and publish posts with all the features of Social in an easy-to-use iPhone app.
For more information, see Adobe Social Mobile App.
Important: In order to use these features, you first must log in to the Marketing Cloud using your own Adobe
ID.
This section shows you how to create and/or connect your Adobe ID to the Marketing Cloud and Social. After you
do this once, you can sign into Social on both your mobile app and desktop using your Adobe ID as well as leverage
the shared assets functionality.
1. Navigate to https://marketing.adobe.com.
2. Click Sign in with an Adobe ID.
Depending on whether or not you have an Adobe ID and are logged in already, you will see one of two screens:
• If you are not logged in to the Adobe Marketing Cloud or you do not have an Adobe ID, the following screen
displays:
Getting Started with Social
25
Depending on your situation, do one of the following:
• If you have an Adobe ID but are not currently logged in to the Adobe Marketing Cloud, click Sign In, type your
credentials, then click Sign In again.
• If you do not have an Adobe ID, click Get an Adobe ID, then create a new ID with your email address by
following the onscreen instructions.
• If you already have an Adobe ID and are logged in to the Adobe Marketing Cloud, the following screen displays:
Getting Started with Social
26
Select Adobe ID Personal Account, type your credentials, then click Sign In.
Tip: How do you know if you have an Adobe ID? If you are already a user of the online Creative Cloud or
Document Cloud (such as Adobe Acrobat online), you likely have an Adobe ID. You can use this for the
Adobe Marketing Cloud as well, including Social. If you are unsure, type your email in the sign-in screen
and Adobe will look you up.
You can now use your Adobe ID to log into Adobe Social. You can do this either of two ways:
• Navigate to https://marketing.adobe.com/ and log in with your Adobe ID.
To navigate between solutions, use the
icon in the menu bar at the top:
Any solutions you will have linked appear in color. In the above example, this user has linked Adobe Analytics and
Adobe Social to his or her Adobe ID. Click the Social icon for Adobe Social.
• Navigate to https://social.omniture.com/, then click Sign in with Adobe ID.
Important: After you successfully sign in to Marketing Cloud for the first time, you must link your Social
account to your Adobe ID. You only need to do this once. For more information, see Linking Your Social
Account to the Marketing Cloud.
Getting Started with Social
27
Linking Your Social Account to the Marketing Cloud
After you successfully sign in to Marketing Cloud for the first time, you must link your Social account to your Adobe
ID. You only need to do this once.
1. Log in to Social.
Follow the instructions in Signing In to Social.
2. Upon logging in the first time, you will see the welcome screen. Click Get Access in the Analytics card (not in
the Social card).
3. At the prompt, provide your usual login credentials for Adobe Social:
• Company: Your login company name.
• Username: Your Adobe Social username.
• Password: Your Adobe Social password.
4. Click Link to link your new Adobe ID to your Social login.
You might need to log back in after this step. If so, just click Sign in with an Adobe ID.
Supported Browsers
Log in to Adobe Social using a supported browser. An error message displays if you attempt to log in using an
unsupported browser.
Adobe Social and the Adobe Marketing Cloud support the following browsers:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 or higher
• Google Chrome
• Mozilla Firefox
• Apple Safari
Use the latest available version of your web browser of choice for an optimal experience.
Signing Out of Social and Resetting Your Password
Information to help you sign out of Adobe Social and to reset your Adobe Social password.
This section contains the following information:
• Signing Out of Social
• Resetting Your Password
Getting Started with Social
28
Signing Out of Social
To sign out of Social, click
in the window header, then click Sign Out.
Resetting Your Password
Adobe Marketing Cloud + Social Users: If you use your Adobe ID (Adobe's single-sign-on system) to sign in to
Social, and you need to reset your password, click Sign in with Adobe ID, then click Trouble Signing in? Specify
the email account that is associated with your Adobe ID, then click Reset my Password. You will receive an email
message instructing you how to reset your password.
Adobe Analytics + Social Users: If you use your Company, Username, and Password to sign in to Social, and
you need to reset your password, click Forgot Password. Specify your Company and username, then click Reset
my Password. You will receive an email message instructing you how to reset your password.
If you do not know your company and username, contact your organization's Social administrator.
Change Social Report Suite or Company
When you log in to Social, you log in to a report suite and company. If you have more than one report suite or
company, you can change to another report suite or company at any time.
To change the report suite
From the Report Suite drop-down list, select the desired report suite.
A report suite defines the complete, independent reporting on a chosen website, set of websites, or subset of
web pages. Usually, a report suite is one website, but it can be a global segment where you have combined
several sites' numbers to get totals.
When you select another report suite, Social changes to display the information from the selected suite.
To change the company
1.
From the right side of the Social header, click .
2. From the Company drop-down list, select the desired company.
If your organization has many report suites that apply to different portions within your company, Social provides the
ability to create a new login company to divide or copy report suites for different individuals within your organization.
This is especially useful for large organizations that deal with different business units where many report suites are
not applicable to others in their company.
Getting Started with Social
29
Product Notification System
The product notification system helps keep you up to date with relevant and timely communications from Adobe
within the Social product. Notifications can include information about product releases, maintenance windows, service
disruptions, platform outages, and more. The product notification system provides more details as necessary.
Notifications display in the upper-right corner of Social in the toolbar. Click the notification icon to display the list of
notifications.
For monthly scheduled maintenance windows, you can review the release notes to get up to speed on new features
and read descriptions of resolutions for important customer-reported issues. Be sure to review the Pre- and
Post-Release Best Practices section to help avoid publishing problems during the maintenance window. If there are
special circumstances to consider for a release, instructions will be included in the Customer Resource Hub.
Getting Started with LinkedIn
Information to help you begin using Social to publish content to your LinkedIn company pages.
This topic includes the following information:
• Adding LinkedIn Properties to Social
• Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages
Adding LinkedIn Properties to Social
Before you can publish to LinkedIn company pages, you must add those pages to your Social account. After your
properties are added, you can then post status updates to company pages as a company. For more information,
see Add LinkedIn Company Pages.
After you have added your LinkedIn properties to Social, you can configure optional settings for the company pages
or groups. You can enable or disable approval settings, change property owners, or delete properties. For more
information, see Configure Property Settings.
Publishing Posts to LinkedIn Company Pages
Just as you would publish to Facebook, Twitter, or Google+, your LinkedIn properties will be available in the Social
Properties drop-down list in the Social Publisher.
Getting Started with Social
30
There are a few types of posts and settings you can create,
• Publish status updates to company pages as a company
• Create a status update with an inline shortened link
• Target based on company size, industry, job function, seniority, and geography
• Assign a campaign to your status update
Note: When publishing photos to a LinkedIn company page using Social, there is an issue with a social asset
link displaying in the post (as shown below). This is due to limitations in the LinkedIn API. As a workaround,
you can post natively to LinkedIn if you want to bypass the issue with the link displaying in the post.
For more information about publishing content to your LinkedIn properties, see Publisher.
Sensitive Personal Data
Adobe Social does not store values that appear to represent credit card numbers or social security numbers.
When these values are present, they are replaced with the string ##########. To view the original content you must
view it directly on the target social network rather than in Adobe Social (for example, in Social moderation feeds or
the Social Buzz report).
Social Training Videos
31
Social Training Videos
Training videos for Social 3 are available for viewing on Adobe EnterpriseTV.
These training videos are meant for existing users of Adobe Social. In each video, social practitioners will learn basic
concepts, receive step-by-step instructions on how to use the feature, and best practices to get the most of that
capability.
You can find these videos and more on Adobe EnterpriseTV (https://outv.omniture.com/). For Social training videos,
under Social, click the Adobe Social tab.
Click the desired link in the Video Link column to view the video. For your convenience, links to individual videos
are also available from within appropriate topics in this guide.
Note: New features and functionality are being added to Social with each monthly release. Because of this,
as time passes, some information in these videos might become outdated.These training videos will be updated
on a regular basis to reflect these changes. However, between video-editing cycles, notes in the table below
explain these changes and link to the appropriate section in this guide so that you can always stay up to date.
The Social training videos are organized according to the following core capability areas:
• New User Orientation
• "How To" Series
• Analytics
• Content Calendar
• Moderation
• Publishing
• Social Campaigns
• Listening
New User Orientation
Video Link
Description
New User Orientation: Adobe Social Learn how to navigate Adobe Social and understand its basic functionality.
New User Orientation: Publishing
Learn how to navigate the Publishing tool in Adobe Social and understand
its basic functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Publisher
New User Orientation: Content
Calendar
Learn how to navigate the Content Calendar tool in Adobe Social and
understand its basic functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Content Calendar
Social Training Videos
Video Link
New User Orientation: Moderation
32
Description
Learn how to navigate the Moderation tool in Adobe Social and understand
its basic functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Moderation
New User Orientation: Analytics
Learn how to navigate the various reports in Adobe Social and understand
basic analytics functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Overview Dashboards
• Analytics
New User Orientation: Social
Campaigns
Learn how to navigate the Social Campaigns reports in Adobe Social and
understand basic social campaign functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Social Campaigns
"How To" Series
Video Link
Description
How to Monitor and Respond to
Conversations
Learn how to monitor and respond to conversations on the social web.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Unified Moderation
How to Pull and Customize Property Learn how to get a high-level overview of all of your pages and accounts
that are linked to Adobe Social and drill down in to analytics for specific
and Post Analytics
social properties.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Properties
How to Troubleshoot a Post that
Failed to Publish
Learn how to identify and resend a post that failed to publish to your social
properties.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices
Social Training Videos
Video Link
How to Set Up Social Campaigns
33
Description
Learn how to use the integration between Adobe Social and Adobe
Analytics to tie social interactions to key metrics on your website to better
understand the business impact of your social efforts.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Campaigns
• Social Campaigns
How to Pull and Customize Social
Campaign Reports
Learn how to use and customize the Social Campaigns reports.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Social Campaigns
How to Reauthorize a Social Account Learn how to reauthorize social accounts for use with Adobe Social.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see Re-authorize Properties.
How to Create a Listening Rule
Learn how to create individual listening rules to track activities on the
social web.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Add Rules to Track
How to Create a Moderation Feed
Learn how to moderate posts, tweets, and comments across social
platforms from within one convenient workflow.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Create a New Moderation Feed
Analytics
Video Link
New User Orientation: Analytics
Description
Learn how to navigate the various reports in Adobe Social and understand
basic analytics functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Overview Dashboards
• Analytics
Social Training Videos
Video Link
34
Description
How to Pull and Customize Property Learn how to get a high-level overview of all of your pages and accounts
that are linked to Adobe Social and drill down in to analytics for specific
and Post Analytics
social properties.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Properties
Overview Dashboard
Learn about the Overview dashboard, the types of metrics available, and
why they are important.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Marketing Overview Dashboard
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Custom Campaigns Reports
Learn about the integration between Adobe Social campaign data and
Adobe Analytics metrics and how to configure the Asset Tracking Codes
report.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Custom Reports
• Asset Tracking Codes
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Custom Listening Reports
Learn about the integration between Adobe Social listening data and
Adobe Analytics metrics and how to configure the custom listening reports.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Custom Reports
• Authors
• Social Platforms/Properties
• Display Name
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Social Training Videos
35
Content Calendar
Video Link
Description
New User Orientation: Content
Calendar
Learn how to navigate the Content Calendar tool in Adobe Social and
understand its basic functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Content Calendar
Content Calendar: Working with
Posts
Learn how to create and edit posts using the Content Calendar.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Content Calendar
• Display and Filter the Content Calendar
• Parent and Child Posts
• Edit Parent or Child Posts in Content Calendar
• View or Create Post Drafts and Templates
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Content Calendar: Multi-Platform
Posts
Learn how to manage multi-platform posts in the Content Calendar.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Content Calendar
• Parent and Child Posts
• Edit Parent or Child Posts in Content Calendar
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Content Calendar: Drafts &
Templates
Learn what Drafts and Templates are in the Content Calendar and how
to create and edit them.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Content Calendar
• View or Create Post Drafts and Templates
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Social Training Videos
36
Moderation
Video Link
New User Orientation: Moderation
Description
Learn how to navigate the Moderation tool in Adobe Social and understand
its basic functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Unified Moderation
How to Monitor and Respond to
Conversations
Learn how to monitor and respond to conversations on the social web.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Unified Moderation
Moderation: Escalation Workflows
Learn how to customize escalation reasons and suggested actions, route
issues, and how to manage escalations.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Configure Escalation Management
• Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Publishing
Video Link
New User Orientation: Publishing
Description
Learn how to navigate the Publishing tool in Adobe Social and understand
its basic functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Publisher
How to Reauthorize a Social Account Learn how to reauthorize social accounts for use with Adobe Social.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see Re-authorize Properties.
How to Troubleshoot a Post that
Failed to Publish
Learn how to identify and resend a post that failed to publish to your social
properties.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
Social Training Videos
Video Link
37
Description
• Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices
Publisher Settings
Learn the basics of how to add new social properties, create page and
audience groups, and set up link shorteners.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Configure Property Settings
• Add Facebook Pages
• Create Page Groups
• Edit Page Groups
• Create an Audience
• Publisher Page
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Post Publishing
Learn the basics of how to create a new post, target content, and schedule
posts.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Publisher
• Publisher Page
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Multi-Platform Publishing
Learn how to publish content to multiple social platforms and properties
simultaneously.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Publisher
• Publisher Page
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Predictive Publishing
Learn how to predict post performance and work with recommendations.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Publisher Page
Social Training Videos
Video Link
38
Description
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Audience Publishing
Learn what audience management is and how to create and save audience
targets to streamline the publishing process.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Create an Audience
• Create Circle
• Publisher Page
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Social Campaigns
Video Link
Description
New User Orientation: Social
Campaigns
Learn how to navigate the Social Campaigns reports in Adobe Social and
understand basic social campaign functionality.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Social Campaigns
How to Set Up Social Campaigns
Learn how to use the integration between Adobe Social and Adobe
Analytics to tie social interactions to key metrics on your website to better
understand the business impact of your social efforts.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topics:
• Campaigns
• Social Campaigns
How to Pull and Customize Social
Campaign Reports
Learn how to use and customize the Social Campaigns reports.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Social Campaigns
Social Training Videos
39
Listening
Video Link
How to Create a Listening Rule
Description
Learn how to create individual listening rules to track activities on the
social web.
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Add Rules to Track
Social Buzz
Learn what social data sources we listen to and how to read and interact
with the report
For more information in Help about the concepts and procedures covered
in this training video, see the following topic:
• Social Buzz
Note: Video based on V3.0, filmed in August 2013. Note that some
functionality may have changed in subsequent releases.
Overview Dashboards
40
Overview Dashboards
View the Marketing Overview and Moderation Overview dashboards.
Marketing Overview Dashboard
Use the Marketing Overview dashboard to get a complete view of your social initiatives. You can also drill down
into specific reports from the various reportlets on this dashboard.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Overview Dashboard.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Overview > Marketing Overview.
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all reportlets in the Marketing Overview
dashboard.
The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar
displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
3. (Optional) Filter the dashboard by social platform or by owned properties only.
You can display information for one platform, multiple platforms, or all available platforms. The report is dynamic.
Individual reportlets display or are hidden, depending on whether they are relevant to the selected platforms. For
example, if you deselect Facebook, the Facebook Pages reportlet is hidden. In addition, information on the
various reportlets change depending on the selected platforms.
a)
Access the filter options by clicking .
b) Select one or more social platforms (for example, Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, and YouTube) to
filter the report.
c) Select or deselect the Only Owned Properties check box, depending on your needs. If this option is selected
(the default), data for only owned properties that the logged-in user owns is displayed, even if that user has
permission to view all analytics information. This filter applies to the Posts, Post Performance, and Facebook
Pages reportlets only. This setting is persistent, meaning that if you log out of Social and then log back in and
view the Marketing Overview Dashboard, the specified setting is retained. If this option is selected, the UI
indicates at the top of the dashboard that data for only owned properties is displayed.
4. View the desired reportlet.
Social Buzz: Contains a line chart that displays your most popular listening rules and their corresponding number
of mentions.
If you have not already added listening rules, click Add Rules and follow the directions in Add Rules to Track.
Overview Dashboards
41
The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates.
Click the blue title to display the Social Buzz report.
Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement rates (number of engaged users
divided by unique reach), clicks, date and time of post, and a representation of the actual post.
Overview Dashboards
42
Use the drop-down list at the top of the ribbon to sort your top posts by the number of engagements or by post
time (in ascending or descending order).
Click the blue title to display the Post Analytics report. Click
to view the post's Post Details report.
Post Performance: Contains a bubble chart displaying statistics for post performance across social platforms.
Overview Dashboards
43
Note: You can mouse over individual metric titles in Social dashboards and reports to display metric
definitions in the user interface.
The following metrics are available, depending on which platforms you selected to display in the dashboard:
• Facebook Engagements: The number of stories and post consumptions for the selected date range.
• Twitter Engagements: The number of people who replied, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link.
• Google+ Engagements: The number of people who clicked +1, commented on, shared, or clicked a link on
posts for the selected date range.
• LinkedIn Engagements: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on posts for the
company during the selected date range.
• YouTube Engagements: The number of times people commented on, favorited, liked, or shared videos or
subscribed to the channel for the selected date range.
Mouse over an individual bubble to display the following information for that post: date and time of post, reach,
and engagements. The bubbles are color coded to make it easy to distinguish posts by social platform. Posts
that are vertically higher on the chart represent greater reach and the size of the bubbles indicate the relative
number of engagements. Click the blue title to display the post's Post Details report.
Campaigns: Contains a representation of your top campaigns.
Overview Dashboards
44
Each campaign tile displays the name of the campaign and details for the selected metric. Use the drop-down
list on the right side of the reportlet to change the displayed metric. For example, you can view revenue, orders,
page views, and more. Click the blue title to display the Social Campaigns report.
Referring Domains: Displays the top-level domains that referred visitors to your site, along with their number
of visits.
This reportlet helps you determine which external sites contribute the most traffic to your pages and applications.
Mentions by Geography: Displays an interactive map of the world showing mentions of your listening rules on
the social web.
Overview Dashboards
45
The Mentions by Geography reportlet provides a visual representation of total mentions of your tracked terms
per country. Darker-shaded countries have more mentions than lighter-shaded countries. Hover over an area to
display its total number of mentions.
Facebook Pages: Displays the number of Page Views and Total Likes across all Facebook pages visible to the
user in the account.
The following metrics are available:
• Page Views: The number of people who saw your pages during the selected date range.
• Total Likes: The total number of people (unique users) who have liked your pages as of the last day of the
selected date range.
Your top five Facebook pages, along with their respective Page Views and Total Likes, display at the bottom of
the chart. This bar chart can be sorted based on Page View or Total Likes by clicking the header in the table.
Overview Dashboards
46
Moderation Overview Dashboard
Use the Moderation Overview dashboard to get a complete view of your organization's moderation efforts. You
can view moderation statistics for individual members of your team, see how long it takes your team to resolve
escalated issues, determine which time of day most issues are escalated, compare the number of unresolved issues
to resolved issues, and more.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Overview > Moderation Overview.
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all reportlets in the Moderation Overview
dashboard.
The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar
displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
3. View the desired reportlet.
Issues Overview: Contains a chart that displays escalated, claimed, and resolved issues for the selected date
range and also includes historical counts. Unlike other charts that display counts of activity only during that
selected date range, this chart displays respective counts "until" that time interval in the selected date range.
The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates.
Team: Contains a chart showing each moderator or your team with corresponding statistics showing the number
of new, claimed, and resolved issues and the average number of minutes it takes for each moderator to resolve
an issue.
Overview Dashboards
47
Assigned Issues: Displays a donut chart that displays the percentage of issues assigned to individual moderation
users or groups.
Mouse over any segment of the donut to view the percentage of issues assigned to an individual moderation
user or group.
Avg.Time to Resolution: Contains a bar chart indicating how many minutes, on average, it takes your moderation
team to resolve issues, by date.
Overview Dashboards
48
Mouse over any bar to view the average amount of time to resolve an issue on each date. Red bars mean that
the average time was more than the threshold. Green bars mean that the average time was less than the threshold.
The threshold is based on the average amount of time spent to resolve all issues in the current report suite. The
threshold is currently not editable.
Issue by Hour: Contains the number of issues that were escalated during each hour during the specified time
period.
Mouse over each bar to view the number of issues that were escalated for each hour.
Efficiency: Displays a stacked bar chart displaying the number of unresolved and resolved issues, by date.
Overview Dashboards
49
Mouse over each bar for additional details.
4. (Optional) Click
to download moderation action statistics and history to an Excel Spreadsheet.
Note: The data in the spreadsheet reflects the specified time period.
The spreadsheet contains two sheets (click the desired tab at the bottom left corner of the spreadsheet):
Moderation Action by User: For each moderator, lists the number of posts marked read, replied to, escalated,
claimed, resolved, retweeted, favorited, and direct-messaged.
Moderation Actions History: Lists every moderation action performed by a Social moderator. You can view
the date and time when the action was performed; action performed (deny, approve, escalate, flag, and so forth);
moderator name; platform; content (verbatim); escalation reason, suggestion, status, and priority; accompanying
notes specified in the escalation; and more.
Analytics
50
Analytics
The Analytics menu lets you access, configure, and manage Social reports.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
Social Campaigns
Use the Social Campaigns report to view data from content that is assigned to various campaigns in your report
suite.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Overview Report and Campaign Details Report.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Campaigns.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
By default, the report displays data for the last 30 days. Only campaigns that have been active during the last
30-day period display on the Social Campaigns page. Each campaign tile has a click-through title that lets you
display its Campaign Details report. Each tile also displays metric statistics for the selected metric, which you
can change.
Analytics
51
If you hover over an individual campaign tile, its metric details display in the Campaign Performance ribbon on
the right side. If none of the tiles is selected, the Campaign Performance ribbon displays color-coded information
for all campaigns that have been active during the specified time period.
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the date range for the report.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
3. To change the displayed metric on each tile, click , then select the desired metric. The metric that you choose
displays at the bottom of each campaign tile and in the right side of the Campaign Performance ribbon chart.
The Instances metric on the left side of the ribbon chart cannot be changed. Click the metric box to display a
Search field and a list of metrics from which you can choose. You can select one metric only.
4. (Optional) If you have many campaigns, start typing the name of the desired campaign in the Search box.
You can also use the View and Page drop-down lists to change how many campaign tiles display on the page
or change pages.
5. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
6.
(Optional) Click
. For more information, see Schedule
to create a new campaign.
For more information, see Create a Campaign.
7. (Optional) Click
to view the report in list-view mode.
Or
Click
to view the report in tile-view mode.
8. (Optional) Click the blue title on any card to display its Campaign Details report.
Campaign Details
While viewing the Social Campaigns report, you can access a post-level report with more information about each
tracking code.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Overview Report and Campaign Details Report.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Campaigns.
2. In the desired campaign tile, click the link in the tile's header to display its Campaign Details report.
3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for the report.
The default date range displayed in the Campaign Details report is the same as the date range specified when
the campaign was created. You can change the date range for this report if you desire. For more information
about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
4. (Optional) Filter the dashboard by social platform or by post type.
You can display information for one platform, multiple platforms, or all available platforms. The report is dynamic.
a)
Access the filter options by clicking
.
Analytics
52
b) Select one or more social platforms (for example, Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, and YouTube) to
filter the report.
c) Select one or more post type (for example, Text, Image, Album and Link) to filter the report.
5. View the desired reportlet.
Performance: Displays a line chart that displays the selected metrics for the specified time period.
Click
to add or remove metrics. You can display as many as five metrics at one time. The available metrics
depend on your Social implementation and whether you are also using Adobe Analytics.
The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates.
Some reportlets in this report display information for the first metric listed. You can drag and drop metrics into
the desired order in the Metrics dialog box.
Analytics
53
Campaign Timeline: Displays a ribbon showing posts with this campaign tracking code. You can see the date
and time that the content was posted, a representation of the content, and metadata about the selected metrics.
Click
in each post panel to display that post's Post Details report.
Visitors by Link: Displays the number of visitors of the first metric listed in the Performance reportlet by link.
For example, if the first metric listed is Visits, this reportlet displays the number of visits by link.
Visitors by Type: Displays the number of visitors of the first metric listed in the Performance reportlet by type
(Text, Link, Album, and so forth). For example, if the first metric listed is Visits, this reportlet displays the number
of visits by type.
6. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
. For more information, see Schedule
Custom Reports
Use the Custom Reports menu to access individual reports surrounding campaigns, authors, platforms, and terms.
Additionally, you can access other reports configured by using SAINT classifications.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Custom Campaigns Reports and Custom Listening Reports.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. Select the desired report by clicking its title:
Asset Tracking Codes (under Campaigns)
Authors (under Authors)
Social Platforms/Properties (under Platforms)
Terms (under Terms)
Language (Under Language)
Note: These are the default Social reports. Depending on your Social implementation, you might have
other reports under the various headings. These reports are based on SAINT classifications. For more
information, see Classifying Terms in SAINT.
Asset Tracking Codes
Use the Tracking Codes report to see which tracking codes have been used to click through to your site.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Campaigns Reports.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports.
Analytics
54
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. Under the Campaigns heading, click Tracking Codes.
The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the tracking codes that have
been assigned to content and has produced a click-through.
You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of click-throughs for each tracking
code on that day.
You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is
sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the
selected time period.
3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the date range for the report.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
4. (Conditional) Click
to configure the graph and its data:
Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see
Configure Graphs.
Metrics: Click
to change the displayed metric.
Items: Click
to add items to the graph.You can display as many as five tracking codes. If no items are selected,
the top five display.
Analytics
55
Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized.
5. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
. For more information, see Schedule
Authors
Use the Authors report to see which authors are most frequently mentioning your tracked terms in posts, pictures,
and videos on the social web.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. Under the Authors heading, click Authors.
The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the five users who are mentioning
your specified terms most frequently on the social web.
You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each author on that
day.
Analytics
56
You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is
sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the
selected time period.
3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the date range for the report.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
4. (Conditional) Click
to configure the graph and its data:
Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see
Configure Graphs.
Metrics: Click
to change the displayed metric.
Items: Click
to select authors for the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected,
the top five display.
Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized.
5. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
. For more information, see Schedule
Social Platforms/Properties
Use the Social Platforms/Properties report to see which social platforms authors are using to mention your specified
terms in posts, pictures, videos, and so forth on the social web.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Listening Reports.
Tip: You can use the Social Platforms/Properties report to help direct your organization's marketing dollars. For
example, if you determine that your terms are mentioned the most on Twitter, and it has the largest potential audience,
your marketing team might consider investing more effort and money on Twitter marketing. Be aware, however, that
if you increase internal marketing efforts using social media, you will create "manufactured mentions" within Social.
You might want to consider filtering out posts coming from internal marketing sources.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. Under the Platforms heading, click Social Platforms/Properties.
Analytics
57
The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the social platforms and
providers that people are using to mention your specified terms on the social web.
Note: Some report suites display a Facebook entry and a Facebook Page entry. The Facebook entry
displays data about public posts on Facebook. The Facebook Page entry displays data about posts made
on your owned Facebook page.
You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each author on that
day.
You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is
sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the
selected time period.
3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the date range for the report.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
4. (Conditional) Click
to configure the graph and its data:
Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see
Configure Graphs.
Metrics: Click
to change the displayed metric.
Analytics
58
Items: Click
to add platforms and properties to the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items
are selected, the top five display.
Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized.
5. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
. For more information, see Schedule
Display Name
Use the Display Name report to see which listening rules are capturing people are most frequently mentioning in
posts, pictures, videos, and so forth on the social web.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Listening Reports.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
2. Under the Terms heading, click Display Name.
.
Analytics
59
The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the terms that users are
mentioning most frequently on the social web.
You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each term on that
day.
You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is
sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the
selected time period.
3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the date range for the report.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
4. (Conditional) Click
to configure the graph and its data:
Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see
Configure Graphs.
Metrics: Click
to change the displayed metric.
Items: Click
to add terms to the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected, the
top five display.
Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized.
5. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
. For more information, see Schedule
Language
Use the Language report to see which languages people are using to mention your terms on the social web. You
can also view average sentiment by language.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Custom Listening Reports.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Custom Reports.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
2. Under the Language heading, click Language.
.
Analytics
60
The report displays a chart at the top and a table at the bottom containing a list of the languages that people are
using to mention your terms on the social web.
You can mouse over any data point in the chart to see the specific number of mentions for each term on that
day.
You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is
sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the
selected time period.
3. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the date range for the report.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
4. (Conditional) Click
to configure the graph and its data:
Graph Type: Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top. For more information, see
Configure Graphs.
Metrics: Click
to change the displayed metric.
Note: Mentions and Average Sentiment are the only metrics that make sense in the context of this report.
Items: Click
to add languages to the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected,
the top five display. Select the desired language codes from the drop-down list.
Analytics
61
Note: Every post that is collected by Social listening rules automatically has a language assigned. You
can use this report to view an overview of language distribution for your mentions. Do not confuse the list
of available languages in the Items drop-down list with the list of languages that the Social Listening module
supports. Social Listening encompasses more than just determining which language was used to post
content. In order for Social to fully support Social Listening for a language, Social needs to be able to
determine how words are structured (tokenization), have a corresponding set of blacklisted keywords, be
able to identify related terms, and more. For a full list of languages that the Social Listening module supports,
see Language Support.
Y Axis: Choose Linear or Normalized.
5. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
. For more information, see Schedule
Competitor Analytics
The Competitor Analytics reports lets you see how the Facebook pages of your designated competitors compare
to your owned Facebook pages. You can view metrics for Total Page Likes, New Page Likes, Post Engagements,
and New Posts during the specified time period.
Social starts collecting data for competitors' pages after you add them to Social. You cannot backfill data. Data is
updated from Facebook hourly. For information about adding competitors, see Add Competitor Pages.
Note: At this time, competitor data is collected for public Facebook pages and posts only. Competitor analytics
is not available for pages that are not publicly accessible. Examples of Facebook pages that might not be
publicly accessible include pages promoting gambling, alcoholic beverages, or other adult products. These
pages might have age restrictions or user-validation methods that prevent Social from collecting competitor
data. Also note that the Facebook API provides data for non-targeted posts only (posts that have not been
targeted using geo or demographic data).
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Competitor Analytics.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
.
) to specify the date range for the report.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
3.
Access the filter options by clicking
.
You can filter the report by the following:
Page Groups: Select one or more page group from the drop-down list.
Pages (Owned): Select one or more owned page from the drop-down list.
Analytics
62
Pages (Competitor): Select the Only Competitor Pages option to display only pages from all of your designated
competitors. Selecting this option removes any owned pages that you might have added to the filter.
Or
Select one or more designated competitors from the drop-down list.
Note that you can include your own pages in the filter. This feature lets you compare your page directly with your
competitor's page. For example, if you want to do a page-to-page comparison of your Facebook page and one
of your competitor's pages, you can add those two pages to the filter for display in the graph.
4. View the desired section.
Post Engagements (Public): Contains a line chart that displays your top competitors and their corresponding
number of engagements (Likes and Comments) for public, non-targeted posts on that page. You can also view
the total number of engagements for all of your designated competitors.
The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any data point to see statistics for specific dates.
The table displays the name of all competitors' pages and information about the default metrics, although you
can change which metrics display:
The available metrics depend on the platform. Click
to select different metrics. You can drag and drop the
metrics into the desired order in the Metrics dialog box, which dictates the order of the columns in each platform's
section. Hover over any column title for a short description of that metric and how it is calculated.
5. (Optional) To download the data in an Excel file, click
.
Data exports mirror any filters set in the Competitor Analytics report (time period, competitors, etc.) instead of
an unfiltered dump of all competitor data.
6. (Optional) To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
.
Analytics
63
For more information, see Schedule and Send Reports Via Email.
Social Buzz
Use the Social Buzz report to get a complete view of your tracked social rules.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Social Buzz.
You can get information about the number of mentions, sentiment scores for individual mentions, and the number
of mentions by platform, geography, and author.You can also drill down into specific reports from the various sections
on this report.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Buzz.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
2. (Optional) Click
.
to specify the time range for all reportlets in the Social Buzz report.
The Social Buzz report is a real-time report. Data is refreshed every minute. The metric totals on this report
reflect the specified time period. You can change the displayed time period for the reportlets to the Last 30
Minutes, Last 1 Hour, Last 2 Hours, Last 4 Hours, Last 8 Hours, or Last 12 Hours (the default).
3.
Access the filter options by clicking
.
You can filter the report by the following:
Classification: Select the desired classification from the list: Display Name, Campaign, or a classification
specific to your implementation.
Provider: Select one or more social providers, such as DailyMotion, Disqus, Twitter, YouTube, and so forth.
Sentiment: Select one or more sentiment categories: Negative, Neutral, and Positive. For more information,
see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
Emotion: Select one or more emotions: Joy, Admiration, Fear, Surprise, Sadness, Disgust, Anger, and Anticipation.
Followers: (Twitter only) Click the Search box, then select the desired range from the drop-down list. Only
mentions from users that fall within the specified range display in the Social Buzz report. You can select more
than one range.
Spam: Social uses a proprietary system to determine whether content is spam. By default, the Filter Spam filter
is selected (content determined to be spam does not display in the report). To see content that the Social system
has marked as spam, deselect this option.
Note that currently, spam filtering is available only for the English language. For more information, see Sentiment,
Language, and Spam Analysis.
Retweets: Include or hide retweets (Twitter only). Mentions that are retweets that fall in the specified range
display in the Social Buzz report.
Language: Click the Search box, then select one or more languages from the drop-down list. Only mentions in
the specified languages display in the Social Buzz report.
Analytics
64
Note: Every post that is collected by Social listening rules automatically has a language assigned. You
can filter the Social Buzz report to display only mentions in the selected languages. Do not confuse the
list of available languages in the drop-down list with the list of languages that the Social Listening module
supports. Social Listening encompasses more than just determining which language was used to post
content. In order for Social to fully support Social Listening for a language, Social needs to be able to
determine how words are structured (tokenization), have a corresponding set of blacklisted keywords, be
able to identify related terms, and more. For a full list of languages that the Social Listening module supports,
see Language Support.
Geography: Search for and select one or more geographic areas (countries, regions, and cities) by which you
want to filter the report.
4. View the desired section.
Display Name/Classification: (The title of this section depends on how you filtered the report using the
Classification filter described in Step 3.) Contains a line chart that contains the display names of your most popular
rules and their corresponding number of mentions.
The individual lines on the chart are color coded. Mouse over any term to highlight its line. Mouse over any data
point to see statistics for specific dates.
Click a display name in the header to reload the report's various sections with data specific only to that rule. This
lets you drill down into the data for the selected rule and display only posts containing that rule, its related terms,
and its mentions by platform and geography. You can Ctrl+Click terms to select and display data for multiple
terms. For example, you might want to isolate a few terms to view and compare data. To view the report with
data containing the top-ten terms again, click the x next to the terms at the top of the report that you previously
selected to drill down.
Click
to change the displayed names. All of the rules you are tracking in Social display in a drop-down list.
You can also drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods. This capability is
sometimes called "date fencing." Date fencing causes the displayed data to refresh, showing only data for the
selected time period.
Display Name: Contains a bar chart displaying statistics for each of your tracked rules.
Analytics
65
The bar chart displays each display name, along with the numbers of mentions for that rule on the social web.
The first ten names are color coded to correspond with the lines on the Social Buzz line chart at the top of this
report. Use the Search box to display statistics for a specific rule.
Click a display name to display its related terms that were included in the mentions' content. You can use these
related terms to track additional terms that are often associated with your tracked terms.
The list of related terms is generated in real time based on a random sample of mentions using the following
process:
1. Social searches for mentions containing the appropriate display name (tracked term) and performs a real-time
weighting of related terms in the content using topic extraction techniques.
2. Social analyzes a random sample of 1,000 mentions from the above search result.
3. Social ranks and displays the related terms in the list.
Note: Because the list of related terms is generated in real time based on a random sample, each time
you refresh your browser, you might see the ranked order of related terms change or different related terms
displayed in the list. In other words, each browser refresh produces a new result set.
Analytics
66
Average Sentiment: Contains a meter that displays the average sentiment for the selected terms/rules.
For more information about how sentiment and how scores are calculated, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
Emotion: Displays a wheel chart displaying the percentage of posts, comments, and tweets that Social has
classified in different emotional categories based on Plutchik's wheel of emotions.
Note: The Emotion widget is a feature currently being developed and fine-tuned by the Social team. This
widget is included in this Social release as a sneak-peek.
The Emotion widget provides more insight into the content of a tweet, post, or comment. Social uses a proprietary
algorithm that uses a combination of linguistic analysis and psychology to classify content in the following emotional
categories: Joy, Admiration, Fear, Surprise, Sadness, Disgust, Anger, and Anticipation.
To filter the report by a single emotion, click the desired emotion. To filter the report by one or more emotions,
click , then select the desired emotion check boxes. To clear the emotion filters, click the tiles at the top of the
report or deselect the boxes in the filter.
Posts by Platform: Contains a line chart displaying the number of posts containing tracked terms/rules, broken
down by platform (Twitter, Facebook, Google+, and more).
Analytics
67
Mouse over any segment on the chart to display individual statistics.
Posts by Authors: Displays a list of authors whose posts have been captured by your listening rules, in descending
order by number of mentions captured. Use the Search box to search for a specific author.
Posts by Geography: Displays an interactive map of the world showing mentions of your rules on the social
web.
Analytics
68
The Posts by Geography section provides a visual representation of total tracked posts per country.
Darker-shaded countries have more mentions than lighter-shaded countries. Hover over a country to display its
total mentions. Click a region on the map or bar chart to drill down into that region. When you drill down into geo
regions, the other reportlets on the Social Buzz report reload to display data relevant to that region. Click the
plus and minus buttons to enlarge or shrink the map.
Be aware of the following information when analyzing posts by geography:
• The number of mentions by geography will be lower than the total number of mentions. The number discrepancy
occurs because users must allow their locations to be visible in order for this data to appear in Social reports.
• On average, one to two percent of tweets have attached geographic information; however, Social takes advantage
of geographical information from users' bios to provide enhanced analysis capabilities. Currently, Social can
collect geographical data on about 30 percent of Twitter users (some users don't specify a geographical location
in their bios).
To reset the Posts by Geography reportlet (which then resets the other reportlets on the Social Buzz report),
click the Geography box at the top of the report. For example, if you drilled down by clicking the United States
> California > Highland Park, the box would look like the following illustration:
Analytics
69
Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts. The first column in the ribbon displays each post's sentiment
score.You canmanually tune the sentiment for individual posts. The second column displays each author's profile
image. The third column contains an icon indicating each post's platform, the post's author, and the verbatim of
the actual post. Click to moderate the post. Click
Facebook, for example).
to view the post on the appropriate platform (Twitter or
Click the Play/Pause icon (
) to view the feed in real-time mode or to pause the feed. This option lets you
pause a fast-moving feed to examine an individual post.
Click the Images icon (
) to display or hide images in the feed. The default is to display images.
Use the Search box to display only posts that contain a specific word (a tracked term or any word). If the author's
name is blue, you can click through to the platform.
You can display images and play videos directly in the stream (for example, Instagram photos and YouTube
videos).
Click Details to display addition details about that post and its author. For more information, see Post Details in
Social Buzz Report.
To see which listening rules captured each post, see How to Tell Which Listening Rule Captured a Post. Also
note that for Twitter, the Followers column in the downloaded report contains the number of followers for that
author. Because this is a Twitter-specific metric, the Followers column contains zero for all other platforms.
5. (Optional) To download posts and their data (verbatims, authors, mentions, retweets, etc. ) in a .csv file, click
, then select the number of posts to download.
You can specify as many as 15,000 verbatims per user in a 24-hour period. Data exports mirror any filters set in
Social Buzz interface (time period, terms, etc.) instead of an unfiltered dump of all social listening data.
If you select fewer than 2,000 verbatims, you can open or save the .csv file almost immediately. If you select
more than 2,000 verbatims, a .zip file containing the .csv file is emailed to the specified email address after
the data has been processed. You can also specify a different email address, if necessary.
6. (Optional) To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
.
For more information, see Schedule and Send Reports Via Email.
Tune Sentiment
Manually override the sentiment of a post from the Social Buzz report.
Adjusting sentiment feeds the sentiment algorithm for a specific report suite, making the algorithm more accurate
to your needs over time.
Analytics
70
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Buzz.
2. In the Posts section, click or touch the sentiment column on the left side of a post to display the Override the
Sentiment Value controls.
3. Click the desired sentiment value: negative ( – ), neutral, or positive ( + ).
After you tune the sentiment for one or more posts, a message displays at the top of the Posts section informing
you that sentiment has changed. Click Undo Change to undo your changes or click x to close the message.
Note: You can also tune a post's sentiment in a moderation feed.
Post Details in Social Buzz Report
Expand individual posts in the Social Buzz report to display more details about that post and its author.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Social Buzz.
2. In the Posts section, click Details to expand the post to display more details.
Analytics
71
The post expands to display more information about that post and its author. The information varies depending
on the platform and author. Information can include the post's language, emotion, post type, date and time, and
more. The display name of the rule that captured the post displays next to Rule.
How to Tell Which Listening Rule Captured a Post
Information to help you determine which listening rule caused a post (verbatim) to display in the Social Buzz report.
Listening Rules let you create complex rules to track activities on the social web. Any listening rules that you create
populate the verbatims in the Posts section of the Social Buzz report.
Listening rules can be more complex than the simple keyword tracking in previous versions of Social. As a result,
customers sometimes see a post in the Social Buzz report and wonder which listening rule captured the post.
Inline functionality is available to display more information about each post, including which rule captured the post.
In the Posts section in the Social Buzz report, click Details for the desired post. The post expands to display more
information about that post, including the post's language, emotion, post type, date and time, and more. The display
name of the rule that captured the post displays next to Rule.
Analytics
72
The display name of the rule that captured the activity is also included in the downloaded Social Buzz report. The
display name of the rule that captured the verbatim is listed in the Display Name column.
To download posts and their data (including which listening rule captured the post) in a .csv file, from the Social
Buzz report, click
, then select the number of posts to download.
You can specify as many as 100,000 verbatims, per user in a 24-hour period. Data exports mirror any filters set in
Social Buzz interface (time period, terms, etc.) instead of an unfiltered dump of all social listening data.
If you select fewer than 2,000 verbatims, you can open or save the .csv file almost immediately. If you select more
than 2,000 verbatims, a .zip file containing the .csv file is emailed to the specified email address after the data
has been processed. You can also specify a different email address, if necessary.
Properties
Use the Properties report as a navigational tool to navigate into your social properties and to see statistics for your
social properties.You can view the Properties report in a tile view or in a list view.You can also access the Properties
Detail report for individual properties.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Social Properties Analytics.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Properties.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
By default, the report displays in a tile view with all of your owned social properties displayed.
Analytics
73
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the date range for all data in the Properties report.
The metric totals on this report reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays.
For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
3. (Conditional) Use the drop-down in the upper right corner to sort the property tiles in ascending or descending
order by the property name or by the number of subscribers.
The header in each property's tile contains the property title and an icon to indicate its platform (Facebook, Twitter,
Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo).
4. (Optional) Filter the report by social platform.
You can display information for one platform, multiple platforms, or all available platforms.
a)
Access the filter options by clicking
above the left navigation rail.
b) Select one or more social platforms (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo) to
filter the report.
c) (Conditional) Select Only Owned Properties to display only those properties that you own.
d) (Conditional) Select one or more page group from the drop-down list.
5. (Optional) Click
to display the report in the roll-up view.
Analytics
74
Note that each social platform has its own section. The available metrics depend on the platform. Click
to
select different metrics.You can drag and drop the metrics into the desired order in the Metrics dialog box, which
dictates the order of the columns in each platform's section. Hover over any column title for a short description
of that metric and how it is calculated.
Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to use the metric selector, see Social 3.2 Metric Selector
Enhancements.
You can search for specific properties in each section. View Number and Page Number controls let you view
and display properties more efficiently if you have a large number of properties in each section.
You can sort each column in ascending or descending order by clicking the title in the heading.
The arrow next to each metric displays the percentage increase or decrease for that metric over the selected
time frame. For example, if you view the report for the last month, the increase or decrease shown corresponds
to the previous month. If you view the report for the last seven days, the increase or decrease corresponds to
the seven days prior to the current seven-day period.
6. (Optional) To download data for each property in a .csv file, click
.
Data includes New Likes, Unlikes, Negative Feedback from Users, People Talking About This, and more.
7. (Optional) To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, see Schedule and Send Reports
Via Email.
8. (Optional) Click the title of any property to access its Property Details report.
Property Details Report
The Property Details report lets you see statistics for individual properties in your Social account.
Analytics
75
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Social Properties Analytics.
To access the Property Details report for a property, click Analytics > Properties > then click the title for any
property. For more information, see Properties.
The Property Details report varies depending on the selected property. For example, if you select a Facebook
page, the report displays the following tabs: Overview, Reach, and Admin Activity. If you select a Google+ page
or a Twitter account, no tabs display.
You can download report data to a Microsoft Excel file by clicking
to one or more email addresses by clicking
. You can also send report data in an Excel file
. For more information, see Schedule and Send Reports Via Email.
Facebook Property Details
Description of the Property Details report for an individual Facebook property.
Note: Insights about your Facebook page's performance are available after at least 30 people like your page.
The Property Details report for a Facebook property displays the following tabs:
• Overview
• Page Reach
• Admin Activity
Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range.
Overview
The Overview page displays the following panels.
Page Engagement: The following metrics display in the Page Engagement panel:
• Likes: The total number of people (unique users) who have liked the page on the last day of the selected date
range.
• New Likes: The total number of new people (unique users) who have liked the page for the selected date range.
• Un-Likes: The total number of unlikes (unique users) of the page for the selected date range.
• People Talking About This: The total number of people (unique users) sharing stories about the page for the
selected date range.
• Total Stories: The number of stories created about the page for the selected date range.
• Total Engagement: The number of stories and consumptions for the page for the selected date range.
The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for each page in the account.
Post Performance: The Post Performance section displays the number of Facebook engagements (the number
of stories and consumptions for the page for the selected date range) and a bubble chart that displays reach and
interaction metrics.
Top Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement and click metrics, date and time
of post, and a representation of the actual post. Use the drop-down list to sort the displayed posts by the number of
engagements or by post time in ascending or descending order.
Click
to view the post's Post Details report.
Analytics
76
Fans by Geography: The Fans by Geography panel provides a visual representation of fan engagement per
country. A gradient color legend is provided to indicate the scale of engagement on the map. Darker-shaded countries
have more fan engagements than lighter-shaded countries. Hover over a city to display the city name and the total
number of Likes for that city.
Engagement by Demographic: Displays demographic engagement data. Rows display for males and females in
each age group for the top five groups. If users have not specified a gender on their Facebook profiles, they are
categorized in the Unknown category.
Like Sources: Displays the top five sources that have produced Likes for the page. Like sources include Like
widgets, profile, Litebox widgets, requests, search, and stream.
Page Reach
The Page Reach page displays the following panel.
Reach: The following metrics display on the Reach panel:
• Total Reach: The number of people (unique users) who have seen any content associated with the page. This
metric is the sum of organic, viral, and paid reach.
• Paid Reach: The number of people (unique users) who saw a sponsored story or ad pointing to the page. These
people can be fans or non-fans of the page.
• Organic Reach: The number of people (unique users) who visited the page, or saw the page or one of its posts
in the news feed or ticker.
• Viral Reach: The number of people (unique users) who saw the page or one of its posts from a story shared by
a friend.
Admin Activity
The Admin Activity page contains the following panels:
Note: The tables can be sorted by any of the columns. These tables can be set to only be viewable by account
administrators. All of the data is exportable and changes per the selected time period.
Moderators: Lists the users who have performed moderation actions on the page. The table tracks each action:
Views, Replies, Deletes, and Escalations.
Publishing: Lists the users who have published to the page using Social. The table tracks posts by type.
Escalations: Summarizes the number of resolved and unresolved escalations per reason. This makes it easy to
see how effective your organization's workflow is.
Moderation Filters: Lists all of the words that have been scanned during page moderation and highlights by category:
Deleted, Bad, Medium, and Good. Use the checkbox controls to change which words are visible.
Twitter Property Details
Description of the Property Details report for an individual Twitter account.
Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range.
The Property Details report for a Twitter account displays the following panels:
Account Engagement: The following metrics display in the Account Engagement panel:
• Favorites: The number of times any tweet from the account has been favorited for the selected date range.
Analytics
77
• Followers: The total number of people (unique users) who have followed the account as of the last day of the
selected date range.
• Replies: The number of times any tweet from the account has been replied to for the selected date range.
• Retweets: The number of times any tweet from the account has been retweeted for the selected date range.
Post Performance: The Post Performance section displays a bubble chart that displays engagement metrics (the
number of people who replied, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link).
Top Tweets: Displays a ribbon showing your top tweets, along with their engagement rates, date and time of tweet,
and a representation of the actual tweet.
Google+ Property Details
Description of the Property Details report for an individual Google+ page.
Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range.
The Property Details report for a Google+ property displays the following panels:
Page Engagement: The following metrics display in the Page Engagement panel:
• Total Engagement: The number of people (unique users) who clicked +1, commented, or shared a post for the
selected date range.
• +1s: The number of users (unique users) who clicked +1 on a post for the selected date range.
• Comments: The number of people (unique users) who commented on a post for the selected date range.
• Shares: The number of people (unique users) who shared a post for the selected date range.
The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for each page in the account. Engagement is the sum
of all +1s, comments, and shares across all pages in the account.
Post Performance: Displays a bubble chart that displays engagement metrics (the number of people (unique users)
who clicked +1, commented, or shared a post for the selected date range).
Circles: Lists the top five circles for the selected page and gives a snapshot of membership, engagement, +1
count/growth, comments, and shares for each circle. The metrics here are similar to the Page Engagement metrics
described above but are calculated at the circle level.
Top Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement rates, date and time of post,
and a representation of the actual post.
LinkedIn Property Details
Description of the Property Details report for an individual LinkedIn property.
Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range.
The Property Details report for a LinkedIn property displays the following tabs:
• Overview
• Followers
Overview
The Overview page displays the following panels:
Analytics
78
Page Engagement: The following metrics display in the Page Engagement panel:
• Followers: The total number of people (unique users) who have followed the company as of the last day of the
selected date range.
• New Followers: The total number of new people (unique users) who have followed the company for the selected
date range.
• Non-Employee Followers: The number of non-employee followers (unique users) of the company as of the last
day of the selected date range.
• Employee Followers: The number of employee followers (unique users) of the company for the selected date
range.
• Total Engagement: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on a post for the company
for the selected date range.
The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for each page in the account.
Post Performance: Displays the number of LinkedIn interactions (the number of people who liked, commented on,
or clicked a link on a post for the company for the selected date range) and a bubble chart that displays reach and
interaction metrics.
Top Posts: Displays a ribbon showing your top posts, along with their engagement and click metrics, date and time
of post, and a representation of the actual post. Use the drop-down list to sort the displayed posts by the number of
engagements or by post time in ascending or descending order.
Followers
The Followers page displays the following panels:
Followers by Geography: Displays the number of followers by country.
Company Size of Followers: Displays the number of followers by size of company (10,000+, 5,000-10,000, and
so forth).
Top Industries of Followers: Displays the number of followers by type of industry (High Tech - Computer Software,
Defense & Space, Marketing and Advertising, and so forth).
YouTube Property Details
Description of the Property Details report for an individual YouTube channel.
Note: All metrics reflect the specified date range.
The Property Details page for a YouTube channel displays the following tabs:
• Overview
• Views
Overview
The Overview page displays the following panels:
Channel Engagement: The following metrics display in the Channel Engagement panel and are calculated for
the specified time period.
• Comments: The total number of comments received for the channel's videos.
• Likes: The total number of likes received for the channel's videos.
• Dislikes: The total number of dislikes received for the channel's videos.
• Shares: The total number of shares made for the channel's videos.
Analytics
79
• Subscribers Gained: The number of subscribers gained as a result of the channel's videos.
• Subscribers Lost: The number of subscribers lost as a result of the channels's videos.
• Favorites Gained: The number of favorites gained as a result of the channel's videos.
• Favorites Lost: The number of favorites lost as a result of the channel's videos.
The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for the channel.
Video Performance: Displays the number of YouTube interactions and a bubble chart that displays reach and
interaction metrics. Interactions include the number of people who commented, clicked favorite, liked, shared videos,
or subscribed to the channel during the specified time period.
Top Videos: Displays a ribbon showing your top videos in the channel. Use the drop-down list to sort the displayed
videos by the number of engagements or by post time in ascending or descending order.
You can click the video thumbnail to launch a viewer to watch the video from within Social.
Below each video the following icons and metrics display:
Metric
Description
Views
The number of times the video was viewed.
Likes
The number of times that users indicated that they liked a video by giving it a positive rating.
Dislikes
The number of times that users indicated that they disliked a video by giving it a negative
rating.
Engagement Rate
Engaged Users / Unique Reach
Engagement
The number of times users interacted with the video.
Click
to view the video's YouTube Property Details report.
Engagement by Country: Displays a bar chart that displays the number of engagements per country.
Views
The Views page displays a chart displaying views over time and the following panels:
Watchtime Metrics: Metrics are calculated for the channel for the specified time period. The following metrics
display:
• Minutes Watched: The estimated amount of time that a viewer has watched a video. This metric gives you a better
sense of what content viewers actually watch, rather those that simply click a video and then abandon it.
• Average Play Time: The average length, in seconds, of video playbacks.
• Average Percent Watched: The average percentage of a video watched during video playbacks.
Views by Source: Displays the number of views based on referrer type. Referrer type describes the manner in
which users reached the video. Possible sources include the following:
• Advertising: Viewers were referred to the video by an advertisement.
• Annotation: Viewers reached the video by clicking an annotation in another video.
• External URL: Viewers were referred from a link on a web page.
Analytics
80
• Google Search: Viewers were referred from Google search results.
• No Link Embedded: The video was embedded on another website when it was viewed.
• No Link Other: YouTube did not identify a referrer for the traffic. This category encompasses direct traffic to a
video as well as traffic on mobile applications.
• Promoted: Viewers were referred from an unpaid YouTube promotion, such as the YouTube Spotlight Videos
page.
• Related Video: Viewers were referred from a related video listing on another video watch page.
• Subscriber: Viewers were referred from feeds on the YouTube homepage or from YouTube subscription features
• YouTube Channel: Views occurred on a channel page.
• YouTube Other Page: Viewers were referred from a link other than a search result or related video link that
appeared on a YouTube page
• YouTube Search: Viewers were referred from YouTube search results.
Views by Country: Displays the number of video views by country.
Views by Gender: Displays the proportion and number of male and female viewers. Social collects data for this
metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube.
Views by Age Group: Displays the proportion and number of video views by age group. Social collects data for
this metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube.
Views by Location: Displays the number of video views, by location. Locations include the YouTube page itself, a
YouTube channel page, an imbedded player on other websites, mobile devices, and external applications.
Post Analytics
Use the Post Analytics report to view overall post statistics across all properties in your Social account.
You can view the report in list view format or in the property roll-up format.
Post Analytics List View
Use the Post Analytics report in list view format to view overall post statistics across all properties in your Social
account. You can also drill down to view statistics for individual properties (Facebook posts, Google+ posts, tweets,
and so forth).
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Posts.
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all sections in the report.
The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar
displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
3. (Optional) Filter the report.
The report is dynamic. The information on the various reportlets change and individual reportlets display or are
hidden, depending on your filtering options.
a)
Access the filter options by clicking
b) Select the desired settings:
.
• Social Platform: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo.
• Visibility: Select which post types to display: Dark Posts Only or Organic Posts Only (non-paid post).
• Page Groups: Select the page group you want to use for the filter. For more information, see Page Groups.
Analytics
81
• Properties: Select the properties you want to use for this filter. You can also filter by only owned pages.
• Audiences: Select the audience you want to use for this filter.
• Campaigns: Select the campaigns you want to use for this filter.
• Tags: When you create a post, you can optionally include tags. Information you type in tags is not viewable
outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information.
Other Social users in your organization can see this information. You can use tags to categorize posts. For
example, you can tag all posts about your Summer Campaign with the campaign name. You can also filter
by tags.
• Post Type: Filter by post type: None (Text Only), Image, Attached Link, Video, Photo Album, SWF Link,
and Event.
Note: Each image in the photo album has its own instance in Post Analytics. There is no roll-up view
of the entire album.
4. Click
to view the Posts section in list view format.
5. View the desired section.
Post Performance: Contains a bubble chart displaying statistics for post interactions across your Facebook,
Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo accounts.
The following metrics are available:
• Facebook Engagements: The total number of likes, comments, shares, link clicks, video plays, and image
views on all posts for the selected date range.
Note that the "video plays" metric represents true engagement when a user clicks the video and clicks Play, as
opposed to when a user scrolls past the video on Facebook and the video auto-plays without sound, which
does not represent an active engagement.
Analytics
82
• Twitter Engagements: The number of people who replied to, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link on all tweets
during the selected date range.
• Google+ Engagements: The number of people who clicked +1, commented on, shared, or clicked a link on
posts for the selected date range.
• LinkedIn Engagements: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on posts for the
company during the selected date range.
• YouTube Engagements: The number of times people commented on, favorited, liked, or shared videos or
subscribed to the channel for the selected date range.
Note: You can mouse over individual metric titles in Social dashboards and reports to display metric
definitions in the user interface.
Mouse over an individual bubble to display the following information for that post: date and time of post, reach,
and interactions. Click a bubble to view the post's Post Details report. The bubbles are color coded to make it
easy to distinguish posts by social provider. Posts with corresponding larger bubbles have a greater reach and
more interactions.
Posts: Displays a list of posts on your various accounts. The first line of each post contains the name of the
property to which the content was posted. By default, the list is ordered by date, newest to oldest. You can,
however, use the drop-down list at the top of the posts to change the sorting order. You can sort in ascending
or descending order by date, engagement, engagement rate, unique reach, or link clicks. Thirty posts display.
Click Load More at the bottom of the list to view additional posts.
The following metrics are available:
• Reach: The number of unique people who saw this post on its social platform.
• Engagement: The number of people who interacted with this post on its social platform.
• Engagement Rate: The number of Engaged Users divided by Unique Reach.
• Link Clicks: The number of clicks generated on a link in this post.
6. (Optional) To download report data in a Microsoft Excel file, click
.
Analytics
83
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
7.
(Optional) Click
. For more information, see Schedule
at the bottom of each tile to view the post's Post Details report.
Post Details
Access the Post Details report from the Post Analytics report to see detailed information about individual posts.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Post Analytics.
1.
From the Post Analytics report, click
2. View the post's details.
at the bottom of the desired tile.
You can download report data to a Microsoft Excel file by clicking
to one or more email addresses by clicking
. You can also send report data in an Excel file
. For more information, see Schedule and Send Reports Via Email.
Facebook Post Details
The Post Details page for a Facebook page displays detailed information about the post.
Information includes the name of the page on which the post was published, the date and time when the post was
made, the name of the Social user who posted the content, any tags that were specified when the post was created,
and any links contained in the post.
In addition, appropriate metrics for the post display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period.
The following metrics are available for Facebook posts:
• Unique Reach: The number of unique people who saw this post on Facebook.
• Impressions: The number of times people saw this post on Facebook.
• Engaged Users: The number of people who interacted with this post on Facebook.
• Engagement Rate: Total Engagement divided by Unique Reach.
• People Talking About This: The number of people who created a story about this post on Facebook. These
stories include liking your page; posting to your page's Wall; liking, commenting on, or sharing one of your page
posts; answering a question you posted; RSVP-ing to one of your events; mentioning your page; phototagging
your page; liking or sharing a deal; or checking in at your place.
• Negative Feedback: The number of people who hid or reported this post as spam on Facebook.
Comments: Displays any comments that users have made about the post. You can click the page name to go to
that page on Facebook.
Engagement: Displays engagements, including comments, likes, shares, link clicks, video plays (click to play),
image views, etc.
Reach: The Reach section shows the following reach metrics:
• Paid Reach: The number of unique users who saw a Sponsored Story or Facebook Ad about the page.
• Organic Reach: The number of unique users who saw the page's post in their News Feeds or visited the page
during the specified time period. These people can be fans or non-fans of the page.
• Viral Reach: The number of unique users who saw the page or one of its posts during the specified time period
from a story published by a friend. These stories include liking your page; posting to your page's Wall; liking,
commenting on, or sharing one of your page posts; answering a question you posted; RSVP-ing to one of your
events; mentioning your page; phototagging your page; liking or sharing a deal; or checking in at your place.
Analytics
84
Twitter Post Details
The Post Details page displays detailed information about a tweet.
Information includes the name of the account on which the tweet was published, the date and time when the tweet
was made, the name of the Social user who posted the tweet, any tags that were specified when the post was
created, and any links contained in the post.
In addition, appropriate metrics for the tweet display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period.
The following metrics are available for tweets:
• Unique Reach: The number of unique people who saw this tweet.
• Engagement: The number of times people engaged with this tweet.
• Engagement Rate: Total Engagement divided by Unique Reach.
• Link Clicks: The number of people who clicked a link in the tweet.
Replies: Displays any replies that users have made to the tweet. You can click the account name to go to that
account on Twitter.
Engagement: Displays engagements, including clicks, retweets, favorites, and replies.
Google+ Post Details
The Post Details page displays detailed information about a post.
Information includes the name of the page on which the post was published, the date and time when the post was
made, the name of the Social user who posted the content, any tags that were specified when the post was created,
and any links contained in the post.
In addition, appropriate metrics for the post display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period.
The following metrics are available for Google+ posts:
• Followers: The number of unique people who potentially saw this post on Google+.
• +1: The number of people who clicked +1 on this post on Google+.
• Comments: The number of comments on this post on Google+.
• Shares: The number of shared stories about this post on Google+.
• Engagement Rate: The number of Engaged Users divided by Unique Reach.
• Link Clicks: The number of clicks a link in this post generated on Google+.
The following metrics are available for Twitter posts:
• Followers: The number of unique people who follow this Google+ page.
• Engagement: The number of engagements for this post on Google+.
• Engagement Rate: The number of engagements for this post divided by Unique Reach.
• Link Clicks: The number of clicks on a link in this post generated on the Google+ page.
Comments: Displays the comments that users have contributed to the post.
Engagement: Displays engagements, including +1s, comments, shares, image views, link clicks, etc.
LinkedIn Post Details
The Post Details page for a LinkedIn post displays detailed information about the post.
Information includes the name of the page on which the post was published, the date and time when the post was
made, the name of the Social user who posted the content, any tags that were specified when the post was created,
and any links contained in the post.
In addition, appropriate metrics for the post display. The metric totals reflect the specified time period.
Analytics
85
The following metrics are available for LinkedIn posts:
• Unique Reach: The number of followers at the time the post was made.
• Engagement: The number of times unique users liked, commented, or clicked a link on the post.
• Comments: The number unique users who commented on the post.
• Liked: The number unique users who liked the post.
Comments: Displays any comments that users have made about the post. You can click the page name to go to
that page on LinkedIn.
Link Clicks: Displays the number of times users have clicked a link in the post.
Engagement: Displays engagements, including comments, shares, link clicks, etc.
YouTube Post Details
The Post Details page for a YouTube video displays detailed information about the video.
For YouTube videos, information includes the channel to which the video was posted, the date and time when the
video was posted, the name of the Social user who posted the video, the video's duration, category, publisher tags
(if any), and YouTube tags (if any).
You can click the video to watch the video inline.
The YouTube Post Details page contains the following tabs:
• Overview
• Views
Overview
The Overview page displays the following panels:
Performance: The Performance section displays the number of YouTube interactions and a bubble chart that
displays reach and interaction metrics. Interactions include the number of people who viewed, liked, disliked, clicked
Favorite, or made comments about the video during the specified time period.
Video Engagement: The following metrics display in the Video Engagement panel and are calculated for the
specified time period.
• Comments: The total number of comments received for the videos.
• Likes: The total number of likes received for the videos.
• Dislikes: The total number of dislikes received for the videos.
• Shares: The total number of shares made for the videos.
• Subscribers Gained: The number of subscribers gained as a result of the videos.
• Subscribers Lost: The number of subscribers lost as a result of the videos.
• Favorites Gained: The number of favorites gained as a result of the videos.
• Favorites Lost: The number of favorites lost as a result of the videos.
The line graphs show a visual representation of engagement for the channel.
Comments: Displays any comments that users have made about the video.
Engagement Breakdown: Displays a chart showing engagements, including comments, likes, shares, and so forth.
Views
The Views page displays a chart displaying views over time and the following panels:
Analytics
86
Note: YouTube calculates views when a user watches a video for an undisclosed amount of time. If a user
abandons watching the video before this time, the view is not counted.
Watchtime Metrics: Metrics are calculated for the channel for the specified time period. The following metrics
display:
• Minutes Watched: The estimated amount of time that a viewer has watched a video. This metric gives you a better
sense of what content viewers actually watch, over those that simply click a video and then abandon it.
• Average Play Time: The average length, in seconds, of video playbacks.
• Average Percent Watched: The average percentage of a video watched during a video playback.
Views by Source: Displays the number of views based on referrer type, which describes the manner in which users
reached the video. Possible sources include the following:
• Advertising: Viewers were referred to the video by an advertisement.
• Annotation: Viewers reached the video by clicking an annotation in another video.
• External URL: Viewers were referred from a link on a web page.
• Google Search: Viewers were referred from Google search results.
• No Link Embedded: The video was embedded on another website when it was viewed.
• No Link Other: YouTube did not identify a referrer for the traffic. This category encompasses direct traffic to a
video as well as traffic on mobile applications.
• Promoted: Viewers were referred from an unpaid YouTube promotion, such as the YouTube Spotlight Videos
page.
• Related Video: Viewers were referred from a related video listing on another video watch page.
• Subscriber: Viewers were referred from feeds on the YouTube homepage or from YouTube subscription features
• YouTube Channel: Views occurred on a channel page.
• YouTube Other Page: Viewers were referred from a link other than a search result or related video link that
appeared on a YouTube page
• YouTube Search: Viewers were referred from YouTube search results.
Views by Country: Displays the number of video views by country.
Views by Gender: Displays the proportion and number of male and female viewers. Social collects data for this
metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube.
Views by Age Group: Displays the proportion and number of video views by age group. Social collects data for
this metric only from users who are logged in to YouTube.
Note: YouTube requires an unspecified number of video views before it provides Gender and Age breakdowns.
Views by Location: Displays the number of video views, by location. Locations include the YouTube page itself, a
YouTube channel page, an imbedded player on other websites, mobile devices, and external applications.
Post Analytics Roll-Up View
Use the Post Analytics report in roll-up view format to view post data in a table format with sortable columns, growth
metrics, and metric totals for each platform.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Analytics > Posts.
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon ( ) to specify the date range for all sections in the report.
The metric totals on this dashboard reflect the specified time period. If you select Custom Range, a calendar
displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
Analytics
87
3. (Optional) Filter the report.
The report is dynamic. The information on the various reportlets change and individual reportlets display or are
hidden, depending on your filtering options.
a)
Access the filter options by clicking
b) Select the desired settings:
.
• Social Platform: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo.
• Visibility: Select which post types to display: Dark Posts Only or Organic Posts Only (non-paid post).
• Page Groups: Select the page group you want to use for the filter. For more information, see Page Groups.
• Properties: Select the properties you want to use for this filter. You can also filter by only owned pages.
• Audiences: Select the audience you want to use for this filter.
• Campaigns: Select the campaigns you want to use for this filter.
• Tags: When you create a post, you can optionally include tags. Information you type in tags is not viewable
outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information.
Other Social users in your organization can see this information. You can use tags to categorize posts. For
example, you can tag all posts about your Summer Campaign with the campaign name. You can also filter
by tags.
• Post Type: Filter by post type: None (Text Only), Image, Attached Link, Video, Photo Album, SWF Link,
and Event.
Note: Each image in the photo album has its own instance in Post Analytics. There is no roll-up view
of the entire album.
4. Click
to view the report in roll-up view format.
5. View the desired section.
Post Performance: Contains a bubble chart displaying statistics for post interactions across your Facebook,
Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo accounts.
Analytics
88
The following default metrics are available:
• Facebook Engagements: The total number of likes, comments, shares, link clicks, video plays (click to play),
and image views on all posts for the selected date range.
Note that the "video plays" metric represents true engagement when a user clicks the video and clicks Play, as
opposed to when a user scrolls past the video on Facebook and the video auto-plays without sound, which
does not represent an active engagement.
• Twitter Engagements: The number of people who replied to, retweeted, favorited, or clicked a link on all tweets
during the selected date range.
• Google+ Engagements: The number of people who clicked +1, commented on, shared, or clicked a link on
posts for the selected date range.
• LinkedIn Engagements: The number of people who liked, commented on, or clicked a link on posts for the
company during the selected date range.
• YouTube Engagements: The number of times people commented on, favorited, liked, or shared videos or
subscribed to the channel for the selected date range.
Note: You can mouse over individual metric titles in Social dashboards and reports to display metric
definitions in the user interface.
Mouse over an individual bubble to display the following information for that post: date and time of post, reach,
and interactions. Click a bubble to view the post's Post Details report. The bubbles are color coded to make it
easy to distinguish posts by social provider. Posts with corresponding larger bubbles have a greater reach and
more interactions.
Posts: Displays a list of posts on your various accounts, separated by platform with additional metrics.
Analytics
89
Sections display for each platform: Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, and Google+. Default metrics display for each
platform. Click
to select different metrics. You can drag and drop the metrics into the desired order in the
Metrics dialog box, which dictates the order of the columns in each platform's section. Hover over any column
title for a short description of that metric and how it is calculated.
Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to use the metric selector, see Social 3.2 Metric Selector
Enhancements.
The following default metrics are available for Facebook:
• Date & Time
• Reach
• Likes
• Comments
• Shares
• Link Clicks
• Negative Feedback
Click
to select different metrics.
The following default metrics are available for Twitter:
• Date & Time
• Potential Audience
• Retweets
• Favorites
• Replies
• Link Clicks
The following default metrics are available for Google+
• Date & Time
Analytics
90
• Followers
• +1s
• Shares
• Comments
• Link Clicks
The following default metrics are available for LinkedIn:
• Date & Time
• Followers
• Likes
• Comments
• Link Clicks
The following default metrics are available for YouTube:
• Date & Time
• Views
• Likes
• Dislikes
• Favorites
• Comments
• Link Clicks
6. Click each column header to change the sorting order for that column's data.
By default, the various columns (Date & Time, Reach, Likes, Comments, etc.) is ordered by date, newest to
oldest.
7. (Optional) To download posts and their data in a .csv file, click .
Or
To send report data in an Excel file to one or more email addresses, click
and Send Reports Via Email.
. For more information, see Schedule
Configure Reports
Configure reports, including viewing trended or ranked reports, configuring graphs, adding metrics to your reports,
and adjusting the reporting date range.
Configure Graphs
Configure the graphs that display in reports so that they are most useful for the intended audience.
1. While viewing a report that has configurable options, click .
2. Select the type of graph you want to display in the chart at the top of the report:
Icon
Description
Trended Line: Trend lines show daily trends for the report metrics and are useful for trending
one metric over time per line.
Analytics
91
Icon
Description
Selecting the line chart option produces a trended report. A trended report displays statistics
for a single metric over time.You use this graph type when you want to see authors' mentions
from one time period to the next.
Using a line chart limits you to displaying one metric and you cannot perform breakdowns.
Horizontal Bar Chart:The Horizontal Bar chart shows relative percentages for the report
metrics.
Selecting a horizontal bar chart produces a ranked report. A ranked report displays statistics
for as many as five metrics and you can perform breakdowns.
Horizontal Stacked Bar Chart: By stacking similar metrics you can get a quick view of the
total influence of a metric.
Selecting a stacked bar chart produces a ranked report. A ranked report displays statistics
for as many as five metrics and you can perform breakdowns.
Donut Chart: By displaying more than one metric you can get a quick view of the total
influence of those metrics.
Selecting a donut chart produces a ranked report. A ranked report displays statistics for as
many as five metrics and you can perform breakdowns.
Configure Options for Reports
Configure report options, including changing the displayed metrics, filtering the data, and breaking down the report
by another metric.
1. While viewing a report that has configurable options, click
2. Configure the report as desired.
.
Note: Not all options are available for all graph types.
Option
Description
Graph Type
Change the type of graph that displays at the top of the report. For more information,
see Configure Graphs.
Selected Metrics
To add or remove metrics, next to Metrics, click
box.
to display the Add Metrics dialog
You can display one metric only when viewing a Trended line chart. The other chart
types let you view up to five metrics.
For more information, see Add or Remove Metrics.
Analytics
Option
92
Description
Items
Next to Items, click
to add items (terms, authors, etc., depending on the report) to
the graph. You can display as many as five items. If no items are selected, the top five
display.
Y Axis
Choose Linear or Normalized.
Break down reports
Click
between the chart and the table to break down the entire report by using
different categories. For example, in the Author report, you can break down the report
by the content provider.
You can also click the Break Down icon ( ) in a ranked report's table to break down
each item by another metric. For example, if you are viewing the Authors report, you
can click the Break Down icon next to each author to break the report down by the
social platform.
Add or Remove Metrics
By default, Social contains default metrics in each report. You can, however, add or remove metrics from reports to
suit your needs.
Note: You can add metrics to or remove metrics from ranked reports only.
Tip: For example, to examine the correlation that mentions of your terms by certain authors and their average
sentiment scores have on orders of your products, you can create an Authors report that contains the following
metrics: Mentions, Average Sentiment, and Orders. The first two metrics are Social metrics and the last metric
is a Analytics metric. The integration of Social with $1 is a powerful tool to help you drive your brand's revenue and
exposure.
1. While viewing the ranked report, click
, then click
next to Metrics to display the Add Metrics dialog box.
Analytics
93
2. From the Metric Type drop-down list, select the desired metric.
You can add as many as five metrics to ranked reports.
3. To delete a metric, click
next to the desired metric.
4. Click Save when you are finished.
Adjust the Reporting Date Range
Adjust the date range so that reports show the desired amount of data.
Click the Calendar icon (
) in the upper-right corner, then select an option:
• Today
• Yesterday
• This Week
• Last Week
• This Month
• Last Month
• Custom Range
If you chose Custom Range, a calendar displays.
Analytics
94
Select the reporting date range.
Click Submit.
Currently, some reports reflect the time zone configured in the report suite and other reports reflect the time zone
configured for the user.
Report
Time Zone
Social Buzz
Report suite
Moderation Overview
User
Social Campaigns
Report suite
Custom Reports
Report suite
Asset Tracking
Authors
Social Platforms/Properties
Display Name
Language
Competitor Analytics
User
Social Buzz
Report suite
Properties
User
Property Details
Post Analytics
Post Details
User
Analytics
95
Schedule and Send Reports Via Email
Send a report in Microsoft Excel format to one or more email addresses, immediately or according to schedule.
While viewing a report, you can also click
to immediately download the report data in Excel format to your
computer. Using the Send Report feature, you can send the report to others in your organization even if they are
not Social users. You can also configure recurring delivery schedules.
1. While viewing a report, click
at the top of the report to display the Send Report options.
2. Fill in the fields:
Field
Description
Email
Specify one or more email addresses to which you want to send the report. Separate
multiple addresses with commas.
Email Subject
Specify a subject for the email message.
Number of Posts
(Conditional) This option is not applicable to all reports.
Select the number of posts to include in the email message.
You can specify as many as 100,000 verbatims per user in a 24-hour period. Data
exports mirror any filters set in report interface (time period, terms, etc.) instead of
an unfiltered dump of all social listening data.
Report Schedule
Select a schedule from the drop-down list:
• Send Immediately
• Hourly
• Daily (Each morning at 9am)
Analytics
Field
96
Description
• Weekly (Starting Sunday)
• Monthly (First day of each month)
• Yearly (First day of each year)
• Custom
If you chose Send Immediately, click Send.
If you chose a recurring schedule, continue with the instructions in Report Timeframe
below.
If you chose Custom as the Report Schedule, you have additional options:
Fill in the fields:
Report Schedule: From the drop-down list that initially displays Hourly, select the
desired delivery schedule:
• Hourly: Delivers the email every hour, every other hour, or any other interval of
hours.
• Daily: Sends the email every day, every other day, every third day, or any other
interval of days. You can also have it sent every weekday.
Analytics
Field
97
Description
• Weekly: Sends the email every week, other week, every third week, or any other
interval of weeks. You can also specify which day of the week it is sent.
• Monthly: Specifies the interval in numbers of months, and you can also select the
day of the month on which it is sent, or the day of the week in a specific week of
the month.
• Yearly: Specifies the day of the year on which the report is sent, or you can send
on a specific day of the week in any week of the year.
Delivery Time: Specify the time of day when the email message will be sent. The
time of day respects the time zone configured in the report suite.
Start: Specify the starting date for the schedule.
End: Select an end date:
• Never End: Specifies no end.
• End After <value> Occurrences: Specifies the number of occurrences before
ending delivery.
• On: Lets you specify a specific date.
If you want to process the data on the same date as the report data, the report
contains only data that has been put in the database at the time the report is sent.
Because complete processing for a day can take up to 24 hours, complete data
might not be available at the time the report is sent. For complete data, always set
the processing time for 24 hours after the end of the reporting period.
Report Timeframe
(Conditional) If you chose a schedule other than Send Immediately or Custom, the
dialog box expands to include a start and end time for the report along with Fixed
or Rolling options.
Analytics
Field
98
Description
• Rolling: Allows the date to advance as time passes. Some considerations:
If you select rolling for both the start and end dates, and you select a daily report
for the previous day, you receive an email each day with a report for the previous
day.
If you select fixed for the starting day, and rolling for the end day, you receive on
the first day a report for the previous day. The second day you receive a report for
the previous two days, and on the third day you receive a report for the previous
three days, and so on.
If you select fixed for both the beginning and ending dates, each day you receive
an identical report for the days that you specified.
• Fixed: Prevents the date from advancing as time passes.
3. (Conditional) If you chose Send Immediately, click Send.
Or
If you chose a recurring or custom schedule, click Schedule.
Publish
99
Publish
The Publish features let you simultaneously post content to Facebook, Google+, and LinkedIn pages that you
manage; your Twitter and Sina Weibo accounts; and your YouTube channels. You can also publish to Audience
Groups and Page Groups.
Content Calendar
Use the Content Calendar to create new content and to interact with existing content created by the Social Publisher
(both past and scheduled) through a List View or a Calendar View (Month or Week).
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts,
Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts, and Content Calendar Drafts & Templates.
The Content Calendar features let you simultaneously post content to Facebook, Google+, and LinkedIn pages
that you manage; your Twitter and Sina Weibo accounts; and your YouTube channels. You can also publish to
Audience Groups and Page Groups.
Content created with the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You can think of the Content
Calendar as the inbox for all of your published content. You can use the Content Calendar as a starting point to
initiate all of your content-management workflows. For example, you can create new posts, perform actions on
existing content (edit the post, change the schedule or targets, and so forth), and plan your overall content strategy
all from within the Content Calendar.
Display and Filter the Content Calendar
Display posts in the Content Calendar and filter or sort the content by different criteria for easier access.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview and Content Calendar Working with
Posts.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
Note: If the rail is not displayed, click
.
Publish
100
2.
Access the search, filter, and sort options by clicking .
3. To search for content by name, in the Search field, type all or part of the content's name.
4. To filter the list by selected criteria, select one or more of the following options from the Filter options.
By default, no filtering is applied (all options are selected). If you select multiple filtering options, only those posts
that meet all selected criteria display in the list.
Note: The Content Calendar views and filters respect the logged-in user's time zone as specified on the
Preferences page. For example, the date and time for each post listed in the Content Calendar is based
on the logged-in user's time zone (not in UTC).
• Social Platform: Select the desired social platforms: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, and LinkedIn. Only posts
applicable to the selected platforms display.
• Visibility: Select which post types to display: All Posts, Organic Posts Only (non-paid post), or Dark Posts
Only.
• Social Properties: Select one or more social properties. Only posts applicable to the selected properties display.
• Campaigns: Select one or more campaigns. Only posts applicable to the selected campaigns display.
• Post Status: Select the desired statuses: Scheduled, Rejected, Failed, Pending Approval, Posted, and
Suspended. Only posts with the selected statuses display.
• Post Type: Select the desired post types: None (Text Only), Image, Attached Link, Video, Photo Album, SWF
Link, Stream App Link, Cover Photo, and Event. Only posts applicable to the selected types display.
• Tags: Select one or more tags. Only posts applicable to the selected tags display.
• Pending Approvals: Select a user or user group, or you can select Show Posts with My Approval Pending.
Only posts that are awaiting approval from that individual or group display. You can then approve or reject the
applicable posts. Any approval actions are automatically logged in the Notes section.
• Created By: Select one or more Social users. Only content created by the selected users display.
• Suspended Posts: Select an option: Include Suspended Posts, Exclude Suspended Posts, or Show Only
Suspended Posts. Note that this filter is not available if you do not have any currently suspended posts in your
account.
• Sort Order: Sort the content in ascending or descending order by date.
Publish
101
Click Reset Filters to return to no filtering (all options selected).
5. (Conditional) Click a Date box above a group of posts to collapse that date's content.
6. (Conditional) Click
next to a post to display its child posts.
The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social platform that is applicable for that
post: Facebook, Twitter, Google+, or LinkedIn. If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties,
a number displays indicating how many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for
more than one property, a
icon displays that you can click to expand the post to see a representation of that
post for each property (child posts). You can then manage each post individually.
For conceptual information about parent posts and child posts, see Parent and Child Posts.
Content Calendar List View
Access the Content Calendar in List View mode.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Content Calendar Overview.
Publish
102
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar to display the List View.
Content that you create and publish using the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You
might need to refresh the content by clicking
to display recently added posts.
The Content Calendar displays only content for the selected date range.
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the desired date range.
If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see
Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
3. Display and filter the content as desired.
For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
Note: The Content Calendar views and filters respect the logged-in user's time zone as specified on the
Preferences page. For example, the date and time for each post listed in the Content Calendar is based
on the logged-in user's time zone (not in UTC).
4. View the content.
By default, each post displays in a collapsed form.
The page thumbnail and social platform (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, or LinkedIn) displays on the left side of
each post. If a number displays in the page thumbnail, that post targets more than one social platform or property.
Posts that target more than one platform or property can be expanded by clicking
next to the post to display
its child posts. For conceptual information about parent posts and child posts, see Parent and Child Posts.
The post's status displays at the top right of the post. Post statuses include posted, pending approval, scheduled,
failed, or rejected. Some statuses are actionable, such as pending approval.
Text along the bottom of each post displays the date and time when the content is scheduled for posting, its
campaign, target information, and associated tags (if included).
5. Perform the desired actions:
Publish
103
Action
Description
Refresh Content Calendar
Click
Create a new post
Use the Publish Anywhere feature.
Approve a post
Click Approve in the top right corner of the desired post's tile. You can also
perform bulk actions on posts, including approving multiple posts simultaneously.
Perform bulk actions
Click
to refresh the calender's content.
, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After
you click , new icons display to the left of the button that let you perform actions
on multiple posts simultaneously.
You can perform the following bulk actions:
Approve: Click
to approve the selected posts.
Users can turn approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting
or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature
in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure
posts that need approval.
Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to
be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has
user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts
for publishing, creates a post.
For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Property Settings.
Reject: Click
to reject the selected posts.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected posts.
Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected posts.You can then edit the duplicate
to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page
permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property
and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view
content for that property access to the post.
Move to Draft: Click
to save the selected posts in an intermediate state as
drafts.The posts are then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month
View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social
property to a post, all Social users who have access to that property can view
and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it remains
private. Only you can view and edit the draft. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Publish
Action
104
Description
Suspend Posts: Click
, then click Suspend Posts to temporarily suspend
scheduled posts from being published. For more information, see Suspend All
Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties.
Unsuspend Posts: Click
, then click Unsuspend Posts to unsuspend all
posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their
assigned social properties according to schedule. This option displays only if you
have previously suspended posts. For more information, see Unsuspend All
Suspended Posts in Bulk.
Exit Multi-Select Mode: Click
select mode.
to exit multi-select mode and return to regular
Change the report suite
Use the Report Suite drop-down list to change the report suite to display its posts.
For more information, see Change Social Report Suite or Company.
View scheduled posts
Click Post Timeline > Post Timeline to display your posts that have been
scheduled. This is the default view.
View or create post drafts
Click Post Timeline > Drafts to display your posts that are in draft form. You can
also create new drafts from the Drafts page. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
View or create post
templates
Click Post Timeline > Templates to display your posts that are in template form.
For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Edit an individual post
Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode.
In addition to editing a post's text and configuration options, such as social
properties, targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions:
Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example,
you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes
that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting
changes. Click
to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an
audit trail because each note has a timestamp.
Preview: Click
to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more
than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For
tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the
tweet.
View Post on Platform: Click
to view the post on its social property (Facebook,
Twitter, Google+, and so forth).
Depending on the social platform and whether the post is targeted or not, login
might be required.
Publish
Action
105
Description
For Facebook targeted posts, a Facebook log-in page displays. After you log in,
click
again to view the post on Facebook. No log-in is required for non-targeted
posts.
For Google+ targeted posts, a Google+ log-in page displays. After you log in,
click
again to view the post on Google+. No log-in is required for non-targeted
posts.
For Twitter, no log-in is required for targeted or non-targeted tweets.
For LinkedIn targeted and non-targeted posts, a LinkedIn log-in page displays.
After you log in, click
again to view the post on LinkedIn.
For YouTube non-targeted videos, no log-in is required.
For Sina Weibo posts, Sina Weibo redirects to the home page in few seconds if
the user is already logged in.
Duplicate: Click
to duplicate the selected post.You can then edit the duplicate
to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page
permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property
and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view
content for that property access to the post.
Move to Draft: Click
to remove the post from your Content Calendar (List
View, Month View, or Week View) and place it on the Draft View. Moving a post
to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit, share with
other users, or use to create a sticky draft. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected post.
View or edit parent (master) Click
next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable.
and child posts
The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social
platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn.
If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a parent post
and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how
many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for
more than one property, a
icon displays that you can click to expand the post
to see a representation of that post for each property.
Using parent and child posts helps you become more productive.You can perform
bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the parent post. These
changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually,
giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can
change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts
Publish
Action
106
Description
unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving
child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged.
For more information, see Parent and Child Posts.
Content Calendar Month View
Access the Content Calendar in Month View mode.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Content Calendar Overview.
The Month View mode is strategic because it gives you a broad view of your campaigns and posts over a calendar
month.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar to display the List View (the default view).
2. Click Month to display the current month's view.
Content that you create and publish using the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You
might need to refresh the content by clicking
to display recently added posts.
Publish
107
3. (Optional) Click the right and left arrows in the calendar header to display the previous or next month's calendar.
4. Display and filter the content as desired.
For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
Note: The Content Calendar views and filters respect the logged-in user's time zone as specified on the
Preferences page. For example, the date and time for each post listed in the Content Calendar is based
on the logged-in user's time zone (not in UTC).
5. View the content.
The top active campaigns display at the top of the calendar, between the month and day names. This gives you
a quick view of where your social activity is occurring. Icons and numbers below the campaign name indicate
how many posts are scheduled for each social platform. Each campaign is color coded with individual posts in
the calendar. Click a campaign to display only posts that are assigned to that campaign.
Publish
108
By default, campaigns with scheduled posts display in a collapsed form on the appropriate date. Icons and
numbers for each campaign indicate how many posts are scheduled for each social platform. Click a campaign
on the desired date to see expanded details. Click View Posts to display a List View of all posts in the campaign
scheduled for that day.
6. To view a post, click it on the calendar, then click View Post. To edit it, click the post.
7. Perform the desired actions:
Action
Description
Refresh Content Calendar
Click
Create a new post
Use the Publish Anywhere feature.
Approve a post
Click Approve in the top right corner of the desired post's tile. You can also
perform bulk actions on posts, including approving multiple posts simultaneously.
Perform bulk actions
Click
to refresh the calender's content.
, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After
you click , new icons display to the left of the button that let you perform actions
on multiple posts simultaneously.
You can perform the following bulk actions:
Approve: Click
to approve the selected posts.
Users can turn approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting
or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature
in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure
posts that need approval.
Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to
be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has
user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts
for publishing, creates a post.
Publish
Action
109
Description
For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Property Settings.
Reject: Click
to reject the selected posts.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected posts.
Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected posts.You can then edit the duplicate
to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page
permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property
and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view
content for that property access to the post.
Move to Draft: Click
to save the selected posts in an intermediate state as
drafts.The posts are then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month
View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social
property to a post, all Social users who have access to that property can view
and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it remains
private. Only you can view and edit the draft. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Suspend Posts: Click
, then click Suspend Posts to temporarily suspend
scheduled posts from being published. For more information, see Suspend All
Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties.
Unsuspend Posts: Click
, then click Unsuspend Posts to unsuspend all
posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their
assigned social properties according to schedule. This option displays only if you
have previously suspended posts. For more information, see Unsuspend All
Suspended Posts in Bulk.
Exit Multi-Select Mode: Click
select mode.
to exit multi-select mode and return to regular
Change the report suite
Click
to change the report suite to display its posts. For more information, see
Change Social Report Suite or Company.
View scheduled posts
Click Post Timeline > Post Timeline to display your posts that have been
scheduled.
View or create post drafts
Click Post Timeline > Drafts to display your posts that are in draft form. You can
also create new drafts from the Drafts page. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
View or create post
templates
Click Post Timeline > Templates to display your posts that are in template form.
Publish
110
Action
Description
Edit an individual post
Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. For more information.
In addition to editing a post's text and configuration options, such as social
properties, targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions:
Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example,
you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes
that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting
changes. Click
to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an
audit trail because each note has a timestamp.
Preview: Click
to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more
than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For
tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the
tweet.
View Post on Platform: Click
to view the post on its social property (Facebook,
Twitter, Google+, and so forth).
Depending on the social platform and whether the post is targeted or not, login
might be required.
For Facebook targeted posts, a Facebook log-in page displays. After you log in,
click
again to view the post on Facebook. No log-in is required for non-targeted
posts.
For Google+ targeted posts, a Google+ log-in page displays. After you log in,
click
again to view the post on Google+. No log-in is required for non-targeted
posts.
For Twitter, no log-in is required for targeted or non-targeted tweets.
For LinkedIn targeted and non-targeted posts, a LinkedIn log-in page displays.
After you log in, click
again to view the post on LinkedIn.
For YouTube non-targeted videos, no log-in is required.
For Sina Weibo posts, Sina Weibo redirects to the home page in few seconds if
the user is already logged in.
Duplicate: Click
to duplicate the selected post.You can then edit the duplicate
to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page
permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property
and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view
content for that page access to the post.
Move to Draft: Click
to remove the post from your Content Calendar (List
View, Month View, or Week View) and place it on the Draft View. Moving a post
to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit, share with
Publish
Action
111
Description
other users, or use to create a sticky draft. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected post.
View or edit master and child Click
next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable.
posts
The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social
platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn.
If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a master post
and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how
many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for
more than one property, a
icon displays that you can click to expand the post
to see a representation of that post for each property.
Using master and child posts helps you become more productive.You can perform
bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the master post. These
changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually,
giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can
change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts
unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving
child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged.
Content Calendar Week View
Access the Content Calendar in Week View mode.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Content Calendar Overview.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar to display the List View (the default view).
2. Click Week to display the current week's view.
Content that you create and publish using the Publisher is automatically added to the Content Calendar. You
might need to refresh the content by clicking
to display recently added posts.
Publish
112
3. (Optional) Click the right and left arrows in the calendar header to display the previous or next week's calendar.
4. Display and filter the content as desired.
For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
Note: The Content Calendar views and filters respect the logged-in user's time zone as specified on the
Preferences page. For example, the date and time for each post listed in the Content Calendar is based
on the logged-in user's time zone (not in UTC).
5. View the content.
Each campaign is color coded with individual posts in the calendar. Each post has on icon of the right side of its
tile to indicate its status, approved or needing approval, for example. Click a post to display its content along with
its associated campaign, scheduled date and time, and associated tags.
6. (Conditional) Perform the desired actions:
Action
Description
Refresh Content Calendar
Click
Create a new post
Use the Publish Anywhere feature.
Approve a post
Click Approve in the top right corner of the desired post's tile. You can also
perform bulk actions on posts, including approving multiple posts simultaneously.
to refresh the calender's content.
Publish
113
Action
Description
Perform bulk actions
Click
, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After
you click , new icons display to the left of the button that let you perform actions
on multiple posts simultaneously.
You can perform the following bulk actions:
Approve: Click
to approve the selected posts.
Users can turn approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting
or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature
in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure
posts that need approval.
Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to
be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has
user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts
for publishing, creates a post.
For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Property Settings.
Reject: Click
to reject the selected posts.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected posts.
Duplicate: Click to duplicate the selected posts.You can then edit the duplicate
to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page
permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property
and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view
content for that property access to the post.
Move to Draft: Click
to save the selected posts in an intermediate state as
drafts.The posts are then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month
View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social
property to a post, all Social users who have access to that property can view
and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it remains
private. Only you can view and edit the draft. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Suspend Posts: Click
, then click Suspend Posts to temporarily suspend
scheduled posts from being published. For more information, see Suspend All
Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties.
Unsuspend Posts: Click
, then click Unsuspend Posts to unsuspend all
posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their
assigned social properties according to schedule. This option displays only if you
have previously suspended posts. For more information, see Unsuspend All
Suspended Posts in Bulk.
Publish
Action
114
Description
Exit Multi-Select Mode: Click
select mode.
to exit multi-select mode and return to regular
Change the report suite
Click
to change the report suite to display its posts. For more information, see
Change Social Report Suite or Company.
View scheduled posts
Click Post Timeline > Post Timeline to display your posts that have been
scheduled.
View or create post drafts
Click Post Timeline > Drafts to display your posts that are in draft form. You can
also create new drafts from the Drafts page. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
View or create post
templates
Click Post Timeline > Templates to display your posts that are in template form.
Edit an individual post
Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. For more information.
In addition to editing a post's text and configuration options, such as social
properties, targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions:
Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example,
you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes
that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting
changes. Click
to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an
audit trail because each note has a timestamp.
Preview: Click
to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more
than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For
tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the
tweet.
View Post on Platform: Click
to view the post on its social property (Facebook,
Twitter, Google+, and so forth).
Depending on the social platform and whether the post is targeted or not, login
might be required.
For Facebook targeted posts, a Facebook log-in page displays. After you log in,
click
again to view the post on Facebook. No log-in is required for non-targeted
posts.
For Google+ targeted posts, a Google+ log-in page displays. After you log in,
click
again to view the post on Google+. No log-in is required for non-targeted
posts.
For Twitter, no log-in is required for targeted or non-targeted tweets.
Publish
Action
115
Description
For LinkedIn targeted and non-targeted posts, a LinkedIn log-in page displays.
After you log in, click
again to view the post on LinkedIn.
For YouTube non-targeted videos, no log-in is required.
For Sina Weibo posts, Sina Weibo redirects to the home page in few seconds if
the user is already logged in.
Duplicate: Click
to duplicate the selected post.You can then edit the duplicate
to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page
permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property
and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view
content for that page access to the post.
Move to Draft: Click
to remove the post from your Content Calendar (List
View, Month View, or Week View) and place it on the Draft View. Moving a post
to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit, share with
other users, or use to create a sticky draft. For more information, see View or
Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected post.
View or edit master and child Click
next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable.
posts
The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social
platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn.
If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a master post
and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how
many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for
more than one property, a
icon displays that you can click to expand the post
to see a representation of that post for each property.
Using master and child posts helps you become more productive.You can perform
bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the master post. These
changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually,
giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can
change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts
unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving
child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged.
View or Create Post Drafts and Templates
While creating posts from the Publisher or the Content Calendar, you can save the posts in an intermediate state
as drafts. You can also create a template to use as a starting point for future posts.
Publish
116
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts,
and Content Calendar Drafts & Templates.
To create a draft, while creating the post in Publisher or Content Calendar, click Save instead of clicking Publish.
This action saves the post in draft form. The post is then placed in the Draft View rather than the List View, Month
View, or Week View. One useful aspect of draft posts is that if you assign a social property to a post, all Social users
who have access to that property can view and use the draft. If you do not assign a social property to a draft, it
remains private. Only you can view and edit the draft.
You can also save multiple posts in draft form using the bulk actions in Content Calendar. For more information,
see Content Calendar List View, Content Calendar Month View, and Content Calendar Week View.
You can edit drafts at any future time and complete the posts. The Drafts view is similar to the List View of the
Content Calendar and lets you create, edit, and manage draft posts. A post in a draft state is analogous to an email
draft, something that is Work In Progress and will not be published to the social platform unless explicitly published.
Drafts can be used as a great collaboration tool for content creation. Multiple authors can work on the same post
before it is pushed to social properties.
Note: The view and edit permissions of a draft derive from the social properties attached to it. If no social
property is associated to a draft, it is private to the author and is not visible to anyone else. If the author adds
one or more social property to the draft, it is visible to those who have access to those social properties.
To display the Draft View
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
By default, the Content Calendar opens in the List View.
2. (Conditional) Click Week to view the Content Calendar in Week View.
3. From the Post Timeline drop-down list, click Drafts.
4. View the content.
By default, each post displays in a collapsed form.
The page thumbnail and social platform (Facebook, Google+, or Twitter) displays on the left side of each post.
If a number displays in the page thumbnail, that post targets more than one social platform. Posts that target
more than one platform can be expanded by clicking
next to the post to display its child posts.
The post's status displays at the top right of the post: Drafts.
Publish
117
Text along the bottom of each post displays the date and time when the content was created, its campaign, target
information, and associated tags (if included).
5. Perform the desired actions:
Action
Description
Refresh Content Calendar
Click
Create a new post
Click
to create a new draft post from inside the Content Calendar. The process
of creating a new post here is similar to the process of creating a post in the
Publisher. For more information about the various options, see Publisher Page.
Perform bulk actions
Click
to refresh the calenders content.
, then click the desired posts to multi-select more than one post. After
you click , new icons display that let you perform actions on multiple posts
simultaneously.
You can perform the following bulk actions:
Approve: Click
to approve the selected posts.
Users can turn Approval on or off so that all posts must be approved before posting
or allowed to be posted without approval. Posting approval is an optional feature
in Social. If you have the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure
posts that need approval.
Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to
be approved if, during creation, the Approval option was set or if a user who has
user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his or her own posts
for publishing, creates a post.
For more information about Approval settings, see Configure Property Settings.
Reject: Click
to reject the selected posts.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected posts.
Duplicate: Click
to duplicate the selected post.You can then edit the duplicate
to create a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page
permissions, you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property
and then assign it to another property to give users with permissions to view
content for that page access to the post.
Change the report suite
Click
to change the report suite to display its posts. For more information, see
Change Social Report Suite or Company.
Publish
118
Action
Description
Edit an individual draft post
or create a Template draft
Click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode. The process of editing an
existing post is similar to the process of creating a post in the Publisher. For
more information about the various options, see Publisher Page.
In addition to editing a post's configuration options, such as social properties,
targets, schedule, and so forth, you can perform the following actions:
Add Note: Add information that only internal Social users can see. For example,
you can add notes about changes that have been made to the post or changes
that need to be made. Or, you can add information about scheduling or targeting
changes. Click
to add additional notes. You can use the notes feature as an
audit trail because each note has a timestamp.
Preview: Click
to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more
than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For
tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the
tweet.
Duplicate: Click
to duplicate the selected post. You can then edit it to create
a new, similar post. Because content access is controlled by page permissions,
you might want to duplicate a post assigned to one social property and then assign
it to another property to give users with permissions to view content for that page
access to the post.
Delete: Click
to delete the selected posts.
Create Template: Click
to create a Template post.
Templates are posts that can be used as starting points to create other posts in
the future. Templates are re-usable posts as opposed to drafts that are meant for
one-time use. Templates can be shared with multiple users or user groups. Note
that special permissions are needed to create and edit templates. If you have
already associated social properties to the post, they are removed.
Select the groups and users you want to be able to view and edit the template.
The process of editing a template is similar to the process of creating a post in
the Publisher. For more information about the various options, see Publisher
Page.
You display templates by clicking Drafts >Templates.
One useful aspect of Templates is that you assign users to a template rather than
social properties. In fact, when you create a template from a post, all social
properties that were previously assigned are removed. After you assign users to
the template, they can then view and use the template draft. If you do not assign
users to a template, it remains private. Only you can view and use the template.
While viewing or editing a template, the following options are available:
• Preview: Click
to preview the selected post. If the post is applicable to more
than one social property, a preview of the post on each property displays. For
Publish
Action
119
Description
tweets, you can click links to view the photo and reply to, retweet, or favorite the
tweet.
• Ignore: Click
to remove the template from your view. This option is helpful
to remove draft posts that do not interest you.
• Delete: Click
to delete the selected posts.
• Update Share Settings: Click
to update the groups and users who are able
to view and edit the template.
• Create Post: Click Create Post to publish the template as a regular post to the
selected social properties.
View or edit child posts
Click
next to a post to display its child posts, if applicable.
The image on the left side of each post displays an icon indicating the social
platform that is applicable for that post: Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn.
If, during the post's creation, it was assigned multiple properties, a master post
and child posts are automatically created. A number displays to indicate how
many different properties are applicable for that post. If the post is targeted for
more than one property, a
icon displays that you can click to expand the post
to see a representation of that post for each property.
Using master and child posts helps you become more productive.You can perform
bulk editing operations by editing the text or settings on the master post. These
changes flow down to the child posts. You can also edit each post individually,
giving you the flexibility to tailor each post for its audience. For example, you can
change the text or the image for one child post while leaving the other child posts
unchanged. Or, for a tweet, you can add a hashtag to one child post while leaving
child posts for Facebook or Google+ unchanged.
Publish the draft
Click Publish to move the post to the Content Calendar and post the edited draft
post on the selected social properties. If the post needs approval before posting,
the post is moved to the Content Calendar. Someone in your organization with
approval permissions can then approve or reject the post, if applicable.
Suspend and Unsuspend Posts
Suspend all posts that are scheduled to be posted to one or more social properties for a specified time range. You
can then unsuspend individual posts or unsuspend all posts using bulk actions.
You might want to suspend posts in the event of a public-relations crisis, natural disaster, or similar business impact.
For example, an airline company might want to temporarily suspend all posts to one or more social properties
immediately following a well-publicized airplane crash.The Suspend Posts option is applicable to currently scheduled
posts only. You can continue to create and publish new posts to those social properties while other posts are in a
suspended state.
To understand what happens to posts that are scheduled for posting to a specific social property during the suspended
time period, suppose a social property has 15 posts scheduled to be posted between October 1 at 10 a.m. and
Publish
120
October 15 at 10 a.m. If you suspend posts for that property for that same time period, all 15 posts will fail, unless
you unsuspend individual posts or unsuspend all posts using bulk actions at some point during that time period.
However, suppose that you unsuspend all posts on October 5 at 2 p.m. Those posts that were scheduled to be
posted between October 1 at 10 a.m. and October 5 at 2 p.m. will fail. All posts that were originally scheduled to be
posted between October 5 at 2 p.m. and October 15 will post according to schedule.
Note: Only Administrative users (those who can manage users and groups within Social) can suspend
individual posts or unsuspend multiple posts using bulk actions. Only users of groups that have the Suspend
Posts permission can suspend or unsuspend posts for one or more properties. Any user who has permission
to publish content to the social property can unsuspend individual posts.
Suspend All Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties
Suspend all posts that are scheduled to be posted to one or more social properties for a specified time range.
Only users belonging to a user group that has been given the Suspend Posts permission can suspend posts for
one or more properties. You cannot suspend individual posts. For more information, see Granting Suspend Posts
Permission.
The Suspend Posts option is applicable to currently scheduled posts only. You can create and publish new content
while other posts are in a suspended state.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
2. Click
, then click Suspend Posts to display the Suspend Posts page.
Publish
121
3. Select the start date and time when you want to start suspending posts, then select the end date and time when
you want to resume publishing.
You can also select a specific time zone from the drop-down list.
4. Select the audience groups, page groups, and social properties for which you want to suspend posts.
5. Click Suspend.
Suspended posts display in the Content Calendar with a Suspended Post icon in its title bar.
To quickly filter suspended posts in the Content Calendar, access the search, filter, and sort options by clicking
above the left navigation rail, then click Suspended Posts and choose an option. For more information, see Display
and Filter the Content Calendar.
Granting Suspend Posts Permission
Grant the user group permission to suspend posts to one or more properties.
Publish
122
1. Click Settings > Users & Groups.
2. Click the Groups tab, then click Edit for the desired user group.
3. Under Group Permissions, click Publisher, then select the Suspend Posts option.
4. Click Save.
Unsuspend an Individual Post
Unsuspend a single post that is currently in a suspended state so that it is posted to its assigned social properties
according to schedule.
Any user who has permission to publish content to the social property can unsuspend an individual post. You can
also unsuspend multiple posts in bulk. Only Administrative users (those who can manage users and groups within
Social) can unsuspend multiple posts using bulk actions. For more information, see Unsuspend All Suspended Posts
in Bulk.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
Suspended posts display in the Content Calendar with a Suspended Post icon in its title bar.
Publish
123
2. Locate and click or tap the desired post to open it in editing mode.
To quickly filter suspended posts in the Content Calendar, access the search, filter, and sort options by clicking
above the left navigation rail, then click Suspended Posts and choose an option. For more information, see
Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
3. Click Unsuspend Post.
Unsuspend All Suspended Posts in Bulk
Unsuspend all posts that are currently in a suspended state so that they are posted to their assigned social properties
according to schedule.
Any user who has permission to publish content to the social property can unsuspend an individual post. However,
only Administrative users (those who can manage users and groups within Social) can unsuspend multiple posts
using bulk actions.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
2. Click
, then click Unsuspend Posts.
Publish
124
3. Click Unsuspend to confirm the action.
Export Content to Excel
Export content from the Content Calendar to an Excel file.
The Export to Excel option let you share content with people in your organization that might not have access to
Social. This option lets you export all content for the currently selected date range and filters.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
2. (Optional) Click the Calendar icon (
) to specify the desired date range.
If you select Custom Range, a calendar displays. For more information about working with the calendar, see
Adjust the Reporting Date Range.
Note that you can upload tweets for only six months at a time.
3. Display and filter the content as desired.
For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
4. Click
, then click Export to Excel.
Social runs a task in the background to create the Excel file. When the file is ready, you will receive an email
message that contains a link to the Excel file.
Parent and Child Posts
Social lets you create and publish content to multiple social platforms and properties simultaneously. Social uses
the concept of parent (master) and child posts in the Content Calendar to accomplish this.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts,
and Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts.
Parent and child posts are automatically created whenever you create a post that is assigned to multiple social
platforms or properties. For example, if you created a post in the Publisher that includes one Facebook page, one
Twitter account, and one Google+ page, this post displays in Content Calendar as a parent post with three child
posts. That is, each social platform has a child post associated with it. As another example, if you create a post in
Content Calendar and assign it to three different Facebook pages, one parent post is created with three child posts.
Each social property has a child post associated with it.
Publish
You can identify parent-child posts by the arrow icon (
125
) in the timeline in the List View.
The image on the left side of each post displays a number indicating how many different platforms or properties are
applicable for that post.
You can click the
icon to expand the post to see a representation of that post for each platform or property (child
posts). You can then manage each post individually.
The concept of parent-child posts lets you focus on the content first and then distribute that content to multiple
platforms. This functionality also provides flexibility for editing multi-platform posts.
Publish
126
Note that although all child posts inherit content and settings from the parent post, the parent post itself does not
correspond to any social property. The parent post is never published to any social platform. The child posts will be
posted on their respective social platforms and properties.
Before child posts are published, each post needs to follow an approval process. Each child post follows its own
approval process. Each posts needs to be reviewed and approved by an approving manager who owns the
corresponding social property or audience before it is published on the social network. If a child post is not approved,
it will not publish even if other child posts of the same parent post have been approved and have been published.
Edit Parent or Child Posts in Content Calendar
While editing a post in Content Calendar that is assigned to multiple social properties, you can edit the parent (master)
post, edit the post at the platform level for Twitter, or edit individual child posts.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Content Calendar Overview, Content Calendar Working with Posts,
and Content Calendar Multi-Platform Posts.
This functionality provides flexibility for editing multi-platform posts.You can edit and customize posts in the following
ways:
• You can edit the parent post and apply changes to all child posts irrespective of the social platform.
• You can edit posts at the Twitter platform level and apply changes to all child posts for all assigned Twitter accounts.
• You can edit each child post individually to customize the content for each social property.
To edit parent or child posts in Content Calendar
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
Note: If the rail is not displayed, click
2. Click
.
next to a parent post to display its child posts.
Publish
127
3. (Conditional) To edit the parent post, click or tap the parent post to open it in editing mode.
Editing the parent post helps you quickly make sweeping changes to content and post parameters whenever
you have major changes and don't want to edit each post in separately.
A parent post can be edited only by users who have permissions for all social properties assigned to the parent
post. That is, you need editing permissions for all social properties assigned to the parent post in order to make
changes to it.
Edit the parent post as desired.
To edit post text that applies to all child posts irrespective of the social platform, ensure that the Parent button
is selected (
), then edit the text as desired.
Publish
128
When you click Save, you are prompted to confirm the action because your changes will override settings in all
child posts.
4. (Conditional) To edit post text at the Twitter platform level, click the post text box, then click the Twitter button (
).
This option lets you edit the post text for all assigned Twitter accounts, while not editing the text for other platforms
(Facebook, Google+, and so forth). For example, you can add a hashtag to the tweets.
5. (Conditional) To edit a child post, click or tap the child post to open it in editing mode.
When editing child posts, note that you are limited to three editable settings: content, targets, and schedule
(including time zone). These settings let you to manage posts being published across time zones to different
social properties. Or, you can change the text or the image to reflect local audiences or regional sensitivities
without affecting the overall content in the parent post.
Publisher
The Publish features let you simultaneously post content to Facebook, Google+, and LinkedIn pages that you
manage; your Twitter and Sina Weibo accounts; and your YouTube channels. You can also publish to Audience
Groups and Page Groups.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Post Publishing and Multi-Platform Publishing.
Although you can create content and simultaneously publish that content to multiple providers, you can edit the
content for Twitter accounts independently to meet specific requirements for that provider. For example, if you create
content to publish on Facebook and Twitter, the Facebook post has a limit of 5,000 characters. The tweet has a limit
of 140 characters. You can type a long status update for Facebook and then edit the tweet content independently
so that it complies with Twitter length regulations or add a hashtag.
The Social user interface has been designed to work on desktops, tablets, and mobile devices. Depending on the
device you are currently using, the user interface automatically adjusts to provide the optimal user experience.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Publish > Publisher.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
Publish
129
2. Fill in the fields.
For more information, see Publisher Page.
3. Click Save to save the post without publishing it. This option creates a sticky draft that you can use as a template
for future posts. For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Or
Click Schedule to specify a schedule for posting.
Publisher Page
Configure posts using the options on the Publisher page.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Post Publishing, Multi-Platform Publishing, Publisher Settings,
Audience Publishing, and Predictive Publishing.
This section contains the following information:
• Assign Social Properties
• Assign a Campaign
• Specify the Post Text
• Insert an Image
Publish
130
• Create and Share a Photo Album (Facebook Only)
• Upload a Video
• Attach a Custom Link
• Attach a Facebook App Link (Facebook Only)
• Upload a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only)
• Share an Event (Facebook Only)
• Use Post Predictions (Facebook Only)
• Attach Tags
• Specify Targets
• Proof and Edit Post
• Schedule Post
Assign Social Properties
Steps
Details
1. Start typing the desired
property, group, or
audience in the Search
Properties & Audiences
box, then select one or
more items.
Select the desired targets to which you want to publish content.
Or
Click
to display the
Social Properties
selector.
You can quickly select one or more social properties from the small property tiles
that display below the Social Properties option. Tiles display for the properties that
you have most frequently used in the last 30 days. This feature lets you quickly find
and publish content to those properties that are most important to you.
You can also select one or more targets from the following lists:
Audience Groups: Lets you post content to a specific audience. An audience is a
collection of people or fans. For more information, see Facebook Audiences.
Page Groups: Lets you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages
or to a collection of Like nodes on the Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you
2. Click one or more social post to every page or node in that group or collection. A Like node is a virtual
property tiles to select
collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside of Facebook
recently used properties.
(for example, on a web page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can
Or
further communicate with every Facebook user who has clicked one of your Like
Select one or more social buttons. For more information, see Page Groups.
properties from the
Facebook Pages: Lets you post content to the Wall of one or more Facebook pages
drop-down list:
that you manage.
• Audience Groups
• Page Groups
• Facebook Pages
• Twitter Accounts
• Google+ Pages
• LinkedIn Companies
• YouTube
• Sina Weibo
Twitter Accounts: Lets you post content to one or more Twitter accounts that you
manage.
Google+ Pages: Lets you post content to one or more Google+ pages that you
manage.
LinkedIn Companies: Lets you post content to one or more LinkedIn company
pages that you manage. For more information, see Publishing Posts to LinkedIn
Company Pages.
You can also use the Search YouTube: Lets you post video assets to YouTube channels that you manage and
box to locate and select the add videos to playlists. Unlike posts for other social properties (Facebook status
desired social properties.
updates, and Twitter tweets, for example) YouTube videos exist longer and are
relevant for a longer period of time.
Publish
131
Steps
Note: If
displays in
the upper, right corner
of the post, a social
property needs to be
re-authorized or the
post will fail. Hover over
the icon to display a
message and a link to
re-authorize the
property.
Details
Sina Weibo: Lets you post content (text and image posts) to one or more Sina
Weibo accounts that you manage. Sina Weibo, used primarily in China, is similar to
Twitter. Note that at this time, no analytics APIs are available from Sina Weibo. As
a result, Social does not offer analytic capabilities for Sina Weibo.
As you add social properties, they are listed at the top of the list (below the search
filter). To remove a property, click the x on the property's tile.
If you create content and assign it to multiple social platforms and properties
simultaneously, Social automatically displays a parent (master) post and child posts
in the Content Calendar. For conceptual information about parent posts and child
posts, see Parent and Child Posts.
Note: Depending on the social properties you select, some of the other options
might not be available. For example, if you select a Twitter account, the Post
Predictions and Target option are not available. Other times, you will receive
a notice if an element is not available for a certain property type.
Assign a Campaign
Steps
Details
1. Click Campaigns.
2. Select the desired
campaign from the
drop-down list.
A campaign is a marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. For
example, if a campaign advertises a specific credit card, the campaign could be a
series of creative elements (links, Flash Multimedia posts, tweets, and so forth)
advertising the card's interest rate and benefits. The campaign's tracking code on
You can also use the Search each creative element lets you track the effectiveness of the campaign by letting
box to locate and select the you know which link a user clicked to come to your website.
desired campaign.
You can specify a default campaign to streamline publishing and governance.
For more information, see Campaigns.
In addition to the campaign tracking code (adbsc) that is automatically appended to
the post's URL, Social also appends three additional parameters:
• adbid: The post's native post ID (for example, its native ID assigned by Twitter).
• adbpr: The post's property ID (for example the Twitter account's ID).
• adbpl: An abbreviation for the post's platform identifier (for example, tw).
The following example shows the parameters added by Social:
http://twitter.com/?adbid=12345&adbpl=tw&adbpr=6789&adbsc=social_20141006
These URL parameters tie your campaign to your social engagement data visible
in Adobe Analytics.
Note: The addition of these new parameters will not change any parameters
you have defined. If you have set up custom parameters in Adobe Analytics,
Publish
Steps
132
Details
they will not be affected. Note that the Adobe parameters appear first, followed
by your custom parameters. There will only be a conflict if you use the exact
same parameters. If you think there might be a conflict, please contact your
Social Account Manager.
Customers who are manually linking post engagement data to post-level campaign
data will see significant reduction in time spent on reporting.
In Adobe Analytics, the Platform, Property, and Post reports under the Social tab
can now pull in campaign conversion data in addition to the existing listening and
engagement data.
For example, you can run a Platforms report that shows Social Mentions and
Average Sentiment, next to Likes and Followers next to Visits to your website
from that platform. In the Post report you can see Post Impressions alongside
revenue driven by this post.
This release of Social adds many new metrics for owned social properties, in addition
to those previously accessible from the Metric Selector in Analytics. More metrics
will be supported in the future. For a list of new metrics, see New Engagement
Metrics for Owned Social Properties.
For more information about the integration between Adobe Social and Analytics,
see Owned Social Properties Reports.
Specify the Post Text
Steps
Details
1. Type the text in the text
box, including URLs (if
desired).
The Social Publisher lets you simultaneously specify text for multiple social properties
(Facebook pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, LinkedIn company pages,
YouTube channels, and Sina Weibo accounts).
As you type text for your post, you can see how the Social UI accommodates posting
from different device types. If you are working on a desktop device, notice that the
preview panes in the third column update to show you what the published post will
look like on each property. If you are working on a tablet or other mobile device,
notice that a Preview button displays that lets you view the preview panes.
For Facebook, Google+, LinkedIn company pages, and YouTube videos, you can
type as many as 5,000 characters. For Twitter, you can type as many as 140
characters. For Sina Weibo, you can type as many as 140 double-byte characters
or 280 single-byte characters.
As you type text, the number of available characters remaining displays below the
text box. Note that this number reflects the most restrictive character limit, depending
on which social properties you selected. For example, if you selected only Facebook
and Google+ properties, the character limit displays 5,000. If you selected one or
more Twitter accounts, the character limit displays 140. If your text exceeds the
Publish
Steps
133
Details
character limit for Twitter, you can edit the text in the Twitter preview panel while
allowing more text in the Facebook and Google+ preview panels. This functionality
lets you create and publish content appropriate to each property.
Note that for Twitter posts, there is an auto-complete functionality that automatically
fills in users' Twitter handles and hashtags as you begin typing the @ sign and a
Twitter handle or the # sign. You can continue typing the handle or hashtag or you
can select it from the list that displays. Social uses all of the Twitter handles that you
have mentioned or followed during the last 60 days and the hashtags you have
mentioned in the last 60 days as a basis for the auto-complete functionality.
Social supports Twitter Cards. For more information, see Use Twitter Cards.
You can click the Text Direction icon
to change the text direction. Clicking this
icon toggles between left-to-right text and right-to-left text.
If you include one or more inline links in a post, you can shorten them using your
configured link shorteners. You must shorten all links if you want to track the post
by campaigns. For detailed information about shortening links, see Generate Short
URLs in Posts.
The default link shortener is ctx.ly. If you add additional link shorteners, they displays
as well.
Insert an Image
Steps
Details
1.
Photos and images get a much higher click-through rate than regular status updates.
The SocialPublisher makes it easy to publish images. For Facebook, these posts
will appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+,
2. Specify the URL to upload these posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams.
the image from the web. For Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn, these
posts will appear on your LinkedIn company page.
Or
Image formats should be .jpg, .gif, or .png. The image size should be no larger
Click Import from Assets than 2 MB. Animated .gif images can be published to Twitter.
to open the Marketing
About the Marketing Cloud Assets core service: The Assets core service is a
Cloud Asset Selector,
select the desired image, centralized repository to store, share, and sync digital assets across Creative Cloud
and Marketing Cloud solutions. Social customers can upload images, documents,
then click .
and files to the Marketing Cloud that are then accessible to publish in Adobe Social
via the Asset Selector. Note that your company must be provisioned for the Adobe
Or
Marketing Cloud and you must log in to Social using your Adobe ID.
Click Browse, then
browse to and select the
Note: Contact your Social Account Manager if you would like to upload assets
image from your
from the Marketing Cloud Assets Selector.
computer.
Click
to display the
Attach Media controls.
For more information, see Adobe Marketing Cloud help.
Publish
134
Create and Share a Photo Album (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1.
Photo Albums apply to Facebook only.
Click
, click
Create/Share Photo
Album, then specify the
album's name.
2. Click Add Photos, then
browse to and select
multiple images.
3. Specify the caption for
each image.
4. To specify the album's
cover image, click the
image, then select Set as
Album Cover.
To remove an image from the album, click the desired image, then select Remove
Image.
Note: There are important differences with photo album posts whether or not
you use the Post Audience feature (described below) to target your audience.
Non-Targeted Album Posts: If you do not target your albums using the Target
feature, post analytics are not available. Non-targeted photo album posts do not
display in the Post Analytics report.
Non-targeted photo album posts display with images in users' Newsfeeds, with the
image you specified as its cover at the top, as shown below:
Targeted Album Posts: If you target your albums using the Target feature, post
analytics are available. Photo album posts display in the Post Analytics report.
Because of Facebook limitations, targeted photo album posts do not display with
the images in users' Newsfeed as with non-targeted posts. After you select targeting
options, a message displays informing you that the appearance of the post on users'
Newsfeeds changes when shared with a targeted audience.The photo album displays
as a Small Image post on users' Newsfeeds, as shown below. Users can click the
image to display all photos in the album.
Publish
135
Upload a Video
Steps
Details
1.
The Social Publisher makes it easy to publish videos. You can select a still frame
from anywhere in the video to use as the video's thumbnail image in the post.
Click
to display the
Attach Media controls.
For Facebook, these posts appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News
2. Click Add Video.
Feeds. For YouTube, these videos appear in your YouTube channels.
3. Specify the URL to upload
the image from the web.
Note: You cannot use audience groups and targeting with videos.
Or
Click Browse, then
browse to and select the
image from your
computer.
Or
About the Marketing Cloud Assets core service: The Assets core service is a
centralized repository to store, share, and sync digital assets across Creative Cloud
and Marketing Cloud solutions. Social customers can upload images, documents,
and files to the Marketing Cloud that are then accessible to publish in Adobe Social
via the Asset Selector. Note that your company must be provisioned for the Adobe
Marketing Cloud and you must log in to Social using your Adobe ID.
Click Import from Assets
Note: Contact your Social Account Manager if you would like to upload assets
to open the Marketing
from the Marketing Cloud Assets Selector.
Cloud Asset Selector,
select the desired image, For more information, see Adobe Marketing Cloud help.
then click
.
Note that only accounts
that are set up with Adobe
Experience Manager
Assets (on demand) can
browse to and select
videos from the Marketing
Cloud Asset Selector.
4. Select a still frame to be
used as the video's
thumbnail image, then
click Finish.
5. (Conditional) For
Facebook videos, add a
title, then under Video
Thumbnail, select From
Video or Upload.
YouTube Notes: For more information, see Publish a YouTube Video.
Facebook Notes: The SocialPublisher posts videos with native Facebook playback.
Users' must enable Video in order for the video story to display. To do this, users
must add video permission inside Facebook (Account Settings > Apps > Video >
Edit Settings > Publish Content to My Wall).
Facebook limits the functionality available with video posts:
• You cannot geo-target a post with a video attachment.
• You cannot customize an action link name for the video.
• Because of a Facebook limitation, Facebook video titles with non-ASCII characters
are truncated and garbled after being published.
Social supports a few methods of video publishing. You can choose to use the
Publisher and upload a video as described here or you can publish videos as stream
apps: embedded or just add a YouTube URL.
Attach a Custom Link
Steps
Details
1. Click .
2. From the Select Link
Type drop-down list,
select Custom Link.
Post a link on Facebook and Google+ pages that you manage and to Twitter accounts
to direct fans to a specific URL or web page. For Facebook, these posts will appear
on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will
Publish
Steps
136
Details
3. Specify the link's URL
appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter,
(ensure that your include these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds..
http://), then click .
A link is the best way to share content. Social makes link tracking and analytics easy
Notice that Social
by automatically shortening URLs using our custom cxt.ly short URL service and by
automatically pulls
tracking the Click-Throughs.
thumbnail images from the
Twitter does not support actionable links. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts
link.
for the post, select Attach as an Inline Link for Twitter, if desired.
4. Use the left and right
arrows to change the
image.
Or
Select Upload, then
specify an image's URL or
click Browse to locate and
select an image from your
computer.
Attach a Facebook App Link (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1. Click .
2. From the Select Link
Type drop-down list,
select Facebook App
Links.
3. From the Select
Application drop-down
list, select the desired
application.
4. From the Select
Facebook Page for App
drop-down list, the location
where the application
currently resides.
Post a link on Facebook and Google+ pages, LinkedIn, and to Twitter accounts to
direct fans to a specific application created in Social. For Facebook, these posts will
appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these
posts will appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For
Twitter, these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds.
This could be another
Facebook page or a
website where you
previously published the
application.
5. Under Link Thumbnail,
select From URL or
Upload.
A link is the best way to share content. Social makes link tracking and analytics easy
by automatically shortening URLs using our custom cxt.ly short URL service and by
tracking the Click-Throughs.
Twitter does not support actionable links. If you selected one or more Twitter accounts
for the post, select Attach as an Inline Link for Twitter, if desired.
Publish
Steps
137
Details
If you select From URL,
the image you chose when
publishing the application
is used. Or, you can select
Upload, then specify an
image's URL or click
Browse to locate and
select an image from your
computer.
6. In the Link Title box,
specify the action link
name that appears to the
right of the image on the
post.
7. In the Link Description
box, specify the
description that appears
to the right of the image
on the post.
To see where the Link Title
and Link Description display
in posts, see the post preview
panel for each property.
Upload a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1. Click
, then click
Upload Facebook Cover
Photo.
2. Specify the image's URL
to upload the image from
the web.
Post or update a cover photo on Facebook pages that you manage. You can post
the cover photo immediately or according to schedule.
Or
Click Browse, then
browse to and select the
image from your
computer.
Image formats should be .jpg, .gif, or .png. For best results, the image should
be 851 x 315 pixels.
Facebook cover photos cannot be posted to audiences using pre-defined targeting.
No analytic information is available for Facebook cover photos.
Publish
138
Share an Event (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1. Click
, then click
Share an Event.
2. Select the desired page
from which to share the
event.
3. Select to not display an
event image by clicking
None.
Post an event on Facebook pages that you manage. These posts appear on your
Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds to inform fans about upcoming events
or to organize social gatherings.
Or
Click Upload to browse to
and select the image file.
Or
Specify the image's URL
to upload it from the web.
Use Post Predictions (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
No user interaction required. The Post Predictions feature dynamically predicts the performance of your Facebook
posts before they are posted. This feature does not apply to Google+, Twitter, or
Click the header in the Post
LinkedIn posts.
Predictions panel to display
bar charts that contain more As you adjust Facebook post text, content, or the schedule, the Post Predictions
detailed information about the section updates automatically to display predictions of the number of Likes,
estimated number of Likes, Comments, and Shares the post will likely obtain after posting. This information
Comments, and Shares.
helps you improve the post's content and to schedule the post at the optimal time
to get maximum engagement.
Adobe Social builds a predictive model based on past posts for each Facebook
page. The predictive model uses advanced Natural Language Processing and
Machine Learning algorithms to study the historical data on your Facebook pages
(even if the content was not published using Social).
Your Facebook page must have a sufficient number of posts in order for Social to
build the model. If the page does not have enough posts, Social builds the model
at the account level and includes posts in all pages in the account. Social uses a
proprietary method to examine historical posts that are similar, both in terms of
content and engagement.
The accuracy of the predictive model improves as more content is posted to the
page. If your page (or pages in your account) do not have enough posts for Social
to create the model, the predictions do not display.
Publish
Steps
139
Details
Note: You can enable or disable post predictions at the user level for all
available Facebook pages in the current report suite. You can also enable or
disable this feature on the Facebook-page level for all users in your Social
implementation. For more information, see Enable or Disable Post Predictions.
Post Predictions is available initially for Facebook posts in English only.
Attach Tags
Steps
Details
1. Click Tags.
2. Type the text for the tag.
Information you type in the Tags box is not viewable outside of the Social product.
Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information. Other
Social users in your organization can see this information when they view pending
posts. You can use tags to categorize this post. Tags are not sent to SAINT or to
Adobe Analytics.
Or
Select the desired tag
from the drop-down list.
Specify Targets
Steps
Details
1. Click Targets.
Facebook
2. Click the desired social
The following options are available for Facebook:
property, then specify the
desired targeting options. Estimated Reach: (Facebook Only. No user interaction required.) Social estimates
the number of Facebook users who will be reached by this post's targeting settings.
As you configure the various targeting settings, such as geo, gender, or age, the
reach estimate automatically updates.
Geo: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. You can then
choose to post the content to everywhere in that country or to a specific state or city.
Note that geo-targeted posts are determined by the location listed in the Facebook
user's profile. Geo-targeted posts are not determined by IP address.
Languages: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target languages. The
content is posted only to fans in the selected geographic location who speak the
specified language. Language is based on what fans specify as their language on
their Facebook profiles.You can target by language without using location targeting.
The post displays in users' News Feeds based on Facebook's location algorithm,
which takes into account their IP address, network, and current city. Languages
spoken are also taken into account.
If a location is not listed in Adobe Social, but it exists in Facebook, contact your
Account Manager and we can add it to the list.
Publish
Steps
140
Details
Age: Use the age pointers to specify the target age range. Be aware that Facebook
does not permit certain types of advertising to minors. For example, you cannot
advertise alcoholic beverages to people in the 13-18 year-old range.
Gender: Select All, Male, or Female.
Education Level: Select All, In High School, In College, or College Alumni. If
you choose In College, or College Alumni, the following options are available:
• College: Specify one or more target colleges.
• College Major: Specify one or more college majors.
Relationship Status: Select one or more relationship statuses: Single, In
Relationship, Married, Engaged, or Not Specified.
Interested In: Select All, Male, or Female.
Workplace: Select one or more target workplaces.
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
Note: If you apply demographic targeting to a Facebook post, that post
displays in the Newsfeeds only of users meeting the selected demographic
criteria. However, it is normal Facebook behavior for that same posts to appear
on your brand's Facebook page. This behavior is true for demographic-targets
posts, but not for geo-targeted posts. If you do not want demographic-targeted
posts to appear on your brand's Facebook page, you can hide them. For more
information, see How Do I Control Who See's my Page's Posts in the Facebook
Help Center.
Twitter
The following options are available for Twitter:
Country: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. The content
is posted only to users in the selected countries.
Region: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target regions. The content
is posted only to users in the selected regions.
City: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target cities. The content is
posted only to users in the selected cities.
The Twitter API provides the list of countries, regions, and cities that are available
in Social.
The Country, Region, and City options are not related to each other. For example,
after you select a country, you can also select regions and cities that are not in that
country. However, if you select a country, a region in that country, and a city within
that country, the widest audience is targeted. For example, if you select United
States, California, and San Francisco, you might expect the tweet to target San
Francisco only. In this scenario, the widest audience is targeted: United States.
Publish
Steps
141
Details
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
Note: For location-based targeting, a user's location is generated from a
variety of signals, including mobile location. If a user moves from one geo
location to another, it might take several days and several actions for that
user's location to change. For example, suppose a user travels from the United
States to Germany. Based solely on IP-location information, it might take
several days for the location to change. However, if that user performs several
actions, such as tweeting with his or her current location (Germany) from a
mobile device, the location changes quicker.
Google+
The following options are available for Google+: Following, Customers, VIPs, Team
Members, Your Circles, Extended Circles, and Public.
Select the desired circle.
Circles let you share posts with different groups of people. For example, you can
create a group for family members, a group for co-workers, a group for college
friends, and so forth. When you post in a specific circle, the post shows in the stream
only for those people in that circle.
Google includes four default circles for each page:
• Following
• Customers
• VIPs
• Team Members
These default circles can be edited or removed by the page administrator.
Social includes three default circles for each page:
• Your Circles (followers you have added to your circles)
• Extended Circles (followers or followers in your circles)
• Public (anyone can see the post)
You can target multiple circles in one post. Each circle has a maximum number or
5,000 followers at this time due to Google limitations.
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
LinkedIn
Include: From the drop-down list, select Employees and Non-Employees or
Non-Employees Only.
Company Size: From the drop-down list, choose Self Employed or the desired
company size number ranges. You must target at least 100 employees and you can
select a maximum of ten size ranges.
Publish
Steps
142
Details
Industry: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target industries. The content
is posted only to users in the selected industries.You can select up to ten industries.
Job Function: From the drop-down list, choose one or more job functions. The
content is posted only to users in the selected functions. You can select up to ten
functions.
Seniority: From the drop-down list, choose one or more seniority levels.The content
is posted only to users with the selected level. You can select up to ten levels.
Geography: From the drop-down list, choose one or more geographic locations.
The content is posted only to users in the selected locations. You can select up to
ten locations.
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
Proof and Edit Post
Steps
Details
1. View and proof the post
using the Preview panel
on the right side.
2. (Conditional) Click a post's
text in the Preview panel
to enable editing mode.
3. Edit the post, if necessary.
As best practice, before posting or scheduling posts, you should use the Preview
panels to ensure that the text and formatting is correct for each platform.
The preview editing functionality lets you create a post with common text for various
platforms and then customize the text for each platform separately, as needed.
Schedule Post
Steps
Details
1. Specify the desired date,
time, and time zone when
you want to post the
content, then click
Schedule.
The default behavior of the scheduler is to post the content later according to
schedule rather than immediately.
Or
Click > Set
Recommended Time to
use the recommended
date and time for optimal
performance.
Or
Select Post Immediately
to post the content now.
Posts can be scheduled at one-minute intervals. The date and time cannot be in the
past. You can schedule a post up to one year in advance. You can schedule an
unlimited number of posts. You can edit or cancel scheduled posts, as desired.
For more information about the predictive capabilities of Social, see the Post
Predictions row above.
Publish
143
Publish a YouTube Video
Publish a YouTube video using the Content Calendar or Publisher. You can configure its settings and then post
the video immediately or according to schedule.
1. To post the video using the Publisher, click Publish > Publisher.
Or
To post the video using the Content Calendar, click Publish > Content Calendar >
.
The screens in this topic were captured from the Publisher, but the steps for publishing a video on YouTube
using the Content Calendar are the same.
2. From the Social Properties drop-down list, select one or more YouTube channels.
3. From the Campaigns drop-down list, select the desired campaigns for the video.
For more information, see Campaigns.
4. Specify the description that displays with the video on YouTube after publishing.
5.
Click
, then click Upload Video.
6. Specify the video file's URL, then press Enter.
Or
Click Browse to browse to and select the video file.
7. On the Basic Info tab, fill in the fields:
Title: Specify the title that displays with the video on YouTube after publishing.
Description: The text you specified in Step 4 is the description that displays with the video on YouTube after
publishing. Edit the text if necessary.
Publish
144
Tags: Specify the desired YouTube search tags. Note that there are two different Tags fields. One field is for
tags internal to Social. The second field is for tags internal to YouTube and used when users search for your
video.
Privacy Settings: Select the desired level of privacy:
• Public: Any YouTube user can search for and view the video on YouTube.
• Unlisted: Any YouTube user who has the video's URL can view the video on YouTube.
• Private: Only you can view the video on YouTube.
Video Thumbnail: Select From Video to use a thumbnail using the video or select Upload to browse to and
select another thumbnail.
Category: Select the YouTube category for the video. Categories include, People & Blogs, Comedy, Music,
Sports, Travel, and more.
8. On the Advanced Settings tab, fill in the fields:
Allow Comments: Select the check box if you want to allow YouTube users to comment on your video. You can
allow all comments (without your approval) or you can allow only comments that you have approved.
User Can Vote on Comments: Select the check box if you want to allow users to vote on comments.
Allow Embedding: Select this option if you want users to be able to embed your video on other websites. If this
option is enabled, users can copy and paste a provided URL into the other website to embed the video. If you
do not select this option, users must watch the video on YouTube.
Licence and Ownership: Select the desired option:
• Standard: The YouTube Terms of Service specify your legal rights and ownership of the video. For more
information, see Terms of Service on the YouTube website.
• Creative Commons: Creative Commons licenses provide a standard way for content creators to grant someone
else permission to use their work. If you select this option, this video is accessible to YouTube users for use,
even commercially, in their own videos via the YouTube video editor.
9. Specify tags internal to social, if desired.
Information you type in the Tags box is not viewable outside of the Social product. YouTube visitors cannot see
this information. Other Social users in your organization can see this information when they view pending posts.
You can use tags to categorize this post. Tags are not sent to SAINT or to Adobe Analytics.
Publish
145
10. Click Schedule, then click Now to post the video immediately or click Later to post the video according to
schedule.
If you select Later, use the Date, Time, and Time Zone options to specify when you want to post the content.
The date and time cannot be in the past. You can schedule a post up to one year in advance.
Note that if you schedule a YouTube video to be posted at a later scheduled time, the video is uploaded to
YouTube in private mode a few hours before the scheduled time so that it is ready to be publicly published.
Enable or Disable Post Predictions
Individual Social users can enable or disable post predictions for all Facebook pages to which he or she can post.
Or, a user listed as an owner of a Facebook page can enable or disable post predictions at the individual
Facebook-page level for all Social users.
The Post Predictions feature dynamically predicts the performance of your Facebook posts before they are posted.
This feature does not apply to Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn posts. For more information, see Post Predictions in
Publisher Page.
Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to enable or disable post predictions, see Social 3.2
Publisher and Content Calendar Enhancements.
To enable or disable the Post Predictions feature at the user level
Note: Before a user can disable this feature, an admin user must have already enabled Post Predictions for
that Facebook page. Furthermore, if a user disables Post Predictions at the user level, other Social users who
can post to that page are not affected by this user's action. Each user can enable or disable Post Predictions,
as desired.
1. Access the Publisher by clicking Publish > Publisher.
2. Click to display the Post Predictions settings.
3. Enable or disable post predictions by sliding the Enable Post Predictions toggle on or off.
To enable or disable the Post Predictions feature at the individual Facebook-page level or all Social users
1. Edit the desired property's settings.
For more information, see Configure Property Settings.
Publish
146
Configure Link Shortening Preferences
Configure link-shortening preferences, including enabling or disabling automatic link shortening in the Publisher
and selecting a default shortener to use for all links.
Note:
Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to configure link shortening preferences, see Social
3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements.
Before a user can configure link shortening preferences, an admin user must have already added link shorteners
to Social. Furthermore, the settings explained in this section are configured at the user level, other Social users
are not affected by this user's action. Each user can enable or disable automatic link shortening and select a
default shortener, as desired.
1. Access the Publisher by clicking Publish > Publisher.
2. Click Publisher Settings at the top right corner of the Publisher.
3. Enable or disable automatic link shortening by sliding the Auto-Shortening toggle on or off.
4. Select the link shortener that you want to set as the default shortener.
All inline links will be automatically shortened using the default shortener.
Use Twitter Cards
Twitter Cards let you attach photos, videos, and media experience to tweets.
You can create tweets with Twitter Cards in Social. Whenever you add a link that supports a Twitter Card, the
appropriate Card automatically displays in the posted tweet. For more information, see Twitter Cards on the Twitter
Developers website.
Social supports the following Twitter Cards:
Card
Description
Social Support?
Summary Card
Default Card, including a title, description, thumbnail, and Twitter
account attribution.
Yes
Summary Card with Large Similar to a Summary Card, but with a prominently featured image. Yes
Image
Publish
147
Card
Description
Social Support?
Photo Card
A Card with a photo only.
Yes
Gallery Card
A Card highlighting a collection of four photos.
Yes
App Card
A Card to represent a mobile application with direct download.
Yes*
Player Card
A card to provide video and audio.
Yes
Product Card
A Card optimized for product information.
Yes
Lead Generation Card
A Card to drive lead generation for your product or service. Available No
via the Twitter Ads Dashboard.
Website Card
A Card to feature your website and to help drive click-though traffic. No
Available via the Twitter Ads Dashboard.
* The posted tweet varies, depending on whether the tweet is viewed on a desktop/laptop computer or on a mobile
device.
Publish
148
Publish Anywhere
Publishing is the most-used capability within Adobe Social. Publish Anywhere makes the ability to publish content
to social networks available from anywhere within Social.
Content creation is not an isolated process. It usually occurs while browsing other relevant content or looking at
already planned content. Previously, there were several places within Social to view content, but only a few places
from which to create it (the Publisher and Content Calendar).
Publish Anywhere is a portable, easy to use, lightweight publisher that can be launched from anywhere within the
product. Users can retain the context of the page and still work on the content being authored.
Publish Anywhere has advanced publishing capabilities and can be used as the single place to create all content
within Social. Publish Anywhere provides powerful capabilities, such as link shortening, rich media, and scheduling.
Publish Anywhere is available throughout Social and can be accessed by clicking Create New Post at the bottom
of any page within Social.
The following illustration shows the Publish Anywhere feature at the bottom of the Social Buzz report.
Publish
Click Create New Post to open Publish Anywhere.
Publish Anywhere Workflow
Configure posts using Publish Anywhere from anywhere in Social.
This section contains the following information:
• Expand Publish Anywhere to Full-Screen Mode (Optional)
• Assign Social Properties
• Specify the Post Text
• Attach Images
• Attach Videos
• Schedule Post
• Assign a Campaign
• Attach Tags
• Attach a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only)
• Attach an Event (Facebook Only)
• Set Dark Post (Facebook Only)
• Specify Targets
• Create and Share a Photo Album (Facebook Only)
• Discard Posts
• Preview Posts
149
Publish
150
• Save as Draft
• Enable Auto-Shortening
Expand Publish Anywhere to Full-Screen Mode (Optional)
Steps
Details
1.
Expand the Publish Anywhere interface to full-screen mode to allow yourself more
room to create, edit, and review your post.
Click
in the Publish
Anywhere toolbar.
2. (Optional) Leave Publish
Anywhere in full-screen
mode when you finish
creating your post if you
want to always use it in
that mode.
If you prefer using the full-screen mode, simply leave Publish Anywhere in that
state and it'll display the same way every time you click Publish Anywhere from
anywhere in Social.
To expand the Publish Anywhere publisher to full-screen mode to allow yourself more room to create, edit and review
your post, click in the Publish Anywhere tool bar:
Assign Social Properties
Steps
Details
1. Start typing the desired
property, group, or
audience in the Post To
box.
Select the desired targets to which you want to publish content.
You can quickly select one or more social properties from the small property tiles
that display below the Social Properties option. Tiles display for the properties that
you have most frequently used in the last 30 days. This feature lets you quickly find
2. Select one or more social and publish content to those properties that are most important to you.
properties from the list:
You can also select one or more targets from the following lists:
• Audience Groups
Audience Groups: Lets you post content to a specific audience. An audience is a
• Page Groups
collection of people or fans. For more information, see Facebook Audiences.
• Facebook Pages
Publish
151
Steps
• Twitter Accounts
• Google+ Pages
• LinkedIn Companies
• YouTube
• Sina Weibo
Note: If
displays
next to the name, a
social property needs
to be re-authorized or
the post will fail. Hover
over the icon to display
a message.
Details
Page Groups: Lets you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages
or to a collection of Like nodes on the Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you
post to every page or node in that group or collection. A Like node is a virtual
collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside of Facebook
(for example, on a web page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can
further communicate with every Facebook user who has clicked one of your Like
buttons. For more information, see Page Groups.
Facebook Pages: Lets you post content to the Wall of one or more Facebook pages
that you manage.
Twitter Accounts: Lets you post content to one or more Twitter accounts that you
manage.
Google+ Pages: Lets you post content to one or more Google+ pages that you
manage.
LinkedIn Companies: Lets you post content to one or more LinkedIn company
pages that you manage. For more information, see Publishing Posts to LinkedIn
Company Pages.
YouTube: Lets you post video assets to YouTube channels that you manage and
add videos to playlists. Unlike posts for other social properties (Facebook status
updates, and Twitter tweets, for example) YouTube videos exist longer and are
relevant for a longer period of time.
Sina Weibo: Lets you post content (text and image posts) to one or more Sina
Weibo accounts that you manage. Sina Weibo, used primarily in China, is similar to
Twitter. Note that at this time, no analytics APIs are available from Sina Weibo. As
a result, Social does not offer analytic capabilities for Sina Weibo.
As you add social properties, they are listed at the top of the list (below the search
filter). To remove a property, hover over the property and click the x on the property's
tile.
If you create content and assign it to multiple social platforms and properties
simultaneously, Social automatically displays a parent (master) post and child posts
in the Content Calendar. For conceptual information about parent posts and child
posts, see Parent and Child Posts.
Note: Depending on the social properties you select, some of the other options
might not be available. For example, if you select a Twitter account, the Post
Predictions and Target option are not available. Other times, you will receive
a notice if an element is not available for a certain property type.
Publish
152
Specify the Post Text
Steps
Details
1. Type the text in the text
box, including URLs (if
desired).
Social lets you simultaneously specify text for multiple social properties (Facebook
pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, LinkedIn company pages, YouTube
channels, and Sina Weibo accounts).
For Facebook, Google+, LinkedIn company pages, and YouTube videos, you can
type as many as 5,000 characters. For Twitter, you can type as many as 140
characters. For Sina Weibo, you can type as many as 140 double-byte characters
or 280 single-byte characters.
As you type text, the number of available characters remaining displays below the
text box. Note that this number reflects the most restrictive character limit, depending
on which social properties you selected. For example, if you selected only Facebook
and Google+ properties, the character limit displays 5,000. If you selected one or
more Twitter accounts, the character limit displays 140.
Facebook: You can use @mentions functionality to cross-promote content and
increase reach and audience awareness in your collaborative efforts with other
brands, talent, and places. For more information, see Facebook @mentions.
Twitter: Note that for Twitter posts, there is an auto-complete functionality that
automatically fills in users' Twitter handles and hashtags as you begin typing the @
sign and a Twitter handle or the # sign.You can continue typing the handle or hashtag
or you can select it from the list that displays. Social uses all of the Twitter handles
that you have mentioned or followed during the last 60 days and the hashtags you
have mentioned in the last 60 days as a basis for the auto-complete functionality.
Social supports Twitter Cards. For more information, see Use Twitter Cards.
Link Shortening: If you include one or more inline links in a post, you can shorten
them using your configured link shorteners. You must shorten all links if you want
to track the post by campaigns..
You can also configure auto-shortening and specify a default shortener. See "Enable
Auto-Shortening" below.
For detailed information about shortening links, see Generate Short URLs in Posts
The default link shortener is ctx.ly. If you add additional link shorteners, they displays
as well.
Attach Images
Steps
Details
1. Click
to display the
Attach Media controls.
Photos and images get a much higher click-through rate than regular status updates.
Social makes it easy to publish images. For Facebook, these posts will appear on
your Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds. For Google+, these posts will
appear on your Google+ pages and on your fans' individual Streams. For Twitter,
2. Drag the image into the
box.
Publish
153
Steps
Details
Or
these posts will appear in your fans' Twitter feeds. For LinkedIn, these posts will
appear on your LinkedIn company page.
Click Browse for Photo,
then browse to and select Image formats should be .jpg, .gif, or .png. The image size should be no larger
the desired image.
than 2 MB. Animated .gif images can be published to Twitter.
Or
You can quickly edit, optimize, and touch up photos from within Publish Anywhere.
Social users do not need external platforms for lightweight photo editing or have
Click URL to Upload
creative teams make adjustments to photos. Hover over your picture to display the
Photo or Video, then
edit icon to open the built-in photo editor. For more information, see Use Photo
specify the URL to upload
Editing Tools.
the image from the web.
Twitter Only: You can create multi-image tweets using Publish Anywhere. After
Or
posting the first image, a plus sign displays. Click the plus sign to add another image.
Click Import from Assets You can add as many as four images.
to open the Marketing
Cloud Asset Selector,
select the desired image,
then click
.
3. (Optional) Use the built-in
About the Marketing Cloud Assets core service: The Assets core service is a
photo editing tools to
centralized repository to store, share, and sync digital assets across Creative Cloud
customer the image.
and Marketing Cloud solutions. Social customers can upload images, documents,
For more information, see and files to the Marketing Cloud that are then accessible to publish in Adobe Social
Use Photo Editing Tools. via the Asset Selector. Note that your company must be provisioned for the Adobe
Marketing Cloud and you must log in to Social using your Adobe ID.
Note: Contact your Social Account Manager if you would like to upload assets
from the Marketing Cloud Assets Selector.
For more information, see Adobe Marketing Cloud help.
Attach Videos
Steps
Details
1. Click
to display the
Attach Media controls.
The Social Publisher makes it easy to publish videos. You can select a still frame
from anywhere in the video to use as the video's thumbnail image in the post.
2. Drag the video into the
box.
For Facebook, these posts appear on your Wall and in your fans' individual News
Feeds. For YouTube, these posts appear in your YouTube channels.
Or
You cannot use audience groups and targeting with videos.
Click Browse for Video, About the Marketing Cloud Asset Selector: Social customers will be able to upload
then browse to and select images and videos from the Marketing Cloud Asset Selector only if they are Adobe
Marketing Cloud customers. You must log in to Social using your Adobe ID using
the desired Video.
the Marketing Cloud.
Or
Publish
154
Steps
Details
Click URL to Upload
Note: Contact your Social Account Manager if you would like to upload assets
Photo or Video, then
from the Marketing Cloud Assets Selector.
specify the URL to upload
the image from the web. For more information, see Adobe Marketing Cloud help.
Or
YouTube Notes: For more information, see Publish a YouTube Video.
Click Import from Assets
to open the Marketing
Cloud Asset Selector,
select the desired image,
then click
.
Note that only accounts
that are set up with Adobe
Experience Manager
Assets (on demand) can
browse to and select
videos from the Marketing
Cloud Asset Selector.
Facebook Notes: The SocialPublisher posts videos with native Facebook playback.
Users' must enable Video in order for the video story to display. To do this, users
must add video permission inside Facebook (Account Settings > Apps > Video >
Edit Settings > Publish Content to My Wall).
Facebook limits the functionality available with video posts:
• You cannot geo-target a post with a video attachment.
• You cannot customize an action link name for the video.
• Because of a Facebook limitation, Facebook video titles with non-ASCII characters
are truncated and garbled after being published.
Social supports a few methods of video publishing. You can choose to use the
Publisher and upload a video as described here or you can publish videos as stream
apps: embedded or just add a YouTube URL.
About the Marketing Cloud Assets core service: The Assets core service is a
centralized repository to store, share, and sync digital assets across Creative Cloud
and Marketing Cloud solutions. Social customers can upload images, documents,
and files to the Marketing Cloud that are then accessible to publish in Adobe Social
via the Asset Selector. Note that your company must be provisioned for the Adobe
Marketing Cloud and you must log in to Social using your Adobe ID.
Note: Contact your Social Account Manager if you would like to upload assets
from the Marketing Cloud Assets Selector.
For more information, see Adobe Marketing Cloud help.
Schedule Post
Steps
Details
1. Click
to display the
Attach Media controls.
The default behavior of the scheduler is to post the content later according to
schedule rather than immediately.
2. Drag the image into the
box.
Posts can be scheduled at one-minute intervals. The date and time cannot be in the
past. You can schedule a post up to one year in advance. You can schedule an
unlimited number of posts. You can edit or cancel scheduled posts, as desired.
Or
Click Browse for Photo,
then browse to and select
the desired image.
Publish
Steps
155
Details
Or
Click URL to Upload
Photo or Video, then
specify the URL to upload
the image from the web.
3.
Click
, then select the
desired date.
4. Specify the desired time
and time zone when you
want to post the content.
Assign a Campaign
Steps
Details
1. Click , then select the
desired campaign.
A campaign is a marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. For
example, if a campaign advertises a specific credit card, the campaign could be a
series of creative elements (links, Flash Multimedia posts, tweets, and so forth)
advertising the card's interest rate and benefits. The campaign's tracking code on
each creative element lets you track the effectiveness of the campaign by letting
you know which link a user clicked to come to your website.
You can specify a default campaign to streamline publishing and governance.
For more information, see Campaigns.
In addition to the campaign tracking code (adbsc) that is automatically appended to
the post's URL, Social also appends three additional parameters:
• adbid: The post's native post ID (for example, its native ID assigned by Twitter).
• adbpr: The post's property ID (for example the Twitter account's ID).
• adbpl: An abbreviation for the post's platform identifier (for example, tw).
The following example shows the parameters added by Social:
http://twitter.com/?adbid=12345&adbpl=tw&adbpr=6789&adbsc=social_20141006
These URL parameters tie your campaign to your social engagement data visible
in Adobe Analytics.
Note: The addition of these new parameters will not change any parameters
you have defined. If you have set up custom parameters in Adobe Analytics,
they will not be affected. Note that the Adobe parameters appear first, followed
by your custom parameters. There will only be a conflict if you use the exact
same parameters. If you think there might be a conflict, please contact your
Social Account Manager.
Publish
Steps
156
Details
Customers who are manually linking post engagement data to post-level campaign
data will see significant reduction in time spent on reporting.
In Adobe Analytics, the Platform, Property, and Post reports under the Social tab
can now pull in campaign conversion data in addition to the existing listening and
engagement data.
For example, you can run a Platforms report that shows Social Mentions and
Average Sentiment, next to Likes and Followers next to Visits to your website
from that platform. In the Post report you can see Post Impressions alongside
revenue driven by this post.
This release of Social adds many new metrics for owned social properties, in addition
to those previously accessible from the Metric Selector in Analytics. More metrics
will be supported in the future. For a list of new metrics, see New Engagement
Metrics for Owned Social Properties.
For more information about the integration between Adobe Social and Analytics,
see Owned Social Properties Reports.
Attach Tags
Steps
Details
1. Click .
2. Type the text for the tag.
Information you type in the Tags box is not viewable outside of the Social product.
Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot see this information. Other
Social users in your organization can see this information when they view pending
posts. You can use tags to categorize this post. Tags are not sent to SAINT or to
Adobe Analytics.
Or
Select the desired tag
from the list.
For more information, see Social Tags.
Attach a Facebook Cover Photo (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1. Click
, then click
Attach Cover Photo.
2. Specify the image's URL
to upload the image from
the web.
Post or update a cover photo on Facebook pages that you manage. You can post
the cover photo immediately or according to schedule.
Or
Click Browse for Photo,
then browse to and select
the image from your
computer.
Image formats should be .jpg, .gif, or .png. For best results, the image should
be 851 x 315 pixels.
Facebook cover photos cannot be posted to audiences using pre-defined targeting.
No analytic information is available for Facebook cover photos.
Publish
157
Attach an Event (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1. Click
Post an event on Facebook pages that you manage. These posts appear on your
, then click
Attach Facebook Event. Wall and in your fans' individual News Feeds to inform fans about upcoming events
2. Search for the desired
or to organize social gatherings.
event.
3. Select to not display an
event image by clicking
None.
Or
Click Upload to browse to
and select the image file.
Or
Specify the image's URL
to upload it from the web.
Set Dark Post (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1. Click
> Dark
Facebook Post.
The Dark Post option lets you create posts on Facebook that do not display on your
Facebook Timeline but can be accessed with direct links.
This option lets social content creators create the content and send the link to their
ad teams to promote as sponsored (paid) content. The ad teams can use the post
ID to buy media in targeted segments in their advertising platforms.
You can create dark posts only in Adobe Social. You must promote the posts in
another tool, such as Adobe Advertising Management (Media Optimizer) or natively
in Facebook.
After you create a dark post, it displays in the Content Calendar with the dark post
icon in its header, in the Post Analytics report, and in Facebook moderation feeds.
You can filter the Content Calendar to display only dark posts (Show Filters >
Visibility > Dark Posts Only. See Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
You can filter the Post Analytics report to display only dark posts. See Post Analytics
List View and Post Analytics Roll-Up View.
You can create a Facebook moderation feed that displays only dark posts. See
Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed.
Specify Targets
Steps
1. Click
Details
> Target Post. Facebook
Publish
158
Steps
Details
2. Specify the desired
targeting options.
The following options are available for Facebook:
Estimated Reach: (Facebook Only. No user interaction required.) Social estimates
the number of Facebook users who will be reached by this post's targeting settings.
As you configure the various targeting settings, such as geo, gender, or age, the
reach estimate automatically updates.
Geo: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. You can then
choose to post the content to everywhere in that country or to a specific state or city.
Note that geo-targeted posts are determined by the location listed in the Facebook
user's profile. Geo-targeted posts are not determined by IP address.
Languages: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target languages. The
content is posted only to fans in the selected geographic location who speak the
specified language. Language is based on what fans specify as their language on
their Facebook profiles.You can target by language without using location targeting.
The post displays in users' News Feeds based on Facebook's location algorithm,
which takes into account their IP address, network, and current city. Languages
spoken are also taken into account.
If a location is not listed in Adobe Social, but it exists in Facebook, contact your
Account Manager and we can add it to the list.
Age: Use the age pointers to specify the target age range. Be aware that Facebook
does not permit certain types of advertising to minors. For example, you cannot
advertise alcoholic beverages to people in the 13-18 year-old range.
Gender: Select All, Male, or Female.
Education Level: Select All, In High School, In College, or College Alumni. If
you choose In College, or College Alumni, the following options are available:
• College: Specify one or more target colleges.
• College Major: Specify one or more college majors.
Relationship Status: Select one or more relationship statuses: Single, In
Relationship, Married, Engaged, or Not Specified.
Interested In: Select All, Male, or Female.
Workplace: Select one or more target workplaces.
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
Note: If you apply demographic targeting to a Facebook post, that post
displays in the Newsfeeds only of users meeting the selected demographic
criteria. However, it is normal Facebook behavior for that same posts to appear
on your brand's Facebook page. This behavior is true for demographic-targets
posts, but not for geo-targeted posts. If you do not want demographic-targeted
posts to appear on your brand's Facebook page, you can hide them. For more
information, see How Do I Control Who See's my Page's Posts in the Facebook
Help Center.
Publish
Steps
159
Details
Twitter
The following options are available for Twitter:
Country: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target countries. The content
is posted only to users in the selected countries.
Region: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target regions. The content
is posted only to users in the selected regions.
City: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target cities. The content is
posted only to users in the selected cities.
The Twitter API provides the list of countries, regions, and cities that are available
in Social.
The Country, Region, and City options are not related to each other. For example,
after you select a country, you can also select regions and cities that are not in that
country. However, if you select a country, a region in that country, and a city within
that country, the widest audience is targeted. For example, if you select United
States, California, and San Francisco, you might expect the tweet to target San
Francisco only. In this scenario, the widest audience is targeted: United States.
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
Note: For location-based targeting, a user's location is generated from a
variety of signals, including mobile location. If a user moves from one geo
location to another, it might take several days and several actions for that
user's location to change. For example, suppose a user travels from the United
States to Germany. Based solely on IP-location information, it might take
several days for the location to change. However, if that user performs several
actions, such as tweeting with his or her current location (Germany) from a
mobile device, the location changes quicker.
Google+
The following options are available for Google+: Following, Customers, VIPs, Team
Members, Your Circles, Extended Circles, and Public.
Select the desired circle.
Circles let you share posts with different groups of people. For example, you can
create a group for family members, a group for co-workers, a group for college
friends, and so forth. When you post in a specific circle, the post shows in the stream
only for those people in that circle.
Google includes four default circles for each page:
• Following
• Customers
• VIPs
Publish
Steps
160
Details
• Team Members
These default circles can be edited or removed by the page administrator.
Social includes three default circles for each page:
• Your Circles (followers you have added to your circles)
• Extended Circles (followers or followers in your circles)
• Public (anyone can see the post)
You can target multiple circles in one post. Each circle has a maximum number or
5,000 followers at this time due to Google limitations.
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
LinkedIn
Include: From the drop-down list, select Employees and Non-Employees or
Non-Employees Only.
Company Size: From the drop-down list, choose Self Employed or the desired
company size number ranges. You must target at least 100 employees and you can
select a maximum of ten size ranges.
Industry: From the drop-down list, choose one or more target industries. The content
is posted only to users in the selected industries.You can select up to ten industries.
Job Function: From the drop-down list, choose one or more job functions. The
content is posted only to users in the selected functions. You can select up to ten
functions.
Seniority: From the drop-down list, choose one or more seniority levels.The content
is posted only to users with the selected level. You can select up to ten levels.
Geography: From the drop-down list, choose one or more geographic locations.
The content is posted only to users in the selected locations. You can select up to
ten locations.
When you are finished selecting targeting options, click Apply Target.
Create and Share a Photo Album (Facebook Only)
Steps
Details
1. Click
Photo Albums apply to Facebook only.
> Attach
Photo Album.
To remove an image from the album, click the desired image, then select Remove
2. Browse to and select
multiple images. Click Add Photo.
More Photos as
Note: There are important differences with photo album posts whether or not
necessary.
you use the Post Audience feature (described below) to target your audience.
3. Specify the description for
each image.
Publish
161
Steps
Details
4. To specify the album's
cover image, click the
pencil icon on the desired
image, then select Make
Album Cover.
Non-Targeted Album Posts: If you do not target your albums using the Target
feature, post analytics are not available. Non-targeted photo album posts do not
display in the Post Analytics report.
Non-targeted photo album posts display with images in users' Newsfeeds, with the
image you specified as its cover at the top, as shown below:
Targeted Album Posts: If you target your albums using the Target feature, post
analytics are available. Photo album posts display in the Post Analytics report.
Because of Facebook limitations, targeted photo album posts do not display with
the images in users' Newsfeed as with non-targeted posts. After you select targeting
options, a message displays informing you that the appearance of the post on users'
Newsfeeds changes when shared with a targeted audience.The photo album displays
as a Small Image post on users' Newsfeeds, as shown below. Users can click the
image to display all photos in the album.
Discard Posts
Steps
Details
1. Click the Schedule
You can easily discard the current post if you decide that you do not want to post
drop-down list > Discard the content.
Posts.
2. Click Yes to confirm that
you want to discard the
post.
Publish
162
Preview Posts
Steps
Details
1. Click the Schedule
You can preview the post to see how it will look when posted to the social platform
drop-down list > Preview (Facebook, Twitter, and so forth). Click Close Preview and edit the post if necessary.
Posts.
2. Click Close Preview to
return to editing mode.
Save as Draft
Steps
Details
1. Click the Schedule
Save the post in an intermediate state as a draft. You can also create a template to
drop-down list > Save as use as a starting point for future posts.
Draft.
You can edit drafts at any future time and complete the posts using the Content
Calendar. The Drafts view is similar to the List View of the Content Calendar and
lets you create, edit, and manage draft posts. A post in a draft state is analogous to
an email draft, something that is Work In Progress and will not be published to the
social platform unless explicitly published. Drafts can be used as a great collaboration
tool for content creation. Multiple authors can work on the same post before it is
pushed to social properties.
For more information, see View or Create Post Drafts and Templates.
Enable Auto-Shortening
Steps
Details
1. Click the
> toggle
Auto-Shortening to the
On Position.
Enabling Auto-shortening will shorten all links in the post content using the set default
shortener automatically.You can manually override this setting while creating content.
Publish
Steps
163
Details
2. Specify a default
shortener.
For detailed information about shortening links, see Generate Short URLs in Posts
Facebook @mentions
Use Facebook @mentions functionality to cross-promote content and increase reach and audience awareness in
your collaborative efforts with other brands, talent, and places.
If you type an @ symbol and begin typing the name of a public Facebook page, a drop-down list displays that lets
you select the desired page. For example, suppose you type, "Great day at @Adobe." As you begin typing "Adobe,"
Social performs a type-ahead search to populate a drop-down list of public pages that match your text. Simply select
the desired page to tag it and ensure that page's audience sees your content.
Note the following information about the @mentions functionality:
• The @mentions functionality is available only in Publish Anywhere. This functionality is not available in the Publisher.
• The @mentions functionality applies to public Facebook pages only.This functionality does not apply to users/profiles.
A famous person will most likely have a public page, not a user page. As a result, in many instances, public pages
of famous people that you mention are available in the drop-down list.
• The @mention functionality is not currently supported in Social Moderation.
Use Photo Editing Tools
Edit your pictures within Social Publish Anywhere through an integration with the Adobe Creative Cloud Aviary photo
editor.
Adobe Social lets you quickly and professionally edit and enhance your pictures.
You can quickly edit, optimize, and touch up photos from within Publish Anywhere. Social users do not need external
platforms for lightweight photo editing or have creative teams adjust photos.
You can add effects; apply filters; add frames and stickers; crop, resize, rotate images; add text; create memes;
remove red eye, whiten teeth, remove blemishes; and more.
1. Add an image to your post by following the directions under Attach Images in Publish Anywhere Workflow.
2. Hover over the image until the edit icon displays.
Publish
3. Click the icon to open the built-in photo editor.
4. Use the photo-editing tools at the top of the picture to edit the picture as desired.
164
Publish
165
Note: If a photo is edited in a post within an approval workflow, it is treated as any other change to the
post (resent through approvals).
Moderation
166
Moderation
Moderate posts and comments across social properties from within one convenient workflow. You can create and
configure moderation feeds to facilitate moderation of escalated issues and posts on owned Facebook pages,
LinkedIn company pages, and Twitter accounts.
In addition to the features discussed in this section, you can also use the Moderation Overview dashboard to get
a complete view of your organization's moderation efforts.You can view moderation statistics for individual members
of your team, see how long it takes your team to resolve escalated issues, determine which time of day most issues
are escalated, compare the number of unresolved issues to resolved issues, and more. For more information, see
Moderation Overview Dashboard.
Unified Moderation
Moderate posts, tweets, and comments across social platforms from within one convenient workflow.
You can create and configure moderation feeds to facilitate moderation of escalated issues and content on owned
Facebook pages, LinkedIn company pages, and Twitter accounts. Images and videos display inline in Facebook,
Twitter, and LinkedIn feeds.
Create a New Moderation Feed
Create a new moderation feed that displays posts from a single social platform or posts that have been escalated
from within Social. You can then display this feed in a list layout (single column) or in a column layout (side-by-side
columns).
You can create as many feeds as necessary. However, you can display as many as ten feeds at a time.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Click Add Feed, then select the desired feed type: Escalations, Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, or Instagram.
The configuration options vary depending on the selected feed type. Some types display two tabs (Filters and
Settings) and other types display only one tab (Filters).
3. Provide a descriptive name for the feed.
A descriptive name helps you quickly locate a specific feed if you have many saved feeds. The name can also
help you quickly understand the feed's purpose and settings.
For example, you could create a filter that includes content with positive sentiment scores and high follower
numbers, and name the filter "Influencers." Or, you could create a filter of escalations assigned to you and name
it "My Escalations."
4. Configure the feed:
Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed
Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of posts that have been escalated from within Social.
You can configure the following filters for the feed:
Note: When you initially open a new feed, all content matching your listening rules displays in the feed. You
do not need to explicitly select all sentiment ranges, moderation statuses, and so forth if you do not want to
limit the feed results. If you select individual options, the feed displays only content that matches those filter
Moderation
167
options. For example, if you do not explicitly select any sentiment ranges or statuses, by default, the feed
displays content with all sentiment (Negative, Neutral, and Positive) and all statuses (Read, Unread, Spam,
Not Spam, Flagged, etc.). As another example, if you select the Positive sentiment range and the Unread
status, only content with positive sentiment that has not been read displays in the feed.
Filter
Escalation Users
Description
Select the desired option:
Escalated to Users: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social to
individual users or user groups. Click the Search for User box, then select one or more
users or user groups.
Escalated by Users: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social by
individual users or user groups. Click the Search for User box, then select one or more
users or user groups.
Escalation Status
Select the desired options:
Escalated: Display all posts that have been escalated from with Social, regardless of the
current escalation status.
Claimed: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been
claimed by a user or user group for resolution.
Resolved: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been
resolved.
Escalation Priority
Select the desired option:
All: Display all posts that have been escalated from within Social, regardless of the
escalation priority.
High: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been
marked as high priority.
Normal: Display only posts that have been escalated from within Social and have been
marked as normal priority.
Sentiment
Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative, Neutral,
or Positive.
You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the left
side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment has
a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign.
For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
Moderation Status
Select one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the
selected moderation statuses: Read, Unread, Spam, Not Spam, Flagged, and Moderation
Error.
Moderation
Filter
168
Description
Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the content
could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform (Facebook or
Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can use the Moderation
Filter to find failed content and take corrective action.
Time Range
Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1
Month, All, or Custom.
Note that the time range for all options in an escalation feed reflects the date and time
when the content was escalated, rather than the date and time when the content was
posted.
The time range for all other moderation feeds (Facebook, Twitter, and so forth) reflects a
rolling range using the date and time when the content was posted. For example, if you
select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always displays content posted during
the previous seven days.
Language
Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language. You
can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language.You can select
only one individual language for each feed.
If you create a feed in a language other than the language you are viewing in the Social
UI, or if a post in a different language displays in an existing moderation feed, click Show
Translation in each post's tile to display a machine-generated translation of that post's
text.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation. For a list of supported
languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft website.
Emotions
Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having
the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness, and
Surprise.
You can determine the emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and its
corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post associated
with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom of the post in the
feed.
Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed
Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of posts or photo albums that have been posted to a single owned
Facebook page. You can also assign the feed to one or more users or groups.
You can configure the following filters for the feed:
Note: When you initially open a new feed, all content matching your listening rules displays in the feed. You
do not need to explicitly select all sentiment ranges, moderation statuses, and so forth if you do not want to
limit the feed results. If you select individual options, the feed displays only content that matches those filter
options. For example, if you do not explicitly select any sentiment ranges or statuses, by default, the feed
Moderation
169
displays content with all sentiment (Negative, Neutral, and Positive) and all statuses (Read, Unread, Spam,
Not Spam, Flagged, etc.). As another example, if you select the Positive sentiment range and the Unread
status, only content with positive sentiment that has not been read displays in the feed.
Filter
Feed Type
Description
Select an option:
Page Posts: Display only content that has been posted to an owned Facebook page.
Private Messages: Display only private messages that have been posted to an owned
Facebook page. These messages are not seen publicly.
Audiences: Display only content that has been posted to an owned Facebook page
from users in a specified Facebook audience. This feature helps large organizations
moderate Facebook posts more efficiently using a targeted approach. For example,
an organization might have a global page and want to create individual moderation
feeds for specific geographical regions. Instead of creating a single feed, you can create
several feeds representing different regions. You can also create different moderation
feeds using audiences across pages and page groups.
Photo Album: Display only photo albums that have been posted to an owned Facebook
page.
Facebook Page (Page
Posts, Private Messages, Select the owned Facebook page whose posts or photo albums you want to moderate
from within this feed.
and Photo Album feed
types only)
If you have not yet added a Facebook page to your account, click Create a Facebook
Page. Then follow the instructions in Add Facebook Pages.
Facebook Audience
(Audiences feet type only) Select the Facebook audience whose posts you want to moderate from within this feed.
Post Type
Select one or more post types:
Posts: Display posts.
Dark Posts: Displays Facebook dark posts only. For more information, see Set Dark
Post in Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Comments/Replies: Display comments and replies to posts.
The Post Type filter lets you exclude post types that might not interest you. This filter
also lets you focus on post types that interested you more, such as comments or replies.
This filter also ensures that you never miss an important comment. If a comment is
made to a post that was originally posted several months ago, that comment displays
nested under the original post; however, that comment also displays at the top of the
feed, letting you see all new content in descending order in terms of recency.
Sentiment
Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative,
Neutral, or Positive.
Moderation
Filter
170
Description
You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the
left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment
has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign.
For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
Moderation Status
Select one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the
selected moderation statuses: Read, Unread, Spam, Not Spam, Flagged, and
Moderation Error.
Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the
content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform
(Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can
use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action.
Time Range
Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1
Month, All, or Custom.
The time range reflects a rolling range using the date and time when the content was
posted. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always
displays content posted during the previous seven days.
Post Author
Language
Select the desired post author: All, By Me, or By Others.
Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language.
You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language. You
can select only one individual language for each feed.
If you create a feed in a language other than the language you are viewing in the Social
UI, or if a post in a different language displays in an existing moderation feed, click
Show Translation in each post's tile to display a machine-generated translation of that
post's text.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation. For a list of
supported languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft
website.
Emotions
Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having
the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness,
and Surprise.
You can determine the primary emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored
dot and its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a
post associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the
bottom of the post in the feed.
You can configure the following settings for the feed:
Moderation
171
Filter
Description
Feed Assignment
Assign this feed to one or more users or groups.
Configure a Facebook Comments Moderation Feed
Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of an individual Facebook post and its comments.
For example, you might want to more closely monitor a specific Facebook post so that you can more effectively
moderate that post and reply to any comments that it subsequently receives.
1. From with a Facebook moderation feed, click the View x Comments link at the bottom of an individual post that
has comments to expand the post and its comments.
2. Click
at the top of that feed to create a new moderation feed for that post and its comments.
3. (Conditional) Click
> Edit to configure the feed.
For more information, see Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed.
4. Moderate the feed as you would any other Facebook moderation feed.
For more information, see Moderate an Individual Facebook Post.
Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed
Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of tweets that have been tweeted to one or more Twitter accounts.
You can also specify the default Twitter account to use to reply to tweets and assign the feed to one or more users
or groups.
You can configure the following filters for the feed:
Note: When you initially open a new feed, all content matching your listening rules displays in the feed. You
do not need to explicitly select all sentiment ranges, moderation statuses, and so forth if you do not want to
limit the feed results. If you select individual options, the feed displays only content that matches those filter
options. For example, if you do not explicitly select any sentiment ranges or statuses, by default, the feed
Moderation
172
displays content with all sentiment (Negative, Neutral, and Positive) and all statuses (Read, Unread, Spam,
Not Spam, Flagged, etc.). As another example, if you select the Positive sentiment range and the Unread
status, only content with positive sentiment that has not been read displays in the feed.
Filter
Feed Type
Description
Select an option:
Listening Rules: Display only tweets that have been captured by listening rules that
you have configured in Social.
For more information, see Listening Rules.
Direct Messages: Display direct messages.
For important information about direct-message feed rate limits, see Direct Message
a Twitter User.
Properties
Listening Rules
Select one or more Twitter accounts whose tweets you want to moderate from within
this feed.
Select one or more listening rules. Only those tweets captured by the selected rules
display in the feed.
For more information, see Listening Rules.
Post Type
Select one or more post types:
Tweets: Display tweets.
Replies: Display replies to tweets.
Retweets: Display retweets.
The Post Type filter lets you exclude post types that might not interest you, for example
retweets of your content. This filter also lets you focus on post types that interested
you more, such as replies.
Social applies this filter to all three post types if you do not explicitly select one or more
types. To exclude one post type, select the other two types and deselect the type you
want to exclude.
Sentiment
Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative,
Neutral, or Positive.
You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the
left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment
has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign.
For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
Moderation
Filter
Moderation Status
173
Description
Select one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with the
selected moderation statuses: Read, Unread, Spam, Not Spam, Flagged, and
Moderation Error.
Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the
content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform
(Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can
use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action.
Time Range
Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1
Month, All, or Custom.
The time range reflects a rolling range using the date and time when the content was
posted. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always
displays content posted during the previous seven days.
Text Search
Followers
Author Search
Language
Specify the text that you want to use to filter this feed. Only tweets that contain the
specified text display in the feed.
Select one or more ranges. Only tweets made by users with the specified number of
followers display in the feed.
Specified the desired Twitter handle whose posts you want to moderate from within
this feed. You do not need to use the @ symbol in the Twitter user's handle.
Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language.
You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language. You
can select only one individual language for each feed.
If you create a feed in a language other than the language you are viewing in the Social
UI, or if a post in a different language displays in an existing moderation feed, click
Show Translation in each post's tile to display a machine-generated translation of that
post's text.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation. For a list of
supported languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft
website.
Emotions
Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having
the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness,
and Surprise.
You can determine the emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and
its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post
associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom
of the post in the feed.
Moderation
174
You can configure the following settings for the feed:
Filter
Description
Default Reply Account
Feed Assignment
Specify the default Twitter account that you want to use to reply to tweets from within
this moderation feed.
Assign this feed to one or more users or groups.
Note: To be able to view the Feed Assignment option and assign feeds, the
user must be an Administrative user in Adobe Analytics and have the Moderation
> Can Edit Unified Moderation Settings permission enabled. For more
information, see Add User Group, Permissions, and Members.
Configure a Twitter Conversation Moderation Feed
Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of a Twitter conversation so you can observe the context of a particular
tweet and its comments and retweets.
For example, you might want to more closely monitor a specific tweet so that you can more effectively moderate
that tweet and reply to any comments or retweets that it subsequently receives.
1. From with a Twitter moderation feed, click the View Conversation link at the bottom of an individual tweet that
has comments or retweets to expand the post.
2. Click
at the top of that feed to create a new moderation feed for that tweet and its comments and retweets.
3. (Conditional) Click
> Edit to configure the feed.
For more information, see Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed.
4. Moderate the feed as you would any other Facebook moderation feed.
For more information, see Moderate an Individual Tweet.
Moderation
175
Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed
Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of posts that have been posted to a LinkedIn company page. You
can also assign the feed to one or more users or groups.
You can configure the following filters for the feed:
Note: When you initially open a new feed, all content matching your listening rules displays in the feed. You
do not need to explicitly select all sentiment ranges, moderation statuses, and so forth if you do not want to
limit the feed results. If you select individual options, the feed displays only content that matches those filter
options. For example, if you do not explicitly select any sentiment ranges or statuses, by default, the feed
displays content with all sentiment (Negative, Neutral, and Positive) and all statuses (Read, Unread, Spam,
Not Spam, Flagged, etc.). As another example, if you select the Positive sentiment range and the Unread
status, only content with positive sentiment that has not been read displays in the feed.
Filter
My Companies
Sentiment
Description
Select the desired LinkedIn company page whose posts you want to moderate from
within this feed.
Select a sentiment range to display only posts with the selected range: Negative,
Neutral, or Positive.
You can determine each post's sentiment range by viewing the colored bar along the
left side of each post in the moderation feed. For example, a post with positive sentiment
has a green bar along the left side of the post with a + sign.
For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
Moderation Status
Select the one or more status types to display only posts that have been marked with
the selected moderation statuses.
The following options are available: Read, Unread, Commented, and Moderation Error.
Content with a status of Moderation Error means that something went wrong and the
content could not be posted. For example, if you reply to a post and the platform
(Facebook or Twitter, for example) is down, the content will not be posted. You can
use the Moderation Filter to find failed content and take corrective action.
Time Range
Select the desired range to filter the feed: Last Hour, Last 12 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 1
Month, All, or Custom.
The time range reflects a rolling range using the date and time when the content was
posted. For example, if you select 1 Week, whenever you access the feed, it always
displays content posted during the previous seven days.
Language
Select the desired language to display only content posted in the selected language.
You can display posts in all languages or you can specify an individual language. You
can select only one individual language for each feed.
Moderation
Filter
176
Description
If you create a feed in a language other than the language you are viewing in the Social
UI, or if a post in a different language displays in an existing moderation feed, click
Show Translation in each post's tile to display a machine-generated translation of that
post's text.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation. For a list of
supported languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft
website.
Emotions
Select one or more emotions to display only posts that have been designated as having
the selected emotions: Admiration, Anger, Anticipation, Disgust, Fear, Joy, Sadness,
and Surprise.
You can determine the emotion associated with a post by viewing the colored dot and
its corresponding emotion underneath each post in the feed. For example, a post
associated with Admiration has a green dot with the word "Admiration" at the bottom
of the post in the feed.
You can configure the following settings for the feed:
Filter
Description
Feed Assignment
Assign this feed to one or more users or groups.
Display Moderation Feeds
Toggle moderation feeds from a list layout (view one feed only) or into a column layout (as many as ten feeds, side
by side).You can also open or close feeds, delete feeds, or arrange open feeds in the moderation queue in a desired
order.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. (Optional) Choose to stream posts or manually refresh posts.
For more information, see Stream or Manually Refresh Moderation Feeds.
3. (Optional) To close an open feed, click
> Close.
You can also close feeds from the rail at the left of the feeds.
4. (Optional) To change which feeds display in the queue, click Manage Feeds, then close feeds in the Open Feeds
list and open feeds in the Closed Feeds list, as needed.
To display feeds in a specific order, open the feeds in the desired order.
See also:
Create a New Moderation Feed
Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets
Edit a Moderation Feed
Edit and save an existing moderation feed.
Moderation
177
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Locate the feed that you want to edit.
For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds.
3. Click
> Edit to open the feed in configuration mode.
4. Edit the feed as desired by changing its filters and settings.
For more information, see the appropriate topic:
• Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed
• Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed
• Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed
• Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed
5. Click
to save the feed.
Tune Sentiment in a Moderation Feed
Manually override the sentiment of a post from a moderation feed.
Adjusting sentiment feeds the sentiment algorithm for a specific report suite, making the algorithm more accurate
to your needs over time.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. In a moderation feed, click or touch the sentiment column on the left side of a post to display the Override the
Sentiment Value controls.
Note: Unless you explicitly select one or more sentiments (Negative, Neutral, or Positive) the sentiment
column does not display.
Moderation
178
3. Click the desired sentiment value: negative ( – ), neutral, or positive ( + ).
Note: You can also tune a post's sentiment from the Social Buzz report.
Download Moderation Feed Content
Download the content of a moderation feed to a Microsoft Excel file, including verbatims and the volume of content
within the feed without having to dedupe the Moderation Overview report's exported file contents.
Note: Please contact your Adobe Social Account Manager if you would like this feature enabled.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Locate the feed for which you want to download content.
For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds.
Moderation
179
3. To download posts and their data (verbatims, authors, mentions, retweets, etc. ) in a .csv file, click
Download, then specify the number of posts to download.
>
You can specify as many as 15,000 verbatims per user in a 24-hour period. Data exports mirror any filters set in
Social Buzz interface (time period, terms, etc.) instead of an unfiltered dump of all social listening data.
The data mirrors an export of the Social Buzz report, but the data set is configured by any effective
moderation-feed filters instead of an unfiltered dump of all data.
If you select fewer than 2,000 verbatims, you can open or save the .csv file almost immediately. If you select
more than 2,000 verbatims, a .zip file containing the .csv file is emailed to the specified email address after
the data has been processed. You can also specify a different email address, if necessary.
4. Click Continue to download the file.
Clone a Moderation Feed
Duplicate an existing moderation feed that you can then edit to create a new, similar feed.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Locate the feed that you want to clone.
For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds.
3. Click
> Save As > specify a title for the feed to create a new identical feed, then click Save.
4. At the top of the new feed, click
> Edit, then configure the feed as desired by changing its filters and settings.
For more information, see the appropriate topic:
• Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed
• Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed
• Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed
• Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed
Delete a Moderation Feed
Delete an existing moderation feed that you no longer need.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Locate the feed that you want to delete.
For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds.
3. Click
> Delete > then click Delete Feed to confirm the deletion.
Note: All filter settings will be lost and that you cannot undo the deletion. Instead of deleting feeds, you
can simply close them. To close an open feed, click
> . You can also close feeds from the left rail by
clicking Manage Feeds. You can then open a closed feed at a later time, if needed.
Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets
Moderate individual posts or tweets from your saved moderation feeds.
Moderation
180
Moderate an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet
Moderate an individual post that has been escalated and assigned to an individual user or to a user group for further
follow-up action.
An escalation feed is different from other feeds because it can contain content from different social platforms. For
example, an escalation feed can contain Facebook and LinkedIn posts as well as tweets.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Display an escalation moderation feed.
When a post or tweet is escalated, it can be assigned to an individual user or to a user group for further follow-up
action. If the post or tweet was assigned to you, a Claim badge displays on the post or tweet's tile in an escalation
feed. If the post or tweet was assigned to a user group, an Assign to Me badge displays on the post or tweet's
tile.
Note: For information about enabling streaming or manually refreshing content, see Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds.
3. (Optional) Click
to display only posts in the feed that contain one or more specified words.
4. If the escalated post or tweet was assigned to you, click Claim to move it into your moderation queue.
Or
If the escalated post or tweet was assigned to a user group that you belong to, click Assign to Me to move it
into your moderation queue.
5. (Optional) Click
at the bottom each the tile to see moderation information about that post or tweet.
You can see the name of the user who escalated the content, the date and time that the content was escalated,
the reason for escalation, suggestions on how to handle the content, and additional notes.
6. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon.
Depending on the content's social platform, the icons vary. For more information about the icons and actions for
each platform, see the table in the following topics:
• Moderate an Individual Facebook Post
• Moderate an Individual Tweet
• Moderate an Individual LinkedIn Post
7. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name.
Moderation
181
The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends
on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles and view his or her Klout score.
For more information, see View Social Contact Information.
Moderate an Individual Facebook Post
Moderate an individual post on an owned Facebook page.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Open a Facebook moderation feed.
Note: For information about enabling streaming or manually refreshing content, see Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds.
3. (Optional) Click
to display only posts in the feed that contain one or more specified words.
4. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon:
Icon
Action
Instruction
N/A
Show
Translation
If you create a feed in a language other than the language you are viewing in the
Social UI, or if a post in a different language displays in an existing moderation
feed, click Show Translation in each post's tile to display a machine-generated
translation of that post's text.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation. For a list of
supported languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft
website.
Add Social Tags
Add tags to classify content, both in-feed and on detail pages (by clicking View
Details), to create moderation feeds out of content that has been tagged. You
can also use tags for reporting within the export.
For more information, see Social Tags.
Moderation
Icon
182
Action
Instruction
View Detail
Display the details of the posts, including its moderation history.You can also click
the authors name to view author details and interactions you have had with this
author.
The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The
available information depends on the user's privacy settings.You can also connect
that user's social profiles across different platforms. For more information, see
View Social Contact Information.
Read/Unread
Mark the post as read.
Marking a post as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the
filter feed to display only posts with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon
( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click
that has already been marked as read.
Escalate
to unmark content
Open the escalation controls that let you assign a reason for the escalation, assign
a person to follow up on the post, offer a suggestion, and more.
For more information, see Unified Moderation Workflow.
Comment
Post a public comment to the post on Facebook. Type the message, then click
Comment.
Like/Unlike
Like or unlike the content.
Click
Hide
> Like.
Hide Facebook Posts: Hide or unhide the post from a Facebook page. This is
useful to hide the post without actually deleting it from the page.
Click
> Hide.
After you hide a post, the Hide icon displays in the upper right corner of the post's
tile in the moderation feed and a note on the moderation history records information
about who hid the post and the timestamp of when action was taken.
To unhide the post on a Facebook page, click
tile.
beneath the text on the post's
Hide Facebook Comments: Hide or unhide a comment on a post from a Facebook
page. This is useful to hide the comment without actually deleting it from the page.
When troublesome customers come back to the page, they still see their comments,
but those comments are hidden from everyone else.
Click View x Comment to display a post's comments, > click
comment > Hide.
under the desired
Moderation
Icon
183
Action
Instruction
After you hide a comment, the Hide icon displays in the upper right corner of the
comment's tile in the moderation feed and a note on the moderation history records
information about who hid the post and the timestamp of when action was taken.
To unhide the post on a Facebook page, click
comment's tile.
Delete
beneath the text on the
Delete the post from your owned Facebook page.
Click
> Delete.
You can also create moderation rules that automatically delete posts containing
specified words that you never want to appear on your Facebook pages. For more
information, see Unified Moderation Rules.
Flag/Unflag
Flag or unflag the content.
Click
> Flag.
Flagging a post does not edit or remove it from the feed, but simply marks it for
further consideration. A Flagged icon (
) displays on the right side in each panel.
You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. You can click
unflag content that has already been flagged.
again to
Note: Some posts in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate
an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet.
5. (Optional) Click View Replies to expand the post to display its replies, then moderate the replies as desired.
You can view two levels of replies. For example, you can see the original post, replies to the original post, and
replies to the replies.
6. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name.
The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends
on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles. For more information, see View
Social Contact Information.
Facebook Moderation Limitations
Comments for the following assets are not currently collected or displayed within moderation:
• Cover photo changes.
• Profile picture changes.
• Comments on photo albums (top level).
• Comments made on images contained within a photo album. In some cases, comments made to the first photo
within an album are displayed, but this is only a partial view of comments made on the album and photos contained
within.
Moderation
184
Moderate a Photo Album
Moderate a photo album on an owned Facebook page.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Open a Facebook moderation feed.
Or
Open a moderation feed that has been configured to display photo albums.
Note: For information about enabling streaming or manually refreshing content, see Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds.
3. (Optional) Click
to display only photo albums in the feed that contain one or more specified words.
4. Click the photo album to expand it.
Moderation
5. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon in each photo's pane:
185
Moderation
Icon
186
Action
Add Social Tags
Instruction
Add tags to classify content, both in-feed and on detail pages (by clicking View
Details), to create moderation feeds out of content that has been tagged. You
can also use tags for reporting within the export.
For more information, see Social Tags.
View Detail
Display the details of the posts, including its moderation history.You can also click
the authors name to view author details and interactions you have had with this
author.
The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The
available information depends on the user's privacy settings.You can also connect
that user's social profiles across different platforms. For more information, see
View Social Contact Information.
Read/Unread
Mark the post as read.
Marking a post as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the
filter feed to display only tweets with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon
( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click
that has already been marked as read.
Escalate
to unmark content
Open the escalation controls that let you assign a reason for the escalation, assign
a person to follow up on the tweet, offer a suggestion, and more.
For more information, see Unified Moderation Workflow.
Comment
Post a public comment to the post on Facebook. Type the message, then click
Comment.
Like/Unlike
Like or unlike the content.
Click
Hide
> Like.
Hide or unhide the post from a Facebook page. This is useful to hide the post
without actually deleting it from the page.
Click
> Hide.
Note: This option currently hides top-level posts only. This option does not
hide comments or replies.
After you hide a post, the Hide icon displays in the upper right corner of the post's
tile in the moderation feed and a note on the moderation history records information
about who hid the post and the timestamp of when action was taken.
To unhide the post on a Facebook page, click
tile.
beneath the text on the post's
Moderation
Icon
187
Action
Instruction
Delete
Delete the post from your owned Facebook page.
Click
> Delete.
You can also create moderation rules that automatically delete posts containing
specified words that you never want to appear on your Facebook pages. For more
information, see Unified Moderation Rules.
Flag/Unflag
Flag or unflag the content.
Click
> Flag.
Flagging a post does not edit or remove it from the feed, but simply marks it for
further consideration. A Flagged icon (
) displays on the right side in each panel.
You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. You can click
unflag content that has already been flagged.
again to
Note: Some posts in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate
an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet.
6. (Optional) Click View Replies to expand the post to display its replies, then moderate the replies as desired.
You can view two levels of replies. For example, you can see the original post, replies to the original post, and
replies to the replies.
7. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name.
The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends
on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles. For more information, see View
Social Contact Information.
Facebook Moderation Limitations
Comments for the following assets are not currently collected or displayed within moderation:
• Cover photo changes.
• Profile picture changes.
• Comments on photo albums (top level).
• Comments made on images contained within a photo album. In some cases, comments made to the first photo
within an album are displayed, but this is only a partial view of comments made on the album and photos contained
within.
Moderate an Individual Tweet
Moderate an individual tweet in a Twitter account.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Open a Twitter moderation feed.
Moderation
188
Note: For information about enabling streaming or manually refreshing content, see Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds.
3. (Optional) Click
to display only posts in the feed that contain one or more specified words.
4. (Conditional) Hover over the timestamp on any tweet to view the complete timestamp and display the listening
rule that captured the content. You can also click the timestamp to open Twitter to view the content.
5. (Optional) Click to display only posts in the feed that contain one or more specified words.
6. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon:
Icon
Action
Instruction
N/A
Show
Translation
If you create a feed in a language other than the language you are viewing in the
Social UI, or if a post in a different language displays in an existing moderation
feed, click Show Translation in each post's tile to display a machine-generated
translation of that post's text.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation. For a list of
supported languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft
website.
Add Social
Tags
Add tags to classify content, both in-feed and on detail pages (by clicking View
Details), to create moderation feeds out of content that has been tagged. You
can also use tags for reporting within the export.
For more information, see Social Tags.
View Detail
Display the details of the tweet, including its replies on Twitter and its moderation
history. You can also click to view the tweet on Twitter.
Read/Unread Mark the tweet as read.
Moderation
Icon
189
Action
Instruction
Marking a tweet as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set
the filter feed to display only tweets with a moderation status of Unread. A Read
icon ( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click
content that has already been marked as read.
Escalate
to unmark
Open the escalation controls that let you assign a reason for the escalation, assign
a person to follow up on the tweet, offer a suggestion, and more.
For more information, see Unified Moderation Workflow.
Reply
Post a public reply to the tweet on Twitter. Choose the desired account from which
to reply, type the message, then click Reply.
The Reply From drop-down list is populated with the Twitter accounts that you
have added to the Social report suite. Adding multiple Twitter accounts gives you
the flexibility to moderate or respond to tweets using different Twitter handles. For
example, your organization could have a main Twitter handle and another handle
that is used for customer-support issues. If both of those accounts have been
added to the report suite, a moderator can quickly and easily reply to a tweet using
either handle. You can also specify a default account for all replies in the feed.
For more information, see Add Twitter Accounts and Configure a Twitter Moderation
Feed.
Retweet
Post a public retweet of the original tweet to the followers of one of your Twitter
properties. From the Retweet dialog box, choose the desired property from which
to retweet, then click Retweet.
Click
> Retweet.
The Retweet From drop-down list is populated with the Twitter accounts that you
have added to the Social report suite. Adding multiple Twitter accounts gives you
the flexibility to moderate or respond to tweets using different Twitter handles. For
example, your organization could have a main Twitter handle and another handle
that is used for customer-support issues. If both of those accounts have been
added to the report suite, a moderator can quickly and easily retweet a tweet using
either handle. For more information, see Add Twitter Accounts.
You can optionally click Quote Tweet to edit the tweet before retweeting. There
are differences between unedited and edited retweets. If you do not edit the tweet,
Retweet displays in your Twitter feed verbatim and indicates that it was retweeted
from the property you specified. However, If you edit the tweet, the result is more
like a direct tweet from the specified property (the tweet will automatically be
prefixed with "RT").
You cannot currently schedule a retweet from the Moderation feed. You can,
however, schedule tweets in the Publisher.
Moderation
Icon
190
Action
Instruction
Flag/Unflag
Flag or unflag the content.
Click
> Flag.
Flagging a tweet does not edit or remove the tweet from the feed, but simply marks
it for further consideration. A Flagged icon (
) displays on the right side in each
panel. You can flag content that needs follow-up attention. You can click
to unflag content that has already been flagged.
Direct
Message
again
Send a direct message to an author using the selected account. The user must
follow one of your owned Twitter properties in order for you to direct message him
or her.
Click
> Direct Message.
You can also direct message a Twitter user from the user's author detail page.
Note that unlike a tweet with its 140-character limit, you can include up to 10,000
characters in a direct message.
Favorite
Publicly favorite the tweet on Twitter.
Click
> Favorite.
Choose the desired property from which to favorite the content, then click Favorite.
Mark as
Spam
Mark the content as spam. This prevents the author from following or replying to
any of your configured Twitter accounts. It also sends a "spam request" to Twitter.
Twitter personnel can then take action on the content.
Click
> Mark as Spam.
You can also mark a user as spam from the user's author detail page. For more
information, see Mark a Twitter User as Spam.
Note: Some tweets in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate
an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet.
7. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name.
The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends
on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles. For more information, see View
Social Contact Information.
Mark a Twitter User as Spam
Mark a Twitter user as spam.
This action reports the user as a spammer to Twitter so that Twitter can take further action, if necessary. This action
also blocks this user from following or replying to your Twitter account.
You can mark a Twitter user as spam from a Twitter moderation feed or from the Twitter author's detail page.
Moderation
191
To mark a user as spam from a Twitter moderation feed
See Moderate an Individual Tweet.
To mark a user as spam from the author's detail page
1. Display the desired Twitter moderation feed.
2. Click the user's avatar image or name to display the author's detail page.
3.
Click , click
, then click Mark User as Spam.
4. Click Mark as Spam to confirm the action.
5. Click
to return to the moderation feed.
Direct Message a Twitter User
Send a direct message to a Twitter user.
A direct message is a private message sent via Twitter. You can send direct messages only to authors who follow
at least one of your owned Twitter accounts that are registered with Social. You can receive direct messages only
from authors you follow.
Note that unlike a tweet with its 140-character limit, you can include up to 10,000 characters in a direct message.
This feature lets you better handle issues privately without having to leave Social and switch to an email application.
You can direct message a Twitter user from a Twitter moderation feed or from the Twitter author's detail page.
To display direct messages in a feed
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Configure or edit a Twitter moderation feed.
Ensure that you select Direct Messages from the Feed Type drop-down list. Configure the other settings as
desired.
When you work with direct-message moderation feeds, keep in mind that Twitter imposes rate limits on server calls
to its platform through APIs. You most likely won't exceed Twitter's rate limit for most types of calls. However, be
aware that the rate limit to display, refresh, or use the infinite scroll feature to load additional direct messages is
currently 15 requests per Twitter account every 15 minutes. If you exceed this limit, you will receive the following
error message:
Twitter Account @account has exceeded its Rate Limit. Please try again later.
Keep in mind that if other Social users in your organization are using the Unified Moderation feature to load or refresh
direct messages, their server calls also count towards this per-Twitter-account limit.
To direct message a user from a Twitter moderation feed
1. Click
> Direct Message.
For more information, see Moderate an Individual Tweet.
To direct message a user from the author's detail page
1. Display the desired Twitter moderation feed.
2. Click the user's avatar image or name to display the author's detail page.
3.
Click , click
, then click Direct Message.
Moderation
192
4. Specify the text and send the message.
5. Click
to return to the moderation feed.
Moderate an Individual LinkedIn Post
Moderate an individual post on a LinkedIn company page.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Open a LinkedIn moderation feed.
Note: For information about enabling streaming or manually refreshing content, see Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds.
3. To perform actions on an individual post, hover over the desired content to display additional options. On a tablet
or mobile device, touch the desired content to display additional options.
4. (Optional) Click
to display only posts in the feed that contain one or more specified words.
5. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate icon:
Icon
Action
Instruction
N/A
Show
Translation
If you create a feed in a language other than the language you are viewing in the
Social UI, or if a post in a different language displays in an existing moderation
feed, click Show Translation in each post's tile to display a machine-generated
translation of that post's text.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation. For a list of
supported languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft
website.
Add Social
Tags
Add tags to classify content, both in-feed and on detail pages (by clicking View
Details), to create moderation feeds out of content that has been tagged. You
can also use tags for reporting within the export.
Moderation
Icon
193
Action
Instruction
For more information, see Social Tags.
View Detail
Displays the details of the posts, including its moderation history. You can also
click the authors name to view author details and interactions you have had with
this author.
Read/Unread Marks the post as read.
Marking a post as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set the
filter feed to display only tweets with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon
( ) displays on the right side in the panel. You can click
that has already been marked as read.
to unmark content
Add Comment Posts a public reply to the post on your LinkedIn company page. Choose the
desired account from which to reply, type the message, then click Reply.
The Comment From drop-down list is populated with the LinkedIn accounts that
you have added to the Social report suite. Adding multiple accounts gives you the
flexibility to moderate or respond to post using different LinkedIn accounts. For
example, your organization could have a main account and another account that
is used for customer-support issues. If both of those accounts have been added
to the report suite, a moderator can quickly and easily reply using either account.
For more information, see Add LinkedIn Company Pages.
Note: Some posts in the feed indicate that they have been escalated. For more information, see Moderate
an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet.
6. (Optional) Click View Replies to expand the post to display its replies, then moderate the replies as desired.
7. (Optional) View author details inside Social by clicking the author's avatar image or name.
The author detail includes a list of the user's information and recent posts. The available information depends
on the user's privacy settings. You can also connect that user's social profiles. For more information, see View
Social Contact Information.
Moderate Multiple Posts using Bulk Actions
Moderate content by selecting multiple posts and tweets to perform the same action in bulk. You can mark content
as read, unread, flagged, or unflagged.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
You can perform bulk actions in both moderation queue layouts (list or column). Up to 30 posts and tweets display
in each moderation feed by default. Scroll to the bottom to load additional content, if additional content is available
for loading.
Note: For information about enabling streaming or manually refreshing content, see Stream or Manually
Refresh Moderation Feeds.
Moderation
194
2. To perform bulk actions on more than one post or tweet, click
in the toolbar to enable bulk-selection mode.
3. (Optional) Click
to display only posts in the feed that contain one or more specified words.
4. Click the panel for each post or tweet on which you want to perform bulk actions.
5. Perform the desired action by clicking the appropriate button on the toolbar:
Read: Mark the content as read. Marking content as read does not remove it from the feed, unless you have set
the filter feed to display only content with a moderation status of Unread. A Read icon (
side in each panel.
) displays on the right
Unread: Mark the content as unread. Marking content as unread removes the Read icon (
the right side in each panel.
Flag: Flag the content. Flagging content does not remove it from the feed. A Flagged icon (
right side in each panel. You can flag content that needs follow-up attention.
) that displays on
) displays on the
Unflag: Unflag the content.
6. To exit bulk-selection mode, click
on the toolbar.
Stream or Manually Refresh Moderation Feeds
You can stream individual moderation feeds to automatically refresh the feed with new content.You can also manually
refresh posts in saved moderation feeds using an actionable indicator that lets you know when new content is
available.
You can enable or disable streaming for each moderation feed. For example, you can enable streaming for relatively
slow-moving feeds. Higher-volume feeds (especially Twitter feeds) might refresh posts at such a rapid rate that it
Moderation
195
makes the feeds difficult to moderate. If this is the situation, disable streaming for those feeds.You can then manually
refresh posts on an individual-feed basis. A good use case for enabling streaming is for live events that you are
following.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation.
2. Locate the feed for which you want to enable or disable streaming.
For more information, see Display Moderation Feeds.
The number of unrefreshed posts displays next to the feed name.
3. Click
, the click Turn Streaming On or Turn Steaming Off, as desired.
If you enable streaming for a feed, the feed refreshes only when you are viewing the top or bottom posts in a
feed. If you are currently viewing posts in the middle of a feed, posts are not automatically refreshed until you
manually refresh the feed or use the scroll bar to return to the top or move to bottom of the feed. This behavior
prevents your feed from constantly refreshing, which could cause you to lose your place in the feed.
The number of unrefreshed posts displays next to the feed name. A feed can be unrefreshed because streaming
was disabled or you are viewing posts in the middle of a feed that has streaming enabled.
4. To manually refresh the feed, click the number in the blue box.
Or
Click
, then click Refresh.
Or
To refresh a feed that has streaming enabled, but you are viewing posts in the middle of the list, scroll to the top
or bottom of the list and the feed automatically refreshes.
Moderation
196
Depending on the platform, the amount of time after posting that new content is available for display in moderation
feeds and reports varies.
Twitter: Tweets are retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed almost immediately after they are
posted to Twitter. Twitter Direct Messages are retrieved and available for display within 15 minutes after they are
posted.
Facebook: Posts, comments, and private messages are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation
feed on average within 7 to 15 minutes after they are posted to Facebook. Social queries for new data frequently,
but Facebook provides no guarantee of any specific response time. Also, because it is a 3rd-party network, there
are a variety of other factors that can affect latency of content from Facebook, resulting in periods where Social will
collect data faster than seven minutes and periods where it will take longer than seven minutes.
LinkedIn: Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in the Moderation feed on average
within 45 minutes after they are posted to LinkedIn. Social queries for new data frequently, but LinkedIn's APIs are
relatively new and still a work-in-progress. For this reason, there will be periods when Social will collect data faster
than 45 minutes and periods when it will take longer than 45 minutes.
View Social Contact Information
View data about individual authors, including emotion and sentiment information, posts captured by your listening
rules, interactions you have had with this user, and more.
1. Display the desired moderation feed.
2. Click the user's avatar image or name to display the author's detail page.
Moderation
197
3. Click Add/Edit Tags to assign or remove tags from this user's social contact profile.
For more information, see Social Tags.
4. View platform-specific information.
Note that the available information varies by platform and user.
For Twitter, you can mark the user as spam, direct message the user, or edit followers (follow or unfollow this
user from all Twitter accounts to which you have access).
5. (Conditional) View comments or write a new comment.
View previous comments about that user posted by Social users in your organization. You can also create new
comments by typing in the Write a Comment box and by pressing Enter. Comments are viewable only in the
Social product by moderators in your organization. Facebook fans and Twitter followers, for example, cannot
see comments.
6. View the Emotion Breakdown reportlet.
The Emotion Breakdown reportlet displays a wheel chart displaying the percentage of posts, comments, and
tweets from this author that Social has classified in different emotional categories based on Plutchik's wheel of
emotions.
Note: The Emotion widget is a feature currently being developed and fine-tuned by the Social team. This
widget is included in this Social release as a sneak-peek.
Moderation
198
The Emotion widget provides more insight into the content of an author's posts and tweets. Social uses a
proprietary algorithm that uses a combination of linguistic analysis and psychology to classify content in the
following emotional categories: Joy, Admiration, Fear, Surprise, Sadness, Disgust, Anger, and Anticipation.
7. View the Average Sentiment reportlet.
The Average Sentiment reportlet contains a meter that displays the average sentiment for the author's posts and
tweets.
For more information about how sentiment and how scores are calculated, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
8. Use the All Posts drop-down list to display the following:
All Posts: Displays all posts, including relevant posts and recent interactions.
Relevant Posts: Displays a list of the user's posts and tweets that match your active listening rules.
Interactions: Displays all posts across social properties that the user has made and with whom you have had
interactions using Social. Interactions include liking, replying to, claiming, resolving, and so forth.
9. Use the All Platforms drop-down list to display posts only from the selected platform, for example, Twitter or
Facebook posts only.
10. Moderate the content as desired.
You can moderate the user's content directly from the social user profile without returning to the moderation feed.
For more information about moderating individual posts and tweets, see Moderate an Individual Facebook Post,
Moderate an Individual Tweet, and Moderate an Individual LinkedIn Post.
11. Click
to return to the moderation feed.
Edit Accounts That Follow a Twitter User
While viewing a Twitter user's social user profile, add or remove owned Twitter accounts that follow this user.
1. Display the desired moderation feed.
2. Click the Twitter user's avatar image or name to display the author's detail page.
3. Click the Twitter icon
to display more options.
4. Click Edit Followers to display the Edit Accounts That Follow dialog box.
Moderation
199
In this illustration, two accounts are following this user.
5. (Conditional) To follow the user, click the desired account.
A check displays next to the account.
6. (Conditional) To unfollow the user, click an account that is already following the user to remove the check.
7. Click Save.
Troubleshoot Moderation Feeds
Information to help you troubleshoot moderation feeds and issues.
The following list offers suggestions to solve common issues when moderating feeds:
Posts and Tweets Missing from Moderation Feeds
Reasons why posts and tweets might be missing from your moderation feeds include the following:
• A post or tweet does not display in the feed based on your current filter conditions.
A post or tweet might not display in a moderation feed based on actions moderators have previously taken. For
example, if the post or tweet was marked as read, it is hidden from the feed unless you select Read from the
Moderation Status filter section.
As another example, a tweet might not display in a moderation feed based on its number of followers. If a tweet
was tweeted from a user with 500 followers, it is hidden from the feed unless you select 101 - 1K from the Followers
filter section.
These are just two examples of why posts and tweets might not display in a moderation feed. Other examples
could include that you have specified a time range or sentiment value in the filter.
As best practice, you should always check your filtering options if you suspect that posts or tweets are missing
from the feed. For more information, see the appropriate topic:
• Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed
• Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed
Moderation
200
• Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed
• Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed
After you display the post tweet in the moderation feed by adjusting its filter conditions, you can view a tweet's
moderation history by viewing its details. From the moderation feed, click
in the post or tweet's panel.
Unified Moderation Rules
Manage moderation rules to automatically delete, escalate or send a notification based on a watch-word list. You
can create a new rule, change a rule's status (active or inactive), edit a rule, or delete a rule.
Note: Posts and comments are usually retrieved and available for display in Social on average within seven
minutes after they are posted to Facebook, although the amount of time can be longer or shorter based on
many different factors (see Stream or Manually Refresh Moderation Feeds). Social performs the appropriate
action (auto-delete, escalate, or send notifications) immediately after Social retrieves the content.
The Rules page (Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules) displays your moderation rules and provides details
about each rule (rule name, number of tracked terms, platform, and status).
To create a new rule, click Add New Rule, then follow the instructions in Create Auto-Delete Moderation Rules.
To activate or deactivate a rule, slide the Activate toggle to the desired position.
To edit an existing rule, click the desired rule's name in the Name column. For more information about each option,
see Create Auto-Delete Moderation Rules and Create Auto-Notification Moderation Rules.
To delete one or more rules, select the desired rules, click
, then confirm the deletion.
Create Auto-Delete Moderation Rules
Create moderation rules that automatically delete posts containing specified words that you never want to appear
on your Facebook pages.
Note: As a best practice, we recommend that you allow only Admin users the permissions necessary to define
moderation rules. For more information, see Add User Group, Permissions, and Members.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules.
2. Click Add New Rule > Auto Delete.
Moderation
201
3. Fill in the fields:
Display Name: Specify a descriptive name for the moderation rule.
Platforms: Select All Pages to apply this rule to all of your owned Facebook pages, or select Specific Pages
then select one or more Facebook pages to apply this rule to those pages only.
Filters: Specify the desired keywords. Specify a word, press Enter, then specify a new word. You can also paste
a list that you created in Word or a text editor into the box. Click Use Adobe Social Default "Bad Words" List
to use a pre-populated list. You can add or remove words from the default list, as needed.
Email: Specify one or more email address. Notification messages are sent to these addresses when a post is
automatically removed from the specified Facebook pages based on this rule. Separate multiple email addresses
with commas.
Note: As best practice, we recommend that you leverage the email notification feature, especially when
creating new rules, so that you can monitor the content being deleted. You can then adjust the rules as
necessary.
4. Click Save.
Moderation
202
A message displays informing you that the rule was successfully created but not activated. Click Activate or No,
Activate Later. If you choose to activate this rule at a later time, use the Activate toggle on the Rules page
(Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules) to activate the rule.
After you activate this rule, Social scans for direct keyword matches and automatically deletes all top-level posts,
comments, and replies (regardless of the author) on your owned Facebook pages based on the settings in the
rule.
Create Auto-Notification Moderation Rules
Create moderation rules that automatically send notification messages to one or more email addresses if content
is posted containing specified words to your owned Facebook pages.
You can add any words that you want to follow on your Facebook pages. For example, you can add product names,
competitor names, or "bad" words that you want to look at in context before deciding what action to take.
Note: As a best practice, we recommend that you allow only Admin users the permissions necessary to define
moderation rules. For more information, see Add User Group, Permissions, and Members.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules.
2. Click Add New Rule > Auto Notification.
Moderation
203
3. Fill in the fields:
Display Name: Specify a descriptive name for the moderation rule.
Platforms: Fill in the fields:
Field
All Pages
Details
Apply this rule to all of your owned Facebook pages.
Moderation
204
Field
Specific Pages
Facebook Audience
Select Post Type
Details
Select one or more Facebook pages to apply this rule to those pages only.
Select one or more Facebook audiences to apply this rule to those audiences only.
Select Post to apply this rule to Facebook posts only.
Select Comments/Replies to apply this rule to Facebook comments or replies to
comments only.
Select Private Message to apply this rule to Facebook private messages only.
Social applies this rule to all three post types if you do not explicitly select one or more
types.
Filters: Specify the desired keywords. Specify a word, press Enter, then specify a new word. You can also paste
a list that you created in Word or a text editor into the box. Click Use Adobe Social Default "Bad Words" List
to use a pre-populated list. You can add or remove words from the default list, as needed.
Email: Specify one or more email addresses.You can also include an email distribution list. Notification messages
are sent to these addresses when a post contains a filtered word on the specified Facebook pages based on this
rule. Separate multiple email addresses with commas.
Note: As best practice, we recommend that you leverage the email notification feature, especially when
creating new rules, so that you can monitor the content triggering notifications. You can then adjust the
rules as necessary.
4. Click Save.
A message displays informing you that the rule was successfully created but not activated. Click Activate or No,
Activate Later. If you choose to activate this rule at a later time, use the Activate toggle on the Rules page
(Moderation > Unified Moderation Rules) to activate the rule.
Unified Moderation Workflow
Use the Escalation page to configure the Escalation controls that display when you click Escalate while moderating
a post or a tweet. You can choose which reasons and suggestions display and specify the default assignee for each
reason. You can also add new reasons or suggestions to the controls.
You must configure the Escalation features in Social before you can escalate tweets. For more information, see
Configure Escalation Management.
Note: To be able to configure Escalation controls (add new Escalation Reasons and Suggested Actions),
the user must be an Administrative user in Adobe Analytics and have the Moderation > Can Edit Unified
Moderation Settings permission enabled. For more information, see Add User Group, Permissions, and
Members.
1. Click Moderation > Unified Moderation Workflow.
Moderation
205
2. In the Escalation Reason field, specify the reason that you want to display in the Escalation controls.
You can create multiple reasons, such as "Assign to Customer Support," "Offer Refund," "Need More Information,"
and so forth.
3. For each reason, select the default assignee from the Assign To drop-down list.
The assignee can be anyone who is a user in the account or a user group. When you or someone in your
organization escalates a post or tweet, the escalation is assigned to default assignee unless another user or user
group is explicitly assigned.
4. (Conditional) To add additional reasons, click the add icon ( ), specify the reason's label, then specify the default
assignee. To delete the existing reason, click the cancel icon ( ).
5. In the Suggested Action panel, specify the suggested action that you want to display in the Escalation controls.
While moderating, you can select an action for each tweet.
6. (Conditional) To add additional suggestions, click the add icon (
suggestion, click the cancel icon ( ).
7. Click Save.
), then specify the label. To delete the existing
After completing the steps in this topic, you can assign escalation actions within the individual moderation feeds.
For more information, see Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets.
Configure Escalation Management
Configure the Escalation Management features in the Adobe Analytics Admin Tools.
1. Click Settings > Marketing Cloud Users & Groups.
2. Click Edit Groups.
Moderation
206
3. Click Add New User Group to display the Define User Group page.
4. In the Group Name field, specify "EscalationModerators" as the label.
"EscalationModerators" must be specified exactly as indicated: same letter casing and no spaces.
5. In the Group Description field, specify a label, such as "Unified Moderation."
6. In the Assign User Logins section, add available users to the Group Members box.
7. Click Save Group.
Note that changes take an hour to update in Adobe Social.
You do not need to specify a report suite or any other settings. The settings you configure apply to your entire
company.
When you select Escalate while moderating a post or tweet, you will notice that the users that you added to the
group are synchronized and can be selected from the Assign To drop-down list.
Settings
207
Settings
Configure settings to enable social monitoring of terms, publishing applications, interacting with social media users,
and more.
Properties
Use the options on the Properties page to configure settings for one or more properties. You can configure the
property's image, owner, report suite, and publish approval workflow for one or more pages.
For Facebook pages you can enable or disable prediction and change the publisher if you are logged in as a user
who is listed as an authorizer of the Facebook page.
Display Managed Properties
Display and filter Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo properties you manage in a
unified view.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
By default, all properties you manage using your Social account display when you access the Properties page
for the first time. You can use the filter check options or the Search feature to limit the number of displayed
properties or to search for a specific property. When you access the Properties page in the future after filtering
the list, the filters you specified are honored (you will see a filtered list of properties).
Click the Property header to sort the list of properties alphabetically in ascending or descending order. Use the
View Page drop-down list to configure how many properties you want to display per page. Use the Page controls
to view additional pages, if necessary.
The following columns display:
• Property
• Report Suite
• Owner
• Authorizers
You can edit the thumbnail image for the property, owners, report suite, publish approval workflow, and prediction
settings. See Configure Property Settings.
2. (Conditional) Click Show Filters to filter the property list.
Select the desired options:
Search Properties: Start typing the desired property name to display its settings in the right panel.
Platforms: Select one or more check boxes to filter the list by platform. Only properties for the selected platforms
display.
• Facebook
• Twitter
• Google+
• LinkedIn
• YouTube
• Sina Weibo
Settings
208
Settings: Select one or more check boxes to filter the list by settings.
• Approval On
• Approval Off
• Prediction On
• Prediction Off
Owners: Select one or more names from the drop-down list to display only those properties that are owned by
the selected owners.
Authorizers: Select one or more names from the drop-down list to display only those properties that require
authorization by the selected names.
Report Suites: Select one or more report suites from the drop-down list to display only those properties in the
selected report suites.
Publishing Workflows: Select one or more workflows from the drop-down list to display only those properties
that use the selected publishing workflows.
Authorization: Select one or more check boxes to filter the list by authorization status.
• Needs Authorization
• Is Authorized
3. (Optional) Click Download to save an Excel file containing information about your managed properties.
4. Click Hide Filters to close the filters pane.
Add Properties
Add social media properties that you want to manage using Social.
Note: To add a new properties, the logged-in user must have full administrative privileges in the Adobe Digital
Marketing Cloud.
Add Facebook Pages
Add a new Facebook page to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to that page and to moderate its
posts.
Before you can add a Facebook page to Social, you must grant Facebook permissions.
1. Log in to your Facebook account.
2. From the Adobe Marketing Cloud, start Social.
See Signing In to Social.
If you do not log in to Facebook before logging in to Social and try to perform an action that requires authorization,
such as adding a Facebook page to Social, a Request for Permission dialog box displays. Note that some
browsers suppress pop-ups unless you explicitly allow them to display (such as by clicking Allow at the top of
the browser window). Follow the instructions on the Facebook dialog box to grant the necessary permissions.
Before you an use Social to publish to a Facebook page or moderate its posts, you must add a new Facebook page
to Social.
Settings
209
1. If you have not already done so, complete the steps above to grant Facebook permissions.
2. Click Settings > Properties.
3. Click New Property > Facebook.
A Facebook web page displays that allows Social to publish to those pages for which you have administrator
rights. You can allow an unlimited number of Facebook pages.
4. Click Allow Access.
Add Twitter Accounts
Add a new Twitter account to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to that Twitter account and to
moderate its tweets.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
2. Click New Property > Twitter.
A Twitter web page displays that you use to sign in and authorize Social to publish to your Twitter account. You
can authorize an unlimited number of Twitter accounts.
3. Specify the username or email address for the Twitter account that you want to authorize, specify the password,
then click Authorize App.
4. Select the report suite to which this account is to be assigned.
5. Select the owner for this account. You can select an individual user or a user group.
After you authorize Social, you are directed back to the Social user interface, where you should see the new Twitter
account listed.
Delete or Update Twitter Accounts
Information to help you if you delete or update Twitter accounts or usernames to ensure that Adobe Social collects
data as expected.
This section contains the following information:
• Delete and Deactivate a Twitter Account
• Change or Rebrand a Twitter Account's Username
Delete and Deactivate a Twitter Account
If you deactivate a Twitter account, Twitter retains your user data for 30 days before it is permanently deleted.
To ensure that requests are no longer made within this 30-day grace period, you must revoke access to Adobe
Social. Revoking access ensures that the account is not re-activated. Accounts are permanently deleted 30 days
from the date they were deactivated.
To revoke access to Social perform the following steps prior to deactivating the account on Twitter:
1. Navigate to the following URL:
https://twitter.com/settings/applications
2. (Conditional) Log in to Twitter, if necessary.
3. Locate Adobe Social by Adobe Systems.
4. Click Revoke Access.
Settings
210
Note: If you want to continue to access historical data and perform queries using the deactivated Twitter
account, do not remove the Twitter account from Social: (Settings > Properties). You can leave the property
in an unauthorized state. After you no longer need access to the data, you can remove the account from Adobe
Social.
Change or Rebrand a Twitter Account's Username
After changing or rebranding a Twitter username (handle), the new property will be treated as a separate property
within Adobe Social.
The following procedure is recommended when changing a Twitter username:
On Twitter:
1. Navigate to the following URL:
https://twitter.com/settings/applications
2. (Conditional) Log in to Twitter, if necessary.
3. Update the username as desired.
4. Click Save Changes.
In Adobe Social:
1. Click Settings > Properties.
2. Add the updated Twitter account.
For more information, see Add Twitter Accounts.
3. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
4. Locate any scheduled posts that leverage the Twitter account with the previous username.
For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
5. Click each post to expand it, then change its social property (replace the old property with the updated property).
Updating the property ensures that scheduled posts are displayed in Post Analytics using the updated property
after being published. If this step is not carried out, posts will be published, but will be associated with the property
prior to updating.
The following information applies to updated properties:
• Post Analytics and its downloaded report will continue to display the username that was used at the time of
publishing/scheduling. If you want to continue to access historical data and perform queries using the old username,
do not remove the Twitter account from Social (Settings > Properties). After you no longer need access to the
data, you can remove the account from Social.
• In Adobe Analytics you will still be able to pull reports using the Twitter ID because that is unchanged. For example,
Adobe Marketing Cloud > View All Reports > Social > Owned Social Reports > Owned Property IDs Reports >
Owned Property IDs. The Property Name report reflects the updated name if that was also modified as part of the
rebranding. The Property Name is the name supplied in Twitter under Profile > Edit (not to be confused with the
username/handle).
Settings
211
Add Google+ Pages
Add a new Google+ page to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to that Google+ page and moderate
its posts.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
2. Click New Property > Google+.
You might be required to log in to your Google+ account. A Google web page displays that you use to allow
Social to publish to those pages for which you have administrator rights. You can allow an unlimited number of
Google+ pages.
3. Click Allow Access.
Add LinkedIn Company Pages
Add a new LinkedIn company page to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to that LinkedIn page and
moderate its posts.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
2. Click New Property > LinkedIn.
A LinkedIn web page displays that allows Social to publish to those pages for which you have administrator rights.
You can allow an unlimited number of pages.
3. Specify the email address and password for your LinkedIn account.
4. Click Allow Access to allow Social to access your LinkedIn Profile Overview (name, photo, headline, and current
position), network updates, and group discussions.
Add YouTube Channels
Add a new YouTube channel to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish content to those channels and
to moderate its posts.
1. Click Settings > YouTube.
2. Click New Property > YouTube.
A web page displays that you use to sign in and authorize Social to publish to your YouTube channels. You can
authorize an unlimited number of channels.
3. Specify the email address for the account whose channels you want to authorize, select the channel, then click
Continue..
4. Review the information, then click Accept.
Social requires permission to do the following:
• View basic information about your account
• Manage your YouTube account
• View YouTube Analytics reports for your YouTube content
• View and manage your assets and associated content on YouTube
5. Select the owner for this channel.
You can select an individual user or a user group.
Settings
212
Add Sina Weibo Accounts
Add a new Sina Weibo account to Adobe Social so that you can use Social to publish to those accounts.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
2. Click New Property > Sina Weibo.
A Sina Weibo web page displays that you use to sign in and authorize Social to publish to your Sina Weibo
account. You can authorize an unlimited number of Sina Weibo accounts.
3. Specify the account name and password for the Sina Weibo account that you want to authorize, then click Sign
In..
4. Select the owner for this account.
You can select an individual user or a user group.
Configure Property Settings
Use the options on the settings page to configure settings for one or more properties.You can configure the property's
image, owner, report suite, and publish approval workflow for one or more pages. For Facebook pages, you can
enable or disable prediction.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
2. Locate the desired property for which you want to configure settings, then click anywhere in the row to enter
editing mode.
Or
To configure settings for more than one property, select the check boxes next to the desired property names,
then click Edit Selected.
3. Edit the settings as desired:
Thumbnail: Select an option:
• Default Image: Use the property's default image as the thumbnail in Social.
• Custom Image: Browse for and select an image from your computer to use as the property's thumbnail in
Social.
Owner: Select the new owner from the drop-down list. The property owner owns the property in Social and can
publish and manage the property. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
Report Suite: Select the new report suite from the drop-down list. A report suite is the most fundamental level
of segmentation in Adobe reporting. Each report suite refers to a dedicated set of tables that are populated in
Adobe's collection servers.
Publish Approval: Select None or select a publishing workflow. If you select a publishing workflow, all content
posted to this page must be approved before posting. Posting approval is an optional feature in Social. If your
property in Social has the posting approval feature enabled, you can configure posts that need approval.
Posts that must be approved have a Pending Approval status. Posts need to be approved if, during creation,
the Approval option was set or if a user who has user group permissions to create posts, but not to approve his
or her own posts for publishing, creates a post.
When a post is configured that requires approval, it is displayed in the Content Calendar, where you can approve
or reject the post. See Content Calendar List View.
Settings
213
Publisher: (Facebook only) Select the publisher from the drop-down list. This is the name of the publisher that
appears on Facebook. In order to configure this setting you must be logged in as an authorizer of the Facebook
page.
Prediction: (Facebook only) Turn Prediction on or off, depending on whether you want to use the Post Predictions
feature in the publisher. The Post Predictions feature dynamically predicts the performance of your post. As
you adjust post text, content, or the schedule, the Post Predictions section automatically updates. For more
information, see the Post Predictions row in Publisher.
4. Click Save.
Delete Properties
Delete one or more Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, or Sina Weibo properties from your Social
account.
Note: Deleting a property removes the property from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish
to that property or moderate its content. All content that you have scheduled for posting on the selected property
is also deleted. Removing a property from Social does not delete the property from the platform. For example,
deleting a Facebook page from Social does not delete the page from Facebook.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
By default, all properties for your account display when you access the Properties page for the first time. You
can use the filter check boxes or the Search feature to limit the number of displayed properties or to search for
a specific property. When you access the Properties page in the future after filtering the list, the filters you specified
are honored (you will see a filtered list of properties). See Display Managed Properties.
2. Select the check boxes next to the desired properties, then click Delete Selected.
3. Confirm the deletion.
Re-authorize Properties
Re-authorize a Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, or Sina Weibo property and grant permissions after
making a change to the property, such as changing your password.
Note: As best practice, we recommend that you log out of all of your property accounts before performing
the steps in this procedure. If you are logged in to other accounts, you can easily authorize accounts that you
do not want to manage using Social. As you perform these steps, you will be able to explicitly log in to the
desired accounts.
1. Click Settings > Properties.
By default, all properties for your account display. If a property needs to be re-authorized, a warning icon (
displays next to its name.
)
2. (Conditional) Click Show Filters, then select Needs Authorization under Authorization to display only properties
that need re-authorization.
3. Click the warning icon ( ) that displays next to the property's name.
4. Click Re-authorize this Property at the top of the page.
Settings
214
(Facebook only) A prompt displays asking if you want to leave the Property Management page if you are trying
to re-authorize a Facebook page. Managing property authorization for a Facebook page requires leaving the
Property Management page and all pending changes will be lost. Click Yes to continue. This prompt does not
display for other platforms and you are not required to leave the Property Management page.
Note: In order to re-authorize a Facebook page, a user must be a Admin or Editor in Facebook. For more
information, see the Facebook Help Center website.
5. Follow the prompts from the property (Facebook, Twitter, and so forth) to grant permissions and to re-authorize
the account.
6. Ensure that any previously scheduled posts are still visible in the Content CalendarList View.
For more information, see Content Calendar List View.
Listening Rules
Manage your active and inactive rules, add rules to track one by one using the Add tab, and add multiple rules in
bulk by using the Bulk tab.
The Rules Builder lets you create complex rules to track activities on the social web. You can continue tracking
keywords mentioned on the social web as you could in previous versions of Social. However, the Rules Builder lets
you track activities not associated with keywords, for example tweets that originated within a geographic boundary.
For example, a city's Tourism department might want to monitor all tweets that are tweeted in its downtown area.
Or, a members of a sporting team's public relations department might want to monitor all tweets that are tweeted
within a specified distance of its venue.
The possibilities are nearly limitless. For a list of all of the different filter types you can use to create rules, see Filter
List.
Add Rules to Track
Add individual rules to track activities on the social web.
Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to use the Rule Builder, see Listening Enhancements.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
2. Click the Add tab.
3. Fill in the fields:
• Display Name
• Platforms
• Collection Dates
• Filters
• Campaigns
• Classifications and Tags
.
Settings
215
Note: Click the
icons in the user interface to access online Help.
4. Click Add Rule to add the term to the Active Terms list.
5. Add additional rules, as desired, by repeating the instructions in this topic.
Data should begin populating in reports within five to ten minutes after you add the rule.
Settings
216
Display Name
Specify the name for this rule. The name you specify displays in Social reports.
This name is not unique and can contain as many as 255 characters.
In previous versions of Social, each term displayed in reports included the actual term and all inclusions and
exclusions. Using "pretty" display names helps make your reports more readable.
As explained in Platforms, you can create several rules that collect mentions of the same keywords by listening on
different social platforms (such as Twitter, G+, Instagram, and so forth). Creating multiple rules targeting different
platforms lets you add additional filter types to rules to target and narrow your results. These individual rules can
have the same name so that information about collected activities is grouped in Social reports.
For example, if you create a rule named "Adobe Sweepstakes" that collects mentions of "adobe" and "sweepstakes"
from several platforms (MetaCafe, G+, YouTube, etc.), you can also create a rule with the same name that collects
mentions of "adobe" and "sweepstakes" from only Twitter to take advantage of the geo capabilities of this platform.
Because both of these rules have the same name, when you look at the Social Buzz report, for example, the mentions
that both rules collected are grouped with the same display name, "Adobe Sweepstakes." When you create rules
with the same name, you are basically creating classifications for reporting purposes.
Platforms
Select one or more social platforms on which you want Social to listen for this rule.
Be aware that the available filter types (discussed below) depend on the selected platforms. If you select more than
one platform, the available filter types include only those types that are applicable for all selected platforms. For this
reason, as best practice, you might want to create keywords to collect brand names and select multiple providers,
because the Keyword filter type is available for most providers. However, you might want to create multiple, similar
rules that listen on different platforms to take advantage of the additional filter types that are available for specific
platforms.
For example, Twitter lets you add geo filters. However, if you select DailyMotion and Twitter as providers, you cannot
use the geo filter functionality for this rule because DailyMotion does not support this functionality. Another example
is if you want to use the Word Proximity filter type so that only mentions that contain two terms in close proximity
Settings
217
in a post are collected. This filter is available for Disqus and Twitter only. If you select these two providers, but also
select YouTube, you cannot use the Word Proximity filter type for this rule.
Social currently supports the following platforms:
Supported Platforms
DailyMotion
Google +
Disqus
Flickr
1
Instagram
Reddit
WordPress
VK
YouTube
MetaCafe
2
Twitter
3
Adobe plans to add more social platforms to this list in the future. If there is a particular platform that you would like
us to add, contact your Account Manager.
1
For Instagram posts, you cannot use the following characters:
spaces
- (hyphen, minus, or dash)
: (colon)
* (asterisk)
@ (at symbol)
% (percent symbol)
$ (dollar sign)
& (ampersand)
( (open parentheses)
) (close parentheses)
. (period)
\ (backslash)
2
Social listens on sites hosted by WordPress.com and powered by WordPress.org.
3
If you choose Twitter as one of your selected platforms, the Twitter Preview automatically displays.
Collection Dates
Specify the start and end dates to specify a date range for which you want to collect data for this rule. You can
choose to backfill Twitter data.
In the Start Date and End Date boxes, specify the date range for which you want to start and stop collecting data
for the rule. Or, you can click
, then specify the desired dates. The End Date is optional. If you do not specify an
end date, the rule will be tracked forever, unless you delete the rule from Social, which moves the rule to the inactive
list.
Settings
218
Using a start and end date lets you track rules for the duration of a special campaign. For example, if you have a
Summer campaign that runs during the months of June, July, and August, you can set the starting date as June 1
and the end date at August 31. Data for this rule will be tracked only during the specified time range.
If you add a new term without backfilling data, that term will start collecting data immediately and you should see
results in your reporting within approximately two hours.
If you choose to backfill data, the process will take longer. Twitter data will be backfilled for the previous 30 days.
You cannot backfill data for other social platforms. For more information, see Backfilling Twitter Data.
If no tweets match your rule's search criteria, your reports won't populate for that term. In addition, that term will not
be present in the metric selector.
Backfilling Twitter Data
You can retrieve and populate historical Twitter data about tracked rules. You can choose to backfill data while
creating a rule or after the rule has been created and activated.
The backfill process typically takes approximately 24 hours to complete and for the reports to populate. The time
needed depends on the amount of data Social is backfilling and whether the rule being a high-traffic rule. For
high-traffic rules, we often see backfills take as long as 48 hours.
We cannot expedite any specific backfill. All of the terms are uploaded into a queue that we cannot adjust.
If you attempt to backfill a large amount of data (more than one million mentions), a Pending Approval message
displays in the user interface. This message means that Adobe must approve the request before the backfill can be
processed. Under normal circumstances, with well-constructed listening rules, this limit should not be an issue. This
feature prevents users from backfilling large amounts of data by mistake.
To backfill data while creating a rule
1. While creating a rule on the Add page (Settings > Rules > Add), under Collection Dates, click Backfill Twitter.
Twitter data will be backfilled for the previous 30 days.
2. Finish configuring the rule settings as explained in Add Rules to Track.
To backfill data after a rule has been created and activated
1. On the Active page (Settings > Rules > Active), from the Active Rules list, click the desired rule to display
additional options.
Settings
2.
Click
219
to open the rule in edit mode.
3. Under Collection Dates, click Backfill Twitter.
Twitter data will be backfilled for the previous 30 days.
4. Finish configuring the rule settings as explained in Add Rules to Track.
5. Click Update Rule.
Filters
Use the Basic and Builder tabs to create rules to track activities on the social web.
As best practice, use the Basic tab if you are familiar with setting up listening rules and are comfortable using
boolean logic. Use the Builder tab if you are unfamiliar with setting up rules. The Builder prevents you, for example,
from adding a filter that is not supported by your selected platforms. When using the Basic tab, be aware that you
can specify filters that are not applicable for your selected platforms. In this case, nothing will be collected for that
filter.
This section contains the following information:
Settings
220
• Maximum Character Length for Rules
• Basic Tab
• Builder Tab
Maximum Character Length for Rules
The maximum character length for rules depends on the platform, as explained in the following table. These lengths
are imposed limitations from the data providers and apply to rules created using the Basic and Builder tabs.
Platforms that allow as many as 2,048 characters in listening rules
Disqus
Twitter
Platforms that allow as many as 255 characters in listening rules
Instagram
DailyMotion
MetaCafe
Reddit
Flickr
YouTube
G+
VK
Platforms that allow as many as 222 characters in listening rules
WordPress
If you exceed the character limit for a provider, an error message displays. Be aware that if you select providers
from each group, your rule cannot exceed the most restrictive character limit (222 for WordPress). You could modify
the rule to fit the most restrictive character limit; however, best practice is to create two rules with the same display
name. Each rule can then comply with its respective character limit.
Basic Tab
The Basic tab opens by default. Add a rule using keywords. You can use Boolean operators, such as All (AND),
Any (OR), and None (NOT) to narrow results. For a full list of supported filters, see Filter List.
Note: Instagram does not allow the use of the All (AND) and None (NOT) operators.
The following illustration shows a rule created on the Basic tab using boolean logic:
Settings
221
Operators are case-sensitive. When typing the AND, OR, or NOT operators, ensure that they are all uppercase
letters.
For example, consider the following examples:
AND hash_tag:adobe Not Keywords:photoshop
AND hash_tag:adobe NOT Keywords:photoshop
Not in the first example should be NOT, as in the second example (all uppercase letters).
Note that while you are creating a rule on the Basic tab, you can click the Builder tab, if desired. However, some
syntax code that you can specify on the Basic tab might not be compatible with the Builder functionality. If this is
the case, the Builder tab is disabled. For example, if you change parentheses in the above example, the Builder
tab will be disabled and a pop-up message displays informing you that the rule is supported for collection purposes
but it cannot be displayed in the Builder.
For Twitter only, you can click Preview to display the Twitter Preview pane. For more information, see Twitter
Preview.
Builder Tab
After you select one or more platforms, the Filters section expands to display more options. The Builder tab lets
you construct term sets using an intuitive user interface using the three operators that Social supports: All (AND),
Any (OR), and None (NOT), as explained below.
Note: Instagram does not allow the use of the All (AND) and None (NOT) operators.
Settings
222
From the All (AND) and None (NOT) drop-down lists, select the desired filter types, provide user input as needed,
then click Add next to each operator.
From the Any (OR) drop-down lists, select the desired filter type, provide user input as needed, then click Add to
New Group to create the initial Any (OR) group (boolean parenthesis) for the filter. To add another filter to this
group, select the desired filter type, provide user input as needed, then click Add to Group. To add another Any
(OR) group (boolean parenthesis), click Add to New Group.You can then click
rules, as needed.
inside any group to add additional
You can add multiple filters for each filter operator to target and narrow your results. For more information, see the
text below each filter in the user interface or refer to Filter List.
Settings
223
As you build a rule by adding operators and filters, the rule displays in the Generated Rule box. You can use the
Generated Rule box to understand the logic that Social uses to construct rule sets and to help you fine-tune your
rule.
For example, suppose you create a rule using the following operators and rules:
• You select Twitter as the platform.
• In the All (AND) section, you add the keywords "adobe" and "social," separated by commas.
• In the All (AND) section, you add the Word Proximity filter and specify 3.
• In the All (AND) section, you add the Has Geo filter set.
• In the Any (OR) section, you add the keywords, "analytics" and "adlens," separated by commas.
• In the None (NOT) section, you add the keywords, "brick" and "house," separated by commas.
Your completed rule should look like the following illustration. Note the text in the Generated Rule box at the bottom
of the illustration.
Settings
224
This rule will collect data for tweets that contain geo data and mention both "adobe" and "social" within three words
of each other, mention "analytics" or "adlens," but do not mention "brick" or "house."
You can add more filters as desired, or you can delete existing filters by clicking the x on each filter's tile.
In addition, you can add more platforms at any time, providing that these platforms support all of your selected filters.
If you have selected a filter that is not supported by a particular platform, that platform's check box is disabled. In
summary, if you select multiple platforms before selecting filter types, only those filters supported by all selected
Settings
225
platforms are available for use. However, if you attempt to add additional platforms after you have selected one or
more filter, the platforms you intend to add must also support the selected filters.
The text in the Generated Rule box is not editable. If you want to further edit the rule using boolean logic, click the
Basic tab at the top of the Rules section to display the generated rule in an editable text box.
Click the following link for a full list of all available filters, with platform information, descriptions, examples, and
advanced syntax to use on the Basic tab.
Filter List
Platform information, descriptions, and examples for all available filters you can use while adding rules to track using
Social.
In the Description and Examples column in the table below, the User Input information specifies the input you
must perform when using the user interface on the Builder tab.
The Advanced Syntax information specifies the syntax you must use when building a rule using boolean logic on
the Advanced tab. For example, to specify the syntax for a Twitter rule using the Author filter, you would specify
author:mtalbot to collect mentions of a term on Twitter by the user with the "mtalbot" Twitter handle.
For more information, see Add Rules to Track.
Note: If a provider receives a rule with filters it does not support, it gets treated as a keyword. For example,
if Disqus gets part of its rule as country_code:US, it will look for the keyword, “country_code:US.”
Social supports the following filters (in alphabetical order):
Filter
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
Activity URL
Contains
WordPress
Matches activities where the activity URL (i.e. permalink) contains the given
phrase or keyword. URL encodings are not encoded at this time.
User Input: Specify a phrase or keyword.
Example: adobe matches all activities with "adobe" in the URL.
Settings
Filter
226
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
Advanced Syntax: activity_url_contains
Syntax Example: activity_url_contains:adobe
Author
Twitter
Matches any activity that matches the given user.
User Input: Specify an author. Do not include the @ character.
Example: adobe matches @adobe but not adobe photoshop.
Advanced Syntax: author
Syntax Example: author:mtalbot
Bio Contains
Twitter
Matches tweets whose author's Twitter bio contains the given keyword or
phrase.
User Input: Specify the desired value.
Example: Start-up matches Start-up junkie but not Software
Engineer startup.
Advanced Syntax: bio_contains
Syntax Example: bio_contains:start-up
Bio Language Twitter
Matches tweets where the user's bio-level language setting matches a given
language.
This language setting simply changes the language in which Twitter displays
its UI text (it does not translate tweet text). This is not a language
classification. Customers have reported that this setting is often left in its
default of English even when the Tweets an account is generating are in a
non-English language.
We recommend its use in conjunction with the language classification
operator (lang) rather than a standalone indicator of a user or Tweet's
language.
User Input: Select the desired language from the drop-down list.
Advanced Syntax: bio_lang
Syntax Example: bio_lang:ja
Valid language codes include: Arabic, ar; Danish, da; German, de; Greek,
el ; English, en ; Spanish, es; Persian, ; Finnish, fa; French, fr; Hebrew, he;
Italian, it; Indonesian, id; Japanese, ja; Korean, ko; Dutch, nl; Norwegian,
no; Polish, pl; Portuguese, pt; Russian, ru; Swedish, sv; Thai, tv; Turkish,
tr; Ukrianian, uk; Chinese, zh.
Settings
227
Filter
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
Bio Location
Twitter
Matches tweets where the user's bio-level location contains the specified
keyword or phrase. This operator performs a tokenized match, similar to the
normal keyword rules on the message body.
The user bio location is a non-normalized, user-generated, free-form string.
User Input: Specify the desired value.
Example: boulder matches Boulder and Boulder, CO and Beautiful
Boulder, CO.
Advanced Syntax: bio_location
Syntax Example: bio_location:boulder
Bio Location
Contains
Twitter
Matches tweets where the user's bio-level location contains the specified
substring.
User Input: Specify the desired value.
Example: boulder matches Boulder and Boulder, CO and Beautiful
Boulder, CO.
Advanced Syntax: bio_location_contains
Syntax Example: bio_location_contains:boulder
Bio Name
Contains
Twitter
Matches tweets where the user's display name (not username) as specified
in their bio, contains a given substring.
User Input: Specify the desired value.
Example: Mike matches any tweets from a user who said he was named
Mike in his bio.
Advanced Syntax:
bio_name_contains
Syntax Example: bio_name_contains:mike
Bounding Box Twitter
Matches against the exact location (x,y) of the Tweet (when present in Tweet)
and against an intersecting Place bounding box if the exact location is not
present, where the place is fully contained within the defined region.
User Input: Specify the values in the appropriate longitude and latitude
boxes. The width and height of the bounding box cannot exceed 25 miles.
Example: -105.301758 39.964069 -105.178505 40.09455 matches all
activities contained in a box around Boulder, CO.
Advanced Syntax: bounding_box
Syntax Example: bounding_box:[-105.301758 39.964069 -105.178505
40.09455]
Settings
228
Filter
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
Contains
Disqus, Twitter,
WordPress
Substring match for activities that have the given substring in the body,
regardless of tokenization.
User Input: Specify a word or phrase.
Example: phone matches on the phone and telephone.
Advanced Syntax: contains
Syntax Example: contains:phone
Country Code Twitter
Matches tweets where the country code associated with a tagged
place/location matches the specified country.
User Input: Select the desired country code from the drop-down list.
Advanced Syntax: country_code
Syntax Example: country_code:jp
Valid ISO country codes.
Followers
Count
Twitter
Matches tweets where the author has a friends count (the number of users
they follow) that falls within the given range.
User Input: Specify the minimum number of friends and the maximum
number of friends that the author must follow for a match to be made.
Advanced Syntax: followers_count
Syntax Example: followers_count:1000..10000
Friends Count Twitter
Matches tweets where the author has a followers count within the given
range.
User Input: Specify the minimum number of followers and the maximum
number of followers that the author must have for a match to be made.
Advanced Syntax: friends_count
Syntax Example: friends_count:100..1000
From
Disqus, Twitter,
WordPress
Matches any activity from a specific user. Can either be a username or
MD5-hashed email. For Twitter, the user ID can be used as well. Do not
include the @ character.
User Input: Specify a username.
Example: mikesmith matches all posts, comments, or likes from mikesmith.
Advanced Syntax: from
Syntax Example: from:mikesmith
Settings
229
Filter
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
Hashtag
Instagram, Twitter
Matches any activity with the given hashtag. Also supports phrases to match
"phrase tags" that contain whitespace characters.
This operator performs an exact match, not a tokenized match. The rule
2012 matches posts with the exact tag 2012, but not those with the tag 2012
election.
User Input: Specify a hashtag. Do not include the hashtag (#) character.
Example: boulderfire matches all posts containing or tagged
#boulderfire, but not #boulderfirefighters.
Advanced Syntax: hash_tag
Syntax Example: hash_tag:boulderfire
Has Geo
Twitter
Matches activities which contain geo (geographic data) in the metadata.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: has:geo
Syntax Example: has:geo
Has Hashtags Twitter
Matches activities that contain hashtags in the message body.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: has:hashtags
Syntax Example: has:hashtags
Has Language WordPress
Matches activities that have been classified as any language.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: has:lang
Syntax Example: has:lang
Has Links
Disqus, Twitter,
WordPress
Matches activities that contain links in the message body.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: has:links
Syntax Example: has:links
Has Media
Twitter
Matches any activities that contain a media URL, such as an image or video.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: has:media
Settings
Filter
230
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
Syntax Example: has:media
Has Mentions
Twitter
Matches any activities that mention other users.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: has:mentions
Syntax Example: has:mentions
Is Comment
WordPress
Matches only activities that are comments.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: is:comment
Syntax Example: is:comment
Is Retweet
Twitter
Delivers only explicit retweets that match a rule. Can also be negated to
exclude retweets that match a rule from delivery and only original content
is delivered.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: is:retweet
Syntax Example: is:retweet
Is Verified
Twitter
Delivers only Tweets where the author is "verified" by Twitter.
User Input: None.
Advanced Syntax: is:verified
Syntax Example: is:verified
Keywords
Blogs, G+, Reddit,
YouTube,
DailyMotion, Flickr,
Disqus, MetaCafe,
Twitter, VK,
WordPress
Matches an exact work or phrase. Word boundaries are respected. To match
a substring, use the Contains filter, if applicable for the selected platforms.
User Input: Specify a word or phrase. You can specify multiple words by
separating them with a comma.
For more information about specifying terms, see Guidelines for Keyword
Selection.
Example: phone matches on the phone but not on the telephone.
Advanced Syntax: keywords
Syntax Example: keywords:phone
Language
Disqus, Twitter,
WordPress
Matches activities that have been classified as a being a part of a particular
language. Only one language is allowed.
Settings
Filter
231
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
User Input: Select the desired language from the drop-down list.
Advanced Syntax: lang
Syntax Example: lang:ja
Valid language codes include: Arabic, ar; Danish, da; German, de; Greek,
el ; English, en ; Spanish, es; Persian, ; Finnish, fa; French, fr; Hebrew, he;
Italian, it; Indonesian, id; Japanese, ja; Korean, ko; Dutch, nl; Norwegian,
no; Polish, pl; Portuguese, pt; Russian, ru; Swedish, sv; Thai, tv; Turkish,
tr; Ukrianian, uk; Chinese, zh.
Listed Count
Twitter
Matches tweets where the author has been listed within Twitter a number
of times falls within the given range.
User Input: Specify the minimum and maximum list count.
Advanced Syntax: listed_count
Syntax Example: listed_count:5000..10000
Place
Twitter
Matches tweets tagged with the specified location.
User Input: Specify the desired location.
Example: Rio de Janeiro matches tweets from Rio de Janeiro.
Advanced Syntax: place
Syntax Example: place:Rio de Janeiro
Place Contains Twitter
Matches tweets where the tagged place/location contains a given substring.
User Input: Specify part of the name of the desired location.
Example: Boulder matches Boulder and Boulder City.
Advanced Syntax: place_contains
Syntax Example: place_contains:boulder
Post Title
WordPress
Matches an exact phrase within the title of a post.
User Input: Specify the desired value.
Example: Big Data matches Making sense of big data within your
company.
Advanced Syntax: post_title
Syntax Example: post_title:Big Data
Settings
232
Filter
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
Post Title
Contains
WordPress
Matches activities that have the given substring in the body, regardless of
tokenization. In other words, this does a pure substring match, and does not
consider word boundaries.
User Input: Specify a word or phrase.
Example: phone matches on the phone but not on the telephone.
Advanced Syntax: post_title_contains
Syntax Example: post_title_contains:phone
Radius From
Point
Twitter
Matches against the exact location (x,y) of the activity when present, and
against an intersecting place bounding box if the exact location is not present,
where the place is fully contained within the defined region.
User Input: Specify the desired distance, select mi (miles) or km (kilometers)
from the drop-down list, then specify the values in the appropriate longitude
and latitude boxes. The radius cannot exceed 25 miles.
Example: -105.27346517 40.01924738 10mi matches activity within 10
miles of 17th and Pearl Street in Boulder, CO.
Advanced Syntax: point_radius
Syntax Example: point_radius:[-105.27346517 40.01924738 10mi]
Retweets Of
Twitter
Matches tweets that are retweets of a specified user. Accepts both
usernames and userids.
User Input: Specify the desired username, separated by commas.
Example: justinbieber matches any retweets of justinbieber.
Advanced Syntax: retweets_of
Syntax Example: retweets_of:justinbieber
Rule Variables Blogs, DailyMotion, Includes a rule variable. This field is dynamic. If the external rule variable is
Disqus, Flickr, G+,
modified, this rule is modified as well.
Instagram, Metacafe,
Note: If you add a rule variable to a listening rule and assign the rule
Reddit, WordPress,
to a social platform, any individual filters used in the rule variable must
Twitter, VK, YouTube
be applicable for that social platform. For example, the keyword filter
is not applicable to Instagram. If you create a rule containing a variable
that contains a keyword filter and assign it to Instagram, no data will
be returned. Likewise, if you create a variable that contains the Bio
Location filter, and include that variable in a listening rule for
WordPress, no data will be returned because Bio Location applies to
Twitter only.
Settings
Filter
233
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
User Input: Select the desired rule variable. You can add multiple rule
variables.
Example: adobe social
Advanced Syntax: rule_variable
Syntax Example: rule_variable:[adobe social]
Source
Twitter
Matches any tweet generated by the given source application. The value
must be either the name of the application, or the application's URL. Cannot
be used alone.
User Input: Specify the application name or its URL.
Example: web matches activities from the web but not activities from a
mobile app.
Advanced Syntax: source
Syntax Example: source:web
Statuses
Count
Twitter
Matches tweets where the author has posted a number of statuses that falls
within the given range.
User Input: Specify the minimum number of statuses and the maximum
number of statuses that the author must have for a match to be made.
Advanced Syntax: statuses_count
Syntax Example: statuses_count:500..9999
Thread URL
Contains
Disqus
Matches activities posted to a web page if its URL contains the given phrase
or keyword. URL encodings are not encoded at this time.
User Input: Specify the desired value.
Example: obama matches all activities posted to a web page with the word
"obama" in the URL.
Advanced Syntax: thread_url_contains
Syntax Example: thread_url_contains:obama
Timezone
Twitter
Matches tweets where the user-selected timezone specified in a user's
profile settings matches the specified timezone.
User Input: Select the desired timezone from the drop-down list.
Advanced Syntax: time_zone
Syntax Example: time_zone:Tokyo
Settings
234
Filter
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
To
Disqus, Twitter
Matches any activity that is in reply to a particular user.
In Disqus, this operator only supports the hashed actor IDs delivered via the
Disqus API, not pretty usernames or displayNames present on the platform.
In Twitter, the value must be the user's screen name (handle) or numeric
ID (excluding the @ character).
User Input: Specify a username.
Example: mikesmith matches all activity in reply to mikesmith.
Advanced Syntax: to
Syntax Example: to:mikesmith
URL Contains Disqus, Twitter,
WordPress,
Matches activities with URLs that literally contain the given phrase or
keyword.
User Input: Specify a phrase or keyword.
Example: adobe matches http://adobe.com but not search on adobe.
Advanced Syntax: url_contains
Syntax Example: url_contains:adobe
Verb
Disqus
Matches activities where a new comment has been created, updated, or
deleted.
User Input: Select an option from the drop-down list: Post, Update, or Delete.
Advanced Syntax: verb
Syntax Example: verb:delete
URL Contains Disqus, Twitter
Matches activities with URLs that literally contain the given phrase or
keyword.
User Input: Specify the desired value.
Example: google matches http://www.google.com but not search on
google.
Advanced Syntax: url_contains
Syntax Example: url_contains:google
Word Proximity Disqus, Twitter,
WordPress
Matches an activity where the keywords are no more than N tokens from
each other. Phrases are not allowed. This filter is especially useful for posts
that contain a lot of text or for tweets in which you want the words to be in
close proximity to each other.
Settings
Filter
235
Applicable
Platforms
Description and Examples
User Input: Specify two keywords, then specify the maximum number of
words that can separate the two words to be considered a match.
Punctuation, such as an apostrophe or hyphen, is not allowed inside
keywords. For this reason, "we're" and "e-mail" cannot be used as keywords.
An error message displays when you click Add if a keyword contains
punctuation.
Example: adobe and photoshop.
If you specify these two words, then select 4 from the drop-down list, the
following phrases are considered matches because no more than four words
separate the two keywords: adobe photoshop or adobe makes photoshop.
The following phrase would not be considered a match because more than
four words separate the two keywords: adobe recently released a new
version of photoshop.
Advanced Syntax: proximity:[word1 word2 4]
Syntax Example: proximity:[adobe photoshop 4]
Campaigns
Associate this rule to a previously configured campaign.
To associate this rule to a specific campaign that you have previously set up, select it from the drop-down list.
Associating individual rules with campaigns lets you view individual rules with the number of mentions generated
by each rule on the Campaign Details report.
For more information, see Campaigns.
Classifications and Tags
Select an existing classification group and classification for this rule. You can also create a new classification group
and classification.
To classify this rule, select a classification group and classification from the drop-down lists, then click Add. You
can also create new classification groups and classifications from within Social by specifying the classification group
Settings
236
and classification in the text boxes. This functionality gives you the option of creating classifications or assigning
terms to classifications without using SAINT.
If you want to add a subclassification to the rule, you must also add its parent classification.
Twitter Preview
Use the Twitter Preview pane to better understand what Twitter users are currently saying about activities on the
social web that your rule and its filters will track.
When you specify a rule using Twitter as at least one of its platforms, the real-time Twitter Preview pane automatically
displays on the right side if you are using the Builder tab to create the rule. The pane automatically updates as you
add additional filters to the rule. You can use this information to refine the rule, if desired. If you are using the Basic
tab to create the rule, click Preview to display the Twitter Preview pane.
If you do not select Twitter as a platform, the Twitter Preview pane does not display.
For example, the following example shows the results and tweets for the last 30 days for a rule the contains the
following filters:
• Contains "adobe" as a keyword
• Does not contain "brick" and "house" as keywords
The expected number of tweets that this rule will collect displays at the top of the preview. Note that the Twitter
Preview is an estimate. Actual collected data might vary slightly.
You can mouse over any data point on the graph to display the search count for that day.
You can click a user's Twitter handle to display the user's Twitter profile. The profile contains metrics for that user,
including the number of tweets, following, and followers. You can also see the user's recent tweets.
Click to
see that tweet's details.
Settings
237
You can also preview the results for active or inactive rules. For more information, see Preview Active or Inactive
Rules.
Rule Variables
Create and configure rule variables for use in listening rules. Rule variables let you create snippets of rules that can
then be added to multiple listening rules. If you later update a rule variable, any listening rules that contain that
variable are automatically updated.
You can think of rules variables as partial rules or even variables.
For example, suppose you want to create many listening rules to collect data about your primary competitors. Without
using rule variables, you might need to add conditions, such as "Competitor1 OR Competitor2 OR Competitor3" to
many rules. Not only is this time-consuming, it is inefficient.
Suppose after collecting data about competitor mentions for several months using listening rules, you want to add
a new competitor to all of your listening rules. Without a rule variable, you would need to edit each listening rule
individually. Using a rule variable, you could add "competitor4" in one place and the change would automatically
update each listening rule.
The previous scenario uses the keyword filter, but you can use any filter as part of a rule variable.
Note: If you add a rule variable to a listening rule and assign the rule to a social platform, any individual filters
used in the rule variable must be applicable for that social platform. For example, the keyword filter is not
applicable to Instagram. If you create a rule containing a variable that contains a keyword filter and assign it
to Instagram, no data will be returned. Likewise, if you create a variable that contains the Bio Location filter,
and include that variable in a listening rule for Facebook, no data will be returned because Bio Location applies
to Twitter only.
Add a Rule Variable
Create and configure a rule variable for use in other listening rules.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
2. Click the Rule Variables tab.
3. Click Add.
.
Settings
238
4. Specify a name for the rule variable.
A descriptive name becomes very useful if you create numerous rule variables. The name will help you locate
rule variables faster for editing, adding to listening rules, and so forth.
Note: You cannot use a hyphen ( - ) or a forward slash ( / ) in a rule variable name.
5. Specify the desired rule using boolean logic.
If you are unfamiliar with creating rules using boolean logic, you can create a rule using the Filters section on
the Add page and then copy the rule from the Generated Rule box and paste it into the Add Rule box for the
rule variable, shown above.
The following examples show properly formatted rule variables:
AND (keywords:competitor1 OR keywords:competitor2 OR keywords:competitor3) NOT
keywords:competitor4
This rule variable collects data for the keywords "competitor1," or "competitor2," or "competitor3," but not
"competitor4."
AND (hash_tag:adobe OR hash_tag:adobesocial) NOT hash_tag:photoshop
This rule variable collects data for the hashtags "adobe" or "adobesocial," but not "photoshop."
6. Click Save.
Edit or Delete a Rule Variable
Edit a rule variable so that the changes automatically affect all listening rules of which it is a part.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
Settings
239
2. Click the Rule Variables tab.
3. Click the rule variable that you want to edit.
4. Click Edit, then edit the rule, as desired.
For more information about the specific fields and options, see Add a Rule Variable.
5. Click Save.
To delete the a rule variable, click Delete.
Add Rules in Bulk
Quickly and efficiently add large sets of rules using a line-delimited text file.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Terms Set Up.
Within Social, using the Add tab, you can conveniently manage rules that you want to track. The Add tab, however,
lets you add new rules only one at a time. For more information, see Add Rules to Track.
You can use the Bulk Add tab to quickly and efficiently add large sets of rules.
Upload Rules
Add rules in bulk to Social that you want to track on the social web.
Note: These instructions help you add rules in bulk.You can also add rules one at a time. For more information,
see Add Rules to Track.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
2. Click the Bulk Add tab.
Settings
240
3. Click Choose File, then browse to and select the file you want to upload.
You can upload any line-delimited text file. If you want to import a file created in Microsoft Excel, you must save
it as a text file before uploading it into Social.
Or
You can upload a CSV file.
The advantage of uploading a CSV file is that, in addition to uploading rules, you can also specify or exclude
social providers that will listen for individual rules.
The following illustration is a sample file:
If you want to upload only rules using a CSV file, you must have one column labeled "Rule." The remaining
columns are optional.
If you want to specify or exclude providers from listening to individual rules, you must have an additional column
labeled "Provider." If you leave the "Provider" row empty for an individual rule, Social enables listening for that
rule for all providers that Social supports. If you specify individual providers, Social enables listening for those
providers only.
In the previous example, Social will listen for "adobe + photoshop - house" on all providers that Social supports.
However, Social will listen for "photoshop" only on Facebook, Flickr, and Google+. When you specify providers,
ensure that you spell them exactly as listed on the Platforms tab, but case does not matter. Also, separate
individual providers with a comma (,).
The "Start Date" and "End Date" columns specify dates that collection for the rule begin and end. If you do not
specify a start date, collection begins immediately after you upload the file into Social. If you do not specify an
end date, the rule will be tracked forever, unless you delete the rule from Social.
The "Display Name" column is used to specify a "pretty" display name for reports. The Type and Class columns
above can contain any label you desire and are used to classify the rule. These columns are for classification
Settings
241
and the values in this column correspond to your classifications. If a value in this column is empty, that classification
is not assigned.
Note: You cannot create new classifications using a .csv file upload. The value you specify in the Class
column must correspond to an existing classification created in SAINT.
Note that these columns correspond to the options you can specify in the Rules Builder. For more information
about these options, see Platforms, Collection Dates, Display Name, and Classifications and Tags.
Ensure that you save the file as a CSV file (comma delimited) before uploading it into Social.
4. Click Add Terms to add the terms in the file to the list of currently tracked terms. This option merges the terms
with your currently tracked terms.
Or
Click Replace All Terms to replace all currently tracked terms with the terms in the file. This option replaces
your currently tracked terms.
To deactivate rules that you no longer want to track, see Deactivating or Reactivating Rules.
Download Rules
You can download the rules you are currently tracking to a text file.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
2. Click
in the top right corner of the page, then save the text file to the desired location.
Manage Active Rules
Edit active rules, preview rule results in the Twitter Preview pane, or delete active rules that you no longer want to
track.
Settings
242
Delete Active Rules
Delete active rules that you no longer want to track. You can simultaneously delete multiply rules, or you can view
a rule's configuration before choosing whether to delete it.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. Click the Active tab, if necessary.
3. Use the Search box to locate the desired terms.
4. Select the check box next to the display name of one or more rules that you want to delete, then click . Note
the number inside parenthesis next to each name. This number indicates how many individual rules exist with
the same display name. If you select one or more check boxes and click
deleted.
, all rules with that display name are
Or
Click the display name of the desired rule in the list to view its individual rules and their current configurations,
then click for the desired rules. Deleting rules individually lets you examine a rule's current configuration in
more detail before deciding whether to delete it. You can also delete one or more rules without deleting other
rules.
Deleted rules are moved to the Inactive page. To "undelete" an inactive rule in order to track it again, you must
re-create the rule. For more information, see Deactivating or Reactivating Rules.
Edit an Active Rule
Edit an active rules's settings, including display name, platforms, collection date range, filters, assigned campaigns,
classifications, and tags.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
Settings
243
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. Click the Active tab, if necessary.
3. Use the Search box to locate the desired rules.
4. Click the name of the desired rule in the list to view its current settings.
5. Click , then follow the general instructions in Add Rules to Track.
6. Click Save Rule to save the rule with its newly configured settings.
Or
Click Save As New Rule to save the rule with a new name while retaining the original rule.
This option lets you use an existing rule as a starting point to create a new rule with similar, but different, settings.
Preview Active or Inactive Rules
Preview an active or inactive rule to better understand what Twitter users are currently saying about activities on
the social web that your rule and its filters will track.
You can preview the results for active or inactive rules, regardless whether Twitter is a selected platform for the rule
or not. For example, if you have an existing rule that targets Disqus and WordPress, you could use the Twitter
Preview to see the results of that rule had you selected Twitter as a platform. Using the Twitter Preview feature in
this way can help you determine if your rule is too narrow or too broad, for example.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
2. Click the Active tab, if necessary.
Or
Click the Inactive tab.
.
Settings
244
3. Use the Search box to locate the desired terms.
4. Click the name of the desired rule in the list to view its current configuration, then click
.
Note that you can preview the results for an existing rule regardless of whether Twitter is one of its assigned
platforms.
You can mouse over any data point on the graph to display the search count for that day.
You can click a user's Twitter handle to display the user's Twitter profile. The profile contains metrics for that
user, including the number of tweets, following, and followers. You can also see the user's recent tweets.
Click to
see that tweet's details.
You can also use the Twitter Preview pane as you build rules. For more information, see Twitter Preview.
Deactivating or Reactivating Rules
Deactivate rules that you no longer want to track. Reactivate inactive rules that you want to track again.
To deactivate a rule
1. Follow the instructions in Delete Active RulesDelete Active Rules.
Deleting an active rule moves it to the Inactive page.
To re-activate an inactive (deleted) rule
1. In the left navigation pane, click Settings > Listening Rules.
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. Click the Inactive tab.
3. To reactivate a rule, re-add the term as explained in Add Rules to Track.
To make it easier to re-add the rule, you can click the rule's name in the Inactive Rules list, then copy rule text.
Settings
245
Navigate to the Add page, then paste the rule text into the text box on the Basic tab in the Filters section.
Because the other settings are not copied from the inactive rule, you must specify its display name, collection
dates, platforms, campaigns, classifications, and tags, as desired.
Guidelines for Keyword Selection
Information to help you specify allowable keywords and to ensure that your keywords yield the desired results.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Terms Set Up.
Social pricing is based on mentions of your selected keywords. This topic provides information to help you choose
appropriate keywords that provide meaningful information while avoiding excessive costs.
For more information about adding terms to track, see the following topics:
• Add Rules to Track
• Add Rules in Bulk
Settings
246
As you build rules and filters, a good tool to gauge the number of potential mentions for a particular term is the
real-time Twitter Preview pane. For more information, see Using the Real-Time Twitter Preview Feature to Fine-Tune
Rules below.
The following sections contain more information to help you track terms appropriately:
• URLs
• Case-Sensitivity
• Character Length of Keywords
• Illegal Characters
• Multiple-Word Strings with Spaces
• Overlapping Keywords
• Blacklisted Keywords
• Meaningless Keywords That Are Not Blacklisted
• Number of Allowable Characters
• Returning Meaningful Data for Keywords
• Using the Real-Time Twitter Preview Feature to Fine-Tune Rules
• Number of Allowable Keywords
URLs
To track and recognize URLs, you must specify the full URL when you add the keyword. For example, you should
specify http://mysite.com rather than mysite.com. If you specify a partial URL, Social collects the partial URL
as a keyword, but it is not recognized as a URL. However, if you specify the full URL, Social collects the full URL
and also collects the partial URL as a keyword (mysite.com, in this example).
Case-Sensitivity
Keywords are not case-sensitive. "Apple" and "apple" are treated the same.
Character Length of Keywords
Two-character keywords are acceptable if other keywords in the set using the "And" operator (+ sign) contain at
least three characters. For example, you cannot specify "El" as a single keyword. You could, however, specify "El"
as a keyword, use an "And" operator, and then specify "Jefe" as the second keyword in the set. You could also
specify "El Jefe" as an allowable keyword. You can use single multi-byte characters as a keyword.
Illegal Characters
Keywords cannot contain the following characters:
• Quotation mark (")
• Non-UTF-8 characters
• Extended ASCII characters. Be aware that, although you can specify Extended ASCII characters by using the
Term Section tab, Social does not process Extended ASCII characters correctly.
Multiple-Word Strings with Spaces
Spaces in keywords cause Social to treat the words as a phrase. For example, if you specify "hello world," that exact
phase must be mentioned in a post to be recorded as a mention. Posts containing the text "hello entire world" or
Settings
247
"hello" are not recorded as mentions in Social; however, because the real-time Twitter Preview operates on different
rules than those for Social, these individual words might display in the preview.
Overlapping Keywords
Be aware that if you are not careful when selecting keywords to track, you could specify overlapping keywords that
inflate your mentions and costs.
For example, suppose you specify the following keywords to track: "Adobe," "Analytics," and "Adobe Analytics." If
someone tweets, "I love Adobe Analytics," Social records three mentions: one for "Adobe," one for "Analytics," and
one for "Adobe Analytics." In this situation, you might want to consider tracking only "Adobe Analytics." Tracking
"Adobe" will cause Social to record mentions in many posts that are not related to Adobe Analytics, such as posts
about Adobe Photoshop. Likewise, tracking "Analytics" will cause Social to record mentions for posts unrelated to
Adobe, such as posts about analytics in general.
Blacklisted Keywords
Social contains a list of blacklisted keywords that are not allowed as single, initial keywords.
For more information, see Blacklisted Keywords.
Meaningless Keywords That Are Not Blacklisted
Some words are not blacklisted, but should be used with caution to avoid excessive costs. As an extreme example,
the acronym "LOL" is not blacklisted, but would return a large number of meaningless mentions.
Number of Allowable Characters
For Twitter and Disqus, rules cannot contain more than 2,048 characters, including keywords, positive operators,
and negative operators.
For all other platforms, rules cannot contain more than 255 characters, including keywords, positive operators, and
negative operators.
Returning Meaningful Data for Keywords
An entire post, comment, or tweet is returned when the keyword criteria is met. For example, if you specify the word
"analytics" as a keyword, the following post could be returned:
"I Love CompanyB's analytics!"
If you are not CompanyB, this data might be meaningless for your purposes (unless you want to track data for your
competitors).
If your company is CompanyA and this data is meaningless to you, you could specify the keyword using one of the
following methods:
• Use a multiple-word string with spaces: Specify "CompanyA analytics" as a keyword. In this instance, the spaces
in keywords cause Social to treat the words as a phrase. In order for a post to be returned, the exact phrase
"CompanyA analytics" must be mentioned in a post. The phrase "CompanyB analytics" would not be returned.
• Use the "And" operator: Specify "CompanyA" as the keyword and use the "And" operator (+ sign) to add "analytics"
as the second keyword in the set. In order for a post to be returned, both "CompanyA" and "analytics" must appear
in the post, although not necessarily next to each other as a phrase.
Settings
248
• Use the "Not" operator: Specify "CompanyB" (your competitor) as the keyword and use the "Not" operator (sign) to add "analytics" as the second keyword in the set. In order for a post to be returned, "CompanyB" must
appear in the post; however, "analytics" cannot appear in the post.
Using the Real-Time Twitter Preview Feature to Fine-Tune Rules
A good tool to gauge the number of potential mentions is the real-time Twitter Preview pane.
This feature gives you a better understanding about what Twitter users are currently saying about the specified term.
You can use this information to further refine the term.
Note: If you do not see your term in the text of the Tweet, click through to the Tweet. The term might be in
the URL.
For example, suppose your product is a resort and a well-known celebrity tweets about visiting your resort, but that
mention does not help promote your brand. You can create a term using the "Not" operator and the celebrity's name
to prevent paying for mentions that are useless for your marketing purposes.
The Real-time Twitter Data Preview can also help you see that certain terms have different meanings, depending
on context. For example, suppose you want to use the word "newt" as a term to gather data about mentions of Newt
Gingrich, the U.S. politician. When you type "newt" into the terms field, you might see many posts in the preview
pane mentioning lizards, amphibians, or salamanders. Because Newt Gingrich has an unusual name that means
something else in different contexts, you should specify terms carefully to avoid collecting unnecessary data or
incurring unnecessary costs. In this example, you could specify "Newt Gingrich" as a term. You could also specify
"Newt" as the term and then use "Not" operators with the words "lizard," "amphibian," and "salamander."
Number of Allowable Keywords
Social lets customers specify up to 1,000 keywords.
Blacklisted Keywords
Social contains a list of blacklisted keywords for the English language that are not allowed as a single, initial keyword.
Social costs are associated with mentions of your keywords that are recorded by Social. For this reason, the list of
blacklisted keyword contains words that are too generic and are likely to return a large number of not useful mentions.
If you attempt to specify a blacklisted keyword, Social displays an error message when you click Add to inform you
that the term is too generic.
Blacklisted keywords can be used inside a multiple-word keyword because spaces in terms cause Social to treat
the words as a phrase. For example, the word "and" is a blacklisted term. You can, however, create a search term
for "apples and bananas." You could also create a term set that contains "apple", the "And" operator (+ sign), and
"banana."
The following English-language keywords are blacklisted and cannot be used as a single, initial keyword.
Blacklisted Keywords
a
her
secondly
able
here
see
about
hereafter
seeing
Settings
249
Blacklisted Keywords
above
hereby
seem
abroad
herein
seemed
according
here's
seeming
accordingly
hereupon
seems
across
hers
seen
actually
herself
self
adj
he's
selves
after
hi
sensible
afterwards
him
sent
again
himself
serious
against
his
seriously
ago
hither
seven
ahead
hopefully
several
ain't
how
shall
all
howbeit
shan't
allow
help
she
allows
however
she'd
almost
http
she'll
alone
hundred
she's
along
i
should
alongside
i'd
shouldn't
already
ie
since
also
if
six
although
ignored
so
always
i'll
some
am
i'm
somebody
amid
immediate
someday
amidst
in
somehow
among
inasmuch
someone
amongst
inc
something
an
inc.
sometime
and
indeed
sometimes
another
indicate
somewhat
any
indicated
somewhere
Settings
250
Blacklisted Keywords
anybody
indicates
soon
anyhow
inner
sorry
anyone
inside
specified
anything
insofar
specify
anyway
instead
specifying
anyways
into
still
anywhere
inward
sub
apart
is
such
appear
isn't
sup
appreciate
it
sure
appropriate
it'd
t
are
it'll
take
aren't
its
taken
around
it's
taking
as
itself
tell
a's
i've
tends
aside
j
th
ask
just
than
asking
k
thank
associated
keep
thanks
at
keeps
thanx
available
kept
that
away
know
that'll
awfully
known
thats
b
knows
that's
back
l
that've
backward
last
the
backwards
lately
their
be
later
theirs
became
latter
them
because
latterly
themselves
become
least
then
becomes
less
thence
becoming
lest
there
Settings
251
Blacklisted Keywords
been
let
thereafter
before
let's
thereby
beforehand
like
there'd
begin
liked
therefore
behind
likely
therein
being
likewise
there'll
believe
little
there're
below
look
theres
beside
looking
there's
besides
looks
thereupon
best
low
there've
better
lower
these
between
ltd
they
beyond
m
they'd
both
made
they'll
brief
mainly
they're
but
make
they've
by
makes
thing
c
many
things
came
may
think
can
maybe
third
cannot
mayn't
thirty
cant
me
this
can't
mean
thorough
caption
meantime
thoroughly
cause
meanwhile
those
causes
merely
though
certain
might
three
certainly
mightn't
through
changes
mine
throughout
clearly
minus
thru
c'mon
miss
thus
co
more
till
co.
moreover
to
Settings
252
Blacklisted Keywords
com
most
together
come
mostly
too
comes
mr
took
concerning
mrs
toward
consequently
much
towards
consider
must
tried
considering
mustn't
tries
contain
my
truly
containing
myself
try
contains
n
trying
corresponding
name
t's
could
namely
twice
couldn't
nd
two
course
near
u
c's
nearly
un
currently
necessary
under
d
need
underneath
dare
needn't
undoing
daren't
needs
unfortunately
definitely
neither
unless
described
never
unlike
despite
neverf
unlikely
did
neverless
until
didn't
nevertheless
unto
different
new
up
directly
next
upon
do
nine
upwards
does
ninety
us
doesn't
no
use
doing
nobody
used
done
non
useful
don't
none
uses
down
nonetheless
using
downwards
noone
usually
Settings
253
Blacklisted Keywords
during
no-one
v
e
nor
value
each
normally
various
edu
not
versus
eg
nothing
very
eight
notwithstanding
via
eighty
novel
viz
either
now
vs
else
nowhere
w
elsewhere
o
want
end
obviously
wants
ending
of
was
enough
off
wasn't
entirely
often
way
especially
oh
we
et
ok
we'd
etc
okay
welcome
even
old
well
ever
on
we'll
evermore
once
went
every
one
were
everybody
ones
we're
everyone
one's
weren't
everything
only
we've
everywhere
onto
what
ex
opposite
whatever
exactly
or
what'll
example
other
what's
except
others
what've
f
otherwise
when
fairly
ought
whence
far
oughtn't
whenever
farther
our
where
few
ours
whereafter
Settings
254
Blacklisted Keywords
fewer
ourselves
whereas
fifth
out
whereby
first
outside
wherein
five
over
where's
followed
overall
whereupon
following
own
wherever
follows
p
whether
for
particular
which
forever
particularly
whichever
former
past
while
formerly
per
whilst
forth
perhaps
whither
forward
placed
who
found
please
who'd
four
plus
whoever
from
possible
whole
further
presumably
who'll
furthermore
probably
whom
g
provided
whomever
get
provides
who's
gets
q
whose
getting
que
why
given
quite
will
gives
qv
willing
go
r
wish
goes
rather
with
going
rd
within
gone
re
without
got
really
wonder
gotten
reasonably
won't
greetings
recent
would
h
recently
wouldn't
had
regarding
www
hadn't
regardless
x
Settings
255
Blacklisted Keywords
half
regards
y
happens
relatively
yes
hardly
respectively
yet
has
right
you
hasn't
round
you'd
have
rt
you'll
haven't
s
your
having
said
you're
he
same
yours
he'd
saw
yourself
he'll
say
yourselves
hello
saying
you've
help
says
z
hence
second
zero
Starter's Guide for Listening
Take the pulse of brand-related conversations across the social web about your company, products, and competitors
using the Adobe Social listening capabilities. The examples in this guide cover the main components of building
listening rules, including creating basic and advanced rules, creating classifications, and creating rule variables.
Listening gives you a better understand of how your brand is viewed, lets you take into account what your audience
is saying about your brand, and helps you respond accordingly. Using the information you gather from your listening
strategy, you can interact with your audience in a more meaningful way, focus on developing relationships, and
serve your fans more effectively.
This guide was developed by one of the Adobe Social Account Managers who specializes in social listening.
On a broad scale, marketers rely on social listening data to:
• Listen to what customers are saying about their brands
• Understand brand preferences
• Identify product and customer service issues
• Surface trends
• Identify business opportunities
• Identify potential brand threats
• Avoid potential crises
This guide focuses on helping you implement your basic listening strategies, including listening to what people on
the social web are saying about your brand name, competitors, and your products or marketing initiatives.
Let's get started. We recommend that you follow the instructions in each topic in order.
Listen for Your Brand Name
Create rules to listen to what people are saying about your brand name on the social web.
Settings
256
Listening rules can be simple or more advanced.
The first example shows you how to create a simple rule that listens for mentions of your brand name. The second
example shows you how to create a more advanced rule that listens for mentions of your brand name and all of its
variations, such as misspellings and differing uses of punctuation.
The information you learn in this guide will help you understand the rule-building theories and processes that you
can then use in your own listening rules.
Build a Basic Listening Rule
Get a pulse on what is being said across the social web about your brand name by creating a basic listening rule
that listens for mentions of your brand on the social web.
Let's start with a basic example: simply listening for "Susie's Bar & Grill."
1. Click Settings > Listening Rules > Add.
2. Name the rule by specifying the Display Name.
The first thing we want to do is specify the display name for this rule. Note that the display name is not the rule
itself. The display name is the friendly name that appears in reporting for this rule. If you do not specify a display
name, the rule itself is used as the display name, which may not be ideal later on to identify your rule.
Note: Best practice is to always specify a display name that is simple, yet descriptive.
In this example, the display name is simple, just “Susie’s Bar & Grill,” whereas the actual rule itself is more
complicated:
3. Choose the platforms that you want to listen on.
In order to select the appropriate platforms, it is good to have an idea about the types of filters you will use to
build the rule. For name-brand listening, we will likely want to use the Keywords filter, which lets us query most
social platforms for a specific keyword or exact phrase. For a complete list of filters, including platform information,
descriptions, and examples, see Filter List.
Looking at the list of available filters, we can see that the Keywords filter is available on the following platforms:
DailyMotion, Disqus, Flickr, Google+, Instagram, MetaCafe, Reddit, Wordpress, Twitter, VK, and YouTube. The
Keywords filter is not available on Instagram, which makes sense because Instagram lets you listen for hashtags,
rather than listening for keywords.
We will just check off those platforms that support the Keywords filter.
Settings
257
Note that you can click Select All, then deselect Instagram to save time and effort.
4. Specify the date range for which you want to collect data.
Note: If you choose a start date in the past, a back-end process starts to backfill Twitter data. When
backfilling listening terms, be aware that this process can take several hours, and the amount of time it
takes depends on how many days you choose to backfill. The End Date is optional. If you do not specify
an end date, the rule will be tracked forever, unless you delete the rule from Social.
5. Under Filters, click the Builder tab.
The Builder lets you build rules with a user-friendly UI, rather then a free-form text entry.
6. From the All (AND) drop-down list, select Keywords, type "Susie's Bar & Grill" in the text box, then click Add.
For now, let’s skip all of the other options.
Here’s how the rule should look:
Settings
258
Note that the Dailymotion checkbox is now deselected. If you mouse over the checkbox you can see a brief
message explaining why Dailymotion is not supported for this rule.
We can see that the generated rule is very simple:
Voila! We have now created a rule named “Susie’s Bar & Grill” that will listen for any mentions across the social
web for the exact phrase “Susie’s Bar & Grill” on the specified platforms.
Settings
259
After you understand how queries are formulated, it might be easier for you to use the free-form text box to enter
your queries. To do this, use the Basic tab in the Rule Builder:
Note: The default filter for free-form text entry is Keywords.
Build an Advanced Listening Rule
Get a pulse on what is being said across the social web about your brand name by creating an advanced listening
rule that listens for mentions of your brand on the social web, including variations of your brand's name.
To create this advanced rule, start by creating a list of all the variations and misspellings of the brand name, in this
scenario, "Susie's Bar & Grill."
Although most people spell the restaurant’s name with the correct spelling (Susie), we have also seen it mentioned
as “Susy.” In order to capture all mentions, we should included both variations, as well as with and without apostrophes.
Additionally, there are four possible variations of “Bar and Grill” that we want to capture, as shown below:
Variation in Brand Name
Variation in Spelling and Format
Susie's
Bar and Grill
Susy's
Bar & Grill
Susies
Bar and Grille
Susys
Bar & Grille
Using the information in this table, our listening rule needs to take into account 16 variations of "Susie's Bar & Grill."
After we have our list, we can use the Rule Builder to create the following query:
(Susie’s OR Susy’s OR Susies OR Susys) AND (Bar and Grill OR Bar & Grill OR Bar and Grille OR
Bar & Grille)
This rule includes various spellings of “Susie’s” together with various forms of “Bar and Grill." Our finished rule will
capture mentions for all 16 variations of "Susie's Bar & Grill."
1. Click the Builder tab.
2. In the Any (OR) section, choose Keywords, specify the four variations of the brand name that we identified,
then click Add to New Group.
Settings
260
Because we can delaminate multiple terms with commas, we can add all terms at once by entering: Susie's,
Susy's, Susies, Susys.
Here's how the rule should look:
By looking at the rule in the Generated Rule section, we can see that the rule looks correct.
Now let's create the second part of the rule that includes variations in the spelling and format of "bar & grill."
3. In the Any (OR) section, choose Keywords (this should already be selected), specify the four variations of "Bar
& Grill" that we identified, then click Add to New Group.
Because we can delaminate multiple terms with commas, we can add all terms at once by entering: Bar and
Grill, Bar & Grill, Bar and Grille, Bar & Grille.
Here's how the rule should look at this point:
We can use the Twitter Preview on the right side to get an idea of what a sample Tweet would like for this query.
As a sanity check, this example looks correct:
Settings
261
Because we are listening for a brand name in this example, we won’t choose a specific social campaign to
associate with this query. For this example, let’s skip classifying this query as well.
We won't save this rule at this point because we want to further refine it by following the instructions in Share of
Voice Listening.
In this second example, we are gaining a more comprehensive view of all the mentions of Susie’s Bar & Grill.
Share of Voice Listening
"Share of Voice" measures the percentage of conversations about your brand, as compared to your competitors,
and is a common and recommended listening strategy.
Susie’s Bar & Grill has three main competitors:
• Burgermeister
• Santa Fe Bar and Grill
• The Daily Grill
For Share of Voice reporting, we should create a query for each of these competitors the same way we did in Build
an Advanced Listening Rule. After we have built rules for each of these competitors, let’s leverage the Classifications
functionality to group (classify) data. Classifications can be leveraged to achieve a holistic view of how we stack up
against our competitors. Creating separate rules lets us look at the data for each rule individually. However, when
we classify a rule, it also lets us “roll up” the data and look at all the rules we have classified in aggregate and create
side-by-side comparisons.
As an example, let’s add "Burgermeister" to our listening strategy as a competitor.
1. In the Classifications and Tags section, type Share of Voice in the Classification Group box, from the
Classification drop-down list, select "Burgermeister" (or whatever you named the listening rule to listen for
Burgermeister), then click Add.
Here's how the rule should look:
Settings
262
Multiple rules for listening for "Burgermeister" could be added under this Classification Group and Classification.
2. Repeat the previous step to add rules for other competitors, such as "Santa Fe Bar and Grill" and "The Daily
Grill."
3. Click Add Rule when finished.
Because we created a classification for these terms called “Share of Voice,” this new classification appears in our
custom reports (Analytics > Custom Reports):
Click this report to view all of our competitors’ data in a single report, as compared to your brand. Feel free to add
additional metrics to the report, such as Average Sentiment.
You can add as many classifications for a given term as you'd like. Any time you assign a classification to a term,
the classification is 100% retroactive.
Listen for Your Products
Listening to what is being said across the social web about a specific product is also a very common strategy.
For this example, let’s listen to what people are saying about "Susie’s Bar & Grill’s" new burger called the “California
BBQ Burger.”
Settings
263
To do this we will want to listen for “California BBQ Burger,” but only in the context of “Susie’s Bar and Grill.” Let’s
create a rule variable for Susie’s Bar and Grill. Rule Variables let you create a partial rule that can be used again in
the future by other rules. If you later update a rule variable, any listening rules that contain that variable are
automatically updated as well.
Note: It is best practice to use rule variables to save time and to reduce errors. For more information, see
Rule Variables.
1. Click Settings > Listening Rules > Rule Variable.
2. Click Add to create a new rule variable, then specify a name that clearly defines this rule variable for later use.
3. Specify the rule variable.
Because we already did all the work to create all the variations for “Susie’s Bar and Grill,” we can just copy and
paste that rule into our rule variable.
4. Click Save.
After saving a rule variable, it is available for use when creating future listening rules or editing existing listening
rules. Here's how to use your newly created rule variable in a listening rule.
1. While creating or editing a listening rule, in the All (AND) section, select Rule Variables, select the desired rule
variable from the drop-down list (in this scenario, "Susie's Bar & Grill"), then click Add.
Settings
264
2. In the All (AND) section, select Keywords, then specify "California BBQ Burger" as the keyword.
Here's how the rule should look:
TIP: Click the rule variable to expand the rule.
3. Click Add to save the rule.
To leverage the rule variable functionality for the different variations of “California BBQ Burger” (such as “California
Barbeque Burger”), we would follow the same process.
The rule would then look something like this:
Fine-Tune Your Listening Rules
After you have added listening rules to Social and are seeing mentions and data in reporting, be sure to take a look
at the quality of the mentions that you are pulling in.
Are any of the mentions irrelevant to your business? If so, you should go in and further tweak your rules to eliminate
noise by creating more specific queries. Remember that social listening is an organic process that requires ongoing
attention to ensure that you are pulling in only data that is relevant for your needs and business goals.
Settings
265
Note: It is best practice to adjust your queries as often as necessary in order to be as specific as possible.
Highly specific queries yield highly relevant results.
Useful Listening Filters
A list of suggested listening filters to help you create effective rules.
• Author
• To
• From
• Hashtag
• Word Proximity
• Friends Count
• Followers Count
Note: For a full list of filters, including platform information, descriptions, and examples, see Filter List.
Author
Matches any activity that matches the given user.
Example: Specifying “adobe” matches any mention where the author mentions @adobe. This also includes retweets
that mention @adobe.
This does not mean you’re following the actual Twitter author. The Author filter only captures mentions or retweets
of the author @adobe.
For example, the following tweet will be captured because it mentions @adobe.
However, the following tweet will not be captured because it does not mention the author @adobe in the text.
Settings
266
To
Matches any activity that is in reply to a particular user.
Example: Specifying “adobe” matches all activity in reply to @adobe.
For example, the following tweet will be captured because it is in reply to @adobe or @adobe is the first text mentioned
in the tweet.
However, the following tweet will not be captured because it does reply or start with the author @adobe.
From
Matches any activity from a specific user. For Twitter, the user ID can be used as well.
Example: Specifying “adobe” matches all posts, comments, and likes from @Adobe. This is just like when you click
Follow in Twitter natively.
Settings
For example, the following tweet will be captured because it is from the author @adobe.
Hashtag
Matches any activity with the given hashtag.
Example: Specifying “adobelife” matches all posts containing or tagged “#adobelife".
For example, the following tweet will be captured because it contains the hashtag "#adobelife."
267
Settings
268
However, the following tweet will not be captured because it does not contain the hashtag "#adobelife."
Word Proximity
Matches any activity where the keywords are no more than the selected tokens from each other.
Example: Specifying “adobe” and “life” with the selected proximity of “4” will capture anything that has the term
“adobe” and “life” within four words of each other.
For example, the following tweet will be captured because the words “adobe” and “life” are within four words of each
other.
However, the following tweet will not be captured because the words “adobe” and “life” are not within four words of
each other.
Friends Count
Matches tweets where the author has a friends count (the number of users he or she follows) that falls within the
given range.
Settings
269
Example: Lets say we want to follow anybody who tweets with the keyword “adobe” and who has a following of
50,000 to 200,000 friends. We would add the Keyword “adobe” then use the Friends Count filter and specify
“50000” in Minimum and “200000” in Maximum. Now we are following the keyword "adobe" mentioned by anyone
who is following 50,000 to 200,000 people.
Note: The Twitter Preview is unable to generate a preview for the Friends Count filter. It will, however,
generate a preview for the "adobe" keyword.
Followers Count
Matches tweets where the author has a followers count within the given range.
Example: Lets say we want to follow anybody who tweets with the keyword “adobe” and who has a follower count
of 50,000 to 200,000 people. We would add the Keyword “adobe” then use the Follower Count filter and specify
“50000” in Minimum and "200000” in Maximum. Now we're following the keyword "adobe" mentioned by anyone
with a follower count of 50,000 to 200,000 people.
Note: The Twitter Preview is unable to generate a preview for the Followers Count filter. It will, however,
generate a preview for the "adobe" keyword.
Settings
270
Listening Glossary
Listening terms and definitions used in Social and its documentation.
Term
Definition
Audience
A measure of the number of people who will be notified of a tweet or will be very likely to see
a tweet by an author on Twitter. For example, a Twitter user with 2,000,000 followers would
have an audience of 2,000,000.
The Audience and Followers metrics (sometimes called reach) apply to Twitter only. These
metrics do not apply to other social platforms (Facebook, YouTube, and so forth). The
Audience and Followers metrics in the various reports display a zero (0) for non-applicable
platforms.
Author
The creator of the post, picture, video, and so forth on the social network.
Content Feed
A collection of verbatims from one or more social networks.
Content Link
The link to the original content on the social network.
Customer
A company that is using Social to track rules on the social web.
Customer
Intelligence
The use of data to understand the composition, needs, and satisfaction of the customer base.
Also, the enabling technology used to segment buyers into groupings to leverage in marketing
activities.
Emotion Analysis
The act of applying natural language processing (NLP) to the verbatims of mentions to gauge
emotion of a post. Adobe's proprietary algorithm leverages Plutchik's Wheel of Emotion, a
scientific model of assessing emotion, to analyze the post for primary and secondary emotions.
Visualization is applied to help communicate the analysis to the end user and allow for
aggregation of emotions across a selection of posts to understand general emotion trends
over time, of a topic, of an audience, and so forth.
Engagement
The ability to directly respond and engage with social authors one-to-one, with the goal of
participating in conversations surfaced through social media monitoring to answer questions,
address problems and issues, engage customers, activate influencers and advocates, gather
insights, and more.
Follower
The number of users who could see a post.
The Audience and Followers metrics (sometimes called reach) apply to Twitter. These metrics
do not apply to other social platforms (Facebook, YouTube, and so forth). The Audience and
Followers metrics in the various reports display a zero (0) for non-applicable platforms.
Influencer
A social author who has a perceived or tangible impact on brand perception or business
results through his or her social graph. Influencers can be identified through different measures
Settings
Term
271
Definition
of influence, including reach, following, share volume, sentiment, web traffic generated,
conversion generated, and revenue generated.
Insights
Actionable business learnings derived from analyzing raw data.
Listening Platform
Technology that provides social listening, social media monitoring, and social intelligence.
Adobe Social is a listening platform. Sophistication of this technology should consider the
type of access to social data sources. There is a difference between fire hose versus public
APIs, a difference in real-time availability to that data and the depth of data and metadata
available, and an ethical difference between sourcing data through official, standardized
means versus inconsistent and unreliable methods like site-crawling and screen-scraping.
Mention
A count of each time Social records a listening term being mentioned on the social web in a
post, picture, video, and so forth.
Mentions and Posts are somewhat interchangeable, but the reported metric numbers might
differ depending on the report you are viewing. See Reporting.
Post
A verbatim posted to a social site that includes the author, term, and content link.
Mentions and Posts are somewhat interchangeable, but the reported metric numbers might
differ depending on the report you are viewing. See Reporting.
Sentiment
Sentiment is a metric that defines the emotional feeling of a term. A low score indicates that
viewers reacted or likely felt unfavorably towards the post, picture, or video. A high score
indicates that viewers reacted or likely felt favorably towards the post, picture, or video.
For more information, see Sentiment Analysis.
Sentiment Analysis
The act of applying natural language processing (NLP) to the verbatims of mentions to gauge
sentiment of a post. A score or visualization can be applied to help communicate the analysis
to the end user and also allow for aggregation of scores across a selection of posts to
understand general sentiment trends over time, of a topic, of an audience, etc. Social sentiment
analysis includes machine-learning algorithms that are also manually tunable and can adjust
to a brand's specificities and preferences over time.
For more information, see Understanding Sentiment Scores.
Social Intelligence
The business insights derived from social listening and social media monitoring. Social
intelligence takes the form of dashboards and reports that together help surface customer
trends, business opportunities, and brand threats that can be used to improve and optimize
social content strategy and campaigns. Trends, business opportunities, and brand threats
can be routed and leveraged across marketing channels and other business units to improve
marketing and customer experiences.
Settings
272
Term
Definition
Social Listening
The ability to query social network data sources for mentions of keywords and hashtags that
have relevance to a business over a specific period of time.
Includes abilities to do the following:
• Create complex Boolean string queries
• Clean the data, including filtering spam and removing duplicate mentions
• Enrich the data through metadata, natural language processing (NLP), and other analyses
(including language, location, sentiment, emotion, and more)
• Filter the query results (including by platform, language, location, and proximity)
Social listening also includes the ability to visualize and display the verbatims of those
mentions and associated metadata.
Social Media
Monitoring
Real–time social listening, moving beyond historical listening for keywords and hashtags for
the purposes of research and insight, to the active monitoring of conversations across the
social web and identifying real-time brand buzz with the goal of engagement and participation.
This also includes the abilities to tag conversations for further analysis and prioritization and
route them to other stakeholders and departments for review, processing, and resolution.
Social Platform
A source of social data (must be able to provide the following: verbatim, content link, and
author). Social platforms include Twitter, Facebook, Google+, YouTube, and so forth.
Verbatim
The text (full text or as much text as possible) from a social comment from the social platform.
Social Tags
Use Social Tags as a centralized location to manage tags for use throughout Social.
Note: The GetPostData API method will continue to return legacy Publisher tags until further notice.
Social Tags help classify content within Social. For example, you can tag social contact profiles, inbound content in
moderation feeds, and outbound posts created in the Content Calendar or Publisher.
Information associated with Social Tags is not viewable outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter
followers, for example, cannot see this information.
Social Tags help you classify content. For example, an online clothing merchant could create individual tags for the
four seasons, grouped in a tag group named "Women's Clothing." These tags let you classify and view content by
season or by the tag group if you want to roll data up into broader categories.
Examples of uses for Social Tags include the following:
• Posts Report: You can filter the Posts report to show only those incoming posts that users in your organization
have assigned specific tags during moderation. For example, an online clothing merchant could tag incoming posts
that mention its Spring collection and then filter the report to show only those posts.
Settings
273
• Content Calendar: You can filter the Content Calendar to display only outgoing posts that have been assigned
specific tags during creation. For example, an online clothing merchant could filter on the "Spring" tag to display
only outgoing content that has been assigned that tag.
• Moderation Feeds: While moderating a feed, you can assign various tags to individual posts and tweets. You can
then create new moderation feeds that display only content that has been assigned to specific tags. For example,
you could tag content with a tag named "Unhappy Customer." You could then create a new moderation feed to
display only posts and tweets from unhappy customers so that you can respond to them later without losing track
of them.
• Social Contact: While moderating content, you can click a user's avatar image or name to display that user's
social contact information. You could then assign specific tags to that user, such as "Influencer." From now on,
whenever a listening rule captures content from that user, and, if you have a moderation feed set up to display
content from influencers, that post or tweet displays in that moderation feed.
The permissions-based Social Tags feature lets you control the access and creation of tag groups and Social Tags
in your Social implementation. The Social Tags feature helps to ensure that the strategies your organization uses
to measure performance using Social Tags is followed and that the use of tags is consistent throughout Social and
your internal teams. Contact your Social Account Manager to have the Social Tags permissions set up in Adobe
Social (this permission cannot be configured in the Social UI).
Note: Legacy tags that you created in Social appear as a new group. You can edit them as needed.
Add Tag Groups
Create tag groups to organize individual Social Tags.
Note: Legacy tags that you created in Social appear as a new group. You can edit them as needed.
1. Click Settings > Social Tags.
2. Click Add Tag Group.
3. Fill in the fields:
Tag Group Name: Provide a descriptive, unique name for the tag group.
Settings
274
A descriptive name helps you quickly locate a specific group if you have many groups. The name can also help
you quickly understand the group's purpose. You can use as many as 50 characters in the name.
Applies To: Select one or more options:
• Posts: Attach tags to outbound posts to let you break down performance based on tags using the Posts report.
• Properties: Add tags to social properties in Unified Moderation Property Management to easily group properties
for filtering and quick publishing. This feature can be used as a replacement for Audiences and Page Groups
that work across networks (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, and so forth).
• Segments: Add tags to Social Contact profiles to let you segment individuals within Social to create customer
segment moderation feeds.
• User Generated Content: Catagorize inbound content by easily adding and editing tags to view trends and
breakdowns.
4. Type the tag in the text box (up to 50 characters), then click
Add
You must add at least one tag to a group before you can save it. You can always add tags later by following the
steps in Add Tags to a Tag Group.
5. Add additional tags, as needed.
6. Click Add to save the tag group and tags.
Edit a Tag Group
Edit an existing tag group to change its name or settings.
1. Click Settings > Social Tags.
2. Click the name of the tag group to open it in editing mode.
Settings
275
3. Edit its name or settings as explained in Add Tag Groups, then click Save.
Delete Tag Groups
Delete one or more tag groups and all tags within the groups.
1. Click Settings > Social Tags.
2. Select the check boxes next to the desired tag groups, then click Delete Tag Group.
If the selected tag groups contain Social Tags, a warning message displays informing you that all tags within the
selected groups will also be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
Add Tags to a Tag Group
Use Social Tags to add new tags to existing tag groups.
Note: Legacy tags that you created in Social appear as a new group. You can edit them as needed.
1. Click Settings > Social Tags.
2. Click the name of the tag group to open it in editing mode.
Settings
3. To add a tag to the group, click
276
Tag to expand the Tags section.
4. Type the tag in the text box (up to 50 characters), then click
5. Add additional tags, as needed.
6. Click Save.
Add
Delete Tags from Tag Groups
Delete one or more Social Tags from an existing tag group.
1. Click Settings > Social Tags.
2. Click the name of the tag group that contains the tags you want to delete.
3. Select the check boxes next to the desired tags, then click Delete Selected.
Page Groups
Create groups to post simultaneously to multiple Facebook pages or to a collection of Like nodes.
Groups let you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages or to a collection of Like nodes on the
Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you post to every page or node in that group or collection. A Like node is a
Settings
277
virtual collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside of Facebook (for example, on a web
page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can further communicate with every Facebook user who has
clicked one of your Like buttons.
Create Page Groups
Create a new page group, configure its settings, and select the Facebook pages and Like Nodes to include in the
group. You can then select groups in the Publisher to publish to every page in the group at once.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings.
1. Click Settings > Page Groups.
2. At the bottom of the list, click Create a New Group.
3. Fill in the fields:
Group Name: Specify a descriptive, unique name for the group.
Owner: From the drop-down list, select a user group or owner for the page group. Only the owner can edit or
delete the group. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
Require Approval to Post: Posting approval is an optional feature in Social and is configured at the account
level. If a post requires approval, it is placed in the Content Calendar, where it can be previewed, edited,
approved, rejected, or deleted. See Content Calendar List View.
Notes: Add additional notes that describe the page group or its purpose.
Facebook Pages: From the drop-down list, select the pages and Like Nodes that you want to include in this
page group. You can also remove pages and Like Nodes from the group. The list displays Facebook pages that
have been added to your Social account. For more information, see Add Facebook Pages.
4. Click Create Group.
Edit Page Groups
Edit a specific page group to change its name, owner, approval settings, and pages or Like Nodes.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings.
1. Click Settings > Page Groups.
2. In the Actions column for the desired group, click Edit.
3. Edit the fields:
Group Name: Specify a descriptive, unique name for the group.
Owner: From the drop-down list, select a user group or owner for the page group. Only the owner can edit or
delete the group.As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
Require Approval to Post: Posting approval is an optional feature in Social and is configured at the account
level. See Configure Property Settings. If a post requires approval, it is placed in the Content Calendar, where
it can be previewed, edited, approved, rejected, deleted, or made into an ad. See Content Calendar List View.
Notes: Add additional notes that describe the page group or its purpose.
Settings
278
Facebook Pages: From the drop-down list, select the pages and Like Nodes that you want to include in this
page group. You can also remove pages and Like Nodes from the group. The list displays Facebook pages that
have been added to your Social account. For more information, see Add Facebook Pages.
4. Click Update Group.
Clone Page Groups
Clone an existing page group. You can then easily edit its settings to create a new page group with a similar
configuration.
1. Click Settings > Page Groups.
2. In the Actions column for the desired group, click Clone, then click OK to confirm that you want to clone the
page group.
3. Click Edit, then edit the fields for the cloned page group:
Group Name: Specify a descriptive, unique name for the group.
Owner: From the drop-down list, select a user group or owner for the page group. Only the owner can edit or
delete the group. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
Require Approval to Post: Posting approval is an optional feature in Social and is configured at the account
level. See Configure Property Settings. If a post requires approval, it is placed in the Content Calendar page,
where it can be previewed, edited, approved, rejected, deleted, or made into an ad. See Content Calendar List
View.
Notes: Add additional notes that describe the page group or its purpose.
Facebook Pages: From the drop-down list, select the pages and Like Nodes that you want to include in this
page group. You can also remove pages and Like Nodes from the group. The list displays Facebook pages that
have been added to your Social account. For more information, see Add Facebook Pages.
4. Click Update Group.
Delete a Page Group
Delete a page group when it is no longer needed.
Removing a page group removes the group from Social so that you can no longer use Social to publish to that group.
All posts that you have scheduled for posting on the pages in the group are also deleted. Removing a group from
Social does not delete the pages in the group from Facebook.
1. Click Settings > Page Groups.
2. In the Actions column for the desired group, click Delete, then confirm the deletion.
Facebook Audiences
Create custom audiences to use in publishing and moderation tasks. Audiences let you quickly publish posts to a
preselected subset of viewers of a Facebook page. Audiences also let you create moderation feeds that display
only content posted by a preselected subset of users of a Facebook page.
Settings
279
You can make your audiences more specific by narrowing this group of people based on their geographical location
or language. Audiences are especially useful if you have specific sets of fans that you want to publish to or moderate
on a regular basis.
The Manage Audiences page lists the audience name, the page/page group, targeting information, and the publishers
who can publish to that audience.
You can create a new audience or you can edit, delete, or export existing audiences.
To access the Facebook Audiences page, click Settings > Facebook Audiences.
Create an Audience
Create an audience to use in publishing and moderation tasks.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Videos: Publisher Settings and Audience Publishing.
1. Click Settings > Facebook Audiences.
2.
Click
.
3. In the Audience Name field, specify a descriptive name for the audience.
4. From the Target Properties drop-down list, select an option:
• Facebook Pages: For content posting, lets you post content to the Wall of a single Facebook page that you
manage. For content moderation, lets you create a moderation feed that displays only content posted by users
of an audience who post content to a Facebook page.
• Page Groups: For content posting, lets you post content simultaneously to a group of Facebook pages or to
a collection of Like nodes on the Facebook Open Graph. This option lets you post to every page or node in that
group or collection. A Like node is a virtual collection of anyone who has clicked a Facebook Like button outside
of Facebook (for example, on a web page or display advertisement). Using this option, you can further
communicate with every Facebook user who has clicked one of your Like buttons. For more information, see
Page Groups. For content moderation, lets you create a moderation feed that displays only content posted to
a collection of Like nodes.
5. (Optional) From the Access Rights drop-down list, select the user or user group that can use this audience
when creating and configuring posts.
As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
For example, you might have a group for administrators, another group for marketers, and another group for
application builders.
6. (Optional) In the Countries box, start typing the name of the desired country, then select the country from the
list. You can then choose to post the content to everywhere in that country or to a specific state or city. You can
select multiple locations and languages for the same audience.
7. (Optional) In the Languages box, start typing the name of the desired language, then select the language from
the list. This option lets post the content to only fans in the selected geographic location who speak the specified
language.
Language is based on what fans specify as their language on their Facebook profiles.You can target by language
without using location targeting.
8. Fill in the fields in the Demographics section to specify demographic targeting options:
Settings
280
Age: Use the age pointers to specify the target age range. Be aware that Facebook does not permit certain types
of advertising to minors. For example, you cannot advertise alcoholic beverages to people in the 13-18 year-old
range.
Gender: Select All, Male, or Female.
9. Fill in the fields in the Education section to specify educational targeting options:
Education Level: Select All, In High School, In College, or College Alumni. If you select In College or College
Alumni, additional options display.
College: Specify one or more target colleges.
College Major: Specify one or more college majors.
10. Fill in the fields in the Advanced section to specify advanced targeting options:
Relationship Status: Select one or more relationship statuses: Single, In Relationship, Married, Engaged,
or Not Specified.
Interested In: Select All, Male, or Female.
Workplace: Select one or more target workplaces.
11. Click Save.
Manage Audiences
Copy, edit, or delete existing audiences. You can also create an RSS feed URL for the audience.
1. Click Settings > Facebook Audiences.
2. Click
to enter bulk operations mode, then select the check box next to one or more audiences that you want
to manage.
Select the check box in the table header to select all configured audiences.
3. Select the desired option:
Icon
Action
RSS Feed: Displays an RSS feed URL. You can subscribe to the audience-specific feed using your
preferred RSS feed reader or you can view the feed in a new window.
The URL is in the form of https://rss.social.omniture.com/audience/1234?token=abcdef.
This is a secure URL and cannot be guessed.
Copy Audience: Lets you duplicate the audience. The copy is named "Copy of <name>" and displays
in a new row in the table. For example, if you copy an audience named "Germany," the copy is named
"Copy of Germany." You could then edit the copy as desired to make a new audience based off of
the original audience.
Edit Audience: Displays the Facebook Audiences page. You can edit the audience as desired. For
more information about the available options, see Create an Audience.
Settings
Icon
281
Action
Delete Audience: Lets you delete an audience from Social. If you delete an audience, all upcoming
posts scheduled for this audience will fail. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Narrow an Audience During Publishing
Further narrow a saved audience that you previously created.
You can use the Audience Manager feature to create an audience for Facebook posts. For example, you could
create an audience to target Facebook users in Germany. This audience makes it easy to target Facebook posts
to people in Germany.
However, you might want to infrequently narrow this audience to include only female Facebook users who live in
Germany.You could create another audience for this narrowed demographic, or you could choose to use the original
audience and simply narrow the audience on a post-by-post basis.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Publish > Publisher.
Click Targets, then from the Targets drop-down list, select the desired audience.
To narrow the audience, click the audience name to display additional targeting options.
Narrow the target as desired.
For example, you could select Female from the Gender drop-down list to narrow the existing target.
Note: You can only narrow the target audience. You cannot expand the target audience.
5. Configure the additional elements for the post as described in Publisher or Content Calendar.
Marketing Cloud Users and Groups
Add new users to your Adobe Social account or add and organize account administrators into groups.
You can control administrator access through group permissions for account, publishing, moderation, applications,
dashboard, and page management.
Add Users in the Analytics Admin Console
Use the Analytics Admin Console to create new users.
Note: You must be an Admin user in the Adobe Marketing Cloud to perform the steps in this section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Settings > Marketing Cloud Users & Groups.
Click the Users tab.
Click Add New User.
Fill in the fields:
For more information, see Users in the Analytics Help and Reference guide.
In particular, ensure that you configure the following options:
Settings
282
Create Default Dashboard: Select this option so that Analytics automatically creates dashboards for this user.
Select the desired report suite to populate the dashboard with the correct data for this user.
Require User to Change Password on Next Login: Selecting this option improves security by forcing the user
to change the specified password at the next log in.
Access > User: If this user is not an administrator, select the appropriate user group.
5. Edit the Welcome Email message, if desired.
6. Click Save Changes.
You must register newly created users in Social before they can log in to Social. See Register Users.
Add User Group, Permissions, and Members
Add user groups, specify permissions, and assign group members.
Group management makes it easy to organize account administrators and control their access levels. The Groups
section lists all of the user groups that are set up within the account. Permissions are set at the user group level, so
all users in the group inherit the group permissions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Settings > Users & Groups.
Click the Groups tab.
Click Add User Group.
In the Group Details section, specify a descriptive name, an optional description, and the desired owner of the
new group.
5. Select Allow All Permissions to grant all permissions to selected users.
Or
Click the appropriate Group Permissions tab, then select the desired permissions, as explained in the following
table:
Group Permissions Tab
Moderation
Permissions
Can access and export unified moderation stats
Edit the moderation, watch words, and auto-delete settings on All or Owned pages
Can edit unified moderation settings
Moderate (reply to, remove, like, and escalate posts and comments) All or Owned
pages
Edit Twitter moderation settings
Can use unified moderation
Admin
Add a new user to the system
Can change the owner of a page
Can manage multi-level approval workflows
Set up and manage competitor pages for analytics
Manage All or Owned social properties
Settings
Group Permissions Tab
283
Permissions
Can add and remove tracked terms
Create, edit, or delete All or Owned user groups
Dashboard
View and export analytics for All or Owned promotions and pages
View competitor analytics
Publisher
Create and edit publishing audiences
Create, edit, post, schedule and cancel posts to All or Owned targets
Ability to create and edit Social campaigns
Create and edit templates
Legacy Applications
Create, edit, and deploy All or Owned custom apps
Create and edit All or Owned tab apps
6. Under Group Members, select one or more group members for whom you want to grant permissions.
7. Click Save.
If you are a member of the Administrator group, you can edit and delete groups, or change a group's owner.
Publishing Workflows
Create and manage multi-level publishing workflows (edit, delete, and duplicate). Publishing workflows let you assign
and complete multi-level approval processes.
A publishing workflow is a process you set up to specify how posts must be approved before they can be posted on
their assigned social platforms (owned Facebook pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, and so forth).
You can create different approval levels and then assign individual user groups or users to each level. Ideally, you
should assign a user group to a publishing workflow rather than to an individual user, who can slow your approval
process. If you assign a user group to a workflow, one member of that user group must approve the post in order
for that approval requirement to be met. You can also specify a user group or individual user to override the
publishing-workflow settings.
You can assign publishing workflows at the individual property level (individual Facebook page or Twitter account,
for example) or at the account level (all new social properties added to the account use a default approval workflow).
You can create the following types of workflows:
• Horizontal Publishing Workflow: User Group/User A, and User Group/User B, and User Group/User C must
approve the post, in any order.
• Vertical Publishing Workflow: User Group/User A, then User Group/User B, and then User Group/User C must
approve the post, in that specific order.
• Combination Publishing Workflow: Combines elements of a horizontal and vertical publishing workflow by
creating multiple approval levels. For example, level one might contain a horizontal hierarchy in which an individual
member in each of three user groups must approve the post, in any order. The second level might contain a single
user who then must approve the post after the first level is completed.
Settings
284
Suppose, for example, that you want multiple teams in your organization to approve a post before it is placed in the
publishing queue. For example, after a member of your social team has created and scheduled a post, you want
one member of your creative, legal, and public relations teams to approve the post, in no particular order. This is
an example of a horizontal workflow.
A similar vertical workflow could be created in which a member of your creative team must approve the post, followed
by a member of your legal team, followed by a member of your public relations team.
You could also create a combination workflow in which the post must first be approved by a member of your creative
team, legal team, and public relations team (in no particular order), followed by a member of your executive team.
Note: If a user is included in a publishing workflow (either explicitly or as a member of a user group), that
user is automatically given the appropriate Approval permissions. The Approve All/Owned permission has
been deprecated. Approval permissions are automatically granted based on assigned publishing workflows.
If a member of a user group is assigned to a publishing workflow (either explicitly or as a member of a user group),
that user receives an email notification when a post is actionable for his or her approval level.
Note that if a post is edited in any way (photo or link added, targeting changed, etc.) during the approval process,
the workflow restarts. That is, any levels that have been completed, must be re-approved.
You can also filter the Content Calendar by Pending Approvals to display only posts that require approval before
they can be posted. You can filter by user group or individual user. You can also filter by your user name to display
only posts that you have been designated in an approval process.
The Notes section for each post can be used as an audit trail to see who has approved that post, along with a
timestamp.
Note: Any existing approval conditions you specified in previous versions of Social are migrated and honored
going forward. You can determine whether an approval condition is a migrated workflow by looking at the
Created By column. If this field is empty, this workflow has been migrated. Migrated workflow names are
populated with the name of the property for which the approval conditions were made.
Create a New Publishing Workflow
Create a publishing workflow containing user groups or individuals who must approve a post before it is posted to
its social platform. There is no limit to the number of publishing workflows you can create within an account.
1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows.
2. Click New.
Settings
285
Fill in the fields:
Approval Workflow Name: Provide a descriptive name for the workflow. A descriptive name helps you quickly
locate and select the desired workflow when selecting approval workflows for specific properties or when editing,
deleting, or duplicating workflows form the Publishing Workflows page (Settings > Publishing Workflows).
Approval Hierarchy: To create the initial level in the workflow hierarchy, click
to Approval Level dialog box.
to display the Add Users/Groups
Select the desired user group or user that you want to assign to this approval level.
To add another user group or user to this initial approval level (a horizontal hierarchy level), click
the dialog box.
to expand
Settings
286
Select the desired user group or user that you want to assign to this approval level. An AND operator separates
the user groups and users in a horizontal hierarchy level.
Click Save on the Add Users/Groups to Approval Level dialog box when you are finished configuring the initial
approval level.
To create an additional level to the workflow hierarchy, click Add Another Approval Level from the Publishing
Workflows page. Adding another level creates a vertical workflow. For example, all approval requirements must
be met for the first level before the second-level requirements can be addressed.
You can create as many levels as necessary for your organization. There is no limit on the number of levels you
can define in each hierarchy. Note that you can drag and drop levels to achieve the desired order of approval
levels.
You can also edit or delete individual levels, as needed by clicking
or
.
Click Save when finished.
Allow the Following Users/Usergroups to Bypass the Workflow: You can optionally select a user group or
user who can override the publishing workflow process to approve a post, even though the approval requirements
have not been met. You should use this option judiciously. This feature is helpful, for example, if a someone who
must approve a post is ill or otherwise is not available to approve a post.
Use this Workflow as default for all new Social Properties: When you configure individual social properties,
you can select the desired publishing workflow from the drop-down list. This lets you use different publishing
workflows for different properties in your account (for example, individual owned Facebook pages, Twitter accounts,
Google+ pages, and so forth). Enabling this option assigns this workflow to all new social properties added to
this account as the default. Even if you select this option, you can still override this assignment for individual
properties.
For information about configuring individual social properties, including publishing workflows, see Configure
Property Settings.
Settings
287
Edit a Publishing Workflow
Edit an existing publishing workflow to change its settings, such as its name, approval levels, approval override, or
default settings.
1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows.
2. Select the desired workflow from the list, then click Edit.
3. Fill in the fields.
For more information, see Step 2 in Create a New Publishing Workflow.
Note: Do not attempt to rename a publishing workflow with the same name as another existing workflow.
Delete a Publishing Workflow
Delete one or more publishing workflows from Social.
1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows.
2. Select one or more workflows, then click Delete.
You do not need to confirm the deletion.
An error message displays if the workflow is associated with one or more social properties. You cannot delete a
publishing workflow if it is associated with social properties.
To remove a workflow association with a social property, complete the following steps:
Platform
Facebook
Twitter
Google+
LinkedIn
YouTube
Sina Weibo
Steps
Click Settings > Facebook Pages. From the Approval drop-down list for the desired
page, select None.
Click Settings > Twitter Accounts. From the Approval drop-down list for the desired
account, select None.
Click Settings > Google+ Pages. From the Approval drop-down list for the desired
page, select None.
Click Settings > LinkedIn Companies and Groups. Click the desired company page
or group to display the Edit LinkedIn Property settings. From the Approval drop-down
list, select None.
Click Settings > YouTube Channels. Click the desired channel to display the Edit
YouTube Property settings. From the Approval drop-down list, select None.
Click Settings > Sina Weibo Accounts. Click the desired account to display the Edit
Sina Weibo Account settings. From the Approval drop-down list, select None.
Settings
288
Duplicate a Publishing Workflow
Duplicate an existing publishing workflow that you can then edit to create a similar (cloned) workflow without having
to start from the beginning of the configuration process.
1. Click Settings > Publishing Workflows.
2. Select one or more workflows, then click Duplicate.
3. Edit the duplicate workflow as explained in Edit a Publishing Workflow.
Viewing the Audit Trail for Publishing Workflows
View the notes for each post in the Content Calendar to view an "audit trail" to see who has approved that post,
along with a timestamp.
Audit-trail data includes username, action, timestamp, comments, and approval-status information.
1. Click Publish > Content Calendar.
2.
(Optional) Locate the desired post by clicking , then filter the Content Calendar by Pending Approval to see
only those posts that require approval before being added to the publishing queue.
For more information, see Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
3. Click the post to display its details.
The Notes section on the right side of contains information about that post, including any edits to its configuration
as well as approval actions. Each time a user approves a post, Social automatically adds a note specifying who
approved that post along with a timestamp of when the action was performed.
Register Users
After creating users in the Admin Tools, register the newly created users and add them to groups.
For more information about creating users in the Admin Tools, see Add Users in the Analytics Admin Console.
1. In the left navigation menu, click Settings > Register Users..
Note: If the left navigation menu is not displayed, click
.
2. In the People to Register section, select one or more users who you want to associate with this account in
Social.
Note: If you are registering several users with varying permissions, you should import all users with the
same permissions separately.
3. In the Groups section, select the groups to which you want to add the selected users.
For accounts with a simple permissions structure, all users can be assigned the Administrators access. For more
complex configurations, you can choose both a Permissions and an Ownership group for those users who are
not Administrators.
Existing user groups display in this section. You can create additional user groups, if necessary. See Add User
Group, Permissions, and Members.
Settings
289
4. In the Custom Message box, specify an optional message that you want sent by email informing users that they
have been registered in Social.
For example, your message might include the following information:
I have just created an account for you in Adobe Social. Please log in with the following credentials and let me
know if you have any issues logging in. You will be required to change your password after logging in.
URL: http://social.omniture.com
Login Company: Company123
Username: Username
Password: Temporary Password
5. Click Create x Users.
For example, if you are registering three users, the button's label is Create 3 Users.
Facebook Permissions
Re-authorize Facebook and grant permissions after making a change to your Facebook pages, such as changing
your password.
1. Click Settings > Facebook Permissions.
The Facebook Permissions page lists each Facebook account and its associated publisher, pages, and
authorization status. If an account needs to be re-authorized, a warning message displays in the Authorization
column.
2. (Conditional) In the Authorized column, click Re-Authorize.
3. Follow the prompts from Facebook to grant permissions and to re-authorize the account.
Campaigns
Create a Social campaign and assign its tracking code and start/end dates.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Set Up.
A campaign is a marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. For example, if a campaign advertises
a specific credit card, the campaign could be a series of creative elements (links, Flash Multimedia posts, tweets,
and so forth) advertising the card's interest rate and benefits. The campaign's tracking code on each creative element
lets you track the effectiveness of the campaign by letting you know which link a user clicked to come to your website.
Note: Social campaigns must be created in Adobe Social. Social campaigns cannot be created in Adobe
Analytics. Social does not display or import campaigns created in Analytics.
After creating campaigns and assigning them to content you post, you can use the Campaigns report to view
statistics about your campaign marketing efforts. For more information, see Social Campaigns.
You can assign individual campaigns to content you publish on Facebook, Google+, Twitter, and LinkedIn.
When assigning campaigns to content, consider the following:
Settings
290
• The Campaigns drop-down list displays available campaigns only if the current report suite has existing campaigns.
To create campaigns, see Create a Campaign.
• You can set a default campaign for your report suite. When users create new posts in the Publisher or Content
Calendar, the Campaign option is pre-populated with the default campaign. This setting streamlines publishing
and governance. Users can change the campaign if other campaigns are available. For more information, see
Create a Campaign.
• The Campaigns drop-down list displays active campaigns only. For example, if you schedule content to post on
September 15, the drop-down list displays only campaigns that are scheduled to start before September 15 and
end on or after September 15.
• The available campaigns in the Campaigns drop-down list displays different campaigns depending on the date
that you select to post the content. The drop-down list displays only campaigns that are relevant to the selected
date.
• The Campaigns drop-down list displays only on content types that have an outgoing link. Click data is recorded
in Analytics when users click through to the website.
Create a Campaign
Create a Social campaign and assign its tracking code and start/end dates. A tracking code associates visitor activity
with a specific creative element.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Campaign Set Up.
Note: Social campaigns must be created in Adobe Social. Social campaigns cannot be created in Adobe
Analytics. Social does not display or import campaigns created in Analytics.
1. Click Settings > Campaigns.
The Campaigns page displays a list of all of your saved campaigns within the currently selected report suite,
with their start and end dates. You can create a new campaign, or you can edit or delete an existing campaign.
2. Click Create Campaign.
3. Fill in the fields:
• Campaign Name: Specify a name for the campaign. You should specify a clear and meaningful name, such
as "20th Anniversary Sale" or "Mealtime Makeover Community Challenge."
• Assign This Campaign as Default: Make this the default campaign for your report suite. When users create
new posts in the Publisher or Content Calendar, the Campaign option is pre-populated with the default
campaign. This setting streamlines publishing and governance by ensuring that all of your content is tagged
and trackable to conversion events, even if users forget to set a campaign during the publishing process. Users
can change the campaign if other campaigns are available.
Note: Deselect this option if you do want to select a default campaign, which makes No Campaign the
default.
• Start Date and End Date: Specify the campaign duration. You can specify one or both of the dates and times.
• Key Performance Indicator (KPI): Select a Key Performance Indicator from the drop-down list. Options include
Page Views, Orders, Instances and more.
Settings
291
• Upload a Photo: Browse to and upload a photo that displays on the Social Campaigns report tile.
• Tracking ID Prefix: Specify the prefix for the tracking code. You can also select Insert Date to attach the
current date in the format YYYYMMDD.
A tracking code prefix and date help your more easily identify tracking codes in URLs and in the Campaigns
Tracking Code report (Analytics > Campaigns > Campaign Details). The actual tracking code is automatically
generated by Social.
The optional prefix and date make the tracking code more readable and lets you easily see which creative
elements are associated with each campaign. For example, if you use the prefix "Winter Sale," all of your tracking
codes associated with this campaign contain the "Winter Sale" prefix.
A key element to keep in mind when creating your tracking code ID prefix is that this prefix will be reflected in
the tracking code in Adobe Analytics. If your analytics team already has a tracking code taxonomy to classify
and organize tracking codes, the social team should coordinate with the analytics team to match this taxonomy,
as needed, in order for campaigns to be included in cross-channel analysis.
4. Click Save.
You can edit a campaign's settings or delete an existing campaign.
Campaign Categorization
After assigning campaigns to content published using the SocialPublisher module, each post obtains a unique
tracking code.
The categorization for the tracking code is automatically uploaded into SAINT when the content is posted.
Categories include the following:
• Platform: (Facebook, Google+, Twitter, or LinkedIn)
• Author name
• Post time
• Post target (Facebook page, audience name, Twitter handle, etc.)
Tags are not sent to SAINT or to Adobe Analytics.
Circle Manager
View and manage your Google+ Circles across all Google+ pages in your account.
Google+ Circles let you organize people into whatever groupings make sense for your organization. You can create
different Circles based on geographic location, age, and the number of engagements those users have had with
your brand. You can then post highly relevant content to these different Circles.
The Circle Manager page displays all of your Circles for the selected Google+ page. You can view the following
information for each Circle: name, number of members, and the publisher group whose members can post to that
Circle.
You can create new Circles, edit or remove existing Circles, and view stats for each Circle.
Create Circle
Create a new Google+ Circle that you can use to publish highly relevant content to a specific audience.
Settings
292
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Audience Publishing.
1. Click Settings > Circle Manager.
2. Click
in the upper right corner.
3. From the Google+ Page drop-down list, select the desired Google+ page for which you want to create the Circle.
4. In the Circle Name field, specify a descriptive name for the Circle.
5. From the Owners drop-down list, select the user or group that can use this Circle when creating and configuring
posts.
As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
For example, you might have a publisher group for administrators, another for marketers, and another for
application builders.
You can select only one user owner group per Circle.
6. From the Gender drop-down list, select the target for your Circle: All, Male, Female, Other, and Not Specified.
7. Under Engagement, select the number of engagements from each person required to be included in this Circle.
An engagement is when a Google+ user clicks +1 on one of your posts, makes a comment on your page, or
shares a page with other users.
8. Click Create Circle.
Edit or Remove Circles
Edit the settings for a single Circle or for multiple Circles at the same time.
Note: You can also edit or remove a circle from the Google+ Pages page (Settings > Google+Pages).
The following sections contain more information:
• Edit a Single Circle
• Remove a Single Circle
• Edit Multiple Circles Simultaneously
• Remove Multiple Circles Simultaneously
Edit a Single Circle
1. Click Settings > Circle Manager.
2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circle you want to edit.
3. Select the Circle name you would like to edit, then click
in the upper right corner.
4. Edit the Circle name, then select the desired owner.
5. Click Save Circle.
Remove a Single Circle
1. Click Settings > Circle Manager.
2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circle you want to remove.
3.
Select the Circle name you would like to delete, then click
confirm the deletion.
in the upper right corner. Click Remove Circles to
Settings
293
Edit Multiple Circles Simultaneously
1. Click Settings > Circle Manager.
2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circles you want to edit.
3. Select one or more Circles. Click
in the upper right corner.
4.
5. From the Owner drop-down list, select the desired owner.
6. Click Save Circle.
Remove Multiple Circles Simultaneously
1. Click Publish > Circle Manager.
2. From the Page Name drop-down list, select the page that is associated with the Circles you want to remove.
3.
Select one or more Circles you would like to delete, then click
in the upper right corner..
4. Click Remove Circles to confirm the deletion.
Link Shorteners
Create multiple ctx.ly, bit.ly, Awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts within Social and generate shortened URLs in
posts instead of using the default Social link shortener.
Using URLs with link shorteners helps you brand your various posts and give you quick access to statistics on link
visits.
Note: The link shortener feature defaults to ctx.ly if an external link shortener fails. If ctx.ly fails, the post is
published without the link being shortened.
Add a ctx.ly Account
Add one or more ctx.ly accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts.You can add multiple custom domains
over the ctx.ly URL shortener.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings.
For example, instead of using http://ctxl.y/ksyrhui334, users can use http://ab.cd/wgidhqwieh878.
1. Create a custom domain and point it to the Social DNS server using a CNAME record.
For example, you can create a CNAME record mapping your custom domain name from abcd.com to
oak.ctx.ly.
At times an A record is needed for the Top Level Domains when a CNAME is not allowed.You can add a CNAME
record or an A record. The A record must point to the IP address of the corresponding URL (depending on the
data center).
Depending on which Adobe data center your Social account is using, the mapping varies:
Settings
294
Data
Center
URL
Dallas
oak.ctx.ly
San Jose oak.ctx.ly
Pacific
p.ctx.ly
Northwest
London
l.ctx.ly
Singapore s.ctx.ly
IP Address
66.235.135.35
66.235.135.35
192.243.232.96
66.235.156.166
63.140.45.52
2. From within Social, click Settings > Link Shorteners.
The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have
created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account.
3. Click the ctx.ly tab, if necessary.
4. Click
to add a custom domain.
5. Specify the desired custom domain, then click Validate.
It might take as many as 48 hours for DNS changes to propagate and Social to accept your domain. If Social
cannot validate the custom domain, please try again later.
6. Specify the desired account name.
7. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users.
The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the ctx.ly account to generate short
URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
8. Click Save.
You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts.
Note: You can use the ctx.ly toggle to enable or disable the default ctx.ly shortener. This toggle does not
affect the custom domains you add to your account.
Training Video: To view a short video explaining how to enable or disable the default ctx.ly shortener, see
Social 3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements.
Use a Custom Domain with a ctx.ly Link Shortener
You can add multiple custom domains over the ctx.ly URL shortener to brand your shortened URLs.
Training Video: To view a short video explaining how use to a custom domain with a ctx.ly link shortener, see
Social 3.2 Link Shortening Enhancements.
This section contains the following information:
• Purchase the Short Domain
• Create a DNS Record for Your Domain
Settings
295
• Configure the ctx.ly Account in Adobe Social
Purchase the Short Domain
You must purchase the domain to be used for your ctx.ly shortened URLs. You can purchase domains from various
third-party vendors.
Create a DNS Record for Your Domain
The DNS (Domain Name System) allows users' web browsers to translate a domain to a website. After you create
the custom domain, you must point it to the Social DNS server using a CNAME record.
Depending on the domain registrar you used to purchase your short domain, the process for updating DNS varies.
The following steps are general, but vary depending on the domain registrar.
1. Log in to your domain registrar's website.
2. Select the short domain you want to configure.
3. Locate the section used to manage DNS entries.
Depending on the registrar, this section might be named "DNS Configuration," "DNS Records," "Advanced DNS,"
"Total DNS," "Host Records," or something similar.
4. Modify the CNAME record to point the custom domain to the Social DNS server: ctx.ly.
For example, you can create a CNAME record mapping your custom domain name from abcd.com to ctx.ly.
Note: If you are unsure of how to perform the preceding steps, please contact your domain registrar's support
team or your organization's internal IT department. Adobe Social Support cannot help you perform these steps.
Configure the ctx.ly Account in Adobe Social
1. From within Social, click Settings > Link Shorteners.
The Link Shorteners page lists all of your link shortener accounts that you have created in Social. You can
preview the account's settings or delete the account, as necessary.
2. Click the ctx.ly tab, if necessary.
3. Click Add Custom Domain.
4. Specify the desired custom domain that you previously purchased and configured, then click Validate.
Note: It might take as many as 48 hours for DNS changes to propagate and Social to accept your domain.
If Social cannot validate the custom domain, please try again later.
5. Specify the desired account name.
6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users.
The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the ctx.ly account to generate short
URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
7. Click Save.
You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts.
Settings
296
Note: You can use the ctx.ly toggle to enable or disable the default ctx.ly shortener. This toggle does not
affect the custom domains you add to your account.
Add a bit.ly Account
Add one or more bit.ly accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts.
Adobe EnterpriseTV Training Video: Publisher Settings.
1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners.
The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have
created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account.
2. Click the Bit.ly tab, if necessary.
3. Click .
A bit.ly web page displays. If you are not signed in to bitly, you are asked to sign in. If you are signed in to bit.ly,
you are prompted you to authorize Social to access your bit.ly account.
4. Click Allow to grant access and to return to the Social UI.
5. From the Short Domain drop-down list, select a default short domain for that account:
• bit.ly
• bitly.com
• j.mp
You can change the default short domain when you create individual posts, if desired.
6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users.
The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the bit.ly account to generate short
URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts.
Add an awe.sm Project
Add one or more awe.sm projects before you can generate short URLs in posts using awe.sm.
Note: Before you can add an awe.sm project to Social, you must first authorize the Adobe Social app for you
awe.sm account. Contact the awe.sm support team to configure your account to be used with Adobe Social.
In Adobe Social
1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners.
The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have
created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account.
2. Click the awe.sm tab.
3. Click .
4. Specify your awe.sm subscription key, then click Authenticate.
5. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users.
Settings
297
The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the awe.sm project to generate
short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an
individual.
6. In the Projects section, select the desired project.
7. Click Save to grant access and to return to the Social UI.
You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts.
Add a Po.st Account
Add one or more Po.st accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts.
1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners.
The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have
created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account.
2. Click the Po.st tab.
3. Click .
4. Specify the campaign name, API key, and short domain.
5. Click Save. to grant access and to return to the Social UI.
6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users.
The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the Po.st account to generate short
URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an individual.
You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts.
Add a BudURL Account
Add one or more BudURL accounts before you can generate short URLs in posts using BudURL.
BudURL offers two types of accounts: BudURL and BudURL Pro. Adobe Social supports both types of accounts.
1. Click Settings > Link Shorteners.
The Link Shorteners page lists all of your ctx.ly, bit.ly, awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL accounts that you have
created in Social. You can preview the account's settings or delete the account.
2. Click the BudURL tab.
3. Click .
4. Specify the account name, API key, and short domain.
5. Click Save. to grant access and to return to the Social UI.
6. From the Owner drop-down list, select an individual user or a group of users.
The account owner specifies who in your organization has permission to use the BudURL account to generate
short URLs in Social while creating posts. As best practice, ownership should be a user group rather than an
individual.
You are now ready to generate short URLs in posts.
Settings
298
Generate Short URLs in Posts
Generate short URLs in posts using link shorteners. You can manually shorten each link using a different shortener
for each link, shorten all links using the same shortener, or automatically shorten all links using the default shortener.
Before a user can configure link shortening preferences, an admin user must have already added link shorteners
to Social.
You must shorten all links for campaign-tracking purposes. Social displays a warning message if a user enters a
link in a post and does not shorten it.
1. While creating the desired type of post in the Publisher or Publish Anywhere, type the desired destination URL
(for example, www.adobe.com or http://acrobat.com) in the message field.
You can add multiple URLs to a post and use different shorteners for each URL.
2. Shorten the links.
If you are using the Publisher to create the post, you can specify a default shortener that will be automatically
used to shorten all links in the post.
Although the following two illustrations show the Content Calendar, the steps are the same for the Publisher.
Shorten Individual Links Using Different Shorteners
Hover over each URL link and select the short domain that you want to use to shorten the link. You can shorten
each link with different shorteners, if desired, for branding purposes.
Shorten All Links Using the Same Shortener
Select the desired link shortener from the Shorten All Links With drop-down list, then click Shorten URL.
Settings
299
The Shorten URL feature manually triggers URL shortening for all links within the post and selects the last-used
shortener by default. You can override the last-used shortener by selecting another link shortener from the
drop-down list.
Automatically Shorten All Links Using the Default Shortener (Publisher Only)
Note: The settings explained in this section are configured at the user level, other Social users are not
affected by this user's action. Each user can enable or disable automatic link shortening and select a default
shortener, as desired.
Click Publisher Settings to access the Link Shortening Preferences options.
Settings
300
Toggle Auto-Shortening to On, then select the desired default shortener from the drop-down list. All links will
be automatically shortened when published using the default shortener unless you manually select another
shortener.
To manually override the default and select a different shortener, click the All Links Will Be Auto-Shortened
Using drop-down list, then select the desired shortener.
Settings
301
You can also hover over any individual link to shorten it manually, regardless whether the Auto-Shortening toggle
is set to On or Off.
3. Finish configuring the post's elements as described in Publish Anywhere Workflow or Publisher.
Competitor Pages
Use the Competitor Pages to view a list of all of the competitors' pages that you have added to social. You can also
add new competitor pages or delete existing pages.
When adding competitor pages, consider the following:
• You don't need to add your owned Facebook pages as competitors in order to see data for those pages in the
Competitor Analytics report. Social automatically pulls data for any Facebook pages that have been added to Social
(Settings > Facebook Pages).
• At this time, competitor data is collected for public Facebook pages and posts only. Competitor analytics is not
available for pages that are not publicly accessible. Examples of Facebook pages that might not be publicly
accessible include pages promoting gambling, alcoholic beverages, or other adult products.
• Some Facebook pages might have age restrictions or user-validation methods that prevent Social from collecting
competitor data.
• The Facebook API provides data for non-targeted pages only (pages that have not been targeted to specific
countries).
• Social starts collecting data for competitors' pages after you add them to Social. You cannot backfill data. Data is
updated from Facebook hourly.
Settings
302
However, Social already has data for a competitor if that competitor was already being tracked by another customer
in Social. This data then displays in both customers' accounts and you might immediately see backfilled data in
the Competitor Analytics report for a newly added competitor. Showing existing data for both customers does not
present confidentiality issues because the data was collected without any special authorization.
Add Competitor Pages
Add pages of your competitors to Social so that you can compare data from your owned Facebook pages and public
data from the Facebook pages of your competitors.
After you add competitor pages to Social, you can analyze the data on the Competitor Analytics report.
1. Click Settings > Competitor Pages.
2. Click
to add a new page.
Note: If you have not previously added competitor pages to Social, the Add New Competitor dialog box
automatically displays. You can add as many as 50 competitor pages to each account.
3. Fill in the fields:
Competitor URL: Specify the full URL of the desired competitor's Facebook page. For example,
http://www.facebook.com/adobe. The easiest way to ensure that the URL is correct is to navigate to the
page in your browser, then copy and paste the URL into Social.
Associated Pages: Associate this competitor with one or more of your owned public pages.You can click Select
All Pages to associate this competitor with all of your owned pages. You can also select all pages and then
deselect a subset of the pages. This feature is helpful if you are interested in analyzing the competitive data that
corresponds to a relevant page for which you have ownership and responsibility.
Associated Page Groups:Associate this competitor with one or more of your owned pages.You can click Select
All Page Groups to associate this competitor with all of your owned pages. You can also select all page groups
and the deselect a subset of the groups.
4. Click Save.
Settings
303
Delete Competitor Pages
Delete competitors' pages that you no longer want to analyze using the Competitor Analytics report.
1. Click Settings > Competitor Pages.
This pages lists all of the competitors' pages that have been added to Social.
2. Select one or more pages, then click
.
If the check box next to a competitor's page is greyed out, you cannot delete that page because you do not own
one or more pages that this competitor's page is associated with. Social prevents you from deleting pages that
are associated with owned pages that you do not own.
Preferences
Configure Social preferences, including specifying your time zone, specifying your home page, specifying the email
address you want to use for notifications, and selecting the email notifications you want to send.
Note: Social can generate many email notifications. If you notice that you receive many email messages for
events tied to Social, you can deselect email notifications for those events that do not interest you. By default,
all notifications are selected.
1.
In the window header, click
>
.
Settings
2. From the Set Your Time Zone drop-down list, select the desired time zone.
This time zone will be the default for the publisher as well as any other time stamp throughout Social.
3. From the Home Page drop-down list, select the page that you want to display whenever you log in to Social.
4. In the Email Address for Notifications field, specify a valid email address.
This email address will be used to send notifications if publishing or permissions issues arise.
304
Settings
305
Note: In order to change an email address, you must change the email address in Social on the Preferences
page (explained in this topic) and in the Adobe Analytics Admin Tools (Analytics > Admin > User Management
> Edit Users).
5. Under Email Notifications, select the desired notifications:
Notification Group
Moderation
Notifications
A post or comment was assigned to you for moderation
A reminder that a post or comment was assigned to you
A spam filter was activated on a page
Publishing
A new template is available for publication
Your post has been approved and scheduled for posting
Your post has been rejected and will not be published
A post needs to be approved before it can be posted
A post has been scheduled for posting
One of your Facebook pages needs to be authorized
One of your Google+ pages needs to be authorized
One of the Twitter Accounts you manage needs to be authorized
Support
The system was unable to post a scheduled message
The system was unable to remove a post from Facebook
System
Upcoming authorization expiration
6. Click Update.
Classifying Terms in SAINT
Create classifications for the terms you want to track in Social.
Adding classifications to the Terms variable lets you group sets of terms and sum the associated metrics in reporting.
For instance, multiple variations of spelling can be grouped under the correctly spelled term. Another example could
be keeping track of the parent category of product-related keywords, or segregating all terms between "My Brand"
and "Competition." Classifications also let you simplify the name of long, complex searches by adding a "Friendly
Name" as a classification column.
When you create a classification, you create it for a specific Adobe Analytics variable, which instructs Analytics to
generate reports that display the variable data based on the defined classification.
After you complete the steps in Creating the Conversion Classification Structure and Add Rules in Bulk additional
reports are available under the Campaigns heading in Analytics > Custom Reports.
Settings
306
Creating the Conversion Classification Structure
Create the Conversion Classification structure in the Adobe Admin Tools to categorize terms into groups.
If you create Adobe Analytics classifications for your terms, you can use the Terms report to see only terms included
in the specified classification. Any unclassified terms (terms with empty cells in the SAINT file for the given column)
will be grouped under "None" for that classification report. The newly created classification can be selected using a
fly-out menu from the Terms menu in the left navigation pane.
Note: To create conversion classifications, you must be an Adobe Analytics Admin.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Log in to the Adobe Marketing Cloud.
In the Suite header, click Admin > Admin Tools > Report Suites.
Select the desired report suite.
From the Edit Settings drop-down list, click Conversion > Conversion Classifications.
From the Select Classification Type drop-down list, select Term.
Note: Do not delete the Term or Active classifications. If you do so, Social will not function.
6. Click the arrow icon next to Term, then click Add Classification to display the Create New Classification dialog
box.
Settings
307
7. Ensure that Text is selected from the Select Type drop-down list.
8. In the Name field, type a name for the classification.
For example, to group your competitor's terms, you could create a classification named "Competition."
9. Click Save.
10. Upload the SAINT file.
For more information, see Import File in the Classifications guide.
If you are using Mac OS, save the file as Windows Formatted Text instead of Text Tab-delimited. Mac computers
process text files differently than Windows, which causes SAINT to throw an error. If you experience upload
issues, see the Common SAINT Upload Issues article in the Adobe Knowledge Base.
Classification uploads usually take no longer than 72 hours to process. Adobe Analytics 15 and ad hoc reporting
process SAINT uploads in six-hour increments, updated four times a day. For more information, see SAINT Processing
Time in the Adobe Knowledge Base.
After you download the SAINT file template, you'll notice additional columns for the newly added classifications.
Settings
308
When you set a value for this new column in a row, that value will appear as a line item in the report for the given
classification, which you select from the fly-out menu.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
309
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
Social uses machine-learning software developed by Adobe to classify incoming text into one of three categories:
data that potentially contains sentiment (sentiment-bearing data), foreign-language data, or spam.
The advent of social platforms, such as Facebook, Twitter, and Google+, has caused a shift in how companies and
organizations market products or service customers. Marketers want to understand the social interactions and
perceptions about their existing customers. Marketers also want to market products and campaigns to new audiences
by leveraging social platforms.
Note: The spam-filtering processes described in this section are currently supported for the English language
only, although sentiment analysis is supported in many non-English languages. Internal testing has determined
that the spam-filtering processes described below have a 70-75 percent accuracy rate.
Language and Spam Analysis
Because content on social platforms is posted in a variety of languages, it is becoming increasingly important for
marketers to be able analyze content in different languages. If content is determined to be in the English language,
Social automatically analyzes the text to determine whether it is likely spam or not. To decrease clutter in reports
and moderation feeds, by default, Social hides content that has been determined to be spam. You can use filter
options in reports and moderation feeds to display or hide spam, as desired.
Social uses automatic language detection and spell checkers to determine the correct language of the text before
analyzing it for sentiment of emotion. Social uses language detection software and spell checkers. Automatic-language
detection reliably works when there are more than ten words in the text. Social also uses spell-check functionality
to handle content with fewer words. If the majority of words are spelled correctly using an English dictionary, Social
treats the content as English language and analyzes it to determine whether it is likely spam. If the majority of the
words are not spelled correctly using the English dictionary, the text is marked as foreign and no spam analysis is
performed.
Social's spam filter uses a spam word/phrase dictionary, a sentiment word dictionary, and a regular spelling dictionary
to analyze text. The spam filter is generic and cannot be tuned. The spam filter engine also uses regular expression
matching to analyze text. The spam filter is machine-learning based, so it is trained using known spam in the tweets
and other social content.
Sentiment Analysis
Sentiment analysis of reviews, comments, and feedback on social platforms is one of the most popular tools for
marketers.
Regardless whether the content is classified as sentiment-bearing data, foreign-language data, or spam, Social
analyzes the content for sentiment, providing that the sentiment engine supports the appropriate language.
If data is determined to potentially contain sentiment-bearing data, Social categorizes it as sentiment-bearing data
and analyzes it using a sentiment-analysis engine developed by Adobe. It is important to note that if a post contains
at least one word deemed to contain sentiment, it is categorized as sentiment-bearing data.
Sentiment-bearing data is then categorized into three levels of sentiment (positive, negative, and neutral) using
natural language processing (lexicon-based prediction). After categorizing the sentiment of text into the above three
levels, the engine uses machine-learning models to assign a score between 1 and 10.
For more information, see Sentiment Analysis.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
310
Content Analysis Functionality
Detailed information about how Social's machine-learning software classifies incoming text into sentiment-bearing
data, foreign-language data, or spam categories.
Sentiment analysis is performed on all three categories, provided that the sentiment engine supports the text's
language. The major difference in regards to categories is that, by default, Social hides content that has been
determined to be spam. You can use filter options in reports and moderation feeds to display or hide spam, as
desired.
The following table illustrates the different content triggers used by the machine-learning engine to classify text into
sentiment-bearing data, foreign-language data, or spam:
Content Trigger
Details
Sentiment-bearing words
The text contains one or more words that the engine determines to convey
sentiment.
For example, "I love Adobe" would be classified as sentiment-bearing data
because the word "love" contains sentiment.
HTTP links
The text contains one or more HTTP links.
www links
The text contains one or more www links.
Symbol-only words
The text contains non-ASCII text.
Telephone numbers
The text contains telephone numbers.
Numeric-only words
The text contains many numbers.
Alphanumeric words
The text contains many alphanumeric words.
Hashtags
The text contains many hashtags.
Lowercase-only words
The text contains only lowercase letters.
Title-case content
The text contains title-case content.
Uppercase-only words
The text contains only uppercase letters.
Stop words
The text does not contain stop words. Advertisements and marketing material
tend to use incomplete sentences.
Currency spam patterns
The text contains currency spam patterns.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
311
Content Trigger
Details
Spam n-gram
The text contains content that matches spam patterns, such as "Buy one, get
two."
Foreign language detected
The engine determines that the text is primarily a non-English language.
Spelling ratio
The content contains a high percentage of misspelled words vs. properly
spelled words.
Sentiment Analysis
Use Social to measure the social sentiment of your organization and its terms. Sentiment is a metric that measures
the emotional feeling of a term.
The Social sentiment-analysis engine uses the latest natural language processing (NLP) and machine-learning
techniques. The engine employs vigorous quality checks to achieve the highest sentiment-analysis standards.
Sentiment Analysis Engine Architecture
High-level diagram of the Social sentiment-analysis engine's architecture.
The engine uses natural language processing (lexicon-based prediction) to categorize mentions into three levels of
sentiment: positive, negative, and neutral. The engine then uses machine learning to assign the mentions to a
sentiment score between 1 and 10.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
312
Lexicon-Based Prediction using Natural Language Processing
In the lexicon-based prediction phase, the Social sentiment-analysis engine uses a combination of shallow and deep
natural language processing to classify mentions as positive, negative, or neutral sentiments.
The following figure illustrates the different uses of the natural language processing components:
Some shallow-parsing and deep-parsing components are language-independent to increase scalability. Other
components are language-specific to boost performance.
The result of the lexicon-based phase is to predict sentiment polarity for the input text (whether it is positive, negative,
or neutral text).
The following sections contain more information about each phase:
• Shallow Parsing
• Deep Parsing
Shallow Parsing
During the shallow-parsing phase, the input text is broken into single sentences and individual words. Text
normalization is used to convert and interpret syntax, such as URLs and numerics. Tweet hashtags are parsed to
understand sentiment. For example, the hashtag #GreatPerformance is separated into two words "great" and
"performance." These words provide clues to the sentiment polarity. Smileys and emoticons are also processed to
derive meaning that could indicate sentiment polarity. Unicode Emoticons in the range 1F600-1F64F and other
popular smileys are understood by the sentiment engine.
Deep Parsing
During the deep-parsing phase, the sentiment-analysis engine tries to understand the sentence structure (subject,
verb, object (SVO)) by calling syntax parsers and relation extractors. A simple sentence such as, "I love pizza." is
broken into a triplet of subject/opinion/object. Subject being "I" and object being "pizza." The engine uses sentiment
lexicons to recognize that "love" is a positive-sentiment word.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
313
The engine uses the following lexicons (dictionaries) to help identify sentiment in mentions:
• Positive sentiment lexicon
• Negative sentiment lexicon
• Popular-phrase lexicon (to classify sentiment in popular phrases such as "you made my day" or "pain in the neck")
• Popular hashtag lexicon
• Pattern lexicon (to detect sentiment in phrases such as "stop complaining" or "stop talking")
• Contextual-opinion lexicon (to classify words such as "discounted" or "crazy")
Machine-Learning Phase
In the machine-learning phase, the Social sentiment-analysis engine assigns a score for each mention based on
the intensity of the sentiment. The score ranges from 1 to 10.
A score of 1 is most negative and a score of 10 is most positive. A score of 5 indicates that the input text is neutral.
The engine has a separate machine learning model for each positive and negative sentiment to determine the
intensity. If the lexicon-based natural language processing (NLP) engine determines that the sentiment polarity is
positive, a positive model is used to assign a score of 6 to 10. If the lexicon-based natural language processing
(NLP) engine determines that the input has negative polarity, a negative model is used to assign a score of 1 to 4.
Understanding Sentiment Scores
Use Social to measure the social sentiment of your organization and its terms.
Sentiment is a metric used in Social that measures the emotional feeling of a term.
Social comes with a default set of lexicons (dictionaries) containing terms and phrases that are generally assumed
to be positive, negative, or neutral. Social uses these lexicons to assign a sentiment score that reflects whether the
terms, verbatim, or collection of verbatims on the social web are positive, negative, or neutral.
For a list of languages supported by Social sentiment analysis, see Language Support.
You can manually override the sentiment of a post from the Social Buzz report. Adjusting sentiment feeds the
sentiment algorithm for a specific report suite, making the algorithm smarter and more accurate to a specific client’s
needs over time. For more information, see Tune Sentiment.
Adobe Consulting Services can also help you with sentiment tuning. For more information, see Adobe Consulting
Services.
How Sentiment Scores Display in Social
Understand sentiment scores and sentiment levels.
You can view sentiment scores in most Social reports. Sentiment is a metric that measures the emotional feeling of
a term.
The following table shows the default sentiment scores displayed in Social and explains their sentiment levels:
Score
Sentiment
0 through 4
Negative
5
Neutral
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
Score
Sentiment
6 though 10
Positive
314
A low score indicates that viewers reacted or likely felt unfavorably toward the post, picture, or video. A high score
indicates that viewers reacted or likely felt favorably toward the post, picture, or video.
How Social Scores Sentiment
Detailed information about how Social scores sentiment of mentions captured by listening rules.
Social uses an algorithm developed by Adobe to assign a sentiment score for each mention. Social classifies
sentiment of each mention’s text (tweets, Facebook posts, blogs, and so forth) on a scale of 1 to 10. A score of 1 is
the most negative, 5 is neutral, and 10 is the most positive.
To achieve this fine-grained analysis, the algorithm uses a hybrid method to perform sentiment analysis. It first uses
an NLP-based (Natural Language Processing) method to classify text sentiments into three basic categories: positive,
negative, and neutral. Then, for positive and negative categories, a corresponding machine-learning model is trained
to assign intensity levels (1 to 4 or 6 to 10).
For the NLP-based method, a set of dictionaries of opinion expressions (including words, phrases, hashtags, and
emoticons) are used for sentiment categorization. Each mention is analyzed based on those expressions. For
machine-learning models to assign intensity levels, n-gram in training corpus is used to build models.
To determine the sentiment score of a mention, the sentiment-analysis engine performs the following tasks:
1. Performs pre-processing (normalization, tokenization, and part-of-speech tagging) for the input text
2. Identifies opinion expressions and their corresponding sentiment scores from the input text
3. Uses the algorithm to obtain the aggregated sentiment score for the input text
Note: People using social media tend to use non-standard language, including slang, abbreviations, idiomatic
phrases, and pop-culture names and terms. This can be challenging for the sentiment analysis engine to
understand. Therefore, you might find some mentions that are rated with a sentiment score that does not
accurately reflect the true sentiment. However, you can manually tune sentiment for individual mentions in the
Social Buzz report and in moderation feeds. As more data is learned by the sentiment-analysis engine and
refinements are automatically made, scoring should improve over time.
Note: Domain/industry-specific (for example, baseball, movie, car, and insurance) sentiment analysis will be
supported by offering domain/industry-specific sentiment dictionaries in the future. Currently, you can customize
your own domain/industry-specific dictionary by using the sentiment tuning feature in the Social Buzz report
and moderation feeds.
The following examples illustrate several scenarios for sentiment analysis:
• Simple Mention that Conveys Positive Sentiment
• Simple Mention that Conveys Negative Sentiment
• Modifier that Enhances Positive Sentiment
• Modifier that Negates Positive Sentiment
• Modifiers that Enhance or Negate Positive Sentiment
• Positive Sentiment Negated Through Context
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
315
• Words that Are Ignored Based on Part of Speech
• Words that Negate Positive Sentiment
• Popular Phrases that Convey Sentiment
• Phrases that Convey Positive or Negative Sentiment Depending on Context
• Conjunctions
• Hashtags
• Emoticons
• Irregular Opinion Expression Normalization and Misspelling Correction
• Name Entity Recognition
• Complex Sentiment Resolution
Simple Mention that Conveys Positive Sentiment
If a mention contains several words that convey positive sentiment, the engine calculates the sentiment score based
on the aggregation of those words.
For example:
"Our hotel room was affordable and great!"
The engine identifies that the words "affordable" and "great" convey positive sentiment. The engine then uses the
scores of these two words to calculate a sentiment score for the mention. This sentiment score should be very
positive. The engine calculates words that convey negative sentiment in a similar fashion.
Note: It is not possible to achieve a sentiment score greater than 10 based on having many positive words
in a mention.
Simple Mention that Conveys Negative Sentiment
If a mention contains several words that convey negative sentiment, the engine calculates the sentiment score based
on the aggregation of those words.
For example:
"Our hotel room was noisy and dirty!"
The engine identifies that the words "noisy" and "dirty" convey negative sentiment. The engine then uses the scores
of these two words to calculate a sentiment score for the mention. This sentiment score should be very negative.
Another example:
"I didn't like the movie."
The engine determines that the negation word "didn't" impacts sentiment. This sentiment score should be negative.
The sentiment-analysis engine also understands some forms of double negations.
For example:
"I didn't dislike the movie."
The engine identifies that the words "didn't" and "dislike" form a double negation. This sentiment score should be
positive (two negatives make a positive).
Note: It is not possible to achieve a sentiment score less than 1 based on having many negative words in a
mention.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
316
Modifier that Enhances Positive Sentiment
Some words act as positive modifiers for other words.
For example:
"Our hotel room was very large."
The engine identifies that the word "large" conveys positive sentiment and that the word "very" modifies "large" in
a positive way. The engine calculates a sentiment score for the mention based on these two words. This sentiment
score should be very positive.
Note: If a mention contains many words that modify sentiment, the sentiment algorithm evaluates the number
of modifiers during calculation. For example, if a mention contains the text "Our hotel room was very, very,
very nice!," the algorithm evaluates the occurrence of modifiers during calculation. It is not possible to achieve
a positive sentiment score greater than 10 based on having many modifiers in the mention.
Modifier that Negates Positive Sentiment
Some modifiers negate the positive sentiment of a word.
For example:
"The waiter was not competent."
The engine identifies that the word "competent" conveys positive sentiment. However, the engine also determines
that the word "not" negates that sentiment. The engine uses the score for the word "competent" but reverses its
score because the word "not" modifies "competent" in a negative way. This sentiment score should be negative.
Modifiers that Enhance or Negate Positive Sentiment
It is possible for a mention to contain one modifier that enhances positive sentiment and another modifier that negates
positive sentiment.
For example:
"Our room was large and clean, but it was too bright to sleep in."
The engine determines that the words "large," "clean," and "bright" convey positive sentiment. However, it uses the
context after the word "but" to determine final sentiment, which is the dominant part of the mention. The engine also
determines that the word "too" negates the positive sentiment of "bright." Overall, the sentiment engine uses the
positive scores for "large" and "clean," but reverses the positive score for "bright." The final sentiment score should
be slightly negative.
Positive Sentiment Negated Through Context
Some words are considered to convey positive sentiment, but as the engine examines the text, it determines that
the word, in context with other words, does not convey positive sentiment.
For example:
"It would be great if you had more desserts on your menu."
The engine determines that the word "great" conveys positive sentiment. However, the engine also determines that
the words "would be" negate the positive sentiment. The engine uses the score for the word "great" but reverses its
score because the words "would be" modify "great" in a negative way. This sentiment score should be negative.
Another example:
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
317
"The iPhone has great display, but is costly."
The engine uses the part of the sentence after the word "but" to determine context. This sentiment score should be
negative.
Words that Are Ignored Based on Part of Speech
Some words are considered to have positive sentiment if they are used as one part of speech (as verbs, for example)
and are considered to be neutral when used as another part of speech.
For example:
"I like the number of desserts on the menu."
The engine identifies that the word "like" is used as a verb and assigns a positive sentiment score.
Another example:
"It's like a huge dessert buffet."
The engine identifies that the word "like" is not used as a verb and does not use "like" in the sentiment analysis.
However, the engine determines that the word "huge" conveys positive sentiment. This sentiment score should be
positive.
Words that Negate Positive Sentiment
Some words, when used with a word that conveys positive sentiment, actually negate the positive sentiment.
For example:
"This restaurant was supposed to be great."
The engine identifies that the word "great" conveys positive sentiment. However, the engine also determines that
the words "supposed to be" negate the positive sentiment. The sentiment engine uses the score for the word "great"
but reverses its score because the words "supposed to be" modify "great" in a negative way. This sentiment score
should be negative.
Popular Phrases that Convey Sentiment
The sentiment-analysis engine uses dictionaries that contain popular phrases and idioms to help determine sentiment.
For example,
"You made my day."
"It couldn't have been better."
The engine's popular-phrase dictionary identifies that both of these phrases convey positive sentiment. The sentiment
score for both phrases should be positive.
Another example:
"You couldn't have been more wrong."
By using the engine's popular-phrase dictionary, Social determines that this phrase conveys negative sentiment.
The sentiment score should be negative.
Phrases that Convey Positive or Negative Sentiment Depending on Context
Some phrases convey either positive or negative sentiment, depending on the context (e.g, the surrounding word).
The engine supports context analysis to some extent.
For example:
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
318
"The painting is so beautiful I want to cry."
The engine, taking context into account, determines that this phrase is positive even though “cry” is a negative word.
Another example:
"The movie plot is so unpredictable."
The user can specify that the word “unpredictable” is a positive word through sentiment tuning. The sentiment-analysis
engine will then assign the positive sentiment for the mention.
Conjunctions
The engine supports conjunctions, such as "and," "of," and so forth.
Hashtags
Hashtags sometimes indicate sentiment. The engine can parse hashtags to derive the sentiment based on the
constituent words.
For example:
"I am at the market #healthyfoods #greatpapaya"
The engine parses the hashtags and determines that the words "healthy" and "great" convey positive sentiment.
The sentiment score should be positive.
Another example:
"tax filing is April 15 #sucksalot #hurtsmywallet"
The engine parses the hashtags and determines that the words "sucks" and "hurts" convey negative sentiment. The
sentiment score should be negative.
Emoticons
Emoticons indicate sentiment. The engine can parse emoticons to identify their sentiment.
For example:
"I go to watch the movie. :-) "
The engine parses the emoticon ":-)" and determines that it conveys positive sentiment. The sentiment score should
be positive.
Irregular Opinion Expression Normalization and Misspelling Correction
People sometimes use irregular opinion expressions to express sentiment. The engine can detect and normalize
those expressions.
For example:
"I loveeeeee my iPhone."
The engine can detect the expression “loveeeeee” and normalize it as “love.” The sentiment score should be positive.
The engine can also detect and correct some misspellings.
For example:
"The view is beautful."
The engine can detect the misspelling word “beautful” and correct it as “beautiful.” The sentiment score should be
positive.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
319
Name Entity Recognition
The engine can identify named entities from the mention. The named entities include events, people, organizations,
and so forth.
"I went to Best buy."
The engine can detect and recognize the company name “BestBuy.” The sentiment should be neutral even though
the mention contains the positive sentiment word “best.”
Complex Sentiment Resolution
The engine has a mechanism to resolve complex and even conflicting sentiments in the mention.
For example:
"The game is damn good."
The engine can detect that “damn” and “good” conveys conflicting sentiments. It can resolve the conflicting words
by sentiment aggregation. The sentiment score should be positive.
How Social Processes Sentiment
In-depth information about how sentiment is processed by the sentiment-analysis engine.
Adjusting sentiment feeds the sentiment algorithm for a specific report suite, making the algorithm more accurate
to your needs over time.
If you do not agree with the existing sentiment score provided in the Social interface, you can give feedback by
correcting the score. For information about how to correct sentiment in the Social Buzz report, see Tune Sentiment.
As you tune the sentiment, Social makes calls to the sentiment-tuning service, which stores the feedback in a cache
per Adobe Social report suite. This service pre-processes feedback and performs internal format conversions for
later usage by the engine. The service updates all feedback data every five minutes.
Note: Adobe Consulting Services can help you with sentiment tuning, also referred to as re-scoring. Sentiment
tuning helps you fine-tune your sentiment analysis. Sentiment tuning is an optional process that comes with
additional costs. The process takes approximately four to six weeks to complete. Contact your Social Account
Manager for more information.
When Adobe Social captures new tweets/social data for a report suite, it passes a task to the sentiment-analysis
engine. The engine has two internal components: QuickMatch and sentiment engine.
QuickMatch determines if there is any feedback in the cache for the same report suite.
If QuickMatch finds a match, it returns the correct sentiment score to Social without computing the sentiment using
the sentiment engine.
If QuickMatch does not find match in the feedback cache, it then asks the sentiment engine to compute sentiment
in the usual way.
For example, the feedback cache for a report suite contains the following data:
" I went to Best Buy yesterday" Engine-8 User's feedback-5
If a new mention, "I went by Best Buy yesterday http://t.co.sddfg" is collected for which sentiment needs to be
computed, QuickMatch finds a match between these two and the user-corrected score of 5 is returned.
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
320
However, if a new mention is collected that reads, "I went to Best Buy with my father yesterday," the matching might
not be successful. In that case the sentiment engine computes sentiment the usual way.
As another example, suppose that a customer previously tuned the word "fumble" to have negative sentiment. The
sentiment-analysis engine then added this score to an internal sentiment word dictionary.
When a new mention is collected that states, "John had 3 fumbles and turned the ball over," the engine computes
sentiment for the mention as being negative because of the word "fumble" being previously tuned to have negative
sentiment.
The QuickMatch component can compute high-similarities in the following situations:
Retweets: If a user provides sentiment-tuning feedback by adjusting the score for a tweet, the new sentiment score
applies to all retweets (retweets + original mention).
Metadata Changes: If a user adds or deletes @users or hashtags in a retweet, the original mention still matches
the retweet and is assigned the same sentiment score.
Punctuation Changes: If the original mention and a new mention have the same text with different punctuation,
QuickMatch recognizes the match and assigns the same sentiment score.
HTTP Link Changes: If an HTTP link is added, deleted, or changes, QuickMatch recognizes the match and assigns
the same sentiment score.
Case Differences: QuickMatch is case-insensitive.
Missing Pronoun or Different Pronoun: If two phases have different pronouns or one is missing a pronoun,
QuickMatch recognizes the match and assigns the same sentiment score.
For example, the following phrases are scored the same:
"We're giving away great knit gloves if you simply LIKE this photo!"
"giving away these great knit gloves if you simply LIKE this photo!"
"They're giving away great knit gloves if you simply LIKE this photo!"
"You are giving away these great knit gloves if you simply LIKE this photo!"
Conjunction Changes: If two phases are identical except one missing a conjunction, QuickMatch recognizes the
match and assigns the correct sentiment score.
For example, the following phrases are scored the same:
"@TheReal_CP24 And who would you say the best running back in the league is CP?"
"@TheReal_CP24 who would you say the best running back in the league is CP"
Missing or Adding Words: If two phases are identical except that one contains neutral words, such as "could,"
"would" or "should," QuickMatch recognizes the match and assigns the same sentiment score.
For example, the following phrases are scored the same:
"I would like to swim."
"I like to swim."
"I wish I could go there"
"I wish I go there"
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
321
Hyphen Equivalency: If two phases are identical except that one contains hypens, QuickMatch recognizes the
match and assigns the same sentiment score.
For example, the following phrases are scored the same:
"Non-playoff"
Non-playoff"
Spelling Mistakes: QuickMatch recognizes frequently misspelled words and assigns the same sentiment score.
For example, the following phrases are scored the same:
"I wish I were totally awesome with Photoshop."
"I wish I were totally awsome with Photoshop."
Missing Adverb, Verb, or Adverb: If two phases are identical except that one is missing one word that is highly
relevant, QuickMatch does not match the sentiment scores for the two phrases. Highly relevant words include
adjectives, verbs, and adverbs.
Junk-Character Equivalency: If two phases are identical except that one contains junk characters, QuickMatch
recognizes the match and assigns the same sentiment score.
For example, the following phrases are scored the same:
School will be fun today. üòÇüòÇüòÇ
School will be fun today.
Space Equivalency: QuickMatch ignores tabs, white spaces, and unicode spaces.
Keep the following in mind when working with sentiment tuning:
• Sentiment-tuning feedback is collected per report suite. This means the feedback data from another report suite
is not used for any other report suite.
• Multiple feedback mentions/tweets can exist for a report suite.
• Feedback data is collected every five minutes.
• You can expect new sentiment scores based on feedback after five to six minutes.
Sentiment-Analysis Accuracy and Improvements
Information about Adobe's efforts to test and improve the accuracy of the sentiment-analysis engine.
The accuracy of the engine is measured before every release. The engine is tested on a wide variety of text samples,
especially smaller samples because social comments tend to be small. On an average the engine has accuracies
of 75 to 85 percent.
The accuracy computation is done by our quality engineering team using industry-standard test sets and the engine's
results. Sometimes, for new domains, the engine needs to be tuned.
The following table provides links to external evaluation results:
External Evaluation
Comments
SemEval-2013: Semantic Evaluation
Exercises
Internal quality engineering gave Task 2B 3 place.
Task 2: Sentiment Analysis in Twitter
rd
http://www.cs.york.ac.uk/semeval-2013/index.php?id=evaluation-results
Sentiment, Language, and Spam Analysis
322
The following sections contain more information about sources of ongoing improvements to the sentiment-analysis
engine:
Lexicon Additions
The Sentiment-analysis engine uses internal tools to analyze the latest social corpus from Twitter, Facebook, and
other social platforms. The tool can generate sentiment words and bigrams. New words then undergo linguistic
review for their polarity and are then added to the engine's lexicons. The sentiment lexicons grew by more than
2,000 new words and hundreds of new phrases and idioms in the last four to five months. We expect this process
to slow as we include the most common additions.
External Linguists
We work with third-party vendors to add and edit new sentiment words, phrases, idioms, and common entities.
Entities include words like "best but" and "super edge." Linguists are need to review phrases and idioms that do not
have any sentiment words (for example, "you made my day").
Wikipedia Mining
The sentiment-analysis engine uses Wikipedia to extract entities with embedded adjectives. Some entities (Great
Lakes Airlines, Great Fridays, and Super Bowl) represent neutral sentiment.
Open-Source Human Labeled Data
The sentiment-analysis engine measures and benchmarks itself with open-source labeled data, if the license allows.
The SemEval test data mentioned above is an example.
Customer Feedback
Adobe customers and internal Adobe departments use the engine to compute sentiment and we incorporate feedback
with new sentiment scores for words, phrases, and language usage.
Language Support
323
Language Support
List of languages that Adobe Social supports, by module.
Note: This table will be updated as information changes.
Social currently supports the following languages. A
corresponding module or feature.
Language UI
icon signifies that Social supports that language for the
2
1
Listening Sentiment Sentiment Publishing Predictive Moderation Spam
3
Analysis Tuning
Publishing
Filter
4
Emotion Doc
1
English
French
Traditional
Chinese
Simplified
Chinese
German
Japanese
Korean
Portuguese
Spanish
Russian
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Danish
Finnish
Italian
Indonesian
Hebrew
Arabic
1
Social currently processes 100 percent of English and Japanese content for sentiment analysis. Social precesses
a subset of the other languages listed above. The result is that sentiment for these languages might appear as
neutral, both individually and when rolled up in reports (for example, the Social Buzz report). When sentiment analysis
is unavailable, content is marked as neutral.
Language Support
324
2
Social supports Publishing and Moderation in all languages that the individual social platform supports (Facebook,
Twitter, Google+, and so forth). For more information about platform support for each network, see the appropriate
platform's user interface or documentation.
For example, for a list of currently supported languages for the following platforms:
• Facebook: From within Facebook, click the language selector at the bottom of any page.
• Twitter: From within Twitter, click the person icon in the upper right corner > click Settings > Language.
• Google+: From within Google+, click the language selector at the bottom of any page.
Social uses Microsoft Translator to provide the machine translation of a post's text in a moderation feed. For a list
of supported languages, see the Languages Translator Codes page on the Microsoft website.
3
Predictive publishing is currently available only for Facebook posts in English. Support for other languages and
platforms will be available in the future.
4
All non-English versions of the Social User Guide other than Japanese, German, Spanish, Portuguese, and French
are currently at the Social 3 level. The Japanese, German, Spanish, Portuguese, and French versions of the Social
User Guide are at the 16.2.1.0 level.
The latest Social release includes several enhancements. In addition, changes to the documentation are made on
an on-going basis. For more information about additions to the documentation that are currently available in English
only, see Release Notes and Documentation Updates.
Changing the UI Language
Change the displayed language in the Social user interface.
Note: For a list of languages that Social supports, by module, see Language Support.
1. Log in to the Adobe Marketing Cloud.
Or
Log in to Social.
2. From the Language drop-down list at the bottom of the page, select the desired language:
• English
• French
• Traditional Chinese
• Simplified Chinese
• German
• Japanese
• Korean
• Portuguese
• Spanish
Note: When you change the displayed language from within the suite or from within an individual product,
it changes the language for all suite products, if additional languages for each product are available.
3. To view the Social documentation in the selected language, from the suite header, click Help > Help Home.
FAQ
325
FAQ
List of Frequently Asked Questions and links to where you can find the answers to these questions in Help.
This section contains the following information:
• Training
• Reporting
• Publishing
• Moderation
• Settings
Training
Where can I receive training for Adobe Social?
• Training Videos: Training videos for Social are available for viewing on Adobe Enterprise TV. See Social Training
Videos.
• Online Training Courses: Adobe Training Services offers a four-hour course to help you learn how to use Social.
For more information, see the Adobe Training Services page.
Reporting
Why do I see discrepancies in certain reports and in their corresponding downloaded reports?
Some reports, including the Moderation Overview Dashboard, pull data in real time. However, downloaded report
are generated from data from Adobe Analytics and is subject to its processing time. As a result, data pulled from
Analytics can be delayed. This issue affects various reports in Social, including the Moderation Overview, Social
Campaigns, and Custom reports.
For more information, see Report Suite Latency on the Adobe Support website.
Why do the numbers for shares in Facebook sometimes differ from the numbers reported in Social?
Differing numbers for shares usually occur when there are fewer than ten shares.
If the share count is fewer than ten, Facebook shows the privacy-aware count instead of the actual count. Facebook
checks to see if each share is private or public and displays only the public shares in its UI.
However, Social reports the number of shares in various reports using an API, which pulls the actual number of
shares, regardless of private/public status.
As an example, suppose eight people share an article on Facebook. If only two of those shares are public, and you
do not have permission to see the other six shares because they were shared on private pages, the Facebook UI
displays only two shares. However, in various reports in Social, the count would be eight, as obtained from the API.
Facebook displays only public shares to provide a better user experience. When a user clicks the Share link in
Facebook to see who shared the article, if the UI indicates that there were eight shares but only two names display
(the public shares), it might cause confusion.
Why are Facebook page Insights not available for my page?
Insights about your Facebook page's performance are available after at least 30 people like your page.
Why are there discrepancies between metric numbers reported by Social and those reported by some social
platforms?
FAQ
326
Adobe Social and some social platforms (Twitter, Facebook, and so forth) sometimes use different calculations to
measure metric numbers.
For example, Twitter reach will always be different because Twitter reports impressions based on reach and Social
reports followers plus followers of retweets. Twitter does not currently make impression data available via API so
our reach calculation is based on Twitter recommendations.
Additionally, Social collects data using public APIs for some platforms rather than from the providers' firehoses. The
metric numbers from public APIs are rate-limited and might differ from the numbers provided directly from the
firehoses. Current social platforms that collect data using public APIs include: blogs, DailyMotion, Facebook, Flickr,
Google+, Instagram, MetaCafe, Reddit, YouTube, and VK.
Although Social uses different methods and calculations to measure certain metrics, the numbers are accurate,
even though you might notice discrepancies when comparing data in Social and in some social platforms.
Why are there discrepancies between the numbers of Posts (Social Buzz report) and Mentions (Custom
reports)?
The number of posts in the Social Buzz report and mentions in the Custom reports are calculated and displayed
differently. Although the discrepancy should be minimal, the main difference is that the Social Buzz report dedupes
posts. The process of deduping eliminates duplicate or redundant information.
For example, assume that you have the following listening rules configured:
• adobe
• adobe + photoshop
• adobe + photoshop + illustrator
If someone tweets, "I love Adobe Photoshop and Illustrator," the Social Buzz report dedupes the post mentions.
The tweet is captured by all three listening rules, but the Post metric increments by one for each captured term. The
reporting system that Adobe Analytics uses to populate the Custom reports does not dedupe the redundant mentions
collected by the three listening rules. In this scenario, that same tweet might increase the number of mentions for
"adobe" in Custom reports by three because all three listening rules captured the term.
The number of posts captured by the Social Buzz report should be less (and more accurate) than the number of
mentions captured by the Custom reports.
Why does the number of followers for my Google+ page display zero in the Properties report when my
Google+ page shows followers?
This might be because you have disabled the Show People Who Have Added You to Circles option in Google+. If
this setting is not enabled in Google+, Google's API does not forward the number of followers to Social.
When looking at the Social Buzz report, why is the total number of tweets for a given display name much
larger than the summation of the listed countries in the Posts by Geography reportlet?
Although Social looks for latitude/longitude tags and location data in users' Twitter bios, geo-data is available for
only 5 to 30 percent of all tweets. As a result, you should not expect the total number of tweets for a display name
to equal the total sum of all reported geographic locations. You can click Details in each tweet in the Posts reportlet
to see the geo-location Social ascribes to each mention. If Social cannot determine the location, the location is not
available.
Publishing
How do I enable LinkedIn publishing?
FAQ
327
Before you can publish to LinkedIn company pages and groups, you must add those pages and groups to your
Social account. After you have added your LinkedIn properties to Social, you can configure optional settings for the
company pages or groups. For more information, see Getting Started with LinkedIn.
How do I choose a property while publishing content?
You select the desired targets to which you want to publish content while creating content in the Social Publisher,
Publish Anywhere, or Content Calendar. You can simultaneously post content to Facebook page groups, Facebook
pages, Twitter accounts, Google+ pages, LinkedIn Companies, and LinkedIn page groups. For information about
creating content in the Publisher, see Publisher. For information about creating content in the Publish Anywhere,
see Publish Anywhere Workflow.
How do I cancel a scheduled post?
Depending on the circumstances, you have a few options.
If you do not want the post to be published at any time in the future, you can simply delete the post from the Content
Calendar.
If you think that you might want to publish the post in the future, perhaps after making changes, you can move the
post to draft format. Be aware that if you move the post to a draft format, someone else in your organization with
publish permissions might publish the post. As best practice, be sure to include a note explaining why you canceled
publishing for the post.
While creating a post, why is the Schedule option in the Publisher or the Publish Anywhere option greyed
out?
You have not filled in information for a required option. While creating a post in the Publisher or Publish Anywhere
widget, the only required fields are Social Properties and the actual text of the post. All other options are optional.
Ensure that you have selected a social property and typed text for the comment.
For more information, see Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Why do some targeted Facebook posts appear as public on a Facebook page's Timeline?
When targeting a post through Social, gender and age targets affect only who sees the post in the News Feed.
Gender and age targets do not affect visibility on the Facebook page's Timeline. For example, a post targeted to
males appears on the Facebook page as public. However, people who liked the page only see the post in their News
Feed if they specified they are male on their Facebook user profile.
In contrast, language and geo (location) targets affect the targeting of the post on the Facebook page to make it
appear on the page's Timeline as not public. For example, if you target a post to English speakers only, the post is
not denoted as public on the page's Timeline. Instead, it appears only on the page's Timeline if viewed by someone
with English as a language specified in his or her Facebook user profile.
Why can't I upload images for publishing?
If you are unable to upload images in the Publish Anywhere or Publisher, the problem might be due to the following
issues:
• Browser Incompatibility: A non-responsive Upload button could indicate a browser-incompatibility issue. Update
your browser to the latest version, clear the browser's cache, then try uploading the image again.
• Image File is Too Large: The size of the file exceeds the permissible limit of 2 MB. A file larger than 2 MB causes
the upload to fail.
Why are my links not getting published?
FAQ
328
If you are unable to add links to your post in the Publish Anywhere or Publisher, or the link shortener is not working
as expected, the problem might be due to the following issues:
• Link Shortening is Disabled: Ensure that link shortening has been enabled. For more information, see Configure
Link Shortening Preferences.
• Copy/Paste Issue: The link reported as not working is the link displayed in the preview pane.The link in the preview
pane changes when the post is published. Copying this link from the preview pane and pasting it into a browser
results in the page not being found (404 message).
Why are my scheduled posts not being posted?
If your scheduled posts are not being posted to the appropriate social platform, the problem might be due to the
following issues:
• Authorization Issues: The social platform (Facebook or Twitter, for example) must be re-authorized. For more
information, see Re-authorize Properties.
• Network Timeout Issues: If the post status is "Failed," it could be due to a network timeout issue and needs to
be addressed as appropriate.
Moderation
How do I filter bad words in Facebook?
After you activate and configure the Bad Words, Medium Words, or Good Words list functionality in Social Facebook
Moderation, Social scans for direct word matches. Social then highlights, alerts, or deletes posts and comments
based on each word list. See Create Auto-Delete Moderation Rules.
How do I moderate a Facebook page or a tweet?
For information about moderating a Facebook page or Twitter account, see Unified Moderation.
How often is content loaded into Facebook Moderation queues and Twitter Moderation feeds? How can I
refresh the content?
Posts and comments are retrieved and display in the Facebook Moderation queue approximately every 12 minutes.
Tweets are retrieved and available for display in the Twitter Moderation feed almost immediately after they are
posted to Twitter. However, because of the rapid nature of Twitter, tweets are not automatically refreshed and
displayed in the feed. This lets you moderate the currently displayed tweets without new tweets flooding your feed.
You can manually refresh the content.
Why are posts or comments missing from my moderation feed?
A post or comment might not display in the feed based on your current filter conditions.
For example, a post or comment might not display in a moderation feed based on actions moderators have previously
taken. For example, if the post or comment was moderated, it is hidden from moderation if New Messages is selected
as a filtering condition.
As best practice, you should always check your filtering options if you suspect that posts or comments are missing
from a feed.
Settings
How do I re-authorize a Facebook, Twitter, or Google+ account?
You must re-authorize an account and grant permissions after making a change to your account, such as changing
your password. See Re-authorize Properties.
FAQ
329
How do I add a Twitter account to Social?
You can add a new Twitter account to Social so that you can use Social to publish to Twitter and moderate tweets.
Click Settings > Properties > New Property > Twitter. See Add Twitter Accounts.
How do I change the report suite for Twitter Accounts?
You can change the owner or report suite for a Twitter account at any time. See Configure Property Settings.
Documentation Updates
330
Documentation Updates
All updates (additions, deletions, and corrections) to the Social User Guide, by date.
This section contains detailed information about updates to this guide that might not be included in the Release
Notes. Consult the Release Notes for information about new features and bug fixes.
Date and Topic
Description
6/16/2016
Added information regarding Publish Anywhere to resource hub.
• Customer Resource Hub
May 31, 2016
Topic
Description
Signing In to Social
Revised topic to reflect changes in the Marketing Cloud interface.
May 5, 2016
Topic
Description
Download Moderation Feed
Content
Changed the number of posts per user that can be downloaded in a 24-hour period
from 100,000 to 15,000.
April 21, 2016
Topic
Description
Social Buzz
Edited entire section to remove information about deprecated platforms from filters
and Klout scores. For more information, see the Data Changes FAQ.
Listening Rules
Edited entire section to remove information about deprecated platforms. For more
information, see the Data Changes FAQ.
Social 16.3.1.0 Release Notes New Topic.
March 17, 2016
Topic
Description
Publish Anywhere Workflow
Added information to help you expand the Publish Anywhere interface to full-screen
mode to allow yourself more room to create, edit, and review your post.
Social 16.2.1.0 Release Notes New Topic.
Documentation Updates
331
March 7, 2016
Topic
Customer Resource Hub
Description
Added new Capability Spotlight: Owned Social Reports.
February 18, 2016
Topic
Description
Publisher Page
Added information about adding images to LinkedIn company pages.
Publish Anywhere Workflow
Social 16.1.1.0 Release Notes
New Topic.
January 21, 2016
Topic
Description
Social 15.11.1.0 Release
Notes
New Topic.
January 8, 2016
Topic
Description
Publisher Page
Clarified information about the Marketing Cloud Assets core service in the sections
about uploading images and videos.
Publish Anywhere Workflow
November 11, 2015
Topic
Release Notes
Description
Added link to a PDF file to help users re-authorize LinkedIn pages.
For more information and step-by-step instructions, see November Release:
Re-Authorization Popup.
November 5, 2015
Topic
Description
Use Photo Editing Tools
New Topic.
Moderate an Individual
Facebook Post
Added information to help you hide a post's comments.
Direct Message a Twitter User Added information that you can now send direct messages that contain up to 10,000
characters instead of the previous limit of 140 characters.
Documentation Updates
Topic
332
Description
Moderate an Individual Tweet
Configure a Facebook
Moderation Feed
Added Photo Album as a supported feed type.
Moderate a Photo Album
New Topic.
Customer Resource Hub
Updated the Publish Anywhere Capability Spotlight.
Social 15.10.1.0 Release
Notes
New Topic.
FAQ
Added the following FAQs:
• Why do I see discrepancies in certain reports and in their corresponding
downloaded reports?
• Why do the numbers for shares in Facebook sometimes differ from the numbers
reported in Social?
For more information, see the Reporting section in FAQ.
Facebook @mentions
Added bullet explaining that the @mentions functionality is not currently available
in Social Moderation.
October 21, 2015
Topic
Social Buzz
Description
Added information explaining how the Related Terms list is generated.
October 15, 2015
Topic
Social 15.9.1.0 Release Notes
Description
New Topic.
September 23, 2015
Topic
Description
Signing In to Social
Added a link to a video explaining how to create an Adobe ID and connect it to
your Adobe Social account.
September 17, 2015
Topic
Description
Facebook @mentions
New Topic
Social 15.8.1.0 Release Notes New Topic
Documentation Updates
333
August 24, 2015
Topic
Description
Customer Resource Hub
Added link to the What New for August 2015 training video.
August 20, 2015
Topic
Description
Publish Anywhere Workflow
Added information to describe new functionality in the Publish Anywhere feature.
Customer Resource Hub
Added a link to the Publish Anywhere product capability spotlight in PDF format.
Use the Photo Editing Tools.
New topic.
Facebook Property Details
Added information about Facebook Insights being available only after at least 30
people like your page.
FAQ
Download Moderation Feed
Content
New topic.
Delete or Update Twitter
Accounts
New topic.
Re-authorize Properties
Added the following note:
Note: In order to re-authorize a Facebook page, a user must be a Admin or
Editor in Facebook. For more information, see the Facebook Help Center
website.
Link Adobe ID with Adobe
Social
New topic.
Moderate an Individual
Facebook Post
Added the following note:
Note: This option currently hides top-level posts only. This option does not
hide comments or replies.
Social 15.7.1.0 Release Notes New topic.
Documentation Updates
334
July 8, 2015
Topic
Description
Preferences
Added note explaining how to change the email address for notification in Social
and in Admin Tools.
Language Support
Added information about sentiment analysis in languages other than English and
Japanese.
Moderate an Individual
Facebook Post
Added information explaining current limitations to Facebook moderation.
Post Analytics List View
Added the following note:
Post Analytics Roll-Up View
Note: Each image in the photo album has its own instance in Post Analytics.
There is no roll-up view of the entire album.
June 18, 2015
Topic
Description
Linking Your Social Account to New topic.
the Marketing Cloud
Twitter Preview
Adobe Social Mobile App
Social 15.5.1.0 Release Notes
Added information explaining that the Twitter Preview is an estimate and that
actual collected data might vary slightly.
New section.
New topic.
May 21, 2015
Topic
Description
Owned Data Mappings
Uploaded new data mappings spreadsheet.
Publish Anywhere Workflow
Added Set Dark Post section.
Post Analytics List View
Post Analytics Roll-Up View
Added information about the Visibility options that let you view all posts, organic
posts only, or dark posts only. Dark posts apply to Facebook only.
Added information about the Visibility options that let you view all posts, organic
posts only, or dark posts only. Dark posts apply to Facebook only.
Documentation Updates
Topic
335
Description
Display and Filter the Content
Added information about the Visibility options that let you view all posts, organic
Calendar
posts only, or dark posts only. Dark posts apply to Facebook only.
Configure a Facebook
Moderation Feed
Publisher Page
Social 15.4.1.0 Release Notes
Added information about creating a Facebook moderation feed that displays only
dark posts.
Added information to the Upload a Video section to describe how to select a still
frame from anywhere in the video to use as the video's thumbnail image in the
post. Previously, Social selected the opening frame to be used as the thumbnail
image.
New topic.
May 11, 2015
Topic
Description
Granting Suspend Posts
Permission
New topic.
April 30, 2015
Topic
Description
Platforms
Removed information about Facebook as an available platform.
On April 30, 2015, Facebook deprecated API support for the ability to search public
posts by keyword. This change impacts Adobe Social and all other listening
providers. In Social, you will not be able to select Facebook as a network to create
listening rules nor will you be able to see results returned from Facebook in the
Social Buzz report. This change should not have a significant impact given the
heavy amount of spam in public posts. For more information, contact your Social
Account Manager.
April 17, 2015
Topic
Customer Resource Hub
Publish Anywhere
Description
Added two new training videos that demonstrate how to manage and use social
tags.
New topics.
Note: Note that the Publish Anywhere feature is currently in Beta.
• Publish Anywhere
Documentation Updates
Topic
336
Description
• Publish Anywhere Workflow
Configure Escalation
Management
Added the following information:
"EscalationModerators" must be specified exactly as indicated: same letter casing
and no spaces.
Note that changes take an hour to update in Adobe Social.
Social Tags
Added the following topics:
• Social Tags
• Add Tag Groups
• Edit a Tag Group
• Delete Tag Groups
• Add Tags to a Tag Group
• Delete Tags from Tag Groups
Moderate an Individual
Facebook Post
Moderate an Individual Tweet
Moderate an Individual
LinkedIn Post
Added information about the Add/Edit Social Tags option.
Added information about the Add/Edit Social Tags option.
Added information about the Add/Edit Social Tags option.
Configure a Twitter Moderation
Added information explaining that a user must be an Administrative user in Adobe
Feed
Analytics and have the Moderation > Can Edit Unified Moderation Settings
permission enabled before he or she can assign moderation feeds.
Unified Moderation Workflow
Applications
Added information explaining that a user must be an Administrative user in Adobe
Analytics and have the Moderation > Can Edit Unified Moderation Settings
permission before he or she can add Escalation Reasons and Suggested Actions.
Removed the Applications section.
The Social Applications feature has been officially deprecated in the Adobe Social
15.4.1.0 (April 2015) release. This includes the removal of all application-related
metrics and data. If you have any questions, please reach out to your Social Account
Manager. For full details, see the Adobe Social Applications - Deprecation Fact
Sheet.
Social 15.2.1.0 Release Notes New topic.
Documentation Updates
337
March 19, 2015
Topic
Description
Release Notes
Added the following note:
Publisher Page
FAQ
Note: Twitter Geo Targeting - Effective March 1, 2015, Adobe Social will
no longer support geo-targeting of tweets. Twitter requires that all
geo-targeting leverage the Ads API. We are working with Twitter to reintroduce
geo-targeting at a later date. We apologize for any inconvenience this has
caused. Please reach out to your Social Account Manager or Customer
Success/Support representative if you have additional questions.
Added information explaining why metric numbers reported by Social and social
providers sometimes differ.
Social 15.2.1.0 Release Notes New topic.
February 19, 2015
Topic
Description
FAQ
Added information explaining why there are discrepancies between the numbers
of Posts (Social Buzz report) and Mentions (Custom reports).
February 5, 2015
Topic
Description
Backfilling Twitter Data
The default period for backfilling Twitter data is now 30 days and cannot be changed.
Collection Dates
January 5, 2015
Topic
Description
Post Analytics List View
Added information describing the Facebook Engagement metric for video plays.
Post Analytics Roll-Up View
FAQ
Added three new FAQs to the Publishing section:
• Why can't I upload images for publishing?
• Why are my links not getting published?
• Why are my scheduled posts not being posted?
Documentation Updates
338
December 2, 2014
Topic
Description
Display and Filter the Content Added note explaining that the Content Calendar views and filters respect the
Calendar
logged-in user's time zone set in Preferences.
Content Calendar List View
Content Calendar Month View
Content Calendar Week View
Unified Moderation Rules
Added note explaining how long it takes after content is posted to Facebook for
Social to retrieve, display, and perform the appropriate action.
Filters
Added note explaining that Instagram does not allow the use of the All (AND) and
None (NOT) operators in listening rules.
November 20, 2014
Topic
Description
Customer Resource Hub
Added a new video explaining the new features in Social 3.4.
Configure an Escalation
Moderation Feed
Added information explaining that the time frame for escalation feeds reflects the
date and time when the content was escalated, rather than the date and time when
the content was posted, as is the case with other moderation feeds (Facebook,
Twitter, and so forth).
Added the new Custom time frame option.
Configure a Facebook
Moderation Feed
Added the new Custom time frame option.
Configure a Twitter Moderation
Feed
Configure a LinkedIn
Moderation Feed
Properties
New topics. Some topics reworked from previous versions of similar topics.
• Properties
• Display Managed Properties
• Add Properties
• Add Facebook Pages
• Add Twitter Accounts
• Add Google+ Pages
• Add LinkedIn Company Pages
Documentation Updates
Topic
339
Description
• Add YouTube Channels
• Add Sina Weibo Accounts
• Delete Properties
• Re-authorize Properties
• Configure Property Settings
Language Support
Other Help Resources
Added text explaining that the Japanese, German, and French versions of the
Social User Guide are at the 3.3.4 level.
New topic.
October 20, 2014
Topic
Add a ctx.ly Account
Description
Added URL and IP Address for the Pacific Northwest data center.
October 16, 2014
Topic
Description
New Engagement Metrics for
Owned Social Properties
New topic.
Publisher Page
Backfilling Twitter Data
Updated Assign a Campaign section.
Added a feature to prevent users from backfilling large amounts of data by mistake.
If users attempt to backfill a large amount of data (more than one million mentions),
a Pending Approval message displays in the user interface. This message means
that Adobe must approve the request before the backfill can be processed.
Filters
Add a Rule Variable
Updated table to indicate that listening rules for WordPress need to be fewer than
222 characters.
Indicated that you cannot use a forward slash ( / ) in a rule variable name.
September 18, 2014
Topic
Social Buzz
Description
Added the following information:
Image Button: Display or hide images in the Posts feed.
Documentation Updates
Topic
340
Description
Play/Pause Button: View the Posts feed in real-time mode or pause the feed to
examine an individual post.
Retweet Filter: Display or hide retweets in the Posts feed using the Retweet filter
option.
Moderate an Individual
Facebook Post
Added the following information:
Hide Facebook Posts: Hide individual posts from a Facebook page instead of
deleting them.
Quick-Action Buttons: The quick-action buttons in moderation feeds have been
simplified. The most frequently used buttons display below the text for each post
or tweet. The less frequently used buttons are accessed by clicking the
icon.
Moderate an Individual Tweet Added the following information:
Moderate an Individual
LinkedIn Post
Quick-Action Buttons: The quick-action buttons in moderation feeds have been
simplified. The most frequently used buttons display below the text for each post
or tweet. The less frequently used buttons are accessed by clicking the
icon.
September 9, 2014
Topic
Platforms
Add a Rule Variable
Sentiment, Language, and
Spam Analysis
Content Analysis Functionality
How Social Scores Sentiment
Description
Added information about characters that you cannot use in Instagram rules.
Added note explaining that a rule variable name cannot contain hyphens ( - ).
New topic.
New topic.
Edited topic and added additional information.
Added the following sections:
• Emoticons
• Irregular Opinion Expression Normalization and Misspelling Correction
• Name Entity Recognition
• Complex Sentiment Resolution
August 21, 2014
Topic
Social Training Videos
Description
Removed outdated videos.
Added the following new videos:
Documentation Updates
Topic
341
Description
• New User Orientation: Adobe Social
• New User Orientation: Publishing
• New User Orientation: Content Calendar
• New User Orientation: Moderation
• New User Orientation: Analytics
• New User Orientation: Social Campaigns
• How to Monitor and Respond to Conversations
• How to Pull and Customize Property and Post Analytics
• How to Troubleshoot a Post that Failed to Post
• How to Set Up Social Campaigns
• How to Pull and Customize Social Campaign Reports
• How to Reauthorize a Social Account
• How to Create a Listening Rule
• How to Create a Moderation Feed
Getting Started with LinkedIn
Configure an Escalation
Moderation Feed
Configure a Facebook
Moderation Feed
Added note and illustration explaining how Social handles posts with images.
Added note explaining the behavior of filters in a newly created moderation feed.
Added information about showing a machine translation for posts in a moderation
feed that do not match the default language specified in Social.
Configure a Twitter Moderation
Feed
Configure a LinkedIn
Moderation Feed
Moderate an Individual
Facebook Post
Added information about showing a machine translation for posts in a moderation
feed that do not match the default language specified in Social.
Moderate an Individual Tweet
Moderate an Individual
LinkedIn Post
Tune Sentiment in a
Moderation Feed
New topic.
Stream or Manually Refresh
Moderation Feeds
Added information about streaming moderation feeds.
July 17, 2014
Topic
Content Calendar List View
Content Calendar Month View
Description
Added information about the View Post on Platform icon.
Added information about the View Post on Platform icon.
Documentation Updates
Topic
Content Calendar Week View
Publisher Page
342
Description
Added information about the View Post on Platform icon.
Added information that Social and Twitter support the use of animated .gif
images.
Added a note explaining how to tell if a social property needs to be re-authorized
prior to posting the content.
July 9, 2014
Topic
Description
Owned Social Properties
Reports
New topic.
Owned Data Mappings
New topic.
June 27, 2014
Topic
Use Twitter Cards
Description
New topic.
June 19, 2014
Topic
Social Campaigns
Publisher Page
Description
Added information about viewing the Social Campaigns report in list-view mode.
Added information about adding thumbnails to Facebook video posts.
Add User Group, Permissions,
Added additional permissions to the Moderation section.
and Members
Link Shorteners
Add a ctx.ly Account
Sentiment Analysis
Added Note.
Added information about adding an A record when a CNAME record is not allowed.
Added IP addresses for each data center.
Reworked entire section and added additional information.
May 30, 2014
Topic
Publisher Page
Description
Added information to explain how location is determined when geo-targeting
Facebook posts.
Documentation Updates
Topic
FAQ
343
Description
Added an entry explaining why the total number of mentions for a given display
name does not equal the summation of mentions by geography.
Added an entry explaining why some targeted Facebook posts appear as public
on a Facebook page's Timeline.
May 22, 2014
Topic
Customer Resource Hub
Supported Browsers
Global Report Suites
Sensitive Personal Data
Moderation Overview
Dashboard
Schedule and Send Reports
Via Email
Adjust the Reporting Date
Range
Publisher Page
Description
Added two new training videos for Social 3.3.
New topic.
New topic.
New topic.
Added additional information about the new Moderation Actions History sheet
in the downloaded Excel spreadsheet.
New topic.
Added information about which time zone individual reports respect: report suite
or user.
Removed Share a SWF section. This feature has been deprecated.
Added Proof and Edit Post section explaining that you can edit posts for all
platforms in the Preview panel.
Configure a Facebook
Moderation Feed
Added information about the Post Type filter.
Configure a Twitter Moderation
Added information about the Post Type filter.
Feed
Configure a Twitter
Conversation Moderation Feed New topic.
Moderate an Individual Tweet
Added step explaining how to hover over the timestamp on any tweet to view the
complete timestamp and display the listening rule that captured the content. You
can also click the timestamp to open Twitter to view the content.
Stream or Manually Refresh
Moderation Feeds
New topic.
Create Auto-Notification
Moderation Rules
New topic.
Documentation Updates
344
Topic
Description
Edit Accounts That Follow a
Twitter User
New topic.
Add Rules to Track
Added the following text:
Data should begin populating in reports within five to ten minutes after you add the
rule.
Add a Rule Variable
Create a Campaign
Preferences
Removed a note indicating that a rule variable name cannot contain a hyphen ( ).The use of a hyphen is now supported.
Added note explaining how to select No Campaign as the default.
Added information about setting a home page that you want to automatically display
whenever you log in to Social.
April 24, 2014
Topic
Publisher Page
Delete a Publishing Workflow
Description
Added information about Facebook limitations when uploading videos whose titles
include non-ASCII characters
Added information about removing publishing workflow associations from social
properties so that the workflows can be deleted.
April 17, 2014
Topic
Customer Resource Hub
Product Notification System
Social Buzz
Description
Added a link to the Social 3.2.2 What's New? video.
New topic.
Added information about the following new filters available for the Social Buzz
report: Followers, Language, and Geography.
Added information about the enhanced Posts by Geography reportlet.
Publisher Page
Configure a Facebook
Moderation Feed
Filter List
Edited Step 1 under Assign Social Properties to highlight new functionality.
Added information about creating Facebook moderation feeds for private messages
and Facebook audiences.
Added the following text to the Radius from Point filter: "The radius cannot exceed
25 miles."
Documentation Updates
Topic
Facebook Audiences
Create an Audience
Create a Campaign
345
Description
Added information about creating a moderation feed using Facebook audiences.
Added information about creating a moderation feed using Facebook audiences.
Added information about the Assign This Campaign as Default option.
Also added related information to the Publisher Page, and Campaigns topics.
Generate Short URLs in Posts
FAQ
Added information about specifying and using a default link shortener.
Added information explaining why the Properties report might display zero followers
for a Google+ page.
Added information explaining why the Schedule (Publisher) or Publish (Content
Calendar) might be greyed out while you are creating a post.
March 31, 2014
Topic
Description
Moderation Overview
Dashboard
Edited the description of the Issues Overview chart.
Language
Filters
Filter List
Add a ctx.ly Account
Competitor Pages
New topic.
Adding information about typing the AND, OR, and NOT operators using boolean
logic on the Basic tab. All operators are case-sensitive.
Edited the Advanced Syntax and Syntax Example text for the Word Proximity
filter.
Added table after Step 1.
Added a paragraph describing the behavior of backfilled data if another customer
is tracking the same competitor in Social.
March 24, 2014
Topic
Customer Resource Hub
Publisher Page
Starter's Guide for Listening
Description
Added Webinars section and links to two sessions.
Removed information about being able to target tweets by city and region. Due to
changes in the Twitter API, you can now target tweets by country only.
Added the following new topics:
Documentation Updates
Topic
346
Description
• Listen for Your Brand Name
• Build a Basic Listening Rule
• Build an Advanced Listening Rule
• Share of Voice Listening
• Listen for Your Products
• Fine-Tune Your Listening Rules
• Useful Listening Filters
March 13, 2014
Topic
Customer Resource Hub
Description
Updated the following resource:
• Features Guide: Social 3.2 Features Guide
Added the following new resources:
• Training Video: Social 3.2.1 Moderation Tool Administrator Setup
• Training Video: Social 3.2.1 Moderation Tool User Orientation
Moderation Overview
Dashboard
Social Buzz
New topic.
Added information about filtering the Social Buzz report by Emotion, and
Countries.
Added information about tuning sentiment scores for individual posts.
Added a information explaining how to tell which listening rule captured a post and,
for Twitter only, how many people are following the post's author.
Added Emotion and Authors sections.
Modified the number of verbatims each user can download in a 24-hour period.
Tune Sentiment
New topic.
Post Details in Social Buzz
Report
New topic.
How to Tell Which Listening
Rule Captured a Post
New topic.
Publisher Page
Added information about quickly selecting recently used social properties.
Added information about using the Shorten URL feature to shorten all inline links
in a post using the last-used shortener, unless the user chooses another shortener.
Added Note about Twitter geo-targeting in the Specify Targets section.
Unified Moderation
Added the following new topics:
Documentation Updates
Topic
347
Description
• Unified Moderation
• Create a New Moderation Feed
• Configure an Escalation Moderation Feed
• Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed
• Configure a Facebook Comments Moderation Feed
• Configure a Twitter Moderation Feed
• Configure a LinkedIn Moderation Feed
• Display Moderation Feeds
• Edit a Moderation Feed
• Clone a Moderation Feed
• Delete a Moderation Feed
• Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets
• Moderate an Individual Escalated Post or Tweet
• Moderate an Individual Facebook Post
• Moderate an Individual Tweet
• Mark a Twitter User as Spam
• Direct Message a Twitter User
• Moderate an Individual LinkedIn Post
• Moderate Multiple Posts using Bulk Actions
• Troubleshoot Moderation Feeds
Unified Moderation Rules
Added the following new topics:
• Unified Moderation Rules
• Create Auto-Delete Moderation Rules
Unified Moderation Workflow
Added the following new topics:
• Unified Moderation Workflow
• Configure Escalation Management
Collection Dates
Platforms
Backfilling Twitter Data
Filters
Added information explaining the amount of time needed to start populating reports
if you choose not to backfill data and what happens if no tweets match your listening
rule.
Added information about WordPress support for blogs supported by
wordpress.org and blogs hosted on wordpress.com.
Added information explaining the amount of time needed for the backfill process
to complete.
Reworked topic extensively.
Documentation Updates
Topic
Filter List
Creating the Conversion
Classification Structure
348
Description
Added information in the Bounding Box row specifying that the width and height
of the bounding box cannot exceed 25 miles.
Added information about uploading SAINT files using Mac OS and a link to a
Knowledge Base article to help troubleshoot SAINT uploads.
Added information about SAINT processing time.
Language Support
Added rows for Danish and Finnish.
Added columns for Sentiment Tuning and Emotion.
February 20, 2014
Topic
Description
Pre- and Post-Release Best
Practices
New topic.
Customer Resource Hub
Social Buzz
Properties
Post Analytics Roll-Up View
Publisher Page
New topic.
Added section to explain the new Average Sentiment widget on the Social Buzz
report.
Added information about selecting and ordering the metrics to display in each
platform's table.
Added information about selecting and ordering the metrics to display in each
platform's table.
Modified the note in the Post Predictions row explaining how to enable or disable
post predictions at the user level.
Modified the steps in the Schedule Post row explaining how to schedule a post,
use the recommended time, or post the content immediately.
Configure Link Shortening
Preferences
Platforms
Filters
New topic.
Added WordPress as a supported platform.
Removed note that certain platforms do not support the use of the Any (OR)
operator. All platforms now support its use.
Added information about the character limits for supported platforms.
Filter List
Added information about which filters are supported by WordPress.
Documentation Updates
Topic
349
Description
Added information about punctuation not being allowed inside keywords in the
Word Proximity filter.
Added rows for the following filters:
• Activity URL Contains
• Has Language
• Is Comment
• Rule Variables
• URL Contains
Use a Custom Domain with a
New topic.
ctx.ly Link Shortener
Generate Short URLs in Posts
Competitor Pages
Added Note.
Added bullet list with additional information.
January 22, 2014
Topic
Description
Add Users in the Analytics
Admin Console
New topic.
Add User Group, Permissions,
New topic.
and Members
January 16, 2014
Topic
Platforms
Filters
Filter List
Create a Campaign
Add a ctx.ly Account
Add Competitor Pages
If There's a Problem
Description
Added VK as a supported platform.
Added note about enterprise providers that use public APIs that do not support the
Any (OR) operator.
Added information keyword and hashtag tracking being supported for the VK
platform.
Added paragraph about coordinating with your analytics team when creating tracking
code ID prefixes.
New topic.
Added information stating that you can add as many as 50 competitor pages.
New topic.
Documentation Updates
350
November 25, 2013
Topic
Guidelines for Keyword
Selection
Description
Clarified information about the character length of allowable keywords for different
social platforms.
November 14, 2013
Topic
Competitor Analytics
Social Buzz
Post Analytics List View
Post Analytics Roll-Up View
Publisher Page
Filter List
Rule Variables
Description
Added note at top of topic.
Added additional information about downloading posts to a .csv file.
New topic.
New topic.
Added information about the #hashtag auto-complete functionality while typing the
content for a tweet.
Removed Instagram from the Applicable Platforms column for Keywords.
New topic and subtopics.
• Rule Variables
• Add a Rule Variable
• Edit or Delete a Rule Variable
FAQ
If There's a Problem
Added information about cancelling a scheduled post.
New topic.
October 24, 2013
Topic
Custom Reports
Competitor Analytics
Social Buzz
Description
Added information about "date fencing" to all custom reports topics. Date fencing
lets you drag your mouse (left+click) across the chart to select different time periods.
New topic.
Added information about new filter options: Classification and Spam.
Added information about "date fencing," which lets you drag your mouse (left+click)
across the chart to select different time periods.
Documentation Updates
Topic
Properties
Property Details Report
351
Description
Extensively reworked topic to include new functionality, including filtering, changing
the displayed time period, viewing the report in list view, and viewing percentage
increases for metrics over time.
Added the following new topics:
• LinkedIn Property Details
• YouTube Property Details
Post Details
Added the following new topics:
• Twitter Post Details
• LinkedIn Post Details
• YouTube Post Details
Display and Filter the Content
Added information about filtering by Pending Approvals.
Calendar
Export Content to Excel
Publisher Page
New topic.
Added a note to the Facebook Targeting section explaining the normal behavior
of demographic-targeted posts in regards to displaying on brands' Facebook pages.
Added information about publishing YouTube video assets.
Added information about publishing content on Sina Weibo.
Added information in the Targets row about targeting tweets by country, region,
and city.
Added information about the auto-complete functionality that automatically fills in
users' Twitter handles as you begin typing the @ sign and a Twitter handle.
Filters
Added information about the Add to New Group and Add to Group options.
Added a note explaining that each rule can contain no more than 2,048 characters.
Classifications and Tags
Twitter Preview
Delete Active Rules
Upload Rules
Preview Active or Inactive
Rules
Added information about adding subclassifications to rules.
New topic.
Added information about deleting all rules with the same display name and deleting
individual rules without deleting all rules with the same display name.
Added a note explaining that you cannot create new classifications using a .csv
file upload.
New topic.
Documentation Updates
Topic
Publishing Workflows
352
Description
New topics:
• Publishing Workflows
• Create a New Publishing Workflow
• Edit a Publishing Workflow
• Delete a Publishing Workflow
• Duplicate a Publishing Workflow
• Viewing the Audit Trail for Publishing Workflows
Link Shorteners
New topics:
• Add an awe.sm Project
• Add a Po.st Account
• Add a BudURL Account
Competitor Pages
New topics:
• Competitor Pages
• Add Competitor Pages
• Delete Competitor Pages
Language Support
Added new column for Spam Filter.
September 12, 2013
Topic
Getting Started with LinkedIn
Social Buzz
Description
New topic. Added information to help you begin using Social to publish content to
your LinkedIn company pages and groups.
Added information after Step 2 about changing the display time range for the
real-time Social Buzz report.
Added step explaining how to download posts to a Microsoft Excel file.
Display and Filter the Content
Added information about filtering by Suspended Posts.
Calendar
Content Calendar List View
Content Calendar Month View
Content Calendar Week View
Added information about using the Content Calendar to use bulk actions to
unsuspend multiple posts.
Added information about using the Content Calendar to move posts to draft form
using bulk actions.
View or Create Post Drafts and Added information indicating that you can access draft posts from the Week View.
Templates
Previously, you could access draft posts from the List View only.
Documentation Updates
353
Topic
Description
Suspend and Unsuspend
Posts
Added new section and subtopics.
• Suspend and Unsuspend Posts
• Suspend All Scheduled Posts for One or More Properties
• Unsuspend an Individual Post
• Unsuspend All Suspended Posts in Bulk
Listening Rules
Added new section and subtopics.
• Add Rules to Track
• Display Name
• Collection Dates
• Backfilling Twitter Data
• Platforms
• Filters
• Filter List
• Campaigns
• Classifications and Tags
• Manage Active Rules
• Delete Active Rules
• Edit an Active Rule
• Deactivating or Reactivating Rules
Historical Release Notes
New section and subtopics.
August 20, 2013
Topic
Social Training Videos
Description
Added 14 new training videos on Adobe EnterpriseTV.
August 15, 2013
Topic
Social Training Videos
Content Calendar
Description
Added notes to provide updated information about new features and functionality
in Social.
Renamed the "Scheduled Posts" drop-down list in Content Calendar to read "Post
Timeline" to better describe the feature's purpose and functionality. As a result of
this change, all subtopics in this section have new screenshots and minor text
changes.
Documentation Updates
Topic
Publisher Page
354
Description
Added a paragraph in the Assign Targets row explaining the Estimated Reach
feature for Facebook targeting.
Added a paragraph in the Schedule Post row to indicate that posts can be
scheduled in one-minute intervals.
Parent and Child Posts
Edit Parent or Child Posts in
Content Calendar
Language Support
New topic.
New topic.
Edited the text in footnote 4 to reflect the current state of localized documentation.
August 5, 2013
Topic
Social Training Videos
Signing In to Social
Language Support
FAQ
Description
New training videos for Social 3 are available for viewing on Adobe EnterpriseTV.
More videos are scheduled for release in the coming weeks. In addition, links to
individual videos are provided from appropriate topics in this guide.
Added information about resetting your Social password.
Added the Predictive Publishing column to the table.
New topic.
If There's a Problem
355
If There's a Problem
Customer Care is prepared to help you solve any issues that might arise. This page contains the information you
need when contacting Customer Care to expedite a resolution.
Basic Information
If you encounter issues or have questions when using Adobe Social, you have a number of options:
For questions, ask the Adobe Social experts:
• Online: Marketing Cloud community
http://help-forums.adobe.com/content/adobeforums/en/social-forum/adobe-social.html
• Twitter: @AdobeMktgCare
http://twitter.com/adobemktgcare
To contact the Social Support team with technical issues:
• In Social, click Help > Contact Support > complete and submit the support incident form.
For the fastest review of your issue, please provide screen captures and details such as:
Summary
Brief summary of the overall issue.
Account information
Company Name.
Report Suite.
Steps to reproduce
Include as much detail as possible, including any URLs needed to duplicate as well
as the expected result.
Include enough detail that somebody unfamiliar with Social should be able to follow
the directions and reproduce the problem.
Priority
P1 (most important) to P4 (least important).
Business impact
What is the impact to your business? For example, is this issue causing revenue
loss or rendering the product unusable, and is there a viable workaround?
Expectations
What do you expect to happen?
Also prepare information related to the specific issue.
In Case of an Outage
If you suspect there is an outage, first check the Marketing Cloud System Status page (http://status.adobe.com)
This has a record of all outages, incidents, and maintenance for Marketing Cloud Solutions, including Social, and
includes latest updates from our Tech Ops team. If you still require assistance, please open a new support incident
in Social (Help > Contact Support) and include the following information:
• Date and time outage started
If There's a Problem
356
• Explanation of what is occurring, steps to reproduce the problem, or message received.
• Scope, for example in which report suite(s), on which social properties, over which date range, where in Social,
and so forth.
Other Help Resources
357
Other Help Resources
Information and links to the Adobe Social Community and the Adobe Social Help page.
In addition to this Social Users Guide, the following resources are useful to help you get the most out of Adobe
Social.
Adobe Social Community Forum
Join the Adobe Social Community Forum, where you can interact with fellow Adobe Social users. You can post
questions, start discussions, get previews of upcoming releases, and get tips and tricks from the Adobe Social team.
See Adobe Social Community Forum.
Adobe Social Help Page
The Adobe Social Help page is your place for up-to-date information about all things Social. Information includes
Getting Started guides, training videos, release notes, blog posts, and FAQs. You can also search through our
product documentation and knowledgebase.
See Adobe Social Help.
Adobe Consulting Services
358
Adobe Consulting Services
Adobe Consulting Services offers custom solutions and integrations for Social.
For more information about any of the following services or integrations, contact your Account Manager:
• Sentiment Tuning
• Tracking Non-Social Sites
•
Sentiment Tuning
Adobe Consulting Services can help you with sentiment tuning, also referred to as re-scoring. Sentiment tuning
helps you fine-tune your sentiment analysis. Sentiment tuning is an optional process that comes with additional
costs. The process takes approximately four to six weeks to complete.
Tracking Non-Social Sites
Adobe Consulting Services can manually add certain non-social sites so that you can track them in Social. Not all
sites can be tracked by Social. Adobe Consulting Services can determine if a site can be tracked on a site-by-site
basis.
Historical Release Notes
359
Historical Release Notes
Historical release notes, listed by release date in descending order.
Social 16.4.1.0
Important: Data collection, accessibility, and usage rates within the social space are constantly evolving.
Due to changes made by our data provider and usage rates, we will no longer be providing blog, Tumblr,
Foursquare or Klout data effective April 8, 2016. Options for these data sources will be removed from listening
rule creation and Social Buzz filtering in the April Monthly Release (MR). We will continue evaluating new
options to help you quantify your social presence across platforms and will provide an update if/when an
alternate options are identified. For more information, see the Data Changes FAQ.
Note: On October 1, 2015 all new links wrapped with Twitter's t.co wrapper will use the https URL scheme.
This scheduled change increases the length of wrapped URLs by a single character.
The Social 16.4.1.0 release (4/21/2016) includes the following changes:
New Features
Feature
Description
Marketing Cloud navigation As part of the Adobe Marketing Cloud Spring 2016 release, a new-top level navigation
and menu changes
menu displays at the top of all solution interfaces. The new interface lets you:
• Single-click navigation between solutions: Choose your own default landing
page or take advantage of the solution-switcher widget.
• Updated Feed: We reimagined the Feed page to become a better platform for
cross-channel collaboration between marketers.
See What's New in the Adobe Marketing Cloud - Spring 2016 in the Marketing Cloud
and Core Services Product Documentation.
Enhancements
• Enhanced Moderation so that when you click a timestamp on a post's comment, it directs you to the comment
itself rather than the top post.
Fixes
The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that prevented data from populating the Post Analytics reports for certain Twitter properties.
• Fixed an issue that caused link attachments in the publishing workflow to fail.
• Fixed an issue that prevented Moderation from capturing tweets, in one example, for a specific day.
• Fixed an issue that caused Publish Anywhere to create incorrect shortened links.
• Fixed an issue in Content Calendar that prevented the filter for LinkedIn properties from working correctly.
Social 16.3.1.0 Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
Historical Release Notes
360
Important: Data collection, accessibility, and usage rates within the social space are constantly evolving.
Due to changes made by our data provider and usage rates, we will no longer be providing blog, Tumblr,
Foursquare or Klout data effective April 8, 2016. Options for these data sources will be removed from listening
rule creation and Social Buzz filtering in the April Monthly Release (MR). We will continue evaluating new
options to help you quantify your social presence across platforms and will provide an update if/when an
alternate options are identified. For more information, see the Data Changes FAQ.
Note: On October 1, 2015 all new links wrapped with Twitter's t.co wrapper will use the https URL scheme.
This scheduled change increases the length of wrapped URLs by a single character.
The Social 16.3.1.0 release (3/17/2016) includes the following changes:
New Features
Feature
Description
Publish Anywhere
You can now expand the Publish Anywhere interface to full-screen mode to allow
yourself more room to create, edit, and review your posts.
See Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Fixes
The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues:
• Fixed an issue that prevented some tweets from being collected and displayed in the Post Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented some metrics from displaying in the Properties report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the 1_documents.xlsx file from being included in the zip file after exporting data
from the Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue that caused Social to send repeated bulk email messages when using auto-moderation rules.
• Fixed a UI issue so that posts in moderation feeds with long links contain horizontal scroll bars.
• Fixed an issue that prevented some posts from displaying in escalation moderation feeds.
Social 16.2.1.0 Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
Note: On October 1 all new links wrapped with Twitter's t.co wrapper will use the https URL scheme. This
scheduled change increases the length of wrapped URLs by a single character.
The Social 16.2.1.0 release (2/18/2016) includes the following changes:
New Features
Feature
Description
Phase 2: LinkedIn rich media You can now attach images to LinkedIn posts using Adobe Social.
See Publisher Page and Publish Anywhere.
Historical Release Notes
361
Fixes
The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue in the Social Buzz report that prevented data from updating and displaying properly. (AS-35600)
• Fixed an issue in the Post Analytics report that caused links and attachments to display in HTML format rather
than as text links as expected. (AS-35825)
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Property filter in the Post Analytics report from functioning properly. (AS-35792)
• Fixed an issue in the Post Details report that displayed the incorrect number of comments for LinkedIn posts.
(AS-35791)
• Fixed an issue that caused the error message to not adequately explain the reason for a failed post. In some cases,
"#" was the only text in the error message. (AS-35576)
• Fixed an issue that caused tags for LinkedIn posts to not display in the Posts report.
• Fixed an issue in the Properties Overview report that caused Posts data to not display. (AS-35544)
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused the Escalate button to not be visible during the moderation escalation
workflow. (AS-35876)
• Fixed an issue that prevented a Hide option from working properly during the moderation workflow. (AS-35869)
• Fixed an issue that prevented Social moderation rules from removing posts that contain words in the Bad Words
list from Facebook pages. (AS-35461)
• Fixed an issue that caused moderation feeds to be delayed or to not pull in all relevant posts as defined in the feed
rules. (AS-35451)
• Fixed an issue that caused the incorrect sentiment scores to display in moderation feeds. (AS-35149)
Social 16.1.1.0 Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
Note: On October 1 all new links wrapped with Twitter's t.co wrapper will use the https URL scheme. This
scheduled change increases the length of wrapped URLs by a single character.
The Social 16.1.1.0 release (1/21/2016) includes the following changes:
Fixes
The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that prevent posts from updating properly in the Social Buzz and Posts by Display Name reports.
(AS-35600)
• Fixed an issue that caused incorrect data for new posts to display in the Competitor Analytics report. (AS-35396)
• Fixed an issue that prevented campaign and tag information from displaying in the downloaded Posts report if the
post contained shortened links. (AS-35150)
• Fixed an issue that caused tags to disappear from the Posts Details report for some YouTube videos. (AS-35110)
• Enhanced the search function for tags to allow "fuzzy" searches. For example, to find a tag named "Adobe Social,"
a user could type "Adobe" or "Social." (AS-35219)
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from editing misspelled tag names by pressing Backspace while moving a tag
from one group to another group. (AS-35788)
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from moving or merging tags. (AS-35753, AS-35712)
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from moving a large number of tags from one group to another group. (AS-35724)
• Fixed an issue with the exported Moderation Overview report that caused tag IDs to display instead of tag names.
(AS-35454)
• Fixed an issue that caused an erroneous email notification to be sent to a user indicating that the user had approved
a post. (AS-35783)
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused an error when geo-targeting Facebook posts by city. (AS-35711)
Historical Release Notes
362
• Fixed an issue that caused Social to repeatedly prompt users to re-authorize an inactive LinkedIn account.
(AS-35661)
• Fixed an issue that caused users to receive an erroneous email message indicating that campaign tracking failed.
(AS-35655)
• Fixed an issue that caused missing post content in moderation feeds. (AS-35648)
• Fixed an issue that caused the wrong auto-notification email message to be sent for Facebook private messages.
(AS-34376)
Social 15.11.1.0 Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
Note: On October 1 all new links wrapped with Twitter's t.co wrapper will use the https URL scheme. This
scheduled change increases the length of wrapped URLs by a single character.
Note: On October 1 all new links wrapped with Twitter's t.co wrapper will use the https URL scheme. This
scheduled change increases the length of wrapped URLs by a single character.
This Social release focuses on streamlining social content creation, distribution, and engagement workflows. You
can create and deliver high-quality, visual social content faster and make sure interactions around that content stay
brand-appropriate and productive.
The Social 15.11.1.0 release (11/05/2015) includes the following changes:
New Features
Feature
Publish Anywhere photo
editing tools
Description
Quickly edit, optimize, and touch up images from within Publish Anywhere, now
available through an integration with Adobe Creative Cloud’s Aviary photo editor.
Social users do not need to use external platforms for lightweight image editing or
have creative teams adjust images.
See Use Photo Editing Tools or the Publish Anywhere Capability Spotlight.
Facebook Album Support
Find and respond to comments on Facebook photo albums as you would other posts
in Social Moderation. Create a new Photo Album only feed to view comments on
albums and photos within albums. Filter and view the performance of your photo
album objects within Post Analytics and export.
See Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed, Moderate a Photo Album, and Post
Analytics List View.
Hide Facebook post
Hide or unhide a comment on a post from a Facebook page. This is useful to hide
comments within Moderation
comments without actually deleting them from the page.When troublesome customers
come back to the page, they still see their comments, but those comments are hidden
from everyone else.
See Moderate an Individual Facebook Post.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
Twitter direct messages
363
Description
You can now send direct messages that contain up to 10,000 characters instead of
the previous limit of 140 characters.
See Direct Message a Twitter User.
LinkedIn API upgrade
LinkedIn has standardized its publishing APIs. As a result, you must upgrade your
LinkedIn accounts to let you take advantage of new functionality in future releases
of Adobe Social. You will see a pop-up message instructing you to upgrade your
LinkedIn accounts once a week until you have upgraded all of your accounts.
For more information and step-by-step instructions, see November Release:
Re-Authorization Popup.
Fixes
The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that caused the following error while publishing using the Content Calendar: ""ERROR comparison
of Float with Float failed." AS-35399
• Fixed an issue that caused tagging to disappear on a published Facebook post. AS-35375
• Fixed an issue that caused missing owned Post ID classifications for non-link posts. AS-35360
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from adding tags to draft posts. AS-35352
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from adding properties to draft posts. AS-35342
• Fixed an issue that caused multiple Twitter handles to display for the same property in exported reports. AS-35337
• Fixed an issue in the Properties report that caused thumbnail images to display for defunct properties. AS-35211
• Fixed an issue that prevented campaigns and Social IDs from displaying in the Posts report. AS-35150
• Fixed an issue with the Moderation Overview dashboard that caused incorrect numbers for escalated, claimed,
and resolved issues. AS-35114
• Fixed an issue that caused an error when users clicked an image in a moderation feed to view the image. AS-35113
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from viewing all tags in a post from the Content Calendar.
• Fixed an issue that prevented moderation feeds from displaying or caused the feed to load slowly. AS-34924
• Fixed an issue with Google+ posts that failed with the following error message: "Your post failed to publish because
Google+ is experiencing a temporary technical issue that is beyond our control. Please try publishing your post
again later." AS-34735
• Fixed an issue that caused auto-notification moderation rules for private message to send the incorrect notification.
AS-34376
Social 15.9.1.0 Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
The Social 15.9.1.0 release (08/20/2015) includes the following changes:
Note: On October 1 all new links wrapped with Twitter's t.co wrapper will use the https URL scheme. This
scheduled change increases the length of wrapped URLs by a single character.
The Social 15.9.1.0 release (09/17/2015) includes the following changes:
New Features
Historical Release Notes
364
Feature
Description
@mentions
Added @mentions functionality to Facebook posts created in Publish Anywhere.
See Facebook @mentions.
Fixes
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 75 back-end
fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important
customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused targeting information to not display in the targeting drop-down list.
• Fixed an issue that caused post scheduling to sometimes fail when using the Social UI in Japanese.
• Fixed an issue that caused some LinkedIn posts fail due to re-authorization issues.
• Fixed an issue that infrequently prevented users from re-authorizing properties and adding new properties.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from deleting pending tweets in the Content Calendar.
Social 15.8.1.0 Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
The Social 15.8.1.0 release (08/20/2015) includes the following changes:
New Features
Feature
Description
Publish Anywhere
Create and post content to social networks from anywhere within Social.
In this guide, see Publish Anywhere and Publish Anywhere Workflow.
To view the Publish Anywhere product capability spotlight in PDF format, download
the file here: Publish Anywhere or visit the Customer Resource Hub.
Create multi-image tweets
Use Publish Anywhere to create tweets that contain multiple images to increase
engagement.
See Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Create tweets with video clips Incorporate video clips up to 30 seconds long in your tweets.
See Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Note that only accounts that are set up with Adobe Experience Manager Assets (on
demand) can browse to and select videos from the Marketing Cloud Asset Selector.
Download a moderation
feed's contents.
Download the content of a moderation feed to a Microsoft Excel file, including
verbatims and the volume of content within the feed without having to dedupe the
Moderation Overview report's exported file contents.
See Download Moderation Feed Content.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
365
Description
Note: Please contact your Adobe Social Account Manager if you would like
this feature enabled.
Adobe Aviary Integration
Edit photos with all of the features of the Adobe Aviary app within the Adobe Social
mobile app. Add text (hashtags or memes), apply filters, and crop or retouch photos
in a streamlined workflow.
See Use the Photo Editing Tools.
Note: To view a training video on these new features, see What's New for August 2015 (15.8.1.0).
Fixes and Enhancements
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 480 back-end
fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important
customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that prevented a thumbnail from displaying on Facebook if the post was published using the Attach
Link option to point to a video that was already uploaded to Facebook.
• Fixed issues in the Publish Anywhere feature when accessed in Internet Explorer 9 (selecting frequently used
properties, browsing for photos, and some UI text not displaying properly).
• Fixed an issue that prevented +1 metrics from displaying in the Post Analytics report.
Social 15.7.1.0 Release Notes
Information about new features and enhancements in Adobe Social.
The Social 15.7.1.0 release (07/16/2015) includes the following changes:
Fixes and Enhancements
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. The fixes highlighted
below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused the download and send functions in the Post Analytics report to fail.
• Addressed many localization issues to improve the linguistic quality of text in the user interface, including
standardizing terms, improving translations to better align text with the context, adding more context to translations,
fixing grammar and punctuation errors, and localizing date/time strings.
Social 15.6.1.0 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 15.6.1.0 release.
The Social 15.6.1.0 release (06/18/2015) includes the following changes:
New Features
Historical Release Notes
366
Feature
Description
Adobe Social Mobile App
The Adobe Social mobile app is now available!
The Adobe Social mobile app brings the power of Adobe Social content publishing
workflows to your iPhone or iPad.
Go to the Apple App Store and search for "Adobe Social." You need an Adobe Social
account and a mapped Marketing Cloud login.
See Adobe Social Mobile App.
Fixes and Enhancements
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. The fixes highlighted
below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Enhanced the publishing workflow to include a reminder when you click Post Now that lists the names of the
properties to which you are posting content.
• Renamed the Approve Now button to Bypass Approvals to clarify the behavior. Clicking Bypass Approvals
uses the override permission.
• Enhanced the spell-check function in the Publisher to ignore shortened links and underline misspellings as
expected.
• Fixed an issue with the Post Analytics report that caused filters to not respect selected page groups.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Download and Send functions on the Post Analytics report to not function.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error when accessing the Post Details report for a YouTube video.
• Fixed an issue that caused discrepancies between the number of Page Engagements reported in the Properties
report and in its downloaded file.
• Fixed an issue that caused data in the Properties report and in its downloaded file to be off one day.
• Fixed an issue with the Classification filter in the Social Buzz report that caused no results to be returned.
• Fixed an issue that prevented tracking codes from appending to Facebook album posts.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused posts to fail due to timeout errors.
• Fixed an issue that prevented moderation-workflow assignees from displaying in Internet Explorer 11 browsers.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from creating listening rules for WordPress that contain an OR operator.
Social 15.5.1.0 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 15.5.1.0 release.
The Social 15.5.1.0 release (05/21/2015) includes the following changes:
New Features
Feature
Description
Facebook dark posts
Create posts on Facebook that do not display on your Timeline but can be accessed
with direct links. This option lets content creators create posts to be promoted as
sponsored (paid) ads.
See Set Dark Post in Publish Anywhere Workflow.
Historical Release Notes
367
Feature
Description
New reserved events in
Adobe Analytics
Currently there are metrics we receive from social networks that cannot be reported
on in Adobe Analytics. New reserved events let you create custom reports in Analytics
to view social data alongside web data.
Adobe Social Mobile App
The Adobe Social Mobile app for iOS will be available in the Apple App Store in June
2015.
For training videos on these new features, see What's New for May 2015.
Enhancements
Feature
Description
Video publishing
Select a still frame from anywhere in the video to upload and use as that video's
thumbnail image in the post. Previously, Social selected the opening frame to be
used as the thumbnail image.
See the Upload a Video section in Publisher Page.
Twitter geo-targeting
On March 1, 2015, Adobe Social discontinued support for geo-targeting of tweets.
After working with Twitter, geo-targeting is available again.
See the Specify Targets section in Publisher Page.
Approving posts
Publishing approvers can now approve a post from its preview.
Twitter direct message
images
Improved the method Social uses to fetch and display images in Twitter direct
messages in moderation feeds.
Social tags
You can now create a tag group or tag with the same name as a previously deleted
tag group or tag.
Fixes
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 140 back-end
fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important
customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that caused incorrect data to display for Facebook pages in the Competitor Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that caused discrepancies in the number of reported Twitter followers.
• Fixed an issue that prevented tracking parameters from appending to posts created using the Publish Anywhere
feature.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused posts to fail with a timeout error.
• Fixed an issue with shortened links where links to pages within a website redirected to the company's homepage.
• Fixed an issue that caused some invalid content (posts, comments, and replies) to appear in moderation feeds.
Code enhancements will help our collection system more effectively block Invalid content that does not match the
page.
Historical Release Notes
368
Social 15.4.1.0 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 15.4.1.0 release.
The Social 15.4.1.0 release (04/17/2015) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Description
Social Tags
Use Social Tags as a centralized location to manage tags for use throughout Social.
Social Tags help classify content within Social. For example, you can tag social
contact profiles, inbound content in moderation feeds, and outbound posts created
in the Content Calendar or Publisher.
See Social Tags.
For training videos, see:
• Social 15.4.1.0: What's New - Part 1 (Social Tag Management)
• Social 15.4.1.0: What's New - Part 2 (Social Tags)
Publish Anywhere
Publishing is the most-used capability within Adobe Social. Publish Anywhere
makes the ability to publish content to social networks available from anywhere within
Social.
Note: Note that the Publish Anywhere feature is currently in Beta.
See Publish Anywhere.
Fixes and Enhancements
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 650 back-end
fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important
customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that caused irregularities for the Twitter Total Reach metric in the Post Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that caused some campaigns to not display correctly in the Social Campaigns report.
• Fixed an issue that caused multiple Facebook cover photos to display on the page after receiving a failure message
in Social.
• Enhanced the upload functionality for Facebook cover photos, especially if a failure occurs.
• Fixed an issue that caused post-time discrepancies between child and master posts when duplicating posts.
• Fixed an issue that caused posts to fail due to "Transaction isolation conflict detected" errors.
• Fixed an issue that caused tags to disappear from scheduled posts.
• Fixed an issue that prevented thumbnail images from displaying in posts published to LinkedIn pages using a link
attachment.
• Fixed an issue that caused shortened URLs published to LinkedIn pages to malfunction.
• Fixed an issue that caused the bulk moderation icons to not display in the Social UI.
• Fixed an issue in the Social UI that caused the scroll bar to not display in the Add New Property dialog box when
adding YouTube channels.
Historical Release Notes
369
• Fixed an issue that caused scrolling issues in some Social dialog boxes on mobile devices (for example, when
escalating a post in a moderation feed).
Social 15.3.1.0 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 15.3.1.0 release.
The Social 15.3.1.0 release (03/19/2015) includes the following changes:
Fixes and Enhancements
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. The fixes highlighted
below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Effective March 1, 2015, Adobe Social will no longer support geo-targeting of tweets. Twitter requires that all
geo-targeting leverage the Ads API. We are working with Twitter to reintroduce geo-targeting at a later date. We
apologize for any inconvenience this has caused. Please reach out to your Social Account Manager or Customer
Success/Support representative if you have additional questions.
• Fixed an issue that temporarily prevented Social from collecting metrics for YouTube channels.
• A onetime Facebook Publisher Authorization page will be triggered upon log in asking customers, who are currently
using a Facebook custom publisher app, to authorize the Adobe Social new publisher app for each user's linked
Facebook account(s). This is required for when we upgrade to the new Facebook graph API in April.
• Fixed an issue that caused metric discrepancies between those reported in Adobe Analytics and in YouTube for
owned social properties.
Social 15.2.1.0 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 15.2.1.0 release.
The Social 15.2.1.0 release (02/19/2015) includes the following changes:
Fixes and Enhancements
This Social release focuses on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 350 back-end
fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important
customer-reported issues.
• Added a new sub-classification for Owned Post ID that lets you run a Social Campaigns report in Adobe Analytics
to view owned social metrics. For example, you can display how many Facebook post impressions were generated
by all posts in a campaign.
• Fixed an issue that caused SAINT classifications to be incorrect after initial Adobe Social enablement.
• Fixed an issue that incorrectly caused an error message to display after editing a tweet so that it contains fewer
than 140 characters.
• Removed the Expand/Collapse option in the Publisher's Preview pane that displays when creating content for
Twitter. Because of changes made by Twitter, this option is no longer necessary.
• Fixed an issue that caused reported metric numbers in Social for YouTube videos to be delayed when compared
to the numbers reported on YouTube.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes prevented posts made natively and non-natively from displaying in the Post Analytics
report.
• Fixed an issue that caused the reported post time in the Posts report to differ from the post time in Facebook.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes prevented users from resolving escalations in Moderation.
• Fixed an issue that caused discrepancies for delegations and re-escalations when comparing numbers on the
Moderation Overview dashboard and in the downloaded report.
Historical Release Notes
370
• Fixed an issue that caused post time stamps in a downloaded moderation report to display in UTC time, rather in
the user's time zone.
• Social now sends email messages when LinkedIn accounts need to be re-authorized.
• Fixed an issue that caused Sina Weibo accounts to require frequent re-authorization.
Social 3.4 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.4 release.
The Social 3.4 release (11/20/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Description
Unified Property
Management
Display Facebook, Twitter, Google+, LinkedIn, YouTube, and Sina Weibo properties
you manage in a unified view within Social. Add new properties to be managed and
change property settings, including thumbnail image, owner, report suite, publish
approval, and prediction (Facebook only).
See Properties.
Custom time frame
Added the new Custom time-frame option available while configuring moderation
feeds.
See the topics under Create a New Moderation Feed.
New Social API methods
Added the following new Social API methods:
CreateTagGroup: Creates a tag group with the specified parameters.
GetTagGroups: Returns all tag groups belonging to a user's account.
GetTagGroupTags: Returns all tags in a specified tag group.
UpdateTagGroup: Updates an existing tag group with the specified parameters.
AddPropertyTags: Adds tags to an existing tag group with the specified parameters.
RemovePropertyTags: Removes tags from an existing tag group with the specified
parameters.
GetPropertyList: Returns data for all properties, including type, name, ID, and
associated tags.
See Adobe Social API in the Developer Connection.
Localized documentation
The Social Users Guide documentation for the Japanese, German, and French
languages has been updated to the Social 3.3.4 level.
To view a video that demonstrates these new features, see Social 3.4: What's New.
Deprecated Functionality
Historical Release Notes
371
• Like Gate and Non-Fan Splash Page: As of November 5, 2014, Facebook Platform Policy no longer allows you
to gate applications or application content based on whether or not a person has liked a page. The Social 3.4
release reflects this change by removing Like Gate and non-fan splash page functionality from the Application
Builder. For more information about Facebook's policy change and how you will be affected, see Facebook Like
Gate Deprecation in the Adobe Social Forum.
• Legacy Facebook Moderation Tool: The legacy Facebook Moderation tool has been deprecated. Use the Unified
Moderation tool to moderate content for all platforms, including Facebook.
Fixes
In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, fixes in Social 3.4 focus on improved performance,
scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 625 back-end fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes
highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Users no longer need the Manage All/Owned Social Properties permission to see the Competitor Analytics
report. Individual users or members of user groups will be able to see the Competitor Analytics report as long
as the View Competitor Analytics permission is enabled. Customers do not need to change this permission
because the new settings will be automatically applied. The Manage All/Owned Social Properties permission
will be visible until the Social 3.4.1 release, but will have no effect.
• Fixed a display issue when filtering the Social Buzz report using the Show Spam option.
• Fixed an issue that caused metrics numbers in the Social Buzz report's trend graph and Display Name sections
to not match.
• Fixed a display issue in the Social Buzz report's Display Name section that caused the bars on the chart to display
out of order and some metric values to display as 0.
• Fixed an issue that caused direct messages to not display in the relevant posts feed.
• Fixed an issue with moderation feeds that caused the Read flag to not work as expected in direct-message feeds.
• Fixed an issue in moderation feeds that sometimes caused numbers to display as "####" instead of the actual
numbers.
• Fixed an issue that caused an "Uncaught TypeError" message to display after setting filters in the Content Calendar
then navigating away from and then back to the Content Calendar.
• Fixed an issue with the Content Calendar Week View that caused the Post Status filter to not be respected.
• Fixed an issue that prevented a post from failing when a linked image could not be retrieved.
• Fixed an issue that caused content with the Post Immediately setting to take longer than expected to post.
• Fixed an issue that caused an incorrect follower count to display when using a LinkedIn targeting parameter.
Social 3.3.5 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.3.5 release.
The Social 3.3.5 release (10/16/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
New campaign parameters
Description
Added three new URL parameters to tie your campaign to your social engagement
data visible in Adobe Analytics.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
372
Description
In addition to the campaign tracking code (adbsc) that is automatically appended to
the post's URL, Social also appends three additional parameters:
• adbid: The post's native post ID (for example, its native ID assigned by Twitter).
• adbpr: The post's property ID (for example, the Twitter account's ID).
• adbpl: An abbreviation for the post's platform identifier (for example, tw).
See Publisher Page and New Engagement Metrics for Owned Social Properties.
Listening rule enhancements
Added safeguard to prevent users from backfilling large amounts of data by mistake.
See Backfilling Twitter Data.
Fixes
In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, fixes in Social 3.3.5 focus on improved
performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 525 back-end fixes and enhancements address these
areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed two export issues with the downloaded Posts report. The first issue caused only one Facebook post link to
display in the export even though two links were specified. The second issue prevented Google+ post links from
displaying in separate rows, one row for each link.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the downloaded Post report from honoring filter settings.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error when filtering templates by Tags in the Publisher.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error when filtering templates by Post Type in the Publisher.
• Fixed an issue that caused the type-ahead, auto-fill feature for tags in the Publisher to not function as expected.
• Fixed an issue that caused group posts to a large number of pages to fail.
• Fixed an issue that caused problems when using hashtags in the Publisher. Suggestions were not provided and
hashtags failed to display in the post.
• Fixed an issue that prevented bit.ly links from adding campaign tracking codes to published posts even though
they had an assigned campaign.
• Fixed an issue that caused the first message in Facebook private message conversations to not display on the
Content Details page.
• Fixed an issue in Unified Moderation that caused URLs in retweets to be truncated if the expanded retweet
exceeded the character limit.
Social 3.3.4 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.3.3 release.
The Social 3.3.3 release (09/18/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Description
Social Buzz report
enhancements
The Social Buzz report includes the following enhancements:
Image Button: Display or hide images in the Posts feed.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
373
Description
Play/Pause Button: View the Posts feed in real-time mode or pause the feed to
examine an individual post.
Retweet Filter: Display or hide retweets in the Posts feed using the Retweet filter
option.
See Social Buzz.
Moderation enhancements
Note: These
moderation
enhancements will be
available September
25, 2014.
Hide Facebook Posts: Hide individual posts from a Facebook page instead of
deleting them.
See Moderate an Individual Facebook Post.
Quick-Action Buttons: The quick-action buttons in moderation feeds have been
simplified. The most frequently used buttons display below the text for each post or
tweet. The less frequently used buttons are accessed by clicking the
icon.
See Moderate Individual Posts or Tweets.
Fixes
In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, fixes in Social 3.3.4 focus on improved
performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 300 back-end fixes and enhancements address these
areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that caused some customers to receive a "Service Error" when logging in to Social.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the user's specified home page from displaying after logging in to Social.
• Fixed an issue that prevented data from being collected for LinkedIn posts.
• Fixed an issue that caused display problems in the Social Buzz report's Display Name reportlet.
• Fixed an issue that caused users to receive an error message while attempting to tune sentiment on the Social
Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue in the Social Buzz report that caused inconsistent metric numbers when adding the number of
posts by platform and then comparing that number to the total number of mentions.
• Fixed an issue that caused link-click reporting inconsistencies in downloaded reports.
• Fixed an issue that prevented Publisher templates from loading for some users.
• Fixed an issue that caused Facebook posts with video attachments to sometimes fail, even though the Content
Calendar indicated that the post was successful.
• Enhanced the Publisher and Content Calendar to display a warning if an image posted from an iPhone is upside
down. Previously, it was difficult to determine whether the image was properly oriented because the device
automatically rotated the image in the Preview pane.
• Fixed an issue that caused an incorrect error message to display when a Facebook post failed due to unsafe or
abusive content.
• Fixed an issue in the Content Calendar that caused selected filters to not be saved after a browser refresh.
• Fixed an issue in the Publisher that caused an error message to display when users entered the letter "M" followed
by a space in a tweet. The Publisher incorrectly recognized the text as a Twitter command.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes prevented shortened bit.ly URLs from retaining tracking codes.
• Fixed an issue that caused a deleted-post notification to be sent when a social property was removed from a draft
post.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from escalating posts in Moderation when there are Reasons configured but
no Suggestions configured.
Historical Release Notes
374
• Fixed an issue that caused an inactive listening rule to display on the Inactive page after being reactivated unless
the user reloaded the page.
• Fixed an issue that caused "Invalid date - Invalid Date (backfill)" to display in Social after backfilling data for a
listening rule.
Social 3.3.3 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.3.3 release.
The Social 3.3.3 release (08/21/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
New Social User interface
New documentation URL
Description
The Social 3.3.3 release (08/21/14) introduces a new user interface (UI) with some
subtle differences.
The Social documentation has been moved to the following location:
https://marketing.adobe.com/resources/help/en_US/social/
Please update your bookmarks.
New training videos
Added 14 new training videos and removed a few outdated videos.
New videos include the following:
• New User Orientation: Adobe Social
• New User Orientation: Publishing
• New User Orientation: Content Calendar
• New User Orientation: Moderation
• New User Orientation: Analytics
• New User Orientation: Social Campaigns
• How to Monitor and Respond to Conversations
• How to Pull and Customize Property and Post Analytics
• How to Troubleshoot a Post that Failed to Post
• How to Set Up Social Campaigns
• How to Pull and Customize Social Campaign Reports
• How to Reauthorize a Social Account
• How to Create a Listening Rule
• How to Create a Moderation Feed
See Social Training Videos.
Unified Moderation
Tune Sentiment: You can now tune a post's sentiment from a moderation feed.
See Tune Sentiment in a Moderation Feed.
Stream Moderation Feeds: You can now stream a moderation feed to automatically
refresh the feed with new content.
See Stream or Manually Refresh Moderation Feeds.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
375
Description
View Machine Translation: If you create a feed in a language other than the
language you are viewing in the Social UI, or if a post in a different language displays
in an existing moderation feed, you can click Show Translation in each post's tile
to display a machine-generated translation of that post's text.
See the topics under Create a New Moderation Feed and Moderate Individual Posts
or Tweets
In-Feed Search: Search each moderation feed by clicking the magnifying glass icon
at the top of each feed and typing content into the search box.
Fixes
In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, fixes in Social 3.3.3 focus on improved
performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 570 back-end fixes and enhancements address these
areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Enhanced the Moderation Overview dashboard's exported file to include the time zone in the Action Time and
Content Time columns.
• Fixed an issue that prevented YouTube data from displaying in the Properties and Posts reports due to disabled
account tokens.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Posts report's exported file to not respect filter settings.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error message to display when exporting the Post Analytics report, even though
the export was successful.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Social Buzz report's export to fail when requesting a high number of post results.
• Fixed an issue that caused revenue discrepancies between the Social Campaign and the Campaign Details
reports.
• Fixed an issue that caused discrepancies in the number of mentions across various reports in Social.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the tracking code for Facebook posts with an associated campaign from being sent
to SAINT.
• Fixed an issue that caused internal notes added by customers using the Content Calendar from saving.
• Fixed an issue that caused filters and tags configured in the Content Calendar to be reset after a browser refresh.
• Filtering the Content Calendar now respects the user's time zone.
• Fixed a formatting issue in the UI when targeting LinkedIn posts by geography.
• Fixed an issue in the Publisher and Content Calendar that caused unexpected characters to display after inserting
a hashtag (#) followed by Japanese, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, or Korean characters.
• Fixed an issue that caused moderation notification email messages to fail.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Escalation status to remain as Claimed even though escalation was marked
Resolved.
• Fixed an issue that prevented an inactive rule from displaying on the Inactive page (Settings > Rules > Inactive
tab).
• Fixed an issue that caused an email notification to be sent to customers when a draft post was created, even
though they had set email notification to minimal.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused a blank page to display after customers clicked the View this Template
link and logged in to Social after receiving an email message stating that a new template is available for publication.
• Fixed an issue that prevented Facebook pages that do not have Facebook admins from displaying on the Facebook
Pages page in Social (Settings > Facebook Pages).
Historical Release Notes
376
Social 3.3.2 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.3.2 release.
The Social 3.3.2 release (07/17/2014) includes the following changes:
Fixes and Enhancements
Enhancements and fixes in Social 3.3.2 focus on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. Nearly
150 back-end fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for
the more important customer-reported issues.
• Added the ability to evaluate owned social property and post KPIs alongside site KPIs in Adobe Analytics. This
data can be integrated into Analytics dashboards, pulled into Report Builder, and is available in Ad Hoc Analysis
and Data Warehouse. For more information, see Owned Social Properties Reports.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Social Buzz report's Related Terms reportlet from loading if your account is
using the Singapore data center.
• Fixed an issue that caused a "file format or file extension is invalid" error message when attempting to export the
Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error message or prevented the file from opening after exporting data from the
Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error message to display when attempting to update sentiment on the Social Buzz
report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Marketing Overview dashboard's Campaigns reportlet from loading if your
account contains many campaigns.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from being able to click View Post in the Content Calendar to display a
Facebook Photo Album or Facebook Cover Photo post.
• Enhanced the Content Calendar so that users can view a post on its platform (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, and
so forth) from the List View, Month View, or Week View.
• Enhanced the Publisher and Content Calendar to support animated .gifs on Twitter.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Content Calendar to not respect certain filters. For example, if a user specified
one or more properties, then specified a Pending Approvals filter, the Content Calendar displayed posts for
more properties than were selected in the Social Properties filter.
• Enhanced the Publisher and Content Calendar to display an icon to indicate that the post will fail because the
associated social property needs to be re-authorized. Users can hover over the icon to display a message and a
link to authorize the property.
• Updated to the latest Twitter library so that all domains are shortened correctly (the number of characters is
accurate).
• Fixed an issue that caused the hashtag to display in Facebook and Google+ posts even though the hashtag was
added in the Twitter preview.
• Fixed an issue that caused the bulk delete function for listening rules to not respect search results. For example,
if a user specified a search term on the Active Rules page (Settings > Listening Rules > Active), clicked the
checkbox at the top of the list to select all returned listening rules, then clicked Delete, more rules were deleted
than expected.
• Fixed an issue that caused a longer than expected delay before data collection started for a newly created listening
rule.
• Fixed an issue that prevented tracking codes being sent to the classification importer (SAINT) even though a
Facebook post had an associated campaign.
Historical Release Notes
377
Social 3.3.1 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.3 release.
The Social 3.3.1 release (06/19/2014) includes the following changes:
Fixes and Enhancements
Enhancements and fixes in Social 3.3.1 focus on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More
than 400 back-end fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions
for the more important customer-reported issues.
• Fixed an issue that caused display discrepancies for custom date ranges in the Marketing Overview dashboard
after a refresh. The dashboard adhered to the date range selected in the calendar, but the date range displayed
under Custom Range did not match. Both dates now match.
• Fixed an issue that caused "N/A" to display for Link Clicks in the Post Analytics roll-up view for posts that were
created natively using Facebook.
• Fixed an issue that caused YouTube videos that do not contain the specified tag to display in the Post Analytics
report when filtering by Tags.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistent time zones to be listed in the Post Analytics and Post Details reports.
• Fixed an issue that caused the downloaded Post Analytics report to not respect selected filters for YouTube
accounts.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the user time-zone offset from displaying properly on the View page of the Post
Details report for YouTube videos.
• Changed the way Social collects and reports Views metrics so that the Post Details report numbers match native
YouTube numbers.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistent metric numbers to be listed in the Properties report roll-up view and the
Property Details report for YouTube properties.
• Fixed a display issue that caused some dates to overlap in the Competitor Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that caused data for two competitor pages with the same name to be combined in one row in the
Competitor Analytics report.
• Enhanced the Social Campaigns report to let users view the report in list-view mode.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from downloading the Social Campaigns report.
• Fixed an issue that caused New Page Like metrics to be inconsistent in the Competitor Analytics report and in
the downloaded report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the up/down change arrows from displaying in the Properties report for Google+
pages and Twitter accounts.
• Fixed an issue that prevented engagement data from displaying in the Property Details report's Post Performance
section.
• Fixed an issue that caused Social to send a nil value for the Non-Employee Followers metric in the Property
Details report for a LinkedIn page.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the link title from displaying while editing a post in the Content Calendar.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Template list in the Content Calendar to load slowly.
• Enhanced the error message that displays in the Content Calendar when a Facebook post fails due to content
deemed unsafe or abusive.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Publisher to ignore line breaks in post text.
• Fixed an issue in the Publisher that prevented the image's thumbnail from displaying for a LinkedIn post even
though the link to the image displays properly.
• You can now add thumbnails to Facebook videos from the Publisher and Content Calendar.
• Fixed an issue that caused posts containing images with shortened URLs to fail.
• Enhanced the link shortener feature to default to ctx.ly if an external link shortener fails. If ctx.ly fails, the post is
published without the link being shortened.
Historical Release Notes
378
• Enhanced the downloadable Moderation report to include the time zone in the Action Time and Content Time
column data.
• Fixed an issue that prevented View Details from displaying information for Facebook private messages in a
moderation feed.
• Enhanced the Moderation feature to display hidden Facebook posts in feeds.
• Fixed an issue that prevented all posts from loading when refreshing a moderation feed.
• Added additional permissions to moderation group permissions, including Can Access and Use Unified Moderation
Stats, Can Edit Unified Moderation Settings, and Can Use Unified Moderation.
• Fixed an issue that caused listening rules with negative Bounding Box values to not validate correctly.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from deleting and then reactivating inactive listening rules.
• Enhanced the exported file for Users & Groups to show detailed permissions information.
• Fixed an image display issue when uploading images while configuring a Sina Weibo, YouTube, or LinkedIn
account.
• Users can now add owned Facebook pages as competitors even if they are not part of the ownership group for
those pages.
• Fixed an issue that prevented campaign data for Social tracking codes from being added to the classification upload
file.
Social 3.3 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.3 release.
The Social 3.3 release (05/22/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Global report suite support
Description
Social now supports global report suites that provide an aggregate view across an
organization's various properties.
For more information, see Global Report Suites.
Unified Moderation
enhancements
The following enhancements have been made in Unified Moderation:
Auto-Notification Rules: Create moderation rules that automatically send notification
messages to one or more email addresses if content is posted containing specified
words to your owned Facebook pages.
For more information, see Create Auto-Notification Moderation Rules.
Twitter Conversation Feeds: Configure or edit a feed to facilitate moderation of
individual tweets and their comments.
For more information, see Configure a Twitter Conversation Moderation Feed.
Actionable Notification of New Content in Moderation Feeds: Manually refresh
posts in saved moderation feeds using an actionable indicator that lets you know
when new content is available.
For more information, see Stream or Manually Refresh Moderation Feeds.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
379
Description
Post Type Filter: Create a Facebook or Twitter moderation feed that displays posts
by post type. For Facebook, you can filter by Posts and Comments/Replies. For
Twitter, you can filter by Tweet, Replies, and Retweets.
For more information, see Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed and Configure
a Twitter Moderation Feed.
Export Moderation History Report: The Microsoft Excel file you can download
from the Moderation Overview dashboard now contains a Moderation Actions
History sheet that displays detailed information about every moderation action
performed during the specified time period.
For more information, see Moderation Overview Dashboard.
Timestamp Enhancements: You can hover over the timestamp on any tweet to
view the complete timestamp and display the listening rule that captured the content.
You can also click the timestamp to open Twitter to view the content.
For more information, see Moderate an Individual Tweet.
Send reports via email
according to schedule
Schedule and send a report in Microsoft Excel format to one or more email addresses,
immediately or according to schedule.
For more information, see Schedule and Send Reports Via Email.
Edit posts in Publisher
Preview
You can now edit posts for all platforms (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, and so forth)
in the Publisher's Preview panel.
For more information, see Publisher Page.
Set Social home page
Set a default home page that automatically displays whenever you log in to Social.
You can set the default home page from the pop-up that displays when you log in
to Social or in Preferences.
For more information, see Preferences.
Fixes, Enhancements, and Deprecations
In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, enhancements and fixes in Social 3.3 focus
on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 460 back-end fixes and enhancements
address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported
issues.
• The Share a SWF feature in the Content Calendar and Publisher has been deprecated.
• LinkedIn recommends that companies publish to groups natively using LinkedIn. LinkedIn group support in Social
has been deprecated.
• Fixed an issue that caused "mixed content" warnings on the Marketing Overview dashboard.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from updating sentiment on the Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue where the change to Daylight Saving Time caused some Facebook data to not display correctly in
the Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue that caused some metric data in the Social Campaigns report to be incorrect.
Historical Release Notes
380
• Fixed an issue when searching for campaigns in the Social Campaigns report that caused campaigns that did
not contain the search term to display as results. "No Results" now displays if the search term is not contained in
any campaign names.
• Fixed an issue that caused metric discrepancies for post engagements in the graph and chart on the Competitor
Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistent metric numbers in the Properties report's roll-up view and in the property's
Property Details report.
• Images now display in the Properties and Posts reports for age-gated pages.
• Fixed an issue that prevented time stamps from displaying on the Post Analytics report for LinkedIn and YouTube
posts.
• Fixed an issue that caused Twitter replies to not display in the donut chart on the Post Details report.
• Fixed an issue that caused some campaigns to display twice in the Social Campaigns report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the YouTube channel name from displaying on a post's Post Details report.
• Changed the tool tip for the YouTube engagement metric to not include subscribers in the calculation.
• Fixed an issue that prevented Social from performing large report downloads.
• Geo-target data in downloaded reports is no longer truncated.
• Fixed column label issues for New Page Likes and Total Page Likes in the downloaded Excel file for the Competitor
Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue in the Publisher when users create a draft Facebook post with more than 140 characters and then
switched the target platform to Twitter prior to publishing. Even if users cleared all text to conform to the Twitter
140-character limit, an error displayed stating that the tweet contained too many characters.
• Fixed the error message that displays when users attempt to post the same content twice. The error message now
states that the post is a duplicate rather than the previous message that stated "Social n/w is experiencing issues."
• The notification email sent when a Facebook page needs to be reauthorized now includes the page name.
• Enhanced the Publisher to retry failed posts immediately and then retry for 15 minutes instead of seven minutes,
if necessary.
• Fixed an issue that occurs in Chrome browsers running on Windows. This issue prevented users from typing text
after a link copied from Excel is manually shortened.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from copying text from Word and pasting it into the Publisher when using
Internet Explorer 11 running on Windows.
• Fixed an issue that allowed Social to accept animated gifs for Twitter posts, which caused a "media_ids parameter
is invalid" error message to display. Twitter does not support animated gifs.
• Changed the error message and email message sent when a post fails that contains a link to a site that Facebook
has blocked.
• Fixed an issue that caused Facebook posts with links to fail with Facebook error 206.
• Fixed an issue that caused Google+ posts to fail with a "connection refused" or "backend error" message.
• Enhanced the message emailed to users when a Google+ post fails to explain the reason for the failure.
• Fixed an issue in the Publisher that caused properties added and subsequently removed to remain in the targets
list.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Properties & Audiences list in the Publisher from loading and also prevented
users from deselecting properties and audiences.
• Fixed an issue that caused draft posts to load slowly in the Publisher.
• Enhanced the Publisher to post larger thumbnails for links in Facebook posts. The thumbnail is now the same if
you post the link from Social or post the link directly using Facebook.
• Fixed an issue that caused tweets containing links to fail with the following error message: "Character limit has
been exceeded after auto-shortening."
• Fixed an issue that prevents Social from hitting rate limits for YouTube video analytics.
• Fixed an issue that prevented links containing pipes ( | ) in URLS to be shortened.
• Fixed an issue that caused rule variables with hyphens ( - ) in the name to fail.
• Enhanced the error messaging when listening-rule bulk uploads fail to more adequately explain the reason for the
failure.
Historical Release Notes
381
• Fixed an issue that caused an apostrophe ( ' ) to display at runtime when using the Zip/Postal Code form element
in an application.
• Fixed an issue that caused an approver to be automatically added when reauthorizing a Twitter account in Social.
• A green badge now displays in Social after a page group is successfully created.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from removing a user group from Social that contains many users.
• Fixed an issue when deleting a user group with ownership of a social property to grant ownership of the property
to the next user group in the list.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from sending metadata to SAINT due to SSL errors.
• Added functionality to help developers determine what caused Adobe Analytics to sometimes display an invalid
application error if a post has campaign tracking associated with it.
Social 3.2.2 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.2.2 release.
The Social 3.2.2 release (04/17/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Default campaign in
Publisher
Description
Specify a default campaign for your report suite. When users create new posts in
the Publisher or Content Calendar, the Campaign option is pre-populated with
the default campaign.This setting streamlines publishing and governance by ensuring
that all of your content is tagged and trackable to conversion events, even if users
forget to set a campaign during the publishing process. Users can change the
campaign if other campaigns are available.
For more information, see Create a Campaign.
Auto-shorten URLs
Specify a default link shortener. The default link shortener is used to shorten all links
in the post, unless users manually override the default shortener.
For more information, see Generate Short URLs in Posts.
Facebook moderation
enhancements
Private Messages: Create a moderation feed that displays only private messages
that have been posted to an owned Facebook page.
Audiences: Create a moderation feed that displays only content that has been
posted to an owned Facebook page from users in a specified Facebook audience.
This feature helps large organizations moderate Facebook posts more efficiently
using a targeted approach.
For more information, see Configure a Facebook Moderation Feed.
Social Buzz report
enhancements
New Filters: Filter the Social Buzz report by Followers (Twitter only), Language,
and Geography (countries, regions, and cities).
Enhanced Posts by Geography Reportlet: A stacked-ranked chart now displays
below the map. Click the map or chart to drill down into specific geographic regions.
For more information, see Social Buzz.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
Publisher quick search
382
Description
Begin typing a property, group, or audience in the search box to streamline publishing
content using the Publisher.
For more information, see Publisher Page.
Product notification system
Keep up to date with the product notification system. This feature provides relevant
and timely communications from Adobe within the Social product. Notifications can
include information about product releases, maintenance windows, service
disruptions, platform outages, and more. The product notification system provides
more details as necessary.
For more information, see Product Notification System.
Fixes
In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, enhancements and fixes in Social 3.2.2 focus
on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 260 back-end fixes and enhancements
address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported
issues.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the search box on the Social Campaigns report from working correctly.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused a campaign to display twice in the Social Campaigns report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Social Buzz report's Authors reportlet populating VK data.
• Fixed an issue with the Post Performance reportlet (Marketing Overview dashboard and Post Analytics report)
that caused the date timestamp on the pop-up for YouTube and LinkedIn posts to not display.
• In the Post Details report's Comments reportlet, clicking the name of a YouTube video's author now correctly
links to that author's YouTube channel.
• YouTube video comments on the Post Details report now display in reverse chronological order (most recent first)
to match YouTube functionality.
• The number of comments now displays on the Post Details report for LinkedIn posts.
• When users export a report to an Excel file, calls are made to various services (for example, YouTube and LinkedIn).
If one of these services is unavailable, the export cannot process correctly. The following error message now
displays: "The export failed to download due to a service for one of the platforms being unavailable. Please try
again later."
• Clicking the property name on the Post Details page now links to that property's Property Overview page.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Like count for companies with global Facebook pages to be the same, regardless
of country.
• Fixed an issue that prevented all posts from loading when refreshing posts in a moderation feed.
• Fixed an issue that prevented filtering a Direct Message moderation feed.
• Enhanced the error messaging in the Publisher and Content Calendar when multiple posts fail to publish.
• The Post Predictions feature in the Publisher now takes scheduled posts into account when recommending the
optimal time to post content. If you have a post scheduled for posting at a certain time, Social will not recommend
the same posting time for another post.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused posts to fail with an "undefined method 'parse_v3_params' for #" message.
• Fixed an issue that caused images in the Publisher preview panel to not format correctly.
• Fixed an issue in the Publisher that sometimes caused the wrong audience to display in the most-used list.
• Fixed an issue in Publisher that caused the properties in the most-used list to display in the incorrect order.
Properties now display in the order of usage, most-frequently used to less-frequently used.
• Fixed an issue that caused published images to not be properly rotated on iPhones.
Historical Release Notes
383
• Fixed an issue that prevented the property list from displaying correctly in the Publisher.
• Fixed an issue that caused YouTube and Sina Wiebo properties to not display in the Select Social Properties list
on the Suspend Posts page.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from targeting a tweet to a specific country.
• Due to changes in the Twitter API, you can now target tweets by country only. You cannot target tweets by city
and region.
• Social now displays a warning message if a user enters a link in a post and does not shorten it.
• Fixed an issue that prevented links in Tweets from referencing a campaign correctly.
• While creating a listening rule with a geo-related filter, such as Bounding Box, an error message now displays if
the user enters invalid criteria. This message displays if users use the Basic or Builder tab to create the rule.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from deleting multiple listening rules.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error when users attempted to create a new listening rule.
• Fixed an issue that prevented a user from deleting a Facebook account if that user is the only admin linked to that
page in Social.
• When users create a new user group, a green success message displays instead of the yellow warning message
that incorrectly displayed in previous releases.
• While creating a new Facebook audience, double-clicking the Save button no longer creates two audiences.
Social 3.2.1 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.2.1 release.
The Social 3.2.1 release (03/13/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Moderation Overview
dashboard
Description
The Moderation Overview dashboard provides a complete view of your
organization's moderation efforts. You can view moderation statistics for individual
members of your team, see how long it takes your team to resolve escalated issues,
determine which time of day most issues are escalated, compare the number of
unresolved issues to resolved issues, and more.
For more information, see Moderation Overview Dashboard.
Unified moderation
The enhanced multi-platform moderation feature lets you moderate inbound content
from Facebook, Twitter, and LinkedIn. The unified moderation feature lets you create
customized moderation feeds, side-by-side in one dashboard. Using auto-delete
rules, inappropriate content posted to your owned Facebook pages can be
automatically removed based on a fully configurable list of keywords.
For more information, see Unified Moderation, Unified Moderation Rules, and Unified
Moderation Workflow.
Note: The legacy Twitter moderation tool has been deprecated. Use the unified
moderation tool to moderate Twitter content. The legacy Facebook moderation
tool is being deprecated, but you can still access it from the left navigation
menu. After you are comfortable with the new workflows for Facebook
moderation within unified moderation, contact your Social Account Manager
Historical Release Notes
Feature
384
Description
to have the legacy Facebook moderation tool removed from your configuration.
You should not use both moderation tools simultaneously.Your account admin
should consult the Moderation Tool Migration Guide to decide which tool to
use. If you have further questions, contact your Social Account Manager.
Social Buzz report
enhancements
The Social Buzz report includes the following enhancements:
• Sentiment Tuning: Manually override the sentiment of a post from the Social
Buzz report. Adjusting sentiment feeds the sentiment algorithm for a specific report
suite, making the algorithm smarter and more accurate to a specific client’s needs
over time.
• Authors Widget: The Authors widget in the Social Buzz report contains a list of
your top authors. The widget respects currently set filters. This feature lets you see
which authors are mentioning content captured by your listening rules the most.
• Post Details: Expand a post to view more details and metadata about each post.
• New Filters: You can now filter the Social Buzz report by Emotion, and Country.
For more information, see Tune Sentiment, Social Buzz, and Post Details in Social
Buzz Report.
Rule Builder enhancements
Enhancements to the Rule Builder make creating listening rules more intuitive. The
Platforms section now displays above the Collection Dates section to make the
workflow more efficient. In addition, the Basic tab (previously named Advanced) is
now the default, which lets you create listening rules using boolean logic.
For more information, see Filters.
Quick-select Social
Properties selector
The Social Properties selection widget in the Publisher displays the properties
that you have most frequently posted to in the last 30 days. This feature lets you
quickly find and publish content to those properties that are most important to you.
For more information, see Publisher Page.
Shorten URL feature for
URLs
When Auto-Shorten is off, the Shorten URL feature lets publishers shorten links
easily from the Publisher and Content Calendar.The Shorten URL feature manually
triggers URL shortening for all links within the post and selects the last-used shortener
by default. The user can override the last-used shortener.
For more information, see Publisher Page.
Adobe Labs: Social Buzz
Emotion widget
Get a sneak peek at the new Emotion widget. The Emotion wheel in the Social
Buzz report contains a wheel graph that displays the percentage of captured posts
in each emotion category.
For more information, see Social Buzz.
Historical Release Notes
385
Feature
Description
Owned Social Insights
Owned Social Insights for LinkedIn and Google+ is available for select companies.
Inquire with your Account Manager for more details.
Fixes
In addition to the new features and enhancements described above, enhancements and fixes in Social 3.2.1 focus
on improved performance, scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 260 back-end fixes and enhancements
address these areas. The fixes highlighted below describe resolutions for the more important customer-reported
issues.
• Fixed a display issue in the Post Performance section of the Marketing Overview dashboard. The labels in the
column headers now display correctly.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Campaigns widget from loading on the Marketing Overview dashboard.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Posted By column to be missing from a downloaded Post Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistencies for posts containing links between the Post Analytics and Post Details
reports.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistent display issues for reach metrics between the Post Analytics and Post
Details reports.
• Fixed an issue that prevented data for some tweets to be included in the Post Analytics report's exported file.
• Changed "Reach" to "Followers" for Google+ pages in the Post Analytics and Post Details reports and in their
respective exported files.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistencies between the Link Click and Link Click (Unique) values in the Post
Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that caused duplicate tweets to display in the Post Analytics report and in its exported file.
• The first line of each post in the Post Analytics report now contains the name of the property to which the content
was posted.
• Fixed an issue that caused the names of filtered properties to not display at the top of the Post Analytics report.
The names of individual properties now display properly and the appropriate platform's icon (Twitter, Facebook,
etc.) now displays next to each property's name.
• Fixed an issue that caused empty rows to display in the Post Analytics roll-up report for LinkedIn properties.
• Fixed an issue in the Post Details report that caused total engagement numbers for LinkedIn posts to not display.
• Fixed an issue that caused engagement number discrepancies between the Post Analytics roll-up report and the
Post Details report.
• Fixed a display issue on the Property Details report for YouTube and LinkedIn properties if no posts were made
to those platforms during the selected date range. The Top Post widget now displays on the right side from which
you can write a new post.
• Fixed an issue where an error was thrown from the Property Details page for a Twitter account if no posts were
made to that account during the selected date range.
• Fixed an issue in the Post Details report that sometimes caused posts from different companies to display if users
changed companies during the same browser session.
• Reordered the filter items in the Analytics and Publish modules so they are consistent.
• Changed the chart label in the Competitor Analytics report to match the selected metric name. For example "Post
Engagements" now reads "Post Engagements (Public)," which also displays in the metric selector.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from adding a new competitor (Settings > Competitor Pages). After entering
information for a valid property, the Save button is now enabled.
• Fixed an issue that caused photos in a Facebook album to be ordered differently than shown in the Social preview.
• Fixed an issue that infrequently caused errors when users tried to upload images using URLs.
• Fixed an issue when posting a link to a YouTube video that caused the Social preview and actual post on Google+
to differ.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused posts to fail with an "undefined method 'parse_v3_params' for #" message.
Historical Release Notes
386
• Fixed an issue that caused the Delete option to incorrectly display on the master post of content posted to multiple
platforms that include LinkedIn.
• Fixed an issue that caused tweets containing links to be unclassified and not display properly in the Campaign
Details report.
• Reworded the message displayed when users create a template from a draft in the Publisher. The new message
more accurately describes the action taken.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Google+ Pages menu item to not display in the left navigation under Settings.
• Fixed an issue that caused some listening rule variables to be truncated and not work correctly.
• Removed the number of followers for Twitter accounts from the Twitter Accounts page (Settings > Twitter
Accounts).You can view the number of followers for each owned Twitter account on the Properties page (Settings
> Properties).
• Fixed an issue that prevented a user from removing a Facebook account from Social if that user is the only admin
linked to that account.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error when accessing Settings > Facebook pages if the report suite does not have
a name.
• Changed the way ownership for a Google+ page works when a role is removed from an admin of that page. Admins
are now shown as page owners and anyone who is an admin can then change the configuration for that page.
• Fixed an issue that caused users problems when selecting Owned or All in the Permission/Ownership section of
the Analytics Admin Console.
Social 3.2 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.2 release.
The Social 3.2 release (02/20/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
WordPress support
Description
WordPress is now a supported listening provider. WordPress, the world's largest
blogging and content creation platform, is used to create more than 70 million blogs.
WordPress users create more than 180,000 new posts per day.
For more information, see Platforms and Filter List.
Listening rules
All listening rules now support the use of the Any (OR) operator.
For more information, see Filters.
Data retention
Average Sentiment gauge
on Social Buzz report
Social now retains listening data for two years instead of two months. Archive and
retrieve up to two years of social listening data beginning Jan 16, 2014 and on.
Added a new widget to the Social Buzz report to show average sentiment for the
selected listening rules.
For more information, see Social Buzz.
Metric selector
You can now select and order the metrics that display on the Properties Overview
and Post Analytics Roll-Up View reports.
For more information, see Properties and Post Analytics Roll-Up View.
Historical Release Notes
387
Feature
Description
Publisher usability
enhancements
The Publisher includes the following usability enhancements:
• Individual Social users can enable or disable the Post Predictions feature.
For more information, see Enable or Disable Post Predictions.
• Improved scheduling workflow makes it easier to post content according to schedule
(the default), post content using the recommended time for optimal results, or post
content immediately.
For more information, see Schedule Post in Publisher Page.
• Individual users can specify link-shortening preferences, including enabling or
disabling automatic inline link shortening in the Publisher and selecting a default
shortener to use for all inline links.
For more information, see Configure Link Shortening Preferences.
Back-end data collection
improvements
Made back-end enhancements to improve the speed and reliability of the back-end
data-collection processes in Social. These improvements impact the data shown in
the Social Buzz report and in the Moderation module.
Improved Content Calendar
Back-end enhancements improve the load and response times for the Content
response time
Calendar List, Month, and Week views.
Improved error messaging in
Improved the error messages users can receive when publishing content using the
Publisher, Content
Publisher or Content Calendar. New error messages contain detailed information
Calendar, and notification
about internal failures and external failures (social platform) and contain information
email messages
to troubleshoot the problem, if applicable.
For more information, see Customer Resource Hub.
Important documentation
updates
New topic detailing best practices for a successful experience with a new product
release. Sections explain how to best manage posts before, during, and after the
monthly maintenance window.
For more information, see Pre- and Post-Release Best Practices.
New topic containing resources to help you become acquainted with the new features
in each release of Adobe Social. Resources include Capability Spotlights, New
Feature Guides, and quick how-to training videos demonstrating new features.
For more information, see Customer Resource Hub.
For a list of all documentation updates, see Documentation Updates.
Fixes
In addition to the new features described above, enhancements and fixes in Social 3.2 focus on improved performance,
scalability, usability, and reliability. More than 500 back-end fixes and enhancements address these areas. The fixes
highlighted below describe resolutions for some of the more important customer-reported issues.
Historical Release Notes
388
• Fixed an issue that caused the Social Buzz report to time out if left open for long periods in a Chrome browser.
• Fixed an issue that caused discrepancies between the number of daily mentions reported in the Social Buzz report
and the number of daily mentions reported in the Display Name custom report.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused discrepancies between the number of engagements reported for a post in
the Post Analytics report and the number of engagements reported in that post's Post Details report.
• Fixed an issue that caused engagement numbers in the Post Details report for a retweet to reflect the original
tweet's numbers.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused metric numbers in the Post Analytics report to not display.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the number of Facebook link clicks from displaying correctly in the Post Details
report.
• Changed how the Engagement Rate metic in the Post Analytics report displays for Facebook and Google+ pages
that have no engagement. In previous releases, the cells were blank. Now "--" displays.
• Fixed an issue that caused the total number of Likes and Followers in the Properties Roll-Up report to not display
for Facebook and Twitter properties.
• Fixed formatting issues that caused truncated column titles in the Property Overview report for LinkedIn and
YouTube properties.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistencies for LinkedIn properties when viewing metrics on the Properties Overview
and Property Details reports.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Properties Roll-Up report from displaying correctly on mobile devices.
• Fixed an issue that prevented LinkedIn posts from being properly filtered by Tags in the Post Analytics and Post
Details reports.
• Changed the behavior of the Properties filter for Twitter accounts in the Post Analytics report. The drop-down
list now displays the Twitter handle rather than the account name.
• Fixed an issue that caused Adobe Analytics campaigns to display in Social. Analytics campaigns should not display
in Social.
• Fixed an issue that prevented Social from collecting Facebook insights when Daylight Saving Time starts.
• Fixed an issue that caused posting dates in an export for a Facebook property to be off by one day (actual date,
minus one day) due to Daylight Saving Time issues.
• Fixed an issue that caused the order for LinkedIn and Twitter posts to sort differently by date in an exported Post
Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from targeting more than eight states when creating a Facebook post.
• Fixed an issue that let users upload a Facebook cover-page image that did not meet the required height requirements,
which caused the post to fail.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused Facebook photo albums to be posted multiple times.
• Fixed an issue that allowed users to upload a .pdf file using the image upload functionality in the Publisher,
which caused the post to fail because this is not a supported file format.
• Fixed an issue that caused LinkedIn posts to display incorrectly in the preview and after posting.
• Fixed an issue that let users schedule tweets with more than 140 characters. These tweets would then fail at the
scheduled time.
• Fixed an issue that caused the reported number of characters in a URL in a tweet to not match when creating the
post in Social and on Twitter.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused posts to fail with an "undefined method 'parse_v3_params' for #" message.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from removing tags from a post in the Content Calendar.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the link thumbnail and title from displaying when editing a post in the Content
Calendar.
• Fixed an issue that caused the amount of time for an individual post to load when clicked from the Content Calender
Week View to take longer than expected.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Content Calendar Month View and Week View to take longer than expected to
load.
• Fixed an issue in the Content Calendar that caused content to take longer than expected to post.
• Fixed an issue that caused posts with multi-level approval workflows to take longer than expected to publish.
Historical Release Notes
389
• Fixed formatting issues in the Content Calender user interface.
• Fixed logo display issues for LinkedIn companies and groups in the Publisher and Content Calendar.
• Fixed an issue that caused a post by the owner of a Facebook page to be marked as spam in moderation.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Share Story pop-up from displaying after users vote for an entry in a Contest
application.
• Fixed an issue that prevented listening rules from collecting data if the specified time zone in the Timezone filter
includes "US & Canada" in the time zone's name.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Preview feature for inactive listening rules to not function correctly.
• Changed the behavior of the Twitter Preview feature in the Listening Rule Builder to hide and refresh when users
switch tabs (from Active tab to Bulk Upload tab, for example).
• Fixed a listening-rule issue for enterprise providers that prevented collection for phrase matching.
• Fixed an issue that caused an upload error (line numbers off by one line) when performing bulk uploads of listening
rules.
• Fixed formatting issues in the Approval Workflow user interface.
• Fixed an issue that caused names to be truncated in the Owner drop-down list when configuring properties (for
example, Settings > Facebook Pages).
• Fixed an issue that caused users who were previously removed from Social to display in the exported report of
current users (Settings > Users & Groups > Users tab > export).
• Fixed an issue that caused an error when users who do not have the appropriate permissions to change the owner
of a Google+ page attempted to change a page's owner. If users do not have the appropriate permissions, they
can no longer change the owner in the user interface.
Social 3.1.2 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.1.2 release.
The Social 3.1.2 release (01/16/2014) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
VK support
Description
VK (VKontakte) is a supported listening provider. VK, similar to Facebook, is used
primarily by Russian-speaking users around the world. With the 2014 Winter Olympics
in Sochi, Russia, this feature provides clients with an opportunity to enter and play
a role in social areas that were previously untapped.
For more information, see Platforms, Filters, and Filter List.
ctx.ly link shortener support
Social now supports ctx.ly short URLs using custom domains.
For more information, see Add a ctx.ly Account.
Fixes
• Made more than 185 back-end fixes to improve the performance, usability, and reliability of the product.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistencies when customers in areas that do not observe Daylight Saving Time
(Arizona, for example) set their time zone preferences in Settings > Preferences and when publishing posts and
applications.
• Fixed an issue when editing the settings for a Facebook page that caused the Owner, Moderation and Insights,
and Prediction settings to not respect their previous settings.
Historical Release Notes
390
• Fixed an issue that prevented Social campaigns from displaying in the Overview Dashboard's Campaign reportlet,
even though the campaigns displayed correctly in the Social Campaigns report.
• Fixed an issue with the Overview Dashboard that caused data to be missing from its Social Buzz reportlet, even
though data displayed correctly in the Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Overview Dashboard and Social Buzz report to contain no data when customers
with a large number of listening rules had some empty Display Name classifications.
• Fixed an issue on the Overview Dashboard's Social Buzz reportlet that sometimes caused "unspecified" to
display as a listening rule.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Overview Dashboard's Campaigns reportlet to be blank when Instances was
the selected metric.
• Made changes to the Social Buzz report so that if an incompatible classification and display name are used as
filters, the report is blank (no metric data displays). This change ensures that the expected results display.
• Fixed a display issue where the Real-Time selector was misaligned in a minimized Social Buzz report window.
• Made changes to the metric selector in the Social Buzz report so that it contains all active listening rules, even if
rules have no mentions.
• Fixed issue where the Display Name and Post by Platform reportlets on the Social Buzz report displayed
inconsistent numbers.
• Fixed an issue that prevented data from displaying in the Social Buzz report if classifications did not have display
names.
• Fixed an issue where removing filters from the Social Buzz report incorrectly sorted the displayed results.
• Fixed an issue that sometimes caused the trendline to not display correctly in the Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Related Terms reportlet in the Social Buzz report from populating correctly
when filtering by two display names.
• Fixed an issue that caused incorrect sorting in the Social Buzz report after removing filters.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Social Buzz report to display data from a blacklisted term.
• Follower Count has been added to the Excel spreadsheet that you can export from the Social Buzz report.
• The display name that captured data for each verbatim has been added to the Excel spreadsheet that you can
export from the Social Buzz report.
• Fixed an issue where Adobe Analytics campaigns were incorrectly displayed in the Social Campaigns report for
those customers that had not yet published to an Adobe Social campaign.
• Fixed an issue that caused metric number discrepancies between the different reportlets on the Campaigns Details
report.
• Fixed an issue that prevented all post types from displaying in the Campaign Timeline reportlet in the Campaign
Details report.
• Fixed a navigational issue when viewing an individual post from the Post Analytics report. When users close the
post to return to the Post Analytics report, the report now displays in whichever mode the user previously was
viewing (list view or roll-up view).
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from sorting the Clicks column in the YouTube section of the Post Analytics
report in roll-up view.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistent numbers reported for ctx.ly links in the Post Analytics report.
• Fixed an issue that caused discrepancies in engagement numbers between the Post Performance reportlet on
the Post Analytics report and the engagement numbers in the posts's Post Details report.
• Fixed an issue that caused tags to not display in the Post Details report.
• Fixed an issue that caused the incorrect number to display for New Followers in the Property Details report.
• Changed the column header on the Twitter tab in the exported Post Performance report from Followers to Reach.
• Fixed an issue that caused the wrong notification email message to be sent when posts are approved.
• Changed the notification messages so that the text is more understandable for users when a post fails.
• Changed how Social reports errors to the administrator when a post fails. The actual error message from the
platform is used in the notification message.
• Fixed an issue that caused links pasted into the Publisher to be added in the wrong place (at the beginning or
middle of the post's text).
Historical Release Notes
391
• Fixed an issue that caused broken links after customers copied shortened URLs from the Publisher and pasted
them elsewhere (in a reply, for example).
• Fixed an issue with the Facebook API that was causing posts to fail.
• Fixed an issue that caused links displayed in the Publisher preview and in the Content Calendar to be different
than the links in the posts after being published to Facebook.
• Fixed an issue that prevented changes made by the auto-correction feature in the Content Calendar from persisting
in the published post.
• Fixed an issue that caused images to be rotated after being published.
• Fixed an issue that caused unreliable video posting to Facebook.
• Fixed a display issue that some customers experienced when creating posts in the Content Calendar. In some
situations, this issue caused edited posts to contain the original text after being published.
• Fixed an issue with the Predictive Publisher feature that sometimes caused it to recommend odd times (during
the night, for example) or times in the past.
• Fixed an issue that caused discrepancies in the number of engagements displayed on an application's tile on the
Apps Overview page and the number reported after exporting the application's results by clicking the wrench icon.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Share Story pop-up for mobile applications to use stock information rather than
customized text.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Twitter backfill feature from working correctly for a few customers.
• Fixed a problem that prevented expired campaigns from displaying on the Campaigns page (Settings > Campaigns)
even though the Show Expired option was enabled.
• Changed the column header on the Users & Groups page (Settings > Marketing Cloud Users and Groups)
from Last Login to Last Visit to more accurately describe the expected behavior.
• Added a warning message when a users attempts to reauthorize a Twitter account other than the account that the
user is currently logged in to.
• Fixed an issue that caused Social to display Twitter reauthorization warnings too frequently (when accounts do
not need to be reauthorized).
• Fixed an issue that prevented certain actions, such as reply, from the Twitter Moderation module.
• Changed the behavior when users log in to Social from one computer or browser and then subsequently log in to
the same account using a different computer or browser. The previously selected report suite automatically loads
regardless of the computer or browser used.
• Fixed an issue that caused Social to load exceptionally slow for certain customers, which made it appear that the
product wasn't functioning correctly.
Social 3.1.1 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.1.1 release.
The Social 3.1.1 release (11/14/2013) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Description
Rule variables
Social lets you create and save rule variables while creating listening rules. Rule
variables let you create a single filter with conditions that can be reused in other
listening rules. If you need to modify a rule variable, you change in one location and
the changes are replicated to all listening rules in which you used the variable.
Filter Marketing Overview
dashboard by owned
properties
You can filter the Marketing Overview dashboard to display data for only properties
that the logged-in user owns.
Enhanced support for post
downloads
Social now lets you download as many as 2,000,000 posts and their data (verbatims,
authors, mentions, retweets, etc. ) from the Social Buzz report.
Historical Release Notes
392
Feature
Description
Post Analytics roll-up view
Social now provides an alternative view to the Post Analytics report where customers
can view post data in a table format with sortable columns, growth metrics, and
metric totals for each platform.
Post Analytics native Twitter
support
The Post Analytics report now displays tweets created in Social and native tweets
created in Twitter.
Hashtag auto-complete
Social now provides auto-complete functionality when using #tags while creating
tweets in the Social Publisher.
Moderation Overview
Dashboard (Beta)
The Moderation Overview dashboard provides a complete view of your
organization's moderation efforts. You can view moderation statistics for individual
members of your team, see how long it takes your team to resolve escalated issues,
determine which time of day most issues are escalated, compare the number of
unresolved issues compared to resolved issues, and more.
Unified moderation (Beta)
The new multi-platform moderation feature lets you moderate inbound content from
Facebook, Twitter, and LinkedIn in customized moderation feeds, side-by-side, from
one dashboard.
Fixes
• Fixed an issue that prevented author mentions for newly added Twitter handles from displaying in moderation
feeds.
• Fixed an issue when filtering a moderation feed that caused the Tracked Terms auto-complete functionality to
return the wrong values.
• An error message now displays when users attempt to name a publishing workflow with the same name as an
existing workflow.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error message (Report Suite is New) when users attempted to create a new campaign.
• Fixed an alignment issue with dates in some graphs.
• Fixed an issue that prevented Social from properly backfilling Twitter data, even though Social indicated that
backfilling was successfully completed.
• Fixed an issue that caused a cloned application to retain the schedule of the original application from which it was
cloned.
• Fixed an issue that prevented customers from accessing the date and time controls when scheduling an application.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error message pop-up screen in a contest application to display behind the entry
pop-up screen.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Submit button from displaying properly when an application was viewed in
Microsoft Internet Explorer.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from sharing a story when the target is set to current window.
• Fixed an issue that caused the inline text editing for a checkbox element to malfunction.
• Fixed an issue that allowed users to delete a live Facebook application.
• Fixed an issue that prevented the Share Story pop-up screen from displaying after users clicked the Vote button
in a contest application.
• Fixed an issue that caused shared stories to not display correctly on mobile phones.
• Fixed an issue that caused a video's post time in reports to not match the actual post time on YouTube.
• Fixed an issue that prevented customers from publishing YouTube videos from Social using certain non-English
UIs.
• Fixed an issue that caused formatting issues in tweets after text containing tabs was copied from another editor
into Social and then published to Twitter, even though formatting in the preview displayed correctly.
• Fixed an issue that caused spelling corrections made with auto-correct in the Content Calendar to not persist in
the post.
Historical Release Notes
393
• Fixed an issue that caused YouTube and Sina Weibo filters to display in the Content Calendar even though those
platforms were not enabled for the customer.
• Fixed an issue that caused text in the Publisher to become misaligned after pasting in a link.
• Fixed an issue that caused an error message to display when publishing a post with a custom link to a Google+
page.
• Fixed several issues with the notification email messages sent when LinkedIn posts are scheduled, approved,
failed to post, etc.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Post Predictions feature to keep processing even when no prediction data is
available.
• Fixed an issue that caused an invalid URL error to display when attaching a link to a post in the Publisher.
• Fixed an issue that caused the post values in an exported report to be incorrect.
• Fixed an issue when editing a Facebook page's settings in Social that caused the previous owner settings to not
be respected and the Moderation and Insights and Predictions settings to be reset to On, regardless of their
previous settings.
• Fixed an authorization issue with LinkedIn companies. The UI did not indicate when a company page needed to
be re-authorized and provided no means to do re-authorize.
• Fixed an issue that caused inconsistencies when customers in areas that do not observe Daylight Saving Time
(Arizona, for example) set their time zone preferences in Settings > Preferences.
Social 3.1 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.1 release.
The Social 3.1 release (10/24/2013) includes the following changes:
New Features and Enhancements
Feature
Description
Expanded platform support
Sina Weibo and YouTube join the list of supported platforms. Although support for
both platforms are currently in Beta, support for Sina Weibo is enabled for all
customers by default. Support for YouTube is not enabled for all customers. Contact
your Social Account Manager if you want YouTube support enabled for your account.
Listening rules
Added the ability to create advanced listening rules using multiple filters to track
activities on the social web.
For more information, see Listening Rules.
Added the real-time Twitter Preview panel to the Rule Builder. This preview helps
you to better understand what Twitter users are currently saying about activities on
the social web that your rule and its filters track.
For more information, see Twitter Preview.
Publishing workflows
Added the ability to create multi-level publishing workflows. These workflows let you
create hierarchical levels containing user groups or individual users who must approve
a post before it can be posted to its assigned social property.
For more information, see Publishing Workflows.
Historical Release Notes
394
Feature
Description
Competitor analytics
Added the ability to add competitors' Facebook pages to Social so that you can
analyze public data collected from those pages.
For more information, see Competitor Analytics and Competitor Pages.
Link shorteners
Added support for Awe.sm, Po.st, and BudURL link shorteners.
For more information, see Add an awe.sm Project, Add a Po.st Account, and Add a
BudURL Account.
Social property roll-up report Added a property roll-up feature that groups social properties by platform, lists all
platforms in a list view with expanded metrics, and provides aggregated property
stats by platform.
For more information, see Properties.
Spam filter
Added a spam filter that automatically filters spam posts from Social.You can display
content that has been marked as spam using the filter option in the Social Buzz
report.
For information, see Social Buzz.
Social authors attribution
The Social Authors report now identifies key influencers on Twitter, Pinterest, and
YouTube who are driving conversion on your website. Contact your Adobe Social
Account Manager for more information about enabling this feature.
For more information, see Authors.
Social Buzz report
Added the ability to filter the Social Buzz report by Classification and Spam.
For more information, see Social Buzz.
Twitter targeting
Added the ability to target tweets by country, region, and city.
For more information, see Publisher Page.
Twitter handle auto-complete Added auto-complete functionality that automatically fills in users' Twitter handles
as you begin typing the @ sign and a Twitter handle.
For more information, see Publisher Page.
Export to Excel
You can export content from the Content Calendar to an Excel file so that people
in your organization can analyze the data outside of Social.
For more information, see Export Content to Excel.
To download a PDF file, click Social 3.1 New Features Guide.
Fixes
Historical Release Notes
395
• Fixed an issue when applying filters to multi-platform posts in the Content Calendar.
• Fixed an issue that caused data exports from the Properties report to not respect filters.
• Fixed an issue in the Campaigns Details report that caused zeroes to display for individual posts after adding
additional metrics using the metric selector.
• Fixed an issue that caused the Engagement Rate metric to be miscalculated.
• Fixed an issue that caused text to be truncated when copied from Microsoft Word or a text editor and pasted into
the Publisher.
• Fixed an issue that caused text to disappear from the Publisher when copied from Internet Explorer 8 or Firefox
and pasted into the Publisher.
• Fixed an issue that caused text to be formatted incorrectly when copied from Firefox on a Mac and pasted into the
Publisher.
• Fixed an issue that caused data queries in the Social back-end to run slowly.
• Enhanced the image-size-limit checks in Social to fix an issue that prevented posting of tweets that contain large
image files.
• Fixed an issue that caused the incorrect image to be posted for Google+ posts.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from publishing YouTube videos using links in Google+ posts.
• Fixed an issue that allowed a user to delete a Facebook application even though that user did not have sufficient
permissions to do so.
• Fixed an issue that caused problems with transparent buttons on applications. Users had to click the text (instead
of an empty area on the button) to navigate to the next screen.
Social 3.0.2 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.0.2 release.
The Adobe Social 3.0.2 release (9/12/2013) includes the following changes:
Feature
Description
Social Buzz report
Added the following functionality to the Social Buzz report:
• Enhanced the real-time Social Buzz report to let users specify the time range for
the report's display (Last 30 Minutes, Last 1 Hour, Last 2 Hours, and so forth).
• Improved the user interface when downloading posts to a Microsoft Excel file.
Publishing: Suspend Posts
Added the ability for Administrative users to temporarily suspend posts scheduled
to be posted to a set of social properties for a specified time range. Also added the
ability to unsuspend an individual post or all currently suspended posts using bulk
actions.
Publishing: Content Calendar Added the following functionality to the Content Calendar:
• Bulk Move Posts to Draft: Added the ability to move multiple posts to draft form
using bulk actions.
• View Draft Posts: Added the ability to view draft posts in the Content Calendar
from the Week View.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
396
Description
• Content Calendar Display: Added a Last Week Onwards time period to the
Content CalendarList View to display posts starting from the previous week and
include all posts scheduled for the future.
Applications: Templates
Improved the look and feel of the gallery in the Contest template. You can add an
element to a contest application that displays a scrollable feed of user-uploaded
images where other users can vote on, like, and share individual entries.
Rules (Beta)
Beta Feature: Added the ability to create complex rules using filter types (such as
author, venue, word proximity, and geo information) to track activities on the social
web.You can use the new Rules Builder or you can continue to use the legacy Terms
Builder.
For more information, see the Social Release Notes.
Fixes
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from deleting pages that are included in audience or page groups. A message
now displays informing users to first remove the pages from the groups, and then delete the pages.
• Fixed an issue that prevented posts from loading in the Campaign Timeline section of the Campaign Details
report.
• Fixed an issue in the export file of the Post Analytics report that caused metric totals for "Following" to display in
the "Followers" column.
• Fixed an issue that caused pagination problems on the Add Facebook Pages page. This issue prevented users
from seeing all owned pages that the user has access to.
• Fixed an issue that caused the download feature on the Post Analytics page to not respect the currently specified
filters.
• Fixed an issue that prevented some users from being able to retweet from Twitter Moderation.
• Fixed an issue that prevented users from enabling Twitter Moderation for additional report suites.
• Fixed an issue that caused applications to appear differently in the Application Builder and at runtime on Facebook
pages.
Social 3.0.1 Release Notes
Historical release notes for the Social 3.0.1 release.
The Social 3.0.1 release (08/15/2013) included the following changes:
Feature
Terms Set Up
Description
The following changes and enhancements have been made to the terms functionality:
• You can now upload terms and term sets using a CSV file. This method lets you
specify or exclude social providers that will listen for individual terms or sets.
• You can now grant permissions for any user to add terms to track in Social.
Previously, only administrative users could be granted this permission. Contact
your Account Manager for help configuring this setting.
Historical Release Notes
Feature
Publishing: Schedule Posts
397
Description
The limitation to schedule posts at five-minute intervals has been removed. Posts
can now be scheduled at one-minute intervals.
For more information, see Publisher.
Publishing: Content Calendar
The following changes and enhancements have been made to the Content Calendar:
• Enhancements to improve speed and performance.
• When filtering the Content Calendar using the Created By option, you can now
select more than one user. See Display and Filter the Content Calendar.
• The Week View calendar automatically scrolls to the earliest post of any day in the
week. See Content Calendar Week View.
• Renamed the "Scheduled Posts" drop-down list to read "Post Timeline" to better
describe the feature's purpose and functionality. See Content Calendar.
• Reach estimates are now available when targeting Facebook posts in the Content
Calendar and Publisher. See Publisher Page.
Localized Documentation
Updated documentation in the following languages is now available:
French
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
German
Japanese
Korean
Spanish
Portuguese
For more information, see Language Support.
Fixes
• Improved the retry logic with failed and expired FB tokens for post and app publishing.
Social 3 Features and Enhancements
The new Adobe Social introduced more than 100 new features across its core capability set wrapped in a completely
redesigned user interface focused on improved usability across devices.
To download a PDF file, click Social 3.0 New Features Guide .
Adobe Social Mobile App
398
Adobe Social Mobile App
The Adobe Social mobile app brings the power of Adobe Social content publishing workflows to your iPhone or iPad.
Last Updated: August 27, 2015
Adobe Social, part of the Adobe Marketing Cloud, lets marketers manage and measure complex social presences
from one integrated platform. Because your social presence is "on" all the time, the Adobe Social mobile app
empowers you to create and approve content wherever you are. With easy-to-use workflows and a simplified design,
creating content from a live event or approving content on your commute (not driving!) is as simple as a few taps.
The Social mobile app lets you do the following tasks:
Task
Description
Real-time Social Publishing Publish outbound content across supported social networks from live events, when
traveling, or any time you’re on the go. Feel free to schedule posts too if real time
isn't your thing.
Automated Campaign
Tracking
Automate link-shortening and downstream conversion tracking for outbound content
using the Adobe Social integration with Adobe Analytics.
Internal Collaboration
Leverage key publishing workflows to route, approve, or reject content created by
others within your company.
Crisis Management
Easily suspend all scheduled content in the event of a crisis or unexpected situation
to protect brand integrity. Hopefully you don't need to use this feature.
Because this Help system will likely be used primarily on mobile devices, step-by-step instructions are intentionally
brief. For more detailed information about the options in each task, see the Adobe Social User Guide.
Many topics in this Help system include links at the bottom of the text to relevant topics in that guide. Although the
steps might differ, the concepts are generally the same.
Tap
to display this Help system's Table of Contents in the left navigation.
Getting Started with the Social Mobile App
Information to get you up and running with the Adobe Social mobile app.
Requirements
Before you can use the Adobe Social mobile app, you must have an Adobe Social account, Adobe ID, and a supported
device and operating system.
This section contains the following information:
• Adobe Social Account Required
• Adobe ID Required
• Supported Devices and Operating Systems
Adobe Social Mobile App
399
Adobe Social Account Required
You must be an authorized user of an Adobe Social account. Your use of the Adobe Social mobile app is subject
to the agreement applicable to the Adobe Social account for which you are an authorized user. For more info see,
the Social Media Marketing Platform page (http://www.adobe.com/marketing-cloud/social-media-marketing.html).
Adobe ID Required
Adobe IDs can be created for free to log in to Adobe Social both on the web and from the mobile app as an authorized
user. Adobe IDs are available only to users 13 and older and require registration and agreement to additional terms
and Adobe's online privacy policy (http://www.adobe.com/special/misc/privacy.html). Adobe online services are not
available in all countries, may require user registration and may be subject to change and discontinuation without
notice.
Link Adobe ID with Adobe Social
Before you can use the Adobe Social Mobile app, you must link your Adobe ID with Adobe Social.
For more information, see Link Adobe ID with Adobe Social.
Supported Devices and Operating Systems
The Adobe Social mobile app was developed for iPhone 5 and iOS 7.2 and up.
Link Adobe ID with Adobe Social
Information to help you link your Adobe ID with Adobe Social so that you can use the Adobe Social mobile app.
Note: In addition to having your Adobe ID linked with Adobe Social, you must also meet other prerequisites
before using the mobile app. For more information, see Requirements.
This section contains the following information:
• If you do not have your Adobe ID linked with any of the Adobe Digital Marketing solutions
• If you already have your Adobe ID linked with one or more Adobe Digital Marketing solutions.
If you do not have your Adobe ID linked with any of the Adobe Digital Marketing solutions
1. Ensure that you have met the other prerequisites.
2. Navigate to the following URL:
www.marketing.adobe.com
Adobe Social Mobile App
3. Click Sign In with an Adobe ID.
400
Adobe Social Mobile App
401
If you do not have an Adobe ID, see the information in Signing in to Social in the Social Product Documentation.
4. In the Social tile, click Get Access.
5. Log in to the Adobe Social mobile app using your Adobe ID.
If you already have your Adobe ID linked with one or more Adobe Digital Marketing solutions.
1. Ensure that you have met the other prerequisites.
2. Navigate to the following URL:
www.marketing.adobe.com
3. Click Sign In with an Adobe ID.
Adobe Social Mobile App
4. After logging in, click Link Your Accounts Now on the Welcome page.
402
Adobe Social Mobile App
403
Note: If the pop-up does not display, disable the pop-up blocker on your browser then log out and log back
in.
5. Click Add Organization.
6. Select Adobe SiteCatalyst/Adobe Social.
7. Log in with your Adobe Social credentials to link your Adobe ID with your Adobe Social account.
Adobe Social Mobile App
404
Sign in to Social Mobile App
Information about using your Adobe ID to sign in to the Adobe Social mobile app.
1. Use your Adobe ID to sign in to the Adobe Social mobile app.
Note: You must use your Adobe ID to sign in. .
2. (Conditional) If you are not yet a member of the Adobe Marketing Cloud, go the Adobe ID website > tap Get an
Adobe ID.
For more information and step-by-step instructions, see Logging in to Social in the Adobe Social Users Guide.
Basic Navigation
Basic navigation instructions to help you get the most out of Adobe Social Mobile.
After you log in to the Adobe Social mobile app, the landing page is similar to the Content Calendar in the Social
desktop user interface.
The default view is Upcoming Posts:
Adobe Social Mobile App
To open the left navigation menu, swipe to the right or tap the drawer (
405
):
Adobe Social Mobile App
406
Select the desired option:
Publishing
• New Post: Create a post using the Adobe Social app to post on Facebook pages you manage and your Twitter
accounts. You can also post to Facebook audience and page groups. See Create a Post.
Content Calendar
• Upcoming Posts: View pending posts in chronological order (earliest to latest).
• Drafts: View posts that are currently in draft mode.
• Past Posts: View posts that have been previously posted to social properties.
• Pending Approvals: View posts that must be approved before being posted to social properties.
• Failed Posts: View posts that have failed to post to social properties.
Note: While in any of the views in the Content Calendar, scroll through the posts as desired. Pull down and
release the list to update the feed with new content.
Help
• Help & Privacy: View the Adobe Social Mobile Users Guide in your web browser. You can also download a PDF
version of the guide.
Sign Out of the Adobe Social Mobile App
Instructions to help you sign out of the Adobe Social mobile app.
1. Swipe to the right or tap the drawer (
2. Tap your avatar image > Sign Out.
) to open the left navigation menu.
Publishing with the Adobe Social Mobile App
The Adobe Social mobile app lets you simultaneously publish content to multiple social platforms and properties.
Create a Post
Create a post using the Adobe Social mobile app to post on Facebook pages you manage and your Twitter accounts.
You can also post to Facebook audience and page groups.
Tap
at the top of any view to open the Publisher.
Or
From the left navigation menu, click New Post.
Fill in the fields, as necessary:
1. Assign Social Properties
Tap Add Property > then select the desired properties, then tap
to save the assigned properties.
Adobe Social Mobile App
407
Notice that the total number of available properties and the number of selected properties displays at the bottom of
the screen.
2. Specify the Post Text
Specify your message.
For Facebook, you can type as many as 5,000 characters. For Twitter, you can type as many as 140 characters.
As you type text, the number of available characters remaining displays below the text box. Note that this number
reflects the most restrictive character limit, depending on which social properties you selected.
If you selected both Facebook and Twitter properties, customize the text for each platform by tapping its icon (
and ) in the Properties section to display a tab for each network that you can use to customize the text for that
platform.
Note: You must add a link if you want to collect data for campaigns. You can shorten inline links using your
configured link shorteners. The Adobe Social app supports the default link shortener specified in the Social
desktop UI, although you cannot edit the default shortener in the mobile app.
3. Insert an Image
Tap
> select Take Picture or Use Existing to browse to and select an image.
Image formats should be .jpg, .gif, or .png. The image size should be no larger than 2 MB. Animated .gif images
can be published to Twitter.
Edit and enhance the picture as desired.
Adobe Social lets you quickly and professionally enhance your images from inside the Social mobile app.
You can add effects; apply filters; add frames and stickers; crop, resize, and rotate images; add text; create memes;
remove red eye, whiten teeth, and remove blemishes; and more. For more information, see Use the Photo Editing
Tools.
4. Insert a Link Attachment
Tap
> specify the URL > tap Get Details.
Note that you can insert either an image or a link attachment.
Use the left and right arrows to select the desired thumbnail image or tap
to upload an image (take or use an
existing image). You can also customize the Title and Description text, as needed. Tap
when done.
5. Add Social Tags
Tap
> select one or more social tags > then tap
.
Social Tags help you classify content. For example, an online clothing merchant could create individual tags for the
four seasons, grouped in a tag group named "Women's Clothing." These tags let you classify and view content by
season or by the tag group if you want to roll data up into broader categories.
Information associated with Social Tags is not viewable outside of the Social product. Facebook fans and Twitter
followers, for example, cannot see this information. For more information, see Social Tags.
Adobe Social Mobile App
408
6. Assign a Campaign
Tap
> select one or more campaigns > tap
.
A campaign is a marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. For example, if a campaign advertises
a specific credit card, the campaign could be a series of creative elements (links, Flash Multimedia posts, tweets,
and so forth) advertising the card's interest rate and benefits. The campaign's tracking code on each creative element
lets you track the effectiveness of the campaign by letting you know which link a user clicked to come to your website.
Adobe Social Mobile supports the default campaign specified in the Social desktop UI.
7. Schedule the Post
Tap
, specify when you want to schedule the post, then tap
.
The following options are available:
• Post Now: Post the content to the selected properties immediately.
• Post Later: Select the time and date when you want the content posted to the selected properties. Tap the Time
Zone to select a different time zone, if necessary.
8. Post the Content to Social Properties
Tap
.
Confirm that you want to post the content now or according to schedule.
Or
Tap Save Draft. This option removes the post from your Upcoming Posts view and places it on the Draft view.
Moving a post to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit. To filter a feed by only draft posts,
see Filter Posts.
Miscellaneous Information
Note that a dot under the icons display depending on whether a value has been set. For example, the Campaign
icon (
) looks like this
if you have associated a campaign with the post or if the default campaign is associated.
For detailed information, see Content Calendar in the Adobe Social Users Guide.
Use the Photo Editing Tools
Edit your pictures using the photo-editing tools available from within the Social mobile app. Add effects; apply filters;
add frames and stickers; crop, resize, rotate images; add text; create memes; remove red eye, whiten teeth, remove
blemishes; and more.
Adobe Social lets you quickly and professionally edit and enhance your pictures.
Tap
> select Take Picture or Use Existing to browse to and select an image.
Use the photo-editing tools at the bottom of the picture to edit the picture as desired.
Adobe Social Mobile App
Filter Posts
Filter posts in a Social Mobile feed by properties, campaigns, and social tags.
409
Adobe Social Mobile App
410
1. Tap Filter at the top of the window to filter the posts in any view by the following categories:
• Properties: Social properties include Facebook pages, audiences, and page groups as well as Twitter accounts.
• Campaigns: A campaign is marketing effort used to bring visitors to a specific website. See Campaigns in the
Adobe Social Users Guide.
• Tags: Tags help you classify content within Social. See Social Tags in theAdobe Social Users Guide.
2.
3.
Tap
after each category (Properties, Campaigns, and Tags) to confirm your selections.
Tap
again to filter the feed.
To clear filters from a feed, click X in the Filter bar.
Edit a Post
Edit an existing post using the Adobe Social mobile app.
1. From the desired view, tap the post to open it in the Post Details view.
Be aware that although posts to all platforms (Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Google+, etc.) created in the Social
desktop user interface display in Adobe Social Mobile, you can edit only Facebook and Twitter posts.
2. Tap
Edit to open the post in editing mode.
3. Edit the post as desired.
For more information, see Create a Post.
4. Tap
.
5. Confirm that you want to post the content now or according to schedule.
Or
Tap Save Draft. This option removes the post from your Upcoming Posts view and places it on the Draft view.
Moving a post to draft lets you create a draft of that post that you can further edit. To filter a feed by only draft
posts, see Filter Posts.
You can swipe to the left or right to display the previous or next post.
Suspend Posts
Suspend all posts scheduled to be posted to all social properties for the next 24 hours, providing that you have the
appropriate permission to do so.
1. Swipe to the right or tap the drawer ( ) to open the left navigation menu > tap Suspend Posts.
2. Review the message > tap Suspend Posts.
For detailed information, see Suspend and Unsuspend Posts in the Adobe Social User Guide.
Approve a Post
If properties are configured to require approval before being posted, approve those posts using the Adobe Social
mobile app.
1. From the desired view, tap the post to open it in the Post Details view.
Adobe Social Mobile App
411
A yellow Approve? badge displays in the top right corner of all posts needing approval.
The Post Details view displays the post's content and any associated campaigns, tags, and notes.
2. (Optional) Tap Add Note > type the desired text > tap Save.
3. Tap Approve Now. This option displays if the user has override approval permissions. Approve Now uses the
override approval permissions and bypasses any further approvals to directly schedule or publish the post.
Or
Tap Approve. This option lets the user approve the post, but let it continue through the publishing workflow.
Or
Tap Reject.
You can swipe to the left or right to display the previous or next post.
Contact and Legal Information
412
Contact and Legal Information
Information to help you contact Adobe and to understand the legal issues concerning your use of this product and
documentation.
Help & Technical Support
The Adobe Marketing Cloud Customer Care team is here to assist you and provides a number of mechanisms by
which they can be engaged:
• Check the Marketing Cloud help pages for advice, tips, and FAQs
• Ask us a quick question on Twitter @AdobeMktgCare
• Log an incident in our customer portal
• Contact the Customer Care team directly
• Check availability and status of Marketing Cloud Solutions
Service, Capability & Billing
Dependent on your solution configuration, some options described in this documentation might not be available to
you. As each account is unique, please refer to your contract for pricing, due dates, terms, and conditions. If you
would like to add to or otherwise change your service level, or if you have questions regarding your current service,
please contact your Account Manager.
Feedback
We welcome any suggestions or feedback regarding this solution. Enhancement ideas and suggestions for the
Analytics suite can be added to our Customer Idea Exchange.
Legal
©
2016, Adobe
All rights reserved.
Published by Adobe Systems Inc.
Terms of Use | Privacy Center
A trademark symbol (®, ™, etc.) denotes an Adobe trademark.
All third-party trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Updated Information/Additional Third Party
Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement